Home

Contents - Alcatel-Lucent Documentation Center

1. Example a backup with backup level 0 must be performed Table 3 28 Backup levels of each backup variable 1stofmonth O 1st week 2nd week 3rd week BI 4th week EI The following table shows how files accumulate in the backup for each weekday Table 3 29 Example for files in backup for two weeks Fri 1st week ab abc abcd abcde abcdef 2nd week g gh ghi ghij abcdefghijk 3 6 4 2 Daily cumulative weekly incremental backups Example The following table shows the backup levels for each days backup Once a month a backup with backup level 0 must be performed Table 3 30 Backup levels of each backup 1st of month 1st week 9 9 2nd week 9 9 3rd week 9 9 4th week ER The following table shows how files accumulate in the backup for each weekday Table 3 31 Example for files in backup for two weeks 1st week 2nd week g gh ghi ghij ghijk AEM R1 7 3 44 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 System management Backup and restore mm ee 3 6 4 3 Daily incremental weekly cumulative backups Example The following table shows the backup levels for each days backup Once a month a backup with backup level 0 must be done Table 3 32 Backup levels of each backup variable Mon Tue Fri 1stofmonth O 1st week 3 4 2 2nd week 3 4 2 3rd week 3 4 2 4th week 3 4 2 The following table shows how files accumulate in the backup for each weekday Table 3 33 Examples for
2. Semi Permanent DS1s TR08 TR303 Leased Lines p _ Configuration of the ROC S ROC over using TL1 commands SPLL service P NE Transport Network NE DS1s Figure A 5 ROC over semi permanent leased line for AEM A 6 2 Communication with remote NEs us ing inband ATM PVC The assumptions for this configuration are m There are data and telephony access technologies collocated in the same NE Data access is orientedto data applications and is based on asynchro nous transfer mode ATM over asymmetrical digital subscriber line ADSL access The data access consists of ADSL application packs and access feeder multiplexer AFM control cards which make the switching between ADSL access traffic and ATM networks using DS3 interfaces 24 channel market m There is an ATM network between central office and remote AnyMedia NEs m In this scenario ATM permanent virtual connections PVCs are used to communicate telephony TL1 FTP over TCP based and data SNMP over UDP and FTP over TCP based management traffic between AEM and AnyMedia NEs m One ATM PVC will be used for every NE to be managed this ATM PVC carries IP packets related to both COMDAC and AFM management infor mation m ATM PVCs carrying management information related to one NE are origi nated in a LAN environment where AEM is located
3. Table 6 1 GSFN and related CLEIs GSFN CLEI Described in DFLT E5ISFAOAAA E5ISFBOAAA Chapter 6 2 4 8 page 6 42 SLCUVROBAA SAC1ACOAAA EMO NE R1 7 0 Chapter 6 2 4 9 page 6 43 FXSO NE R1 7 0 2LS E5ISFAOAAA E5ISFBOAAA Chapter 6 2 4 10 page 6 44 SLCUVROBAA SAC1ACOAAA 2GS E5ISFAOAAA E5ISFBOAAA SAC1ACOAAA 2FXLS E5ISFAOAAA E5ISFBOAAA 2FX E5ISFAOAAA E5ISFBOAAA 2RVO E5ISFAOAAA E5ISFBOAAA Chapter 6 2 4 11 page 6 46 2NOS E5ISFAOAAA E5ISFBOAAA Chapter 6 2 4 12 page 6 47 BRI 5SC4PTOCAA Chapter 6 2 4 13 page 6 48 TO SAC1AHOAAA Chapter 6 2 4 14 page 6 49 SAC1AEHAAB SLCUVNOBAA 2RVT SCA1AHOAA SLTRFEOCAA Chapter 6 2 4 15 page 6 50 DX4 N R 5SC3HJEAAA Chapter 6 2 4 16 page 6 51 FX O P 1 2 3 5 SAC1BFOAAB FX S T 1 2 3 5 55C3HJEAAA EM4 C H SAC1BGOAAB Chapter 6 2 4 17 page 6 53 PLR 1 2 SAC1BGOAAB ETO4 5SC3HJEAAA Chapter 6 2 4 18 page 6 54 FXO SAC1AHOAAA Chapter 6 2 4 19 page 6 55 SLCUVNOBAA OCU 1 2 3 5SCTFFGAAB Chapter 6 2 4 20 page 6 57 SW56 5SCTFFGAAB 5SC3240AAA Chapter 6 2 4 21 page 6 58 TD O S A B C D SAC1 BFOAAB Chapter 6 2 4 22 page 6 59 TO4 5SC3HJEAAA Chapter 6 2 4 23 page 6 60 FXOD NE Chapter 6 2 4 24 page 6 61 R1 7 0 DPT SCA1AHOAAA Chapter 6 2 4 25 page 6 62 SACPDCOBAA SLCUVNOBAA AEM R1 7 06 00 363 211 454 Service provisioning Service provisioning telephony p Se 6 2 4 4 Add a logical DSO Launch the Logical The Logical DSO w
4. IAT IAT IAT IAT Figure 5 4 Examples of IAT subshelves AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 5 9 NE management equipment configuration Overview of the controlled systems p Se 5 2 2 3 1 IAT provisioning model This model contains the following components m Server pack provisioning The server pack provisioning is equal to the AP provisioning in the main shelf m Subshelf provisioning A subshelf must be provisioned to define the type of the subshelf This type also defines the used controller pack in the subshelf After provisioning of the subshelf its supplied slots are automatically cre ated in the system These slots include the controller pack slot s and AP slot s both identified by the subshelf slot AID The subshelves defined in this release are IATO1 and IATO2 m Subshelf controller pack provisioning The controller pack of a subshelf needs not to be provisioned manually as this is automatically done with the subshelf provisioning Drops at subscriber interface APs are automatically created Also one or more subshelf feeder ports dependent on the controller pack type are cre ated in the system m Cross connect mainshelf to subshelf The bearer channel bandwidth available at the subshelf depends beside the capacity limits of the server pack and subshelf controller pack on the number of links to the subshelf The links between mainshelf and subshelf are provisioned with a cross connection command whic
5. DS3 Configuration of the ATM PVC in the AFM y Configuration of IP addresses in AFM and COMDAC NBI client DCN1 NE2 man 10BaseT ports from AFM and COMDAC LAN ports joined by means of LAN crossover cable Figure A 6 Communication with remote NEs using in band ATM PVC AEM R1 7 A 12 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 Configuration parameters Contents B 1 Overview B 1 B 1 1 AnyMedia server configuration variables B 1 B 7 B 1 2 AnyMedia client GUI configuration variables AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 B I ee Contents AEM R1 7 B II Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 Configuration parameters B 1 B 1 1 363 211 454 Overview This chapter provides information about all the configuration parameters that are used with AnyMedia Element Manager 24 Channel AEM R1 7 as follows m an alphabetical list of all configuration parameters that are used with AEM m adetailed information about each parameter These configuration parameters are distributed in three configuration files as fol lows AnyMediaEM cfg for variables used by the AnyMedia servers m AnyMedia ini and SystemPreferences ini for variables used by the GUI Only the configuration parameters the AnyMedia administrator can modify are ex plained in this chapter modify these configuration variables with caution as they may adversely a
6. obtaining the operational state of a virtual path cross connection m Management of ATM virtual channel services creating and deleting virtual channel services i e by means of cre ating and deleting virtual channel links and virtual channel cross connections changing the administrative state of a virtual channel cross connec tion Alarm The Alarm Management provides the following functionality features management m Integrated display of all the alarms The AEM provides a common window alarm viewer to show all alarms re ported by the managed NEs or generated by the management system it self The display shows all the information pertaining to the alarm including alarm type severity service affecting indication date time of occurrence and clearing m Alarm display filters It is possible to filter the items shown in the alarm viewer for instance to see only the critical alarms AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 1 11 Functional description System and software architecture p Se m Alarm notification to user The user is informed by visual alerts when a new alarm has been reported to the AEM m Alarm correlation Alarms coming from the same NE point through NB and BB agents i e the same alarm is reported via both controller cards are correlated into one single alarm m Clearing of alarms Alarms in the management system will automatically be cleared when the faults are removed at the
7. m The following message appears if there is a previous package in the sys tem that was partially or completed installed and has different version Current administration requires that a unique instance of the lt Package_Name gt package be cre ated However the maximun number of instances of the package which may be supported at one time on the same system has already been met No changes were made to the system After this step the installation looks for its packages dependencies If a needed package is found the following message will appear Package lt Package_Name gt lt Application_Name gt lt Application_Version gt have been found in lt Application_Path gt gt NOTE Refer to Type y and press Return on page 14 to see this response If the package is not found the installation will prompt about its installation path in order to check this path and the correct application version lt Package_Name gt needs lt Application_Name gt lt Application_Version gt to be installed previ ously If it isn t Answer q to next question and install the package lt Package_Name gt otherwise provide the paths required What is the base path of lt Required_Package_Name gt lt Package_verision gt q When an input is provided the installation checks the path and the version of the application If the path is invalid the following message will appear ERROR Pathname does not exist
8. EM Domain An assigned collection of Controlled Objects EM Task This represents a subset of the management functions supported by EM applications EM User An entity defined via login name that can be assigned at least to an EM user group EM User Group A logical group of EM users enabled to access one or more domains Permissions to access domains applica tions and tasks are administered on an EM user group basis Embedded Operations Channel EOC A duplicated DSO data link dedicated for exchange operations messages between the LDS and RDT AEM R1 7 GL 4 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 Glossary F Fault Case For some faults e g DCN failure normal working conditions need to be re established within certain time limits These are fault cases that are taken into account Fault Management For detecting displaying storing filtering and routing fault alarm data Feeder DS1 Ports These are the DS1 circuits that are used to provide virtual remote terminals or INA virtual bank feeder facilities and are provided by IO_DS1 circuit packs in the AnyMedia Access System The DS1 port numbers are included as part of the AlDs for these feeder DS1 ports Forced Switch This refers to an Element Manager initiated switch command that instructs the NE to perform a switch no matter what the conditions of the protection unit COMDAC and IO_DS1 circuit packs only are Full Backup This copies a complete file system or director
9. Lit when a fault is detected on the pack Indicates that this AFM is active Lit when the highest severity alarm is critical or major yellow CLF1 yellow CLF2 yellow Lit when the highest severity alarm is minor Lit when a fault or facility alarm occurs on the in service received D1 port 1 Lit when a fault or facility alarm occurs on the in service received D1 port 2 See Chapter 7 2 for more details about alarm handling AEM R1 7 06 00 363 211 454 NE management equipment configuration Equipment configuration p Se 5 5 4 1 BAIU Shelf View window The prinziple of displaying inventory provisioning and alarm information is the same as for the main shelf cf Chapter 5 5 4 page 5 48 However the BAIU shelf is a data shelf only data packs are inserted up to 20 AP slot 0 to 19 and one AFM slot 0 5 5 4 2 MDS2 MDS2B Shelf View window This window provides general inventory provisioning and alarm information through the pack LEDs Each slot will show the card type inserted and its alarms when applicable If the slot is empty no card will be shown a FLT u A 1 a eu gt c gt 2h nau gt c gt io CN gt 03708 Deercere cAsiovere owg gezo cavionere gt 26 D a gt c gt le un gt c gt 26 HERG wea pvece mon prere RUD Pele son gt c gt ie CEREREA 1 ERELERFT 3 f ts fz g B 2 2 m E 2 2 i a 2 Figure 5 19 MDS2 Shelf View window
10. Parameters Buttons Description Autonomous The check box Traps Disabled shows the state of this au Output States tonomous output check box is marked disabled check box is not marked enabled Apply This button confirms the changes of the autonomous output state 5 5 6 2 4 Modify the synchronization data parameter Procedure Complete the following procedure to modify the synchronization data parameter Step Procedure 1 Select NE in the Network Element Browser and Synchronization gt Data via the cursor menu The Synchronization Data window pops up This window can also be reached from the NE Management window tab Data cf Chapter 5 5 3 3 page 5 44 by pressing the More Details but ton If you want to then re synchronize the AEM database for use the Resync button in the field configuration data Configuration re synchronize the AEM database for use the Resync button in the field alarms Alarms change the state of the autonomous use the check box Traps Disabled to output define the state and press Apply exit the window Click on Close AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 5 127 NE management equipment configuration Equipment configuration p See 5 5 6 3 Configuration of timing source for te lephony only Overview The AnyMedia Access System supports four timing modes m External DS1 The line code and framing format for the external DS1 syn chronization input mus
11. The AnyMedia Element Manager 24 Channel AEM R1 7 runs on SUN SPARC Solaris 2 computers running Solaris 2 6 plus the patches recommended by SUN In order to successfully install the AEM R1 7 for the SUN Solaris installation the following has to be taken into account Disk partitioning HDD partitioning should include in addition to the standard UNIX entries e g usr var etc two entries for the AEM software and the transac tion log cf Chapter 2 1 1 page 2 2 for size requirements Additionally a temporal directory with 2 Gbytes is necessary for uncompressing the in stallation files Swap space In addition to the SUN recommendation 100MB per platform should be configured for OODBMS requirements NIS If more than one AEM platform is to be used NIS should be configured in the server so all the AEM clients will share the logins and password which are configured in the server tables All the users require a NOT null pass word in order to manage AEM NFS Network File Sharing is not required even when using a LAN but if NIS is used NFS allows operators to log in in any client platform having access to their home directories SUN patches All the Solaris patches described in the shopping list and included on CD ROM 1of 4 under SUN directory must be installed before AEM installation AEM R1 7 Version 1 00 06 00 2 1 Software installation and commissioning General p Se m LAN amp WAN configuratio
12. p Se Selecting Views Proceed as follows to select the desired view option Step Procedure 1 Select Views gt ViewX X 1 to 5 in the menu bar The same view options can be selected via the option menu Views in the general information section cf Chapter 7 3 3 3 page 7 14 Response The alarms are displayed according to the selected view 7 3 4 3 Filters Summary For displaying the alarm lists you can select pre defined filters Only those alarms corresponding to the pre defined criteria are displayed The alarm set is displayed without modifying the current view The filters are m Alarms for the last 24 hours all alarms which have been changed in the last 24 hours m Critical Raised Alarms m Raised Alarms m Alarms from a Host s m Critical Alarms not cleared m Owned Acknowledge Alarms m Clear Alarms m All Acknowledge Alarms m None Filter All Alarms Effects The alarms are rearranged according to the selected filter criteria AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 7 19 Fault management and maintenance _ _ _ _LLLLL Selecting Filter 7 20 Version 1 00 Proceed as follows to select the desired filter option Alarm monitoring Step Procedure 1 Select the desired filter option If you want to view then select Filters gt Pre de fined Filters Result Notes all alarms which have been changed in the last 24 hours all critical raise
13. 5 4 3 5 Create modify NEs Complete the following procedure to create modify an NE Step Procedure 1 Select the NE in the Network Browser or on the background map and New or Edit via the cursor menu or select File gt New or View gt Object via the menu bar or click on the Open icon in the tool bar The Groups amp NEs window tab NEs pops up cf Figure 5 12 page 5 30 If you want to then edit the parameters of an existing NE use the option menus NE Name Selec tion and NE Identification to select the desired NE edit the parameters in the field NE Representation and press Apply create a new NE use the option menu NE Selection to select the NEW option enter an appropriate name in the text field NE Name use the option menu Parent Group to select the desired parent group define the parameters in the field NE Representation and press Apply The Domain Selection window pops up cf Figure 5 14 page 5 36 configure the NE click on NE Management The NE Management window pops up cf Fig ure 5 15 page 5 37 2 Click on Close to exit the window 5 4 3 6 Remove an NE Select the NE in the Network Browser or on the background map and click on Remove in the cursor menu or select File gt Remove via the menu bar or click on the remove icon in the tool bar AEM R1 7 5 32 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 NE management equipment configuration Equipment configuration p Se 5
14. AFM NVDS Backup Figure 5 56 AFM NVDS Backup window 2 Click on the Browse button to open the File Browser window cf Chapter 5 5 15 5 page 5 168 to select create the directory example of the file structure NE Files NVDS lt NE_Name gt AFM and the file name of the backup file gt NOTE Do not insert any blank in the backup file name Such a file cannot be re stored 3 Click on OK to confirm The chosen file name appears in the field Filename in the AFM NVDS Backup window 4 Click on Apply this command button is available only after having se lected the file name to start the backup An n Progress window pops up NVDS Backup on lt NE NAME gt in progress AEM R1 7 5 164 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 NE management equipment configuration Equipment configuration After finishing the backup process successfully the In Progress window disappears 5 Press Close to exit the AFM NVDS Backup window gt NOTE Pressing the Close button during the backup execution will cancel the backup operation AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 5 165 NE management equipment configuration Equipment configuration p See 5 5 15 3 Data restore telephony agent Procedure Complete the following procedure to initiate data restore from a telephony agent Step Procedure 1 Select NE in the Network Element Browser and Restore gt Telephony via cursor menu The COMDAC NVDS Restore window pops up CO
15. Parameters Buttons Description Slot Id This field displays the slot id Possible values ap 1 1 15 for FAST shelf ap 1 1 19 for BAIU shelf or subap 1 8 1 8 Inventory Infor The following fields will be empty if no pack is inserted Oth mation erwise the read only text fields provide the following informa tion Card Type 11 character mnemonic used to identify the gen eral type of function provided Possible values ADSL Serial Number 12 character alphanumeric code that in cludes the date and place of manufacture Apparatus Code Specifies the function of the pack Possible values LPA400 LPA400B LPA404 LPA414 LPA408 ICC InterChangeability Code Indicates the interchange ability among packs to specify forward backward compatibil ity Format of the ICC is m n where m is the issue number and n the series number CLEI Code assigned by Bellcore that provides information about the functionality of the pack ECI Code that corresponds to the bar coded label on the faceplate of the pack There is a one to one correspondence between CLEI and ECI codes Provisioning In The option menu Provisioned Pack Type shows ADSL for formation a provisioned slot and the value None for a non provi sioned slot This option menu is available only if the admin istrative state is Locked gt NOTE The Provisioned Pack Type may be different from the Apparatus Code shown in the Inventory Informa tio
16. Probable Cause A unique identification string for each alarm type shows the probable cause of the alarm RcvCells High Indicates the number of cells received BB formatted into RevCells Low two 32 bits integers high and low part of the counter RcvErroredCells Indicates the number of wrong cells received BB format High RevErrored ted into two 32 bits integers high and low part of the Cells Low counter AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 3 49 System management Log management p See Table 3 35 Information displayed in the Log Viewer table Column Meaning RFI Indicates the Remote Failure Indication data BB Severity Severity of an alarm on the object for which the log mes sage has been sent Shelf Id Indicates the Shelf Id where the data agent is placed BB Slot Id Indicates the Slot Id where the performance data has been recollected BB Time Stamp Date and Time when a performance data was collected in the NE UAS Indicates the Unavailable Seconds Log types and dis Depending on the chosen log type the table in the Log Viewer displays different in played information formation more or less columns The following table shows which information is displayed for which log type Table 3 36 Log types Log Type Contents Actions Date amp Time Login Conditions Object Method Pa rameters ADSL Performance Date amp Time NE Name IP Address Shelf Id Slot Id Port Id Time Sta
17. AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 2 17 Software installation and commissioning Installation procedure ee Verifying disk space requirements Checking for conflicts with packages already installed Checking for setuid setgid programs The following files are being installed with setuid and or setgid permissions opt lucent os51_SP2 ostore lib oscminit lt setuid root gt Do you want to install these as setuid setgid files y n q 21 Type y and press Return This package contains scripts which will be ex ecuted with super user permission during the process of installing this package Do you want to continue with the installation of lt LuOSRT gt y n 22 Type y and press Return Installing ObjectStore 5 0 SP3 Runtime for Any Media NB EM R1 7 as lt LuOSRT gt Installing part 1 of 1 lt files list gt verifying class lt none gt Executing postinstall script kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Remember execute osconfig to set the environment kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkxk You have the installation logfile in tmp EM_Install_LuOSRT 1log Installation of lt LuOSRT gt was successful ObjectStore config Object Store configuration uration I The default copy of ObjectStore to configure is in opt lucent 0S51_SP2 ostore Is this the copy that you want to configure yes AEM R1 7 2 18 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 Software ins
18. If you decide to continue the switch operation will be started The infor mation displayed will be updated once the switch is finished to show the current state The following events set off error messages m The NE is not equipped for the requested protection switching i e the pro tecting slot is empty m The NE detects an error in the switch request i e the request cannot be executed due to another activity in the AEM m The NE cannot execute the request as the NE software installation is in progress 4 Click on tab IO DS1 to change the window see next section or click on Close to exit the window AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 5 145 NE management equipment configuration Equipment configuration ee 5 5 11 3 IO DS1 protection switching Overview The NE supports both protected and unprotected DS1 feeder interface opera tions i e the IO DS1 can be 1 N protected 1 lt N lt 5 or without a protection IO DS1 pack IO DS1 protection is controlled by the active COMDAC via the protec tion control bus The AEM cannot provision DS1 pack protection It is automatically invoked when an FAC100 pack is plugged into the IO DS1 protection slot Figure 5 48 Shelf Protection window tab IO DS1 This window provides IO DS1 protection information It also provides the mecha nisms needed to perform changes in the protection scheme as well as protection switches Use the following table to define the IO DS1 Pr
19. Lucent h i i Elnur gt c gt 2e 7 r 4 a a P dlei zilei allcisiicis a a FLT a A u a A P 1 4 2 cuy Oi Ee Figure 5 20 MDS2B Shelf View window AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 5 51 NE management equipment configuration Equipment configuration Single clicking on any slot will launch the card specific window cf Chapter 5 5 5 9 page 5 71 for MSC Chapter 5 5 5 11 page 5 73 for PTU Chapter 5 5 5 13 page 5 75 for CU Pack Color Meanings MSC red Lit when a fault is detected on the pack yellow m Lit when loss of clock sync signal is detected m Flashes when incorrect MDSU MDS2 MDS2B side association is de tected PTU red Lit when a fault is detected on the pack green Lit when a channel served by the PTU is under test For cards which need to be provisioned APs and IO_DSis it is necessary to rep resent the slot state since the provisioned data may be different to the inserted card There are two possible views of this window m Inserted view apparatus codes of inserted cards are shown m Provisioned view apparatus code of the provisioned cards is shown The user can switch between the two views via two check box located below the shelf view of the window The following table describes the representation of the different slot states Description and Repre Inserted View Provisioned View Slot State sentation Label Pack Label provisioned
20. Modify the timing source Equipment configuration Complete the following procedure to modify the timing source control parameter for telephony services Step Procedure 1 Select NE in the Network Element Browser and Timing Source Control via the cursor menu The Timing Source Control window pops up If you want to then change the provisioned timing synchro nization mode use the corresponding option menu in the Provisioning Timing Reference field and press Apply change the provisioned primary source change the provisioned secondary source change the line code parameter change the framing format parameter use the corresponding option menu in the Provisioning Timing Reference field and press Apply use the corresponding option menu in the Provisioning Timing Reference field and press Apply use the corresponding option menu in the Provisioning Timing Reference field and press Apply use the corresponding option menu in the Provisioning Timing Reference field and press Apply get the active timing synchronization source and the source states press the Get button in the Active Timing Reference field switch between the working and standby sources of synchronization press the Get button in the Active Timing Reference field to get the active values and click on Switch exit the window AEM R1 7 06 00 click on Close 363 211 454 NE management equipment con
21. NE out 1 Check whether the new NE can be incorporated in the existing DCN plan drawn up in the network planning phase if not the DCN plan must first be revised creation of the NE assignment of the NE to a domain logical connection of the NE selection of the timing synchronization source selection of the COMDAC protection scheme simplex duplex NOR ON selection of those slots for which an absence of the pack will be alarmed COMDAC provisioning of card types which are inserted in a slot 9 provisioning of subshelves All steps are described in detail in Chapter 5 AEM R1 7 1 28 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 Functional description Working with AEM Removal of an NE If an NE is no longer managed by the AEM the administrator deletes it from the AEM database gt NOTE When an NE is deleted from the AEM database it is still fully functional The TL1 and TCP IP links between the AEM and the NE will be closed and the management access via the AEM is not possible until the NE is created and connected again 1 4 3 2 2 Modification of NEs Adding a NEs can be modified by adding or removing packs The AEM recognises automat pack ically which pack has been plugged and where As only default settings are set on the new pack the system administrator must adapt the configuration Removing a When removing a pack it must be ensured that there are no connections running pack via this unit Then the pack
22. Parameters Description When a check mark is set the channel unit applies a current from tip to ring or across the transmission lead simplex of the subscriber interface Possible values Set Not set Default Set This option menu can be used to select whether the transmit equalizer mast be loaded or non loaded distribution cable Possible values N L Default N Sealing Current Load Non Load Impedance The transmit and receive impedance parameter selects the termination impedance of the channel unit Possible values 150 600 1200 Default 600 7 dB J3 When the Black option is selected the channel unit sup ports an input TLP range of 15 0 to 1 dB When the White option is selected the channel unit supports an input TLP range of 8 0 to 8 5 dB Possible values Black White Default Black Slope This slider can be used to adjust the frequency response of the equalizer Possible values 0 15 step 1 Default 0 AEM R1 7 6 54 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 Service provisioning Service provisioning telephony Service Details Parameters Description Bandwidth BW This slider can be used to control the frequency response characteristic of the transmit equalizer Possible values 0 15 step 1 Default 0 Height This slider can be used to control the amplitude of the trans mit equalizer s transfer function Possible values 0 15 step 1 Default 0 Receive Attenu
23. Processing package information Processing system information Verifying disk space requirements Checking for conflicts with packages already installed Checking for setuid setgid prograns AEM R1 7 2 12 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 Software installation and commissioning Installation procedure p Se This package contains scripts which will be ex ecuted with super user permission during the process of installing this package Do you want to continue with the installation of lt LuRWRT gt y n 11 Type y and press Return Installing RogueWave Libraries Runtimes for AnyMedia EM R1 7 as lt LuRWRT gt Installing part 1 of 1 lt files list gt verifying class lt none gt Executing postinstall script You have the installation logfile in tmp EM_Install_LuRWRT log Installation of lt LuRWRT gt was successful OrbixMT 2 3c patch Processing package instance lt LuOX23RT gt from 02 installation lt home bldr17 LOAD_36 1 1 build lucent AnyMediaEMR1 7 gt Orbix 2 3c02 Runtime for AnyMedia NB EM R1 7 sparc solaris Version 2 3c02MT Run Time OK No previous package LuOX23RT have been found Here is a list of your partitions and the free space in each of them Filesystem kbytes used avail capacity Mounted on dev dsk c0t0d0s0 143927 36990 92545 29 dev dsk c0t0d0s4 625262 401569 167420 71 usr dev dsk c0t0d0s3 96455 11285 75525 13 var dev dsk c0t0d0s6 6591133 4313833
24. Timing Source Control only for telephony Create Subshelf gt IAT only NE R1 7 0 Alarms Logs List gt ATM Cross Connections List gt VRT VB List gt Physical DS1 List gt Logical DS0 List gt Data Test Backups gt Telephony Backups gt Data Restore gt Telephony Restore gt Data Software Download gt Telephony Software Download gt Data AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 5 21 NE management equipment configuration Initial windows E U Selected icon on Network Ele ment Browser Cursor menu entries NE continued Main Shelf Subshelves AP Program Copy gt Telephony Program Copy gt Data Cut Through gt Telephony Profiles gt ADSL Transmission Profiles gt ADSL PM Threshold Performance gt ATM Traffic Performance gt Feeder Performance gt ADSL AFM Feeder PM Threshold Data View Protection View Edit View AEM R1 7 5 22 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 NE management equipment configuration Groups and NEs management 5 4 Groups and NEs management The groups and NE management map handling is performed by the following windows m Network Browser m NE Browser m Group Map Groups and NEs Management NE Browse Figure 5 7 Groups and NEs Management windows 5 4 1 Groups management Overview NE groups 363 211 454 Groups management consists of the addition of a new group to the set of groups
25. VCI Virtual Channel Identifier VF Voice Frequency VFDE Voice Frequency Data Enhancement VPI Virtual Path Identifier VRT Virtual Remote Terminal AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 AB 11 Abbreviations I E gt WW na Ww WAN Wide Area Network X XO Crystal Oscillator EEEE SoS Y YEL Yellow Alarm EEEE SoS Z ZCS Zero Code Suppression ZS Zero Suppression AEM R1 7 AB 12 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 Glossary 10Base T This is a physical interface used for high speed Ethernet connection It uses twisted pair cables A a wire One of the wires of the subscriber line Sometimes it is called the tip wire AEM NB AnyMedia Access System Element Manager for Narrowband Services It may be also named simply AEM NB in some parts of the document Alarm Any condition that needs operator attention since it may impact the normal operations of any system under opera tor responsibility e g Element Manager Network Element AMS Alarm Management Subsystem AnyMedia Access System This is also referred to as the Network Element or just the NE AnyMedia NE AnyMedia Network Element for Narrow Band Services It is the Network Element to which the DCN defined in this document is related Also known as FAST or AMAS AO Autonomous output reports generated by the NEs Application Group of one or more modules that offer related functionality Applicatios Pack AP This is a
26. ervice Details Information _ Enhanced Switched _ AB Signalling _ Quality Monitoring tom Reload Success I Figure 6 29 Logical DS0 window SW56 Service Details Parameters Description Enhanced When the enhanced switched 56 kbps check mark is set the Switch channel unit supports the transmission of call progress tones to the customer premises equipment CPE Possible values Set Not set Default Not set AB Signaling The AB signaling parameter check mark is normally not set which causes the channel unit to operate in the software sig naling mode Possible values Set Not set Default Not set AEM R1 7 6 58 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 Service provisioning Service provisioning telephony p Se Service Details Parameters Description Quality Monitor When the quality monitoring parameter check mark is set ing the channel unit will send abnormal station code to the net work upon detecting an excessive number of bipolar viola tions from the loop Possible values Set Not set Default Not set 6 2 4 22 TDIO SIIA B C D Service Details windows Overview TD O S A B C D 4 wire tandem office and 4 wire tandem subscriber 4 state Type Il Type and 2 state Type II Type The tandem function is used for pro viding a back to back carrier interface for loop or ground start circuits It is appli cable to the SPQ444 channel unit E TDOA Service Details
27. p ee 6 2 1 Network interface 6 2 1 1 VRT VB List window This window displays the VRT VB id list based on a selection criterion It provides access to the VRT VBs windows for addition or deletion of logical DSO and or log ical DS1 and for modifying the VRT VB specific parameters if applicable Figure 6 4 VRT VB List window The following table shows the view edit option of this window Parameters Buttons Description NE Name NE name of the selected NE max 30 characters Selection Crite Radio buttons are used to define the list that will be dis rion played in the field VRT VB List Selected criterion is All The list will display all VRT VB ids Selected criterion is TR 303 or TR 08 or INA In these cases only the VRT VB ids of the selected type will be displayed AEM R1 7 6 6 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 Service provisioning Service provisioning telephony p Se Parameters Buttons Description VRT VB List This field contains a table displaying VRT VB information This information is presented in a 3 column table The table is sorted by VRT VB Id A scroll bar allows navigation through the table Rows in the table can be selected to edit VRT VBs and to add logical DSO and logical DS1 through the use of the corresponding buttons described below VRT VB Id Lists all ids of the VRT VB defined by the selection criterion Number of Logical DSO Informs about the number of already d
28. 15 Type a valid path where the package files must be placed and press Re turn Or press Return to accept the default path Select owner and group for package files NBR USER GROUP 1 halt other 2 root other 3 smtp root 4 verl staff Enter selection q AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 2 65 Software installation and commissioning Installation procedure ee 16 Type 4 and press Return User verl and Group staff have been selected Using lt gt as the package base directory Processing package information Processing system information Verifying disk space requirements Checking for conflicts with packages already installed Checking for setuid setgid programs This package contains scripts which will be executed with super user permission during the process of installing this package Do you want to continue with the installation of lt LuNETSCP gt y n 17 Type y and press Return Installing Netscape Navigator 4 6 Stand Alone for AnyMedia EM R1 7 as lt LuNETSCP gt Installing part 1 of 1 lt files list gt verifying class lt none gt Executing postinstall script You have the installation logfile in tmp EM_Install_LuNETSCP 1log Installation of lt LuNETSCP gt was successful AEM R1 7 2 66 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 Software installation and commissioning Installation procedure GUI installation Processing package instance lt LuGUI24
29. 3072 Bit Rate kbps Option 4 Two spin buttons upstream and downstream can be used to define the values for option 4 bit rate Possible values upstream 32 1440 default 160 downstream 32 13120 default 1536 AEM R1 7 5 116 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 NE management equipment configuration Equipment configuration p Se Parameters Buttons Profile Data Description Latency Two option menus upstream and downstream shows the value Interleaved Interleave Depth These two text fields upstream and downstream are enabled only if the value for Latency is In terleaved Possible values 0 255 default in both directions 2 Parity Bytes per RS These two option menus upstream and downstream allow the following values to be selected 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 default in both directions 2 These option menus are enabled only if the Type of Rate Adaption is Explicit DMT Symbols per RS These two option menus upstream and downstream are enabled only if the Type of Rate Adaption is Explicit Possible values 1 2 4 8 16 default in both directions 1 SNR Margin dB These two option menus upstream and downstream allow the following values to be selected 0 31 default in both directions 5 PSDM dBm Hz This option menu is used to set the line power Possible values 60 40 default 40 Remove This button can be used to remove any profile except one
30. AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 A 9 Data communications network DCN configuration Recommended DCN configurations E SeSe m A DCN device is needed at the Central Office to make the translation be tween 10BaseT MAC amp LLC1 IP and DS3 ATM PVC AAL5 802 2 LLC 802 2 SNAP IP interface to the ATM network The LLC encapsulation method to be supported by that device is that described in RFC 1483 i e this method allows multiplexing multiple protocols over a single ATM virtual circuit Fur ther this method carries connectionless network traffic over the ATM net work Note that this functionality if available can also be performed by the ATM switch connected by means of a LAN connection with the central of fice e g CBX 500 in these cases there is no need of a separate ATM router at the CO m ATM PVC which carries IP management information is carried over an ATM network and finally they are inserted in a related NE by means of DS3 data ports IP packets contained in the ATM PVC are extracted in the data AFM card which also support RFC 1483 m Part of these IP packets those with IP address of AFM which carry BB management information are terminated in AFM m Part of these IP packets those with IP address of COMDAC which carry telephony management information are forwarded to AFM LAN port which is joined to COMDAC LAN port located on the SCP of the AnyMedia Main shelf these IP packets will be terminated in the COMDAC
31. Client Host A machine where one or more user modules are installed Common Data and Control Pack COMDAC This performs the main bandwidth management and control functions of the system Configuration Management This consists of a set of functions for controlling the network elements including initialization parameter setting starting and stopping and collecting information about the NE configuration Controlled Objects An entity defined via type and value Where type is defined as NE for AEM NB R1 0 but later when unbundled it requires the ability to configure type as VRT for the 24 channel product Value will identify one specific managed NE or VRT Interface CIT Craft Interface Terminal A local RS232 connection on the AnyMedia access system to which a PC GUI can be connected D Date This refers to the day month and year and represents a calendar function that needs to include a calculation for leap years and a capability of determining the day of the week from the date and must be Y2K compliant DCN Data Communications Network the communication media and interconnected devices used to exchange manage ment information between the AEM NB the NEs and other OSs Defaults These are the parameter values built into the NE when it is shipped from the factory Default values are restored upon execution of an INIT SYS command AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 GL 3 Glossary ee Device Driver A program that co
32. Continue with step 2 No Install the correct SW version AEM R1 7 7 50 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 Fault management and maintenance Alarms mm ee 2 Check if the COMDAC AFM is in the initialization process and wait until this process has finished 3 Is the alarm now cleared Yes O K No Call Lucent Technologies Technical Support 7 5 5 14 TCP_IP_CON_REFUSED Meaning The TCP IP connection establishment could not be completed successfully for port numbers 11002 11004 11006 and 11008 Abbreviation TCP_IP_CON_REFUSED Severity Critical Service affecting No Effects It is not possible to manage the telephony agent Possible cause s Some TCP IP protocol errors stopped the connection establishment process be tween the AEM and the telephony agent Corrective actions Proceed as follows to clear the alarm Step Procedure 1 Check the TCP IP communication addresses Are the TCP IP communication addresses correct Yes Continue with step 2 No Correct the addresses Continue with step 4 2 Check the gateway telephony agent identification Is the gateway telephony agent identification correct Yes Continue with step 3 No Correct the identification Continue with step 4 3 Check the DCN Is the DCN in service Yes Continue with step 4 No Bring the DCN into service AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 7 51 Fault management and maintenance Alarms mm ee 4 Is the alarm now cleared
33. Data communications network DCN configuration NE communication capabilities A A NE communication capabili ties In this section the management communication capabilities of an AEM R1 7 are described The AnyMedia Access System provides the following management in terfaces for operation administration maintenance and provisioning OAM amp P m Craft interface terminal CIT The CIT port is an EIA TIA 232 E interface configured as a data communi cation equipment DCE and located on the CTU faceplate for local and re mote logins The CIT interface supports exchange of TL1 messages and file transfers There are two modes available for communications via the CIT interface dumb terminal which allows local access with the exchange of TL1 messages GSI without PPP capability which allows local exchange of TL1 messagesand file transfers over a Lucent proprietary communicat ing protocol The protocol profile in the NE for this scenario is shown in Figure A 1 TL1 over TCP File Transfer Protocol TL1 over Telnet also used for cut through TCP at layer 4 TCP at layer 4 IP at layer 3 IP at layer 3 PPP RS232 Figure A 1 COMDAC R1 4 remote access to CIT port protocol profiles m External system LAN interface LAN interface is available via the shelf connection panel SCP connector on the AnyMedia Access System Mainshelf It provides access to an IEEE 802 3 compliant LAN through a 10BaseT connect
34. FXS0 Service Details windows Overview These GSFNs are only available for NE R1 7 0 EMO E amp M non locally switched The E amp M function is used to provide the E amp M signaling interface FXS0 foreign exchange station non locally switched It is applicable to the emu lated SPQ443 phantom channel unit that is used to handle DSO signals routed to a PBX or key system attached to the secondary T1 DSX 1 line at the IAT EMO Service Details Information Figure 6 17 Logical DSO window EMO FXS0 Service Details Parameters Description Trunk Condition This option menu can be used to determine whether the AP or CU sets the signaling state toward the central office CO to the Idle state Busy or the DSO remote alarm indication Rai code during a fault condition Default Idle AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 6 43 Service provisioning Service provisioning telephony p SeSe 6 2 4 10 2LS 2GS 2FXLS 2FX Service Details windows Overview The 2LS 2 wire loop start service with enhanced transmission and signaling pro visioning options is applicable to the POTS32 LPA300 PRCOIN LPA350 and PROG2W LPA380 APs channel units The 2GS 2 wire ground start service with enhanced transmission and signaling provisioning options is applicable to the PRCOIN LPA350 and PROG2W LPA380 APs channel units The 2FXLS 2 wire FX loop start is applicable to the PRCOIN LPA350 and PROG2W LPA380 APs The 2FX 2 wi
35. Menu display Menu option Meaning Information in TES Index Display the index help allowing the user to Chapter 7 3 4 5 navigate through the AEM help information page 7 23 On Window Display the help information of the window where the user is currently working AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 7 13 Fault management and maintenance Alarm monitoring 7 3 3 2 Toolbar The toolbar contains often used functions and consists of four buttons Table 7 7 Toolbar Function Icon Meaning Acknowledge Acknowledge all selected alarms Their status im vo mediately changes to acknowledged The cknowledot User_Ack is set to the login of the user who has acknowledged the alarm Clear Clear all selected alarms Their status immedi Clear ately changes to cleared Reload Reload the actual alarms states into the table m Only alarms which match the filter criteria are in PRR cluded Print Open a window for printing out all alarm items displayed in the currently displayed table 7 3 3 3 General Information The first section is a frame titled General Information this frame includes controls showing information about the number of alarms of each alarm severity in the do main where the user is working m Critical Displays the number of critical CR alarms m Major Displays the number of major MJ alarms m Minor Displays the number of minor MN alarms m Information Displays
36. OK No previous package LuPerCo have been found Using lt opt lucent AnyMediaEM_R1 7 gt as the package base directory Processing package information Processing system information 1 package pathname is already properly installed Verifying disk space requirements Checking for conflicts with packages already installed Checking for setuid setgid programs AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 2 37 Software installation and commissioning Installation procedure E See This package contains scripts which will be executed with super user permission during the process of installing this package Do you want to continue with the installation of lt LuPerCo gt y n 21 Type y and press Return Installing AnyMedia Element Manager Performan Monitorin Release 1 7 Administration as lt LuPerCo gt Installing part 1 of 1 opt lucent AnyMediaEM_R1 7 PerformanceConfig bin PCDbCreate opt lucent AnyMediaEM_R1 7 PerformanceConfig bin StatConfig opt lucent AnyMediaEM_R1 7 PerformanceConfig db PCDSchema adb verifying class lt common gt Executing postinstall script Package lt LuOSRT gt ObjectStore 5 1_SP2 Run Time have been found in opt lucent OS51_SP2 Object Store path set to LuOSRT ObjectStore Release 5 1 Service Pack 3 5 1_SP2 Run Time bin lib osversion Package lt LuOX23RT gt OrbixMT Version 2 3c02MT Run Time have been found in opt lucent OrbixMT_2 3c
37. P bit Severely Errored Second Possible val ues 1 900 for 15 minutes 1 86400 for one day m UAS Unavailable Second Possible values 1 900 for 15 minutes 1 86400 for one day Valid Data Three check boxes show whether the data for the time period are valid or not Get This button is used to retrieve the performance monitoring data of the selected feeder Reset Counts This button can be used to restart the performance monitor ing data of the selected feeder 8 3 2 Modify the AFM performance moni toring Procedure Complete the following procedure to modify the AFM performance monitoring Step Procedure 1 Select NE in the Network Element Browser and Performance gt Feeder via the cursor menu or click on the PM Data button in the AFM Feeder window The AFM Performance Monitoring Data window pops up 2 Use the option menu Feeder Id to select the desired feeder 3 Use the check box Log Performance Data to define whether the monitor ing data should be logged or not If you want to then retrieve the performance monitoring click on Get data restart the monitoring data counter for click on Reset Counts the selected feeder AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 8 7 Performance monitoring AFM feeder performance monitoring p SeSe If you want to then exit the window click on Close AEM R1 7 8 8 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 Performance monitoring ATM traffi
38. Profiling window Controlled Objects Ta ble AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 4 25 User management Controlled objects 4 Select one controlled object type in the Controlled Object Type field and click Open The Controlled Object Profile window pops up with the current information about the selected controlled object Controlled Object Profile window Figure 4 22 Controlled Object Profile window Adding to domains To assign the selected controlled object to further domains select one or more domains in the Domains Not Assigned field and click Add gt gt gt NOTE To create domains see Chapter 4 3 1 page 4 8 Removing from To remove the selected controlled object from domains select one or more do domains mains in the Domains Assigned field and click lt lt Remove gt NOTE The EM object generated by default is protected against deletion Click OK or Apply to save the changes After clicking OK the window will be closed If you want to reject the changes click Close before OK or Apply Other fields The following fields are read only fields to display data of the selected controlled read only object Controlled Object Type Displays the controlled object type Possible values are EM and NE Value Displays the characteristics of the selected controlled object If the controlled ob ject is EM it displays AnyMedia if it is NE it displays the NE Id number AEM R1 7 4 26 Versio
39. SUN Solaris CH Figure 1 3 AEM functional groups AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 1 7 Functional description System and software architecture ee 1 3 1 1 NE Management The NE management functionality is distributed in 5 areas These are Equipment management Service management Alarm management Performance manage ment and Test management Equipment The equipment management provides the following functionality features management m Scrolling list of NEs The NEs are displayed in a list covered in a single window called Network Element Browser where the NEs and their components can be handled like files in a file browser m NE provisioning The operator can create a new NE manageable for the AEM view The op erator must enter the specific configuration data for the new NE such as IP address NE Name NE user id and password m Software download to a single NE Provides a storage medium for maintaining a copy of the software and a mechanism for downloading that software to an NE for both data and te lephony agents m Software download to multiple NEs Download of new software to multiple NEs on an individual connection ba sis m NE non volatile data storage restoration Restores NE non volatile data storage upon user request Provides a stor age medium for maintaining a copy of the NVDS for backup and restore purposes for both telephony and data agents m Maintain a local copy of NE inventory
40. Select one or more applications in the Applications Not Assigned field and click Add gt gt gt NOTE For this action please pay attention to Table 4 1 page 4 16 Removing To disable the access to applications select one or more applications in the Appli applications cations Assigned field and click lt lt Remove For this action please pay attention to Table 4 1 page 4 16 gt NOTE The administrator user group has access permissions to all applications and this access permissions cannot be modified gt NOTE If the user select an application in the Applications Assigned field all tasks that are under it will be expanded in the Tasks Assigned and Tasks Not As signed fields Adding tasks To give the selected user group access to further tasks select one or more tasks in the Tasks Not Assigned field and click Add gt gt gt NOTE For this action please pay attention to Table 4 1 page 4 16 AEM R1 7 4 22 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 User management User groups Removing tasks To disable the access to one or more tasks select one or more tasks in the Tasks Assigned field and click lt lt Remove For this action please pay attention to Table 4 1 page 4 16 gt NOTE If the task View is removed from the Alarm Management or Groups and NEs Management the remaining tasks from the respective application are no more possible but not removed gt NOTE The administrator user group has access
41. Set Secondary Secondary channel used when a check mark is set the channel channel unit supports a low speed telemetry channel in the subscriber s data bits Possible values OCU1 OCU2 Set Not set Default Not set OCU3 Set When a check mark is set the channel unit will send abnor mal station code to the network upon detecting an excessive number of bipolar violations from the loop Possible values OCU1 OCU2 Set Not set Default Not set OCU3 Not set Quality Monitor ing AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 6 57 Service provisioning Service provisioning telephony p Se Service Details Parameters Description Subscriber Data This option menu can be used to specify the subscriber data Rate rate in kbps for the subscriber interface Possible values OCU1 24 48 96 192 OCU2 384 560 OCU3 640 Default 192 for OCU1 560 for OCU2 640 for OCU3 Error Correc This option menu can be used to select the error correction tion technique for the DSO path The MVEC option is applicable only for subscriber data rates of 19 2 kbps and less SCEC requires two DSO time slots Possible values OCU1 NONE MVEC Default NONE OCU2 OCU3 NONE SCEC Default NONE 6 2 4 21 SW56 Service Details window Overview The SW56 Switched 56 kbps DDS service is also applicable to the SPQ452 dual OCU dataport including enhanced service options to the DDS o O GSFN Swo6
42. The AEM maintains a local copy of specific hardware identifiers and soft ware version identifiers This local copy accepts automatic inventory notifi cations This information can be used for display and report functions in case of loss of communication with the supported NE The hardware iden tifiers include all packs m Maintain a local copy of NE provisioning configuration data The AEM maintains a local copy of all cross connection and parameter set tings for each NE This information can be used for display and report func tions in case of loss of communication with the supported NE m Maintain NE software copies The system keeps a copy of the versions of the NE software running in the NEs managed by the AEM Generally only one version of NE software per NE type is used by all the NEs in a network but the AEM must have the ca pacity to manage two software versions during the upgrade period AEM R1 7 1 8 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 Functional description System and software architecture p Se m AEM database synchronization Automatic update of the AEM database records based on NE database changes m Internal audits only applicable to data agents The AEM performs periodic internal audits to ensure the integrity of the configuration data with the NE m Protection control The management system provides a facility to allow the user to switch op eration of one unit in an NE to a standby unit if that unit ex
43. The AEM provides a mechanism to define the order in which the NEs will be synchronized m Maximum software download time It is possible to perform software download actions on 80 NEs in 6 hours m Scaling The AEM provides a scaling capability which defines the most suitable cost effective configuration depending on the number of NEs and number of us ers to be supported AEM R1 7 1 6 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 Functional description System and software architecture p ee 1 3 System and software architecture 1 3 1 Functional groups The AEM software architecture is built with a number of components that can be grouped in the following distinct functional groups 1 NE Management Equipment Management Service Management Alarm Management Test Management Performance Management 2 General Components Components for Operation Administration and Maintenance OAM Common Servers 3 Software Platform Software bus Repository third party libraries 4 Graphical User Interface GUI 5 Northbound Interface 6 Southbound Interface Figure 1 3 shows the six functional groups The shadowed blocks are part of the AEM 4 GUI Northbound General Southbound interface NE Management components interface equipment service alarm test performance common S OAM comp Software platform software bus repository third party libraries Hardware platform
44. The NE AM alarms are classified in two groups Normal alarms Data provided Access Identifier Condition Type Notification Code Service Affect ing Access Identifier Type Occurrence Date Occurrence Time Environment alarms Data provided Access Identifier Alarm Type Notification Code Occurrence Date Occurrence Time For all alarm types several alarm data fields are conceptually the same although they convey different values For instance both Condition Type and Alarm Type refer to the type of alarm being raised cleared Battery on discharge Loss of frame AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 7 39 Fault management and maintenance Alarms p See The following table maps all the equivalent fields to general names that uniquely identify a concept independently of the alarm type Table 7 12 General alarm fields General Name Platform Alarm NE Alarm NE Environment Alarm Object_ld EM Object Identifier Access Identifier Access Identifier Alarm_Type Alarm Type Identifier Condition Type Alarm Type Severity Severity Notification Code Notification Code Serv_Affec Service Affecting Service Effect Date_First_Time Occurrence Time Occurrence Time Occurrence Time H a a Date_Last_Time and Date Occurrence Date Occurrence Date a Time and date YYYY MM DD HH MM SS b Only time HH MM SS c Only date MM DD Alarm severities For each alarm one of the following alarm seve
45. The first or left section is a mirror im age of the second or right section Main shelf I c c gt Fuses and Jacks Figure 5 2 MDS2 shelf layout R1 2 The MDS2B shelf shown in Figure 5 3 is arranged to accommodate 12 CU packs one PTU and one MSC pack per section The first or top section is a mirror im age of the second or bottom section Main shelf lt gt Fuses and Jacks DDM 2000 MDS2 Figure 5 3 MDS2B shelf layout Metallic shelf con The MSC provides the required shelf interface and central control for half of the shelf Each MSC is two slots wide but has only one backplane connector An 8 MHz MDS2 link is provided to interface with the AnyMedia Access System shelf On the distribution side the MSC supports 3 4 096 Mbps PCM links for connecting 12 channel units The MSC performs the following functions troller m Translates between 1 5 AnyMedia Access System PCM highways and 3 SLC carrier format PCM buses m Performs rate conversion from incoming 8 MHz link and distributes timing and synchronization to CUs AEM R1 7 5 4 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 NE management equipment configuration Overview of the controlled systems p Se m Translates between one AnyMedia Access System UART link and the SLC carrier bank controller link BCL and PTU control interfaces Control and monitoring for CUs and PTUs Composite clock input and digital data s
46. ance monitoring data by each ADSL drop there are three option menus to select the ADSL drop Figure 8 1 ADSL Performance Monitoring Data window The following table shows the view edit options of this window Parameters Buttons Description NE Name NE name of the selected NE max 30 characters AEM R1 7 8 2 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 Performance monitoring ADSL performance monitoring data Parameters Buttons Physical Drop Id Description These fields display the ADSL drop id by means of three op tion menus m The first one contains the drop shelf Format drop 1 or subdrop 1 8 None is also allowed m The second one contains the slot number inside the NE but only for slots in which an ADSL pack is provi sioned Format 1 16 for main shelf or 1 8 for subshelf None is also allowed m The third one contains the drop number inside the slot indicated in the previous list 1 x Format drop shelf slot port Possible values drop 1 1 16 1 x None is also allowed x is the number of drops supplied by the server Log Perform This check box can be used to define whether the AEM is ance Data collecting and logging the performance monitoring data for all the ADSL drops in the NE or not AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 8 3 Performance monitoring ADSL performance monitoring data mm ee Parameters Buttons Description Performance Upstream Four text fields show t
47. background use the option menu Line Code to change the value and click on Apply edit a physical DS1 use the option menus Physical DS1 to select the desired physical DS1 and click on Edit Physical DS1 The Physical DS1 window pops up cf Chapter 6 2 3 1 page 6 21 get the current service states click on Get in the Operational State field exit the window click on Close AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 6 29 Service provisioning Service provisioning telephony a See 6 2 4 Creation of VRT VB logical TO sub scriber Assumptions For the following description it is assumed that the NE is connected the logical TO is not yet created and the physical line drop or roc is not in use by any other log ical TO The following figure shows a block diagram of TO cross connections Physical distribution ports in APs and CUs LLN CRV 1 PLN 1 TO Cross connection Figure 6 12 TO Cross connections AEM R1 7 6 30 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 Service provisioning Service provisioning telephony p Se 6 2 4 1 Logical DSO list window This window displays the logical DSO list based on a selection criterion It provides access to the Logical DSO window to edit logical DSOs Figure 6 13 Logical DSO List window The following table shows the view edit option of this window Parameters Buttons Description NE Name NE name of the selected NE max 30 characters AEM R1 7 3
48. co _ oo N k 1 ao ee i BK 363 211 454 Functional description 1 1 Scope Purpose Contents 363 211 454 About this subject This chapter describes the AnyMedia Element Manager 24 Channel AEM R1 7 This release covers the following NE releases m narrowband releases R1 2 1 R1 2 2 and R1 7 0 m broadband releases R1 1 2 and R1 4 gt NOTE For the AEM the terms telephony data are used instead of narrow band broadband This chapter provides an overview of the AEM and tries to give an insight into the functioning of the AEM by providing detailed information on the AEM features mentioned The following AEM subjects are described m basic functionality m management features m system and software architecture m hardware and software platform m interfaces m applications AEM R1 7 Version 1 00 06 00 1 1 Functional description Introduction p See 1 2 Introduction General The AEM is part of a telecommunication management network TMN It repre sents the element management layer and fulfills the tasks of the ISO International Organisation for Standardization functional areas see Chapter 1 2 2 page 1 3 Benefits This provides some benefits for the operator m better control over revenue generating services by local and centralized management m reduced time and effort for provisioning tasks m fast and efficient fault detection and isolation m prevention o
49. connection between the INA physical port and the feeder DSO without explicitly provisioning the feeder DSO to be used The access identifier AID of an INA log ical line and its INA feeder DSO are the same For more information refer to the network elements documentation Screen navigation Figure 6 3 page 6 5 shows an overview of the screen navigation for service provi sioning The arrows represent the order in which the windows can be opened Example To open the Logical DSO list m select NE in the Network Element Browser and List gt Logical DSO via the cursor menu AEM R1 7 6 4 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 Service provisioning Service provisioning telephony v from O DS1 window Equipment Configuration cf Chapter 5 5 page 5 33 v from AP Telephony CU or IAT window Equipment Configuration cf Chapter 5 5 page 5 33 VRT VB List VRTs VBs Physical DS1 List Logical DSO List E r s s Logical DS1 Logical DSO Physical DS1 General to Timing Source window Details yates Equipment Configuration i cf Chapter 5 5 page 5 33 a aaaa EE Select Logical DSO Cc Object Network Element Browser I Windows with several tabs L Window Figure 6 3 Screen navigation for service provisioning telephony AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 6 5 Service provisioning Service provisioning telephony
50. in The type of the provisioned black grey black serted and match card is the same as the type of the inserted card provisioned in The type of the provisioned dark grey gray dark grey serted and mis card is different from the match type of the inserted card provisioned and not The operator has provi black white inserted sioned this slot associating it to a type of card but no card is inserted in the slot not provisioned and No card type is pre grey dark grey gray inserted provisioned in the slot but a Card is inserted not provisioned and No card type is provisioned black black not inserted and no card is inserted in the slot AEM R1 7 5 52 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 NE management equipment configuration Equipment configuration Description and Repre Inserted View Provisioned View Slot State sentation Pack Pack Label provisioned not in No card is provisioned no black black grey serted and agent card is inserted in the slot type mismatch and there is mismatch between the telephony and the data agent gt NOTE Pack refers to the slot face plate Label refers to the apparatus code gt NOTE The NE does not send the match indication for a provisioned data AP The shelf view therefore indicates provisioned inserted and mismatch until a re sync is done AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 5 53 NE management equipment configuration Equipment configuration
51. kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Do you like to continue y n q AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 2 21 Software installation and commissioning Installation procedure E SeSe eee 3 Type y and press Return to continue or type n or q and press Return to exit AnyMedia NB EM R1 7 installation CopyRight c 2000 Lucent Technologies Inc All Rights Reserved Please choose the installation mode 1 ADM lt Administration package installation gt 2 GUI lt Client package installation gt Enter selection q 4 Type 1 and press Return The package lt LuLUMRT gt is already installed on the system The package lt LuRWRT gt is already installed on the system The package lt LuOX23RT gt is already installed on the system The package lt LuOXNSRT gt is already installed on the system The package lt LuOSRT gt is already installed on the system The package s were already installed in the System ObjectStore config Object Store configuration uration II The default copy of ObjectStore to configure is in opt lucent 0S51_SP2 ostore Is this the copy that you want to configure yes 5 Press Return ObjectStore includes shared libraries For Ob jectStore applications and utilities to work the dynamic linker must be able to find them The recommended arrangement is to have symbolic links in usr lib to the shared libraries AEM R1 7 2 22 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 Software installation and
52. m 1591 to 1641 As CORBA servers are activated by the Orbix daemon they are assigned to a port that clients can communicate with The time zone must be the same for the AnyMedia client lt GUI gt LUMOS Net work Element and OS Since the number of AEM R1 7 processes is so high further process environment customization is needed on the server related to IPC semaphores Carry out the following command to verify the value of the SEMMNU parameter sysdef grep SEMMNU AEM R1 7 Version 1 00 06 00 2 5 Software installation and commissioning General mm ee The output of this command is like this 30 undo structures in system SEMMNU If the number appearing e g 30 is less than 200 edit the etc system file by add ing the following line at the end of the file set semsys seminfo_semmnu 200 Reboot the server workstation AEM R1 7 2 6 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 Software installation and commissioning Installation procedure p Se 2 2 Installation procedure General The AEM R1 7 distribution includes one installation script per CD ROM called install_AMEM_ which shall be used in a full installation of the CD ROM it in cludes all packages stored on the distribution media Also the script can be used to install individual packages it will detect if any package is not installed and ask the user to install it cf Chapter 2 2 2 page 2 71 This guide shows the flow of the installation according to the
53. m the Restore windows and m the Groups amp NEs window File Browser Figure 5 59 File Browser window The following table shows the parameter of this window Parameters Buttons Description Selected File This text field displays the selected file The field is editable only if the file browser has been accessed from a backup window In this case the Available Files Directories list is used to select the corresponding path directory subdirecto ries AEM R1 7 5 168 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 NE management equipment configuration Equipment configuration p Se Parameters Buttons Description Available This list box contains all the existing files or subdirectories Files Directo contained in the selected directory If a file is selected this file ries name will be displayed in the Selected File field Label This field displays the current relative path selected in the list above A different path is shown depending on the window the File Browser has been accessed from Create Direc This button can be used to create a directory The directory tory name can be specified by use of the text field on the right hand side OK This button is used to confirm the selection of the file or di rectory If the File Browser has been accessed from a Backup win dow and a new file name has been entered this file will be created in the selected directory 5 5 16 TL1 cut through telephony agent Over
54. the text field shows the logical DSO number inside the selected VTR VB A command button pro vides access to the Select Logical DSO window for adding or editing cross connections Possible values for the option menu v8dp 1 20 1 96 for TR 08 v3dp 1 1 2048 for TR 303 inadsO 1 20 1 24 for INA gt NOTE Existing DSOs are marked with a grey background edit function is possible for empty fields white back ground only the add function is possible The second line is available only when the GSFN field is populated with BRI not for TR 303 NO1 NO2 or OCU1 OCU2 OCU3 for a second entry in bundle logical DSOs The third line is available only when the GSFN field is popu lated with BRI not for TR 303 for a third entry in bundle log ical DSOs AEM R1 7 6 36 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 Service provisioning Service provisioning telephony p Se Parameters Buttons Description Logical DSO Physical DSO Id These fields display the physical DSO id by General Infor means of three option menus mation contin ued m the first menu contains the drop shelf type drop 1 for AP m2drop 1 for MSD2 iatvdp 1 32 for IAT m the second menu contains the slot number inside the shelf or subshelf 1 16 for the AP slots 1 24 for the MDS2 slots 1 for the IAT slots m the third menu contains the port number inside the slot 1 32 for the AP ports 1 4 for the MSD2 ports 1 24
55. with the AnyMedia Element Manager Then a TL1 interface see Command and Message Manual is used Firstly the OS is authenticated and authorized via the ACT USER message The AEM opens a dedicated TL1 virtual circuit with every NE included in the domain of the external OS When the connections are open any TL1 command typed by the OS operator will be sent to the proper NE and the responses to these com mands as well as all the available autonomous output messages AO will be routed to the proper OS To close the northbound interface session the external OS uses the CANC USER TL1 message When this message reaches the AEM it logs out the external OS closes all the TCP IP connections which are involved in this northbound interface session both sides northbound to the OS and southbound to the NEs managed by the OS and logs the end of the northbound interface link The OS will be authenticated and authorized by the AEM not by the NE Using this mechanism the OS will only have to send one ACT USER TL1 message which will be spawned by the AEM to all the NEs in the network managed by the OS To do that the AEM will have to maintain some information e g the TIDs and IP ad dresses of all the NEs managed by the OS and a UID PID pair to open a virtual circuit on each NE The AEM operator will be provided with the required set of script tools to maintain this information easily In the same way only one CANC USER message sent by the
56. 0 3 2 3 Input format parameters 0 3 2 4 Output format 0 3 2 5 Output format parameters C 3 2 6 Generic error responses 0 3 3 RTRV ALM ENV Retrieve Alarm Environment C 3 3 1 Purpose C 3 3 2 Input format 0 3 3 3 Input format parameters 0 3 3 4 Output format 0 3 3 5 Output format parameters C 3 3 6 Generic error responses AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 D p ia oo 2 A 2 A 2 A 2 A 63 P a Ko ia H G p a ii 5 a 5 0 5 D 5 ui N oO 06 00 C I SS Contents AEM R1 7 C II Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 Northbound interface C 1 Overview This appendix provides you with information about the m Northbound interface basics and Northbound interface specific TL1 messages C 2 Northbound interface basics C 2 1 Northbound interface description General The AnyMedia Element Manager 24 Channel AEM R1 7 offers to any external OS a straight TL1 connection with the set of NEs in the OS s network Using this link any external OS with access rights to open a northbound interface session can configure test or monitor a set of NEs using a TL1 interface and can receive the responses to the TL1 commands and the autonomous outputs which are gen erated by the NE depending on the northbound interface application type se lected Two types of north The AEM provides two different types of northbound interface applic
57. 1 Default 15 This slider can be used to define the receive gain parameter Possible values 1 1 5 step 0 25 Default 1 Receive Gain Transmit Gain This slider can be used to define the transmit gain parame ter Possible values 1 6 75 step 0 25 Default 1 AEM R1 7 6 62 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 Service provisioning Service provisioning telephony p Se 6 2 4 26 Overview of APs and GSFNs Overview The following table provides an overview of the general service functions and the compatible AP CU GSFN Apparatus codes DFLT 2LS LPA300 LPA350 LPA380 SPQ440C 2GS LPA350 LPA380 SPQ440C 2FX 2FXLS 2RVO 2NOS LPA350 LPA380 ISDN LPU116 COIN LPA350 lines 1 16 only 4DO ROC DATA AUA200 DPX AUA232 EBS SPQ429 SPQ328 AC AUA45B LR AUA75 NO1 NO2 MCU5205 MCU5405 BRI AUA293 ISDN BRITE TO SPQ442 SPQ443 LPA200 DPT SPQ442 SPQ456 LPA200 FXO SPQ442 LPA200 DX4 N R FX S T 1 2 3 5 ETO4 TO4 AUA41B FX O P 1 2 3 5 TD O S A B C D SPQ444 FXS SPQ443 FXSO EMO NE R1 7 0 EM4 C H PLR 1 2 SPQ454 FXOD NE R1 7 0 OCU 1 2 3 SPQ452 SW56 SPQ452 SPQ334 OCUO NE R1 7 0 6 2 4 27 Remove VRT VB logical DSO Sub scriber There are several ways to initiate the deletion of logical DSOs The corresponding button Remove Logical DSO exists in the CU AP and Logical DSO List win dows this button is disabled in CU and AP wind
58. 12 2NOS Service Details window Overview The 2NOS 2 wire transmission only with sealing current is applicable to the PRCOIN LPA350 and PROG2W LPA380 APs 2N0S Service Details Information f ig Figure 6 20 Logical DS0 window 2NOS Service Details Parameters Description Receive TLP This slider can be used to reset a fixed receive gain or loss in RTLP dB Negative values define loss positive values define gain Possible values 8 1 5 step 0 25 Default 8 Transmit TLP This slider can be used to set a fixed transmission gain or TTLP loss in dB Negative values define loss positive values de fine gain Possible values 6 75 4 5 step 0 25 Default 4 5 AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 6 47 Service provisioning Service provisioning telephony p SeSe Service Details Parameters Description Impedance This option menu can be used to define the termination im pedance of the tip ring interface Possible values 600 900 Default 900 Balance Mode This option menu can be used to define whether the AP or CU uses an adaptive hybrid to control the 4 wire to 2 wire balance or a prescription set value Possible values Auto Fixed Default Fixed Balance This slider can be used to establish the prescription balance setting in case BAL1 is Fixed If BAL1 has value Auto this control will be disabled grayed out Possible values 0 31 step 1 Default 0 Equalizat
59. 2 3 5 FX S T 1 2 3 5 EM4 C H PLR 1 2 ETO4 FXO OCU 1 2 3 SW56 TD O SI A B C D TO4 2RVT FXS EMO FXOD FXS0 NO OCUO Unknown Add Logical DS0 This button is available only m if no row in the table is selected and m if a specific VRT VB id has been selected and the max imum number of logical TOs has not been created yet max 96 for TR 08 max 2048 for TR 303 max 24 for INA AEM R1 7 6 32 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 Service provisioning Service provisioning telephony Parameters Buttons Description Logical DSO Edit Logical DSO This button provides access to the Log List ical DSO window to edit the logical DSO parameters when continue ever this is possible gt NOTE This button is disable if GSFN Unknown or 4DO Remove Logical DS0 This button can be used to remove the cross connection selected in the list This button is disabled if Physical DSO id roc 1 or the GSFN 4DO 6 2 4 2 Modify the logical DSO list Procedure Complete the following procedure to modify the logical DSO list Step Procedure 1 Select NE in the Network Element Browser and List gt Logical DSO via the menu bar The Logical DSO List window pops up This window can also be reached from the VRT VB List window cf Chapter 6 2 1 1 page 6 6 and VRT VB windows cf Chapter 6 2 1 3 page 6 8 Chapter 6 2 1 7 page 6 15 2 Use the radio buttons in the Selection C
60. 2211389 67 homelocal dev dsk c0t0d0s5 240399 8597 207763 4 var cache swap 1201856 56 1201800 1 tmp masstc1 export1 b1d 2 b1dr17 51014048 49192112 1481856 98 home bldr17 masstc1 export1 b1d 2 syi_pl 51014048 49192112 1481856 98 home syi_pl Where should Orbix be installed opt lucent OrbixMT_2 3c2 q AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 2 13 Software installation and commissioning Installation procedure ee 12 Type a valid path where the package files must be placed and press Re turn Or press Return to accept the default path Checking your DNS domain name The DNS domain name found was es lucent com What is your DNS domain name default es lucent com q 13 Type your DNS domain name and press Return or press Return to ac cept the default name Select owner and group for package files NBR USER GROUP 1 halt other 2 root other 3 smtp root 4 verl staff Enter selection q 14 Type 4 and press Return User verl and Group staff have been selected Using lt gt as the package base directory Processing package information Processing system information Verifying disk space requirements Checking for conflicts with packages already installed Checking for setuid setgid programs This package contains scripts which will be ex ecuted with super user permission during the process of installing this package Do you want to continue with the installation
61. 24 provisioning model 5 33 Pushbutton 3 13 AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 IN 3 Index Q Quitting the Alarm Viewer 7 11 R Radio button 3 14 Reaction to fault identification 1 27 Recovery 1 27 Refresh workspace menu 3 12 Remote Operations Channel definition A 2_ Remote Operations Channel protocol profiles A 4 Remote Operations Channel protocol A 4 Repetitive Alarm 7 7 Restart Workspace Manager workspace menu 3 12 Restore database 3 38 Restore command 3 40 Return key 3 5 ROC over Semi Permanent Leased Lines DCN A 6 RogueWave Installation 2 12 Router definition A 2_ U SeSe S Safety Classification XVII SCHED EX 7 30 screen navigation equipment configuration 5 33_ Security Id 5 46 Selected Domains 5 36 Semi Permanent Leased Line definition A 2_ Server application Definition 3 16 Server applications start up via a command line 3 18 Shelf protection COMDAC 5 142 IO DS1 5 146 Shelf view 5 48 Shuffle Up Down workspace menu 3 12 Software installation 1 23 download 5 150 upgrade 5 150 Software copy COMDAC 5 158 Sorting Alarms 7 17 Spin box 3 14 I re sreen navigation service provisioning 6 4 Status Bar 5 16 status bar 5 19 Sub NetworkController 5 171 System security 1 30 System Internal Events 1 15 3 46 System management functions 7 18 T Tab 3 14 TAR command 3 41 Target ID 5 37 TCP IP_CON_REFUSED 7 51 Terminating the Alarm Viewer
62. 3 page A 7 A 6 2 4 AEM client configuration The AEM client configuration is the same as described in Chapter A 6 1 4 page A 8 A 6 2 5 Transport elements configuration The ATM switches which will transport the ATM PVCs carrying the IP manage ment traffic need to be provisioned i e a table must be provisioned in these switches saying that the cells from a specific VPI VCI are related to a VPI VCI pair in another interface The ATM router and AnyMedia Access System must be at tached to the ATM network by using DSS3 links for the ATM router other links may also be used e g DS1 STM 1 OC 3 etc If the switch supports directly rfc1483 a direct LAN connection between the switch and the CO LAN environment must be provisioned in this case there is no need of ATM router at the CO side AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 A 11 Data communications network DCN configuration Recommended DCN configurations O see If SDH ADMs are used the paths which carry the ATM information need to be pro visioned A 6 2 6 Connection diagram Configuration of the ATM PVC in the ATM switch i e VPIVCI _ DS3 ATM card AEM server or other interface switching p a Hia ee 2 10BaseT DS3 _ 100BaseT A ATM router optional Chere Transport network optional Ethernet 10BaseT e g two SDH ADMs ina 100BaseT card point to point configuration IP over ATM 10BaseT PVC service 2 100BaseT TCP IP i
63. 3 3 System management System access 3 2 3 AEM Access Bar The AEM access bar allows access to all AEM applications and offers an alarm in dication as well as a help feature a ME Ban agp ae Groups amp NEs Users Admin System Help Management and Profiling Administration Alarms Log Alarm Management Viewer Notification Figure 3 2 AEM access bar Start access bar To start the access bar see Start AEM Access Bar in Chapter 3 2 1 page 3 2 Functions The access bar provides access to the following applications m Groups amp NEs managemen cf Chapter 5 m Alarms Management cf Chapter 7 m Users administration and Profiling cf Chapter 4 m Log Management cf Chapter 3 7 page 3 46 m System Administration cf Chapter 3 4 page 3 16 m Alarm Notification m Help Start applications To start an application click on the respective icon Access Control If an icon of the access bar is grayed you are not allowed to access this applica tion or the application is not running Whether access is granted or denied de pends on your user group membership The Alarm Notification and Help icons are always accessible Alarm notification The Alarm Notification icon displays a flag If new alarms are received the flag is raised and an audible signal is issued The alarm notification can be acknowl edged the flag goes down by clicking on the icon Help icon The Help icon provides access to the AEM online help If
64. 4 Logical DS1 id This field shows the id used to identify the logical feeder Possible values v3fdr 1 1 28 for TR 303 v8fdr 1 20 a b c d for TR 08 ina 1 20 for INA Add Logical DS1 This button provides access to the Logical DS1 window The button is available only if a row in the table is selected and there is no logical DS1 cross connected to this physical DS1 Edit This button is associated with an option menu Possible values Physical DS1 Logical DS1 Physical DS1 is always enabled logical DS1 is enabled only if a cross connection exists between the DS1 ids of the selected row Therefore the Edit button provides access to the Phys ical DS1 window cf Chapter 6 2 3 1 page 6 21 or Logical DS1 window cf Chapter 6 2 3 3 page 6 26 Remove Logical DS1 This button can be used to re move a cross connection from the list The button is enabled only if a row with existing cross connection is selected AEM R1 7 363 211 454 NE management equipment configuration Equipment configuration p Se 5 5 5 2 Configure IO_DS1 Complete the following procedure to modify the IO DS1 data Step Procedure 1 Select NE gt Main Shelf gt FAC100 in the Network Element Browser and View via the cursor menu or select View gt Object via the menu bar or single click on the pack O_DS7 in the Shelf View window The O DST window pops up If you want to then change the required slot s
65. 4 page 7 15 m System management Chapter 7 3 4 page 7 18 m Alarm viewer functions Chapter 7 3 5 page 7 24 7 3 2 Starting and terminating the Alarm Viewer 7 3 2 1 Starting the Alarm Viewer The Alarm Viewer can be started in different ways m Clicking on the icon Alarm Viewer in the Access Bar cf Chapter 3 2 3 m Clicking on Alarms in the menu bar of the other AEM applications cf Chapter 3 3 6 In this case only alarms of the NE which is selected in the Network Browser are shown m Selecting File gt New in the Alarm Viewer The displayed window has the title Alarm Viewer and maintains similarities with the other AEM s windows The Alarm Viewer window consists of the sections m Menu bar File Views Filters Actions Help m Toolbar buttons for Acknowledge Clear Reload and Print m General Information m Alarm table AEM R1 7 7 10 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 Fault management and maintenance Alarm monitoring IT ns y By Ss Figure 7 3 Alarm Viewer window 7 3 2 2 Terminating the Alarm Viewer The Alarm Viewer can be terminated as follows m By selecting File gt Exit in the Alarm Viewer menu to close all Alarm Viewers launched by the user m By clicking on Close button to close only the Alarm Viewer being in use Before quitting the Alarm Viewer the user is prompted for confirmation 7 3 3 Performing Alarm Viewer functions The Alarm Viewer provides different possibilities to perf
66. 4 5 Controlled objects 4 25 4 5 1 Modify controlled objects 4 25 AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 4 I ee Contents AEM R1 7 4 II Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 User management 4 1 Introduction This chapter describes the User Administration and Profiling application of the AnyMedia Element Manager 24 Channel AEM R1 7 It allows to m create modify delete users m assign unassign users to from user groups m create modify delete user groups m assign unassign user groups access to from applications tasks and do mains m create modify delete domains m assign unassign controlled objects to from domains gt NOTE All actions can only be done by the AEM administrator The following figure shows the relation between user user group applications and tasks domains and controlled objects Applications Tasks User User group Domain Controlled objects AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 4 1 User management Introduction mm ee The User Administration and Profiling application is started via the AEM access bar by clicking on the third icon Figure 4 1 Access bar AEM R1 7 4 2 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 User management User 4 2 User 4 2 1 Create user Introduction This chapter describes the process to add a new user to the system Before add ing a new user t
67. 4 5 Help 7 23 7 3 5 Alarm Viewer functions 1 24 74 Test management T25 7 4 1 Telephony tests 7 26 7 4 1 1 Port test 7 26 74 1 1 1 Port test via GUI 7 26 7 4 1 2 AP Card Test 1 28 7 4 1 3 Stand by card test scheduling 730 7 4 1 3 1 Test scheduling via TL1 commands 7 30 7 4 1 4 Built in self test 31 7 4 1 5 Loopback test on the feeder side 731 7 4 2 Data tests 1 33 7 4 2 1 ADSL test list 233 7 4 2 2 ADSL corrupted CRC test 7 35 7 4 2 3 ADSL port BIST test Tar 7 5 Alarms 7 39 7 5 1 Overview 738 7 5 2 Alarm types 1 39 7 5 3 Network element alarms 7 41 7 5 4 General element manager platform alarms 7 41 7 5 4 1 LOG_DEL_FULL 7 41 7 5 4 2 LOG_DEL_PART 7 42 7 5 4 3 PRINT_ALARM 7 42 7 5 5 Element manager alarms concerning network element 7 43 7 5 5 1 ALARM_AO_NOT_PROCESS 7 43 7 5 5 2 ALARM_EVENT_NOT_PROCESS 7 44 7 5 5 3 COMM_DENIED 7 44 7 5 5 4 COMMUNICATION_LOST 7 45 7 5 5 5 COMM_PROBLEM 7 45 7 5 5 6 COMM_RES_NOT_AVAILABLE 7 46 7 5 5 7 CONFIG_AO_NOT_PROCESS 7 46 7 5 5 8 CONFIG_EVENT_NOT_PROCESS 7 47 AEM R1 7 1 7 II Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 N Tee Contents 7 5 5 9 CX_CONN_NOT_VISIBLE 7 48 7 5 5 10 INVALID _MIB_IDENTIFIER 7 48 75 5 11 NB ASSOC_FAILED 7 49 7 5 5 12 NB ASSOC_LOST 7 49 7 5 5 13 SW_VR_ILLEGAL 7 50 7 5 5 14 TCP_IP_CON_ REFUSED 7 51 7 5 5 15 TL1_COMM_DENIED 7 52 75 55 16 UNABLE_TO_SYNC_ALARM 7 52 7 5 5 17 UNABLE_TO_SYNC_CONFIG 7 53 7 5 5 18 UPLOAD PROBLEM 7 54 7 5 6 Correlated alarms 7 55 AEM R1 7 1 363 21
68. 4 Remove AnyMedia package installa tions In order to remove any AnyMedia package installations the administrator must ex ecute the script remove_ANY This script works exactly the same way than the in stallation one and allows to remove full or partial installations and individual pack ages also It will ask confirmation for every package to be removed When a package is removed all files installed by it or created during the AnyMedia operation such as data bases and temporal data files are erased in the target system 2 2 5 PC GUI client installation This type of installation uses the install_AMEM bat script This script and all necessary files are included on Disk 4 of 4 m readme txt m licence txt m install_ AMEM bat m anymediaemr17 zip m jre 1_2 2 005 win i m cc32d473 Please read the readme ixt file first and then follow the given instructions AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 2 73 Software installation and commissioning Installation procedure Procedure OrbixWeb proper ties AEM users file 2 74 Version 1 00 gt NOTE In order to establish a communication it is necessary that the PC users and the server user are the same with the same login PC GUI R1 7 is distributed on a compressed file named anymediaemr17 zip This section contains instructions for installing the software once this file is in your sys tem 1 Change to the appropriate directory on the CD ROM 2 Install jre by
69. 5 1 _SP2 Run Time have been found in opt lucent OS51_SP2 AEM R1 7 2 54 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 Software installation and commissioning Installation procedure Object Store path set to LuOSRT ObjectStore Release 5 1 Service Pack 3 5 1_SP2 Run Time bin lib osversion Creating data bases You have the installation logfile in tmp EM_Install_LuAMBB112 1log Installation of lt LuAMBB112 gt was successful The package lt LuAMBB112 gt is not installed in the system Please try install_AMEM again and install the package lt LUAMBB112 gt to complete the installation gt NOTE The last message is an error and can be ignored 2 2 1 1 5 Installation of the data R1 4 agent optional Complete the following procedure to install the data R1 4 agent Step Procedure 1 Go to the directory where the installation script is placed CD ROM 3 of 4 2 Type install_AMEM bb and press Return AnyMedia EM R1 7 installation CopyRight c 2000 Lucent Technologies Inc All Rights Reserved Pre requisites 1 Before attempting to install the application please read the readme txt file 2 AnyMedia EM R1 7 runs on SUN SPARC Solaris 2 computers running Solaris 2 6 plus security and Y2000 and packs 105490 07 AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 2 55 Software installation and commissioning Installation procedure p Se 105568 13 105210 19 106040 12 105633 21 106409 01 1
70. 5 156 5 5 13 COMDAC program copy 5 158 5 5 14 AFM program copy and validation 5 160 5 5 15 Nonvolatile data storage NVDS 5 162 AEM R1 7 5 IV Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 o S Contents 5 5 15 1 Data backup telephony agent 5 5 15 2 Data backup data agent 5 5 15 3 Data restore telephony agent 5 5 15 4 Data restore data agent 5 5 15 5 File Browser window 5 5 16 TL1 cut through telephony agent 5 5 17 Fiber Reach 5 5 17 1 Start a Fiber Reach session 5 5 17 2 Add a host 5 5 17 3 Delete a host 5 5 18 Delete network element AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 5 V ee Contents AEM R1 7 5 VI Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 NE management equipment configuration 5 1 Overview This chapter describes the Groups and NEs Management application of the AnyMedia Element Manager 24 Channel AEM R1 7 It addresses the follow ing topics m Overview of the controlled AnyMedia Access System Explanation of menu bar Network Browser and Network Element Browser m Map handling m Screen navigation m NE management m Equipment configuration 5 2 Overview of the controlled systems This section provides a short overview of the controlled AnyMedia Access Sys tems For more information please refer to the network element documentation for m Telephony 24 channe narrowband releases R1 2 1 R1 2 2 and R1 7 0 m Data broadband releases R1 1 2 and R1 4 AnyMedia Main The AEM R1 7 is able t
71. 5 17 5 3 3 Background Map 5 18 5 3 4 Status bar 5 19 5 3 5 Cursor menu 5 20 5 4 Groups and NEs management 523 5 4 1 Groups management 5 23 5 4 2 NEs management 526 5 4 3 Groups and NEs window 5 27 5 5 Equipment configuration 5 33 5 5 1 Add a network element 5 35 5 5 2 Connection states AEM telephony agent 5 38 5 5 3 Communication states AEM data agent 5 42 5 5 4 Shelf View 5 48 5 5 5 Configuration of the packs 5 54 5 5 6 Network element synchronization 5 122 5 5 7 Date amp Time Telephony window 5 133 5 5 8 Date amp Time Data window 5 135 5 5 9 Network element working mode 5 139 AEM R1 7 VI Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 Contents 5 5 10 Simplex COMDAC protection scheme 5 140 5 5 11 Equipment protection switching 5 142 5 5 12 Network element software upgrade 5 150_ 5 5 13 COMDAC program copy 5 158 5 5 14 AFM program copy and validation 5 160 5 5 15 Nonvolatile data storage NVDS 5 162 5 5 16 TL1 cut through telephony agent 5 169 5 5 17 Fiber Reach 5 171 5 5 18 Delete network element 5 173 es 6 Service provisioning 6 1 6 1 Introduction 6 1 6 2 Service provisioning telephony 6 1 6 2 1 Network interface 6 6 6 2 2 Physical DS1 List window 6 17 6 2 3 Creation of VRT VB logical feeder T1 cross connection 6 20 6 2 4 Creation of VRT VB logical TO subscriber 6 30 6 3 Service provisioning data 6 65 6 3 1 ATM Cross Connections List window 6 65 6 3 2 ATM Cross Connections window 6 68_ 6 3 3 Add an ATM cross conn
72. 5 3 2 2 Network browser Network Element Browser 5 3 3 Background Map 5 3 4 Status bar 5 3 5 Cursor menu 5 3 5 1 Cursor menus entries 5 3 5 1 1 Network Browser 5 3 5 1 2 Network Element Browser 5 4 Groups and NEs management 5 4 1 Groups management 5 4 2 NEs management 5 4 3 Groups and NEs window 5 4 3 1 5 4 3 2 5 4 3 3 5 4 3 4 5 4 3 5 5 4 3 6 Groups window Create modify groups Delete a group NEs window Create modify NEs Remove an NE 5 5 Equipment configuration 5 5 1 Add a network element 5 5 2 Connection states AEM telephony agent 5 5 2 1 5 5 2 2 5 5 2 3 5 5 2 4 Changing connection states Association maintenance NE Management window tab Telephony Modify NE Management data telephony agent 5 5 3 Communication states AEM data agent 5 5 3 1 5 5 3 2 5 5 3 3 5 5 3 4 Changing connection states Association maintenance NE Management window tab Data Modify NE Management data data agent 5 5 4 Shelf View 5 5 4 1 5 5 4 2 BAIU Shelf View window MDS2 MDS2B Shelf View window 5 5 5 Configuration of the packs 5 5 5 1 5 II Version 1 00 06 00 IO DS1 window AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Contents 5 5 5 2 Configure IO_DS1 5 57_ 5 5 5 3 View the COMDAC parameters 559 5 5 5 4 View the CTU parameters 5 61 5 5 5 5 Common Application Pack window 563 5 5 5 6 Provisioning a slot via common AP 5 65 5 5 5 7 Telephony Application Pack window 5 66_ 5 5 5 8 Modify a telephony AP 569
73. 5 5 5 9 MSC window 5 71 5 5 5 10 Modify an MSC 5 72 5 5 5 11 PTU Window 5 73 5 5 5 12 Configure a PTU 5 74 5 5 5 13 Channel Unit Window 5 45 5 5 5 14 Modify a CU 5 78 5 5 5 15 MDSU window 5 80 5 5 5 16 Modify an MDSU 5 82 5 5 5 17 IAT Server window NE R1 7 5 83 5 5 5 18 Modify an IAT Server 555 5 5 5 19 IAT Subshelf window NE R1 7 5 87 5 5 5 20 Modify an IAT subshelf 5 89 5 5 5 21 IAT Server Port Information window NE R1 7 5 92 5 5 5 22 Configure an IAT server port 5 93 5 5 5 23 AFM window data application 5 94 5 5 5 24 Modify an AFM data application oor 5 5 5 25 AFM Feeder window data application 5 99 5 5 5 26 Modify an AFM feeder data application 5101 5 5 5 27 AFM Feeder PM Threshold window data application 5 102 5 5 5 28 Define AFM Feeder PM thresholds data application 5 103 5 5 5 29 ADSL Application Pack window data application 5 104 5 5 5 30 Modify an ADSL pack data application 5 107 5 5 5 31 ADSL Drop window data application 5 109 5 5 5 32 Modify an ADSL drop data application 5 112 5 5 5 33 Transmission Profile window data application 5 114 5 5 5 34 Modify the ADSL transmission profile data application 5 118 5 5 5 35 Threshold Profile window data application 5 119 5 5 5 36 Modify the ADSL threshold profile data application 5 121 5 5 6 Network element synchronization 5 122 AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 5 III ee Contents 5 5 6 1 Telephony agent 5 122 5 5 6 1 1 Configuration in
74. 6 3 2 page 6 68 3 Use the option menus Physical Drop Id to select the ADSL drop in which you want to create a new ATM cross connection If the ATM Cross Connection window has been launched in another way see above a ADSL Drop is already selected The list ATM Cross Connection Information displays all cross connec tions for the selected ADSL drop If you want to then add a VP cross connection define the Feeder VPI and the Drop VPI in the field New Cross Connec tion change the administrative state to Un locked if required and click on Apply add a VC cross connection define the Feeder VPI Feeder VCI Drop VPI and Drop VCI in the field New Cross Connection change the administrative state to Un locked if required and click on Apply 4 Click on Close to exit the window AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 6 71 Service provisioning Service provisioning data mm ee 6 3 4 Modify an ATM cross connection Procedure Complete the following procedure to modify an ATM cross connection Step Procedure 1 Select NE in the Network Element Browser and List gt ATM Cross Con nections via the cursor menu The ATM Cross Connection List window pops up cf Chapter 6 3 1 page 6 65 2 Use the radio buttons and the related option menus to select the filter for the display of the cross connection table 3 Click on the cross connection to be changed and press Edit The ATM Cross Connection windo
75. 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 3 7 System management General information on keyboard mm ee Figure 3 4 Controls in a window Window part Function Horizontal scroll Use the horizontal scroll bar and the slider to shift the visible window section to the bar left or right m Small step to the left or right Click on the left or right scroll bar arrow m Page left or right Click on the scroll bar to the left or right of the slider m Shift window section Use the mouse and drag the slider horizontally until the desired window section becomes visible Vertical scroll bar Use the vertical scroll bar to shift the currently visible window section up or down m Small step up or down Click on the top or bottom scroll bar arrow m Page up or down Click on the scroll bar section above or below the slider m Shift window section Use the mouse and drag the slider up or down until the desired window section becomes visible Maximize button Activate the maximize button by clicking on it to show the window at its maximum size i e the window will occupy the whole screen If you click again on the maximize button thus activated the window will be restored to its original size Menu bar The menu bar contains the menu names each of them containing options related to the topic These options may be selected to control the process running in this win dow cf Chapter 3 3 6 page 3 10 Tool bar The tool bar contains ic
76. 7 11 Testroutines Access tothe 7 25 AP card test 7 28 AP card test result 7 29 Built in self test 7 31 Loopback test 7 31 Port test 7 26 Port test result 7 27 Result of standby card test scheduling 7 31 Standby card test scheduling 7 30 Text box 3 14 timing source 5 128 timing source control primary source 5 130 secondary source 5 130 timing sync mode 5 129 TL1 messages Path through interface C 3_ TL1_COMM_DENIED 7 44 7 46 7 52 tool bar 5 17 Trademarks XIV Typographical conventions XV U UNABLE_TO_SYNC_ALARM 7 52 UNABLE_TO_SYNC_CONFIG 7 53 7 54 Unassign controlled objects from domains 4 12 user groups access from applications 4 22 user groups access from domains 4 21 user groups access from tasks 4 23 users from user groups 4 6 AEM R1 7 IN 4 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 Index User Create 4 3 Delete 4 7 Modify 4 5 User administration 4 1 User group Create 4 14 Delete 4 23 Modify 4 19 E Ww Window controls 3 6 3 7 maximize button 3 8 menu bar 3 8 minimize button 3 7 scrollbar 3 8 title bar 3 7 window frame 3 7 window menu 3 8 Window controls AEM NB windows 3 12 Window menu 3 9 Close 3 9 Lower 3 9 Maximize 3 9 Minimize 3 9 Move 3 9 Restore 3 9 Size 3 9 Windows basics 3 6 Workspace manager 3 11 Workspace menu 3 11 Log out 3 12 Minimize Restore Front Panel 3 12 Programs 3 12 Refresh 3 12 Restart Workspace Manager 3 12 Shuffle Up
77. AEM does not match the alarm data of the data agent Possible cause s Alarm buffer overflow Corrective actions Proceed as follows to clear the alarm Step Procedure 1 Perform a manual alarm synchronization process to upload the alarm data and to start processing traps 2 Is the alarm now cleared Yes O K No Call Lucent Technologies Technical Support 7 3 3 3 COMM_DENIED Meaning An unsuccessful reply has been detected when the AEM sends the request to es tablish a connection with the telephony agent Abbreviation COMM_DENIED Severity Critical Service affecting No The alarm will be cleared when the connection between the AEM and the teleph ony agent has been successfully established Effects It is not possible to manage the telephony agent Possible cause s The AEM is trying to establish the connection with an agent while its COMDAC in itialization process is in progress AEM R1 7 7 44 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 Fault management and maintenance Alarms a Voss Corrective actions Proceed as follows to clear the alarm Step Procedure 1 Check if the COMDAC is in the initialization process and wait until this process is finished 7 5 5 4 COMMUNICATION_LOST Meaning Communication with data agent lost Abbreviation COMMUNICATION_LOST Severity Critical Service affecting No Effects It is not possible to manage the data agent Possible cause s Heart beat messages are not responded to by the
78. AEMR1 7 distribution tree which consist in directories with the installation remove scripts plus the installation and licensing documents Subdirectories named AnyMediaEMR1 7 contains the software which is divided in several packages A package contains a collection of files and directories required for the application and scripts to control how where and if the package is installed These were built using the application packaging tools offered by Solaris refer to your SUN documentation for more information AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 2 3 Software installation and commissioning General ee AnyMedia Element Manager 24 Channel AEM Release 1 7 Disk 1 of 4 contains the common part of the AEM product Source Path __ tmp lucent AnyMediaEMR1 7 I readme txt LuACROBAT LuGUI24 LuANYHL I install_Acrobat LuJRERT I INSTALLATION pdf I LuNETSCP SRD pdf LuOXWRT I install AMEM_ gen H LuNER remove_ANY LuSysAdm t LuAM r LuNBI LuBack LuLogg LuSec LuNeED LuSysED LuFiBtarow LuShelf r LuTrap m LuPerfCo m LuPerTr LuTeSc LuLUMRT LuOSRT LuOX23RT LuOXNSRT LuRWRT I license txt Sun 2 6 README 15jun00 2 6 _Recommended tar Z 1 2 2_05 patches_sparc_5 6 tar Figure 2 1 AEM R1 7 distribution tree CD ROM 1 AnyMedia Element Manager 24 Channel AEM Release 1 7 Disk
79. AnyMediaEM_R1 7 Package lt LuLogg gt Loggin LuLogg_36_1 1 have been found in opt lucent AnyMediaEM_R1 7 OK No previous package LuPerf have been found Using lt gt as the package base directory Processing package information Processing system information 1 package pathname is already properly installed Verifying disk space requirements Checking for conflicts with packages already installed Checking for setuid setgid programs AEM R1 7 2 36 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 Software installation and commissioning Installation procedure p ee Installing AnyMedia Element Manager Performace Release 1 7 Administration as lt LuPerf gt Installing part 1 of 1 opt lucent AnyMediaEM_R1 7 Logging Performance bin LogWriter lt symbolic link gt opt lucent AnyMediaEM_R1 7 LoggingPerformance cfg Logging cfg verifying class lt common gt Installation of lt LuPerf gt was successful Performance Moni Processing package instance lt LuPerCo gt from toring installation lt homelocal tmp lucent AnyMediaEMR1 7 gt AnyMedia Element Manager Performan Monitorin Release 1 7 Administration sparc LuPerCo_36_1 1 kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk AnyMedia Element Manager c 1999 Lucent Technologies kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Package lt LuSysAdm gt SystemAdmin LuSysAdm_36_1 1 have been found in opt lucent AnyMediaEM_R1 7
80. Copy gt Data A submenu option again may offer a submenu then an appropri ate number of gt is added 3 3 7 Cursor menu Menu at the cursor Some objects in windows have a menu associated with them This menu will pop position up at the cursor position when the right mouse button is pressed The cursor must not however be positioned on a menu bar or a window frame The cursor menu is not available in all windows The functions which can be executed using this cur sor menu depend on the application of the respective window Select menu Proceed as follows to select a menu option from the cursor menu option Step Procedure 1 Press the right mouse button 2 Move the cursor onto the desired menu option 3 Click the left or right mouse button to execute the menu option or if you do not wish to execute a menu option move the cursor away from the menu and click somewhere outside the menu AEM R1 7 3 10 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 System management General information on keyboard see rn 3 3 8 Workspace manager General After logging in to the operation system SUN Solaris the workspace manager window is situated at the bottom of the screen offering a range of functions and in formation A function is initiated by clicking the respective area of the workspace manager In Figure 3 6 only an example of the workspace manager is given as the entries are configurable Personal Applications Lock Screen Log Out
81. Down 3 12 AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 IN 5 Index AEM R1 7 IN 6 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454
82. Drop Id ATM Cross Connections In formation Description The ADSL drop id is shown by means of three option menus m The first one contains the drop shelf Format drop 1 or subdrop 1 8 None is also allowed m The second one contains the slot number inside the NE but only for slots in which an ADSL pack is provi sioned Format 1 16 for main shelf or 1 8 for subshelf None is also allowed m The third one contains the drop number inside the slot indicated in the previous list 1 x Format drop shelf slot port Possible values drop 1 1 16 1 x depending on the ADSL type x can be 4 or 8 These option menus show the drop selected in the previous window The option menus can also be used to select an other drop This list shows the cross connection parameters The number of displayed cross connections depends on the se lected filter see option menus above Feeder Id Shows the feeder involved in the ATM cross con nection Feeder VPI Shows the VPI used to create the cross con nection on the feeder side Feeder VCI Shows the VCI used to create the cross con nection on the feeder side This field is empty if the row represents a VP cross connection Physical Drop Id Indicates the physical drop used to create the cross connection on the feeder side It will be the drop selected in this window Drop VPI Shows the VPI used to create the cross connec tion on the drop side Drop VCI Sho
83. For more information about possible alarms see Chapter 7 5 4 page 7 41 describes AEM alarms or refer to the network elements documentation describes NE alarms 7 4 1 5 Loopback test on the feeder side It is possible to set or clear a loopback on particular feeders gt NOTE Executing a loopback test on an E1 feeder which is used for managing the NE ROC over PLL results in loss of the management connection The connection can be re established only via GSI using the serial line of the CIU connector TL1 command RLS LPBK E1 e1 1 1 4 1 4 where e1 1 1 4 1 4 has to be replaced by the corresponding feeder id To avoid the loss of the management connection please make sure that the feeder you intend to test is not the feeder of the management interface Use the TL1 command RTRV ROC AID via GSI or the cut through con nection from the AEM to find out if the feeder is associated to the leased line roc interface AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 7 31 Fault management and maintenance Test management p SSe Procedure Proceed as follows to set clear a DS1 loopback Step Procedure 1 Open one of the following windows m AT Server Port Information window cf Chapter 5 5 5 21 m Physical DS1 window cf Chapter 6 2 3 1 2 Select the physical feeder where you intend the test to run 3 Click on Set Clear to change the loopback state If the loopback setting is service affecting a Warning
84. Network Modification m Performance Monitoring Required The administrator rights are sufficient to perform all required operations The vi rights sual check of parameters and displays on the GUI requires monitoring rights only 1 4 3 1 Fault management Alarm types There are two alarm types alarms generated by the NEs and alarms generated by the AEM itself e g an alarm indicating that log files without archiving is being removed LOG_DEL_FULL All alarms are displayed in the alarm viewer It al lows the network operator to detect the alarm and to locate its source General fault Figure 1 8 page 1 26 shows the general fault handling In the following the indi handling vidual phases are described in more detail AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 1 25 Functional description Working with AEM ee Fault localisation and diagnosis Identification of the alarm source e Identification of the fault source Fault identification e Detection of faults e Alarm display on the user interface Alarm logs Fault clearance e Recovery mechanisms Interactions between operator and AEM e Initiation of maintenance actions GG GY G Figure 1 8 General fault handling 1 4 3 1 1 Fault identification Background The AEM gathers information about faults occurring in the network and forwards this information to the network operator This procedure comprises two tasks on the one hand the f
85. OS to the AEM will be enough to close all the virtual circuits with the NEs and the northbound inter face session For the routing of the TL1 messages the NEs TID is used and from every NE configuration table the corresponding IP address is determinated Incoming mes sages that have no TID field empty are sent to all connected NEs In case the OS will send a TL1 request message the OS has to support as many completion responses as NEs are connected Messages coming from the NEs responses and autonomous output are queued until they are complete i e re ceived and then sent to the northbound OS There are no guarantees about the order in which responses are sent to the OS AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Northbound interface Northbound interface specific TL1 messages TL1 cf Command and Message Manual TCP Authorization Authentication Info TL1 R1 0 R1 1 R1 7 TCP IP H H ul NEs The light grey NEs can not be accessed by the external OS Figure C 1 Northbound interface The number of concurrent northbound interface sessions supported by a single NE will depend on the number of available virtual circuits on the NE The AEM will provide the independence of the northbound interface sessions and the AEM GUI interface so an operator using
86. Password in the Provisioning Information field and press Provision deprovision an provisioned NE click on Deprovision in the Provision ing Information field change the administrative state use the corresponding option menu in the Operational State field show edit the synchronization data click on More Details exit the window click on Close 5 5 3 Communication states AEM data agent There are three general AEM data agent communication states Communication Stopped Initial communication state when there is no communication between AEM and the data agent Communication Trying The AEM is in an active state trying to start the communication with the data agent Communication Established The AEM and the data agent are able to communicate with each other The three described states can be divided in six AEM data agent communication states as follows AEM R1 7 5 42 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 NE management equipment configuration Equipment configuration p e COMM_STOPPED Initial connection state when there is no connection between AEM and the data agent and the AEM is in a passive state avoiding any possibility of communication establishment with the data agent COMM_TRYING The AEM is in an active state trying to start a communication with the data agent by sending SNMP PDUs COMM_TRYING_PROBLEM_DETECTED The AEM has detected a failure in the communication process COMM
87. Procedure 1 Select NE gt Main Shelf gt CTU in the Network Element Browser and Edit via the cursor menu or select View gt Object via the menu bar or single click on the pack CTU in Shelf View window The CTU window pops up Figure 5 23 CTU window This corresponding window contains all information related to the CTU It can be displayed even when the pack is not plugged in The following table shows the view edit options of the CTU window Parameters Buttons Description NE Name NE name of the selected NE max 30 characters AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 5 61 NE management equipment configuration Equipment configuration p See Parameters Buttons Description Inventory Infor mation The read only text fields provide the following information Card Type 11 character mnemonic used to identify the gen eral type of function provided Possible value CTU Serial Number 12 character alphanumeric code that in cludes the date and place of manufacture Apparatus Code Specifies the function of the pack Possi ble value DTP101 ICC InterChangeability Code Indicates the interchange ability among packs to specify forward backward compatibil ity Format of the ICC is m n where m is the issue number and n the Series Number CLEI Code assigned by Bellcore that provides information about the functionality of the pack ECI Code that corresponds to the bar coded label on the fa
88. System responses and inputs for this type of installation and for a full installation are similar Only the following differences could be found m When an installation starts the package checks if a previous installation of the package already exists in the system If no previous package is found the following message will appear OK No previous package lt Package_Name gt have been found gt NOTE Refer to Type 1 and press Return on page 9 to see this response If one of the following messages appears the installation will stop without changes on the system m The following message appears if there is a previous package in the sys tem that was completely installed and has the same version Previous completely installed package lt Package_Name gt version lt Package_Version gt have been found And it is the same to the new one you want to install lt Package_Version gt AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 2 71 Software installation and commissioning Installation procedure p Se m The following message appears if there is a previous package in the sys tem that was partially installed and has the same version Previous partially installed package lt Package_Name gt version lt Package_Version gt have been found And it is the same to the new one you want to install lt Package_Version gt But it is partially installed Better to use pkgrm lt Package_Version gt and installed it again
89. The APs provide the line side interface functionality that provide service to end users Figure 5 25 Telephony Application Pack window This window contain all information related to the AP It can be displayed even when the pack is not inserted The displayed information differs depending on the type of service The following table shows the view edit options of the Telephony Application Pack window Parameters Buttons Description NE Name NE Name of the selected NE max 30 characters Slot Id This text field shows the slot being used as telephony AP Possible values ap 1 1 16 subap 1 1 8 AEM R1 7 5 66 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 NE management equipment configuration Equipment configuration p Se Parameters Buttons Description Inventory Infor The following fields will be empty if no pack is provisioned mation Otherwise the read only text fields provide the following in formation Card Type 11 character mnemonic used to identify the gen eral type of function provided Possible values cf Table 5 1 page 5 78 Serial Number 12 character alphanumeric code that in cludes the date and place of manufacture Apparatus Code Specifies the function of the pack Possible values LPA380 LPA380C LPA300 LPA350 LPU116 ICC InterChangeability Code Indicates the interchangea bility among packs to specify forward backward compatibility Format of the ICC is m n where m is the issue n
90. This slider can be used to define the receive attenuator pa ator rameter Possible values 0 16 5 step 0 1 Default 16 5 Transmit Atten This slider can be used to define the transmit attenuator pa uator rameter Possible values 0 16 5 step 0 1 Default 16 5 6 2 4 19 FXO Service Details window Overview The FXO foreign exchange office function is used for a non locally or locally switched loop or ground start application It is applicable to the SPQ442 channel unit XO Service Details Information Figure 6 27 Logical DSO window FXO AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 6 55 Service provisioning p See 6 56 Version 1 00 Service Details Parameters Trunk Condition Service provisioning telephony Description This option menu can be used to determine whether the AP or CU sets the signaling state toward the CO to the Idle state Busy or the DSO remote alarm indication Rai code during a fault condition Default Idle Impedance The transmit and receive impedance parameter selects the termination impedance of the channel unit Possible values 600 900 Default 600 Loop Start This option menu can be used to define whether loop start or Ground Start On Hook Trans mission Toll Diversion ground start is used Possible values LS GS Default GS When a check mark is set the channel unit is configured for full time on hook transmission Possible values Set Not s
91. agent alarms If NE alarm and or environment alarm reports are inhibited the AEM database is only a snapshot of telephony agent alarm information at a certain moment in time m BLOCK The AEM alarm database and the current telephony agent alarms are out of synchronization due to alarm buffer overflow The AEM alarm da tabase is only a snapshot of telephony agent alarm information at a certain moment in time For more information refer to the NE documentation for the NE releases AEM R1 7 5 122 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 NE management equipment configuration Equipment configuration p SSe 5 5 6 1 3 Synchronization Telephony window Figure 5 40 Synchronization Telephony window The following table shows the view edit options of this window Parameters Buttons Description NE Name NE name of the selected NE max 30 characters Configuration The Processing State represents the synchronization state between the AEM and NE This information is automatically updated Possible values SYNC and ASYNC The Label button Resync or Sync is used to change the synchronization state The Processing State represents the alarm processing state between the AEM and NE This information is automat ically updated Possible values PROC and BLOCK The Resync button is used to re synchronize the alarm pro cessing state Alarms AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 5 123 NE management equipment configurati
92. all defined group names of the system One of them must be selected to ena ble the creation of a subordinate group Group Background Map This text field is used to enter the path to Representation the map related to the group Browse This button is used to open the File Browser win dow in order to select the background map Group Icon This text field is used to enter the path to the icon related to the group Browse This button is used to open the File Browser win dow in order to select the icon X Coord This text field is used to set the x coordinate to lo cate the icon on the background map of the parent group Y Coord This text field is used to set the y coordinate to lo cate the icon on the background map of the parent group Apply This button is used to confirm the changes The button is available only if the Group Name is present AEM R1 7 5 28 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 NE management equipment configuration Groups and NEs management a Se 5 4 3 2 Create modify groups Complete the following procedure to create modify a group Step Procedure 1 Select the group in the Network Browser or in the background map and New or Edit via the cursor menu or select File gt New or View gt Object via the menu bar or click on the open icon in the tool bar The Groups amp NEs window tab Groups pops up cf Figure 5 4 3 page 5 27 If you want to then edit the parameter
93. and press Return Here is a list of your partitions and the free space in each of them Filesystem kbytes used avail capacity Mounted on dev dsk c0t0d0s0 143927 36997 92538 29 dev dsk c0t0d0s4 625262 401583 167406 71 usr dev dsk c0t0d0s3 96455 11928 74882 14 var dev dsk c0t0d0s6 6591133 3366955 3158267 52 homelocal dev dsk c0t0d0s5 240399 8597 207763 4 var cache swap 1194560 8600 1185960 1 tmp masstc1 export1 b1d 2 b1dr17 51014048 44384096 6289872 88 home bldr17 masstcl export1 bld 2 syi_pl 51014048 44384096 6289872 88 home syi_pl Enter install directory opt lucent JDK_1 2 2_05 q 6 Type a valid path where the package files must be placed and press Re turn Or press Return to accept the default path Select owner and group for package files NBR USER GROUP 1 halt other AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 2 61 Software installation and commissioning Installation procedure p See 2 root other 3 smtp root 4 verl staff Enter selection q 7 Type 4 and press Return User verl and Group staff have been selected Using lt gt as the package base directory Processing package information Processing system information Verifying disk space requirements Checking for conflicts with packages already installed Checking for setuid setgid programs This package contains scripts which will be ex ecuted with super user permission during the process of installin
94. been found in opt lucent AnyMediaEM_R1 7 Package lt LuNBI gt NorthBound LuNBI_36_1 1 have been found in opt lucent AnyMediaEM_R1 7 AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 2 49 Software installation and commissioning Installation procedure p Se Package lt LUNER gt NER LuNER_36_1 1 have been found in opt lucent AnyMediaEM_R1 7 Package lt LuNeED gt NetEvenDist LuNeED_36_1 1 have been found in opt lucent AnyMediaEM_R1 7 Package lt LuSec gt Security LuSec_36_1 1 have been found in opt lucent AnyMediaEM_R1 7 Package lt LuShelf gt ConbinedShelf LuShelf_36_1 1 have been found in opt lucent AnyMediaEM_R1 7 Package lt LuSysED gt SystemEventDist LuSysED_36_1 1 have been found in opt lucent AnyMediaEM _R1 7 Package lt LuLUMRT gt Lumos Build 3 0 run time have been found in opt lucent LUMOS OK No previous package LUuAMNB17 have been found Using lt gt as the package base directory Processing package information Processing system information Verifying disk space requirements WARNING The filesystem has 185076 free blocks The current installation requires 378210 blocks which includes a required 150 block buffer for open deleted files 193134 more blocks are needed Do you want to continue with the installation of lt LUAMNB17 gt y n 5 Type Y and press Return Checking for conflicts with packages already installed Checking for setuid setgid prograns This package
95. circuit pack which provides the line side interface functionality for POTS SPOTS ISDN or special service circuits Each AP handles 24 or 32 lines POTS SPOTS COIN and special services or 16 lines ISDN There can be up to 16 APs in an AnyMedia Access System shelf Archive Process of copying file systems to removable media such as tape and deleting the original files once they have been backed up AUDIT Trail A subset of all log messages A record showing who has accessed an Anymedia EM and what operation was per formed during a given period of time AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 GL 1 Glossary ee B b wire One of the wires of the subscriber line Sometimes it is called the ring wire Backup Process of copying file systems to removable media such as tape to safeguard against loss damage or corrup tion BB Broad Band Blinking Alarm An alarm which is continuously changing its status raised clear raised clear Bridge A network layer device that passes packets between two or more network segments that use the same data link communications protocol OSI layer 2 The network segments appear as one segment to protocol levels higher than the data link layer The bridge recognizes with the help of the MAC address which LAN component is con nected at which port of the bridge Data packets are only transferred over the bridge if the participant is at another port of the bridge With a bridge data tra
96. commissioning Installation procedure p Se If you choose not to make these links then you will have to instruct all ObjectStore users to add opt lucent OS51_SP2 ostore lib to their LD_LIBRARY_PATH environment variable Warning ObjectStore libraries already exist in usr lib If you choose not to make links in usr lib for the new libraries ObjectStore users may incorrectly link with old libraries Do you want to create links to ObjectStore li braries in usr lib yes 6 Press Return You have configured this machine to run an Ob jectStore server The server s transaction log is in opt lucent transaction log Do you want to proceed yes 7 Press Return Writing configuration files and initializing the server please wait 000529 170809 ObjectStore Release 5 1 Service Pack 2 Database Server The ObjectStore server is running ObjectStore includes a server daemon which must be running for any application to access an ObjectStore database It is recommended that you auto start the daemon via commands in your operating system startup scripts If you do not configure automatic startup you will have to start the server daemon by hand or re run this utility to configure auto start What you like to configure automatic server startup and shutdown yes 8 Press Return Successfully created etc rc2 d S80ostore4 AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 2 23 Software installation and commissioni
97. conditions The 40 charac ters include a pair of escaped quotes AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 C 19 Northbound interface Northbound interface specific TL1 messages ee C 3 3 6 Generic error responses Code Definition Reason for code cLos NE Connection Not Available Connection with the lt NE TID gt is not available IITA Input Invalid Target Identifier TID does not match with SID has unallowed characters or string is too long IICT Input Invalid Correlation Tag Incorrect CTAG ICNV Input Command Not Valid The command verb or a modifier is invalid not recogniz able by the system PICC Privilege Illegal Command Code Command not supported at this interface a only available via AEM AEM R1 7 C 20 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 ee Abbreviations A ACO Alarm Cut off ADSL Asymmetrical Digital Subscriber Line AEM AnyMedia Access System Element Manager AFM Access Feeder Multiplexer AID Access Identifier AMAS AnyMedia Access System ANR Abnormal ANSI American National Standards Institute AO Autonomous Output Message AP Application Pack APOG Applications Planning and Ordering Guide ASCII American Standard Code for Information Interchange ATM Asynchronous Transfer Mode ATU Alarm and Test Unit AUTO Automatic LU SeSe B BAL Balance AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 AB 1 Abbreviations EEE ee BB B
98. configuration Equipment configuration 5 5 5 3 View the COMDAC parameters Overview The COMDAC common data and control pack performs the main bandwidth management and control functions for the system Procedure Complete the following procedure to view the COMDAC data Step Procedure 1 Select NE gt Main Shelf gt COM100 or COM101 in the Network Ele ment Browser and Edit via the cursor menu or select View gt Object via the menu bar or single click on the pack COMDAC in Shelf View window The COMDAC window pops up COMDAC Window Figure 5 22 COMDAC window This window contains all the information related to the COMDAC It can be dis played even when the pack is not inserted AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 5 59 NE management equipment configuration Equipment configuration p See The following table shows the view edit options of the COMDAC window Parameters Buttons Description NE Name NE name of the selected NE max 30 characters Slot Id Slot number where the COMDAC is plugged in Slot format comdac 1 1 2 Slot Information The read only text fields provide the following information Card Type 11 character mnemonic used to identify the gen eral type of function provided Possible value COMDAC Serial Number 12 character alphanumeric code that in cludes the date and place of manufacture Apparatus Code Specifies the function of the pack Possible value COM 101 ICC In
99. contains scripts which will be executed with super user permission during the process of installing this package Do you want to continue with the installation of lt LUAMNB17 gt y n 6 Type Y and press Return AEM R1 7 2 50 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 Software installation and commissioning Installation procedure p See Installing AnyMedia NB Element Manager Release 1 7 for NE release 17 as lt LuAMNB17 gt Installing part 1 of 1 lt files list gt verifying class lt common gt Executing postinstall script Package lt LUOSRT gt ObjectStore 5 1 SP2 Run Time have been found in opt lucent OS51_SP2 Creating data bases You have the installation logfile in tmp EM_Install_LuAMNB17 1log Installation of lt LuAMNBl17 gt was successful The package lt LUAMNB17 gt is not installed in the system Please try install_AMEM again and install the package lt LUAMNB17 gt to complete the installation gt NOTE The last message is an error and can be ignored 2 2 1 1 4 Installation of the data R1 1 2 agent optional Complete the following procedure to install the data R1 1 2 agent Step Procedure 1 Go to the directory where the installation script is placed on CD ROM 3 of 4 2 Type install_AMEM bb and press Return AnyMedia EM R1 7 installation CopyRight c 2000 Lucent Technologies Inc All Rights Reserved Pre requisites AEM R1 7 363 211 4
100. cut through TCP at layer 4 TCP at layer 4 IP at layer 3 IP at layer 3 HDLC HDLC DSO DSO Figure A 3 COMDAC remote operations channel ROC protocol profiles AEM R1 7 A 4 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 Data communications network DCN configuration AEM communication capabilities For establishing communication between the AEM and the NE the NE must be minimally configured with its LAN ROC or CIT parameters as applicable This op tion is the only available as the AnyMedia Access System does not support re mote boot and remote TCP IP configuration The GSI can be used to provide this initial configuration of the NE using the CIT port A 5 AEM communication capabilities The AEM uses for communicating management data an external system LAN in terface The protocol profile in the AEM for this scenario is shown in Figure A 4 TL1 over TCP COMDAC File Transfer Protocol TL1 over Telnet also SNMP AFM COMDAC and AMF used for cut through TCP at layer 4 TCP at layer 4 UDP at layer 4 IP at layer 3 IP at layer 3 IP at layer 3 MAC amp LLC 1 MAC amp LLC 1 MAC amp LLC 1 at layer 2 at layer 2 at layer 2 10BaseT at layer 1 10BaseT at layer 1 10BaseT at layer 1 Figure A 4 AEM protocol profiles A 6 Recommended DCN configu rations If a data network is not yet available between the central site where the AEM is lo cated and the remote site where the NEs are located
101. double click on jre 1_2 2 005 win i recommended path for jre is C jdk1 2 2 and if netscape 4 7 is not already installed double click on cc32d473 3 Start installation script double click on install_AMEM bat 4 Select the extract button and indicate the directory where the system should be installed This instruction generates five directories m classes configuration m HelpFiles m Libraries m icons Under configuration directory OrbixWeb properties file should be updated with the name of the host its IP address and the address With the following format OrbixWeb IT_NS_HOSTNAME NameOfYourServerMachine OrbixWeb IT_NS_IP_ADDR IP address of your ServerMachine OrbixWeb IT LOCAL_HOSTNAMEsSIP address of this PC If name of the PC where installation is taking part is not known by the server then update OrbixWeb IT_IORS_USE_DNS false On the AEM users file include the logging and password of the users that will used the PC client The AEM users contains the mappings of logging to host names Each entry should be kept on an individual line The name of the user should be placed in the first column followed by the corresponding encrypted password ob tained by ypcat command on server side The user name and password should end with a colon For example syi_snni aZv4 IkMOIVyD6 AEM R1 7 06 00 363 211 454 Software installation and commissioning Installation procedure p Se After installation indicate th
102. ee Logical operators The following symbols for logical operators must be used Table 7 8 Logical operators Operation Symbol AND amp amp OR II NOT Brackets must be used to group the expressions if more than one logical ex pression is needed Relational opera The following symbols for relational operators must be used tors Table 7 9 Relational operators Operation Symbol equal less than lt less than or equal lt greater than gt greater than or equal gt AEM R1 7 7 22 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 Fault management and maintenance Alarm monitoring p Se Alarm field names The alarm field names and their possible values from the following table have to and values be used Table 7 10 Alarm field names and possible values Field name Possible values index integer gt 0 node integer gt 0 for NE identifiers or O for AEM source_type Agent_BB or Agent_NB object AID parameter in TL1 REPT ALAM e g ap 1 1 cause CONDTYPE parameter in TL1 REPT ALAM e g ATS severity indeterminate critical major minor warning or cleared serv_aff sa Or nsa event_type AIDTYPE parameter in TL1 REPT ALAM e g COMM ack_state ack or noack ack_user any string which can be a valid user login num_raises integer gt 0 c time integer number of seconds since Jan 1 1970 UTC l_c_time integer number of seconds since Jan 1 1970 UTC corr
103. equipped Figure 6 2 represents the composite provisioning data required to bring a single subscriber line into ser vice on a TR 08 VRT v8dp 1 1 ds1 1 1 1 drop 1 1 1 v8fdr 1 a TR 08 VRT T1 Cross Connection TO Cross Connection Figure 6 2 Provisioning data for a TR 08 POTS subscriber line Port assignment As mentioned above the AnyMedia Access System may contain 1 TR 303 VRT and or up to 20 TR 08 VRTs and INA VBs in any combination subject to the limit imposed by the 20 available DS1 network interfaces A physical distribution port may be assigned to only 1 logical line on 1 VRT or INA VB similarly a logical line can be assigned to only 1 physical distribution port TR 303 VRT The single TR 303 VRT can support any number of physical lines up to the full 608 line maximum capacity of the AnyMedia Access System The logical lines of the TR 303 VRT are identified by call reference values CRVs which may be any AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 6 3 Service provisioning Service provisioning telephony p Se of 672 integer values from 1 to 2048 A physical distribution port in the system can be assigned to any CRV of the TR 303 VRT The TR 303 VRT includes full access concentration between its logical line DSOs and available time slots on the feeder DS1s 24 time slots associated with the VRT full access means that if there is an available feeder time slot it is possible to assign a logical line DS
104. field to define the test parameters and click on Apply The In Progress window pops up ADSL CRC Corrupted CRC Test executed on lt NE Name gt lt Drop Id gt in progress 4 Wait until the test is finished and view the test result in the ADSL Cor rupted CRC Test window Test Results see above 5 Click on Close to exit the window AEM R1 7 7 36 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 Fault management and maintenance Test management mm ee 7 4 2 3 ADSL port BIST test Procedure Proceed as follows to set up an ADSL port BIST test Step Procedure 1 Open one of the following windows m ADSL AP window cf Chapter 5 5 5 29 m ADSL Drop window cf Chapter 5 5 5 31 2 Use the option menu near the Apply button to select ADSL BIST Test and click on Apply If the drop is in the unlocked administrative state a Warning window pops up otherwise the In Progress window pops up see below Performing a BIST Test on ADSL drop may be service af fecting Do you want to continue 3 Enter y and press Return The In Progress window pops up BIST Test executed on lt NE Name gt lt Drop Id gt in progress 4 Wait until the ADSL BIST Test Result window appears and view the test result ADSL Port BIST Test Result Figure 7 13 ADSL BIST Test Result window AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 7 37 Fault management and maintenance Test management ee The following table shows the parameters of this window Par
105. for conflicts with packages already installed Checking for setuid setgid programs Installing AnyMedia Element Manager Shelf Release 1 7 Administration as lt LuShelf gt Installing part 1 of 1 opt lucent AnyMediaEM_R1 7 CombinedShelf bin NECombined opt lucent AnyMediaEM_R1 7 CombinedShelf cefg CombinedPacks cfg opt lucent AnyMediaEM_R1 7 CombinedShelf cfg CombinedShelves cfg verifying class lt common gt Installation of lt LuShelf gt was successful General Event Dis Processing package instance lt LuSysED gt from tributor installation lt homelocal tmp lucent AnyMediaEMR1 7 gt AnyMedia Element Manager System Even Dist Release 1 7 administration sparc LuSysED_36_1 1 kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkxkkk AnyMedia Element Manager c 1999 Lucent Technologies kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Package lt LuSysAdm gt SystemAdmin LuSysAdm_36_1 1 have been found in opt lucent AnyMediaEM R1 7 OK No previous package LuSysED have been found Using lt gt as the package base directory Processing package information AEM R1 7 2 42 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 Software installation and commissioning Installation procedure p ee Processing system information 1 package pathname is already properly installed Verifying disk space requirements Checking for conflicts with packages already installed Checking
106. for setuid setgid programs Installing AnyMedia Element Manager System Even Dist Release 1 7 administration as lt LuSysED gt Installing part 1 of 1 lt files list gt verifying class lt common gt Installation of lt LuSysED gt was successful Trap Dispatcher in Processing package instance lt LuTrap gt from stallation lt homelocal tmp lucent AnyMediaEMR1 7 gt AnyMedia Element Manager Trap Dispacher Release 1 7 Administration sparc LuTrap_36_1 1 kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkxkkk AnyMedia Element Manager c 1999 Lucent Technologies kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Package lt LuSysAdm gt SystemAdmin LuSysAdm_36_1 1 have been found in opt lucent AnyMediaEM_R1 7 OK No previous package LuTrap have been found Using lt gt as the package base directory Processing package information Processing system information AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 2 43 Software installation and commissioning Installation procedure p See 1 package pathname is already properly installed Verifying disk space requirements Checking for conflicts with packages already installed Checking for setuid setgid programs The following files are being installed with setuid and or setgid permissions opt lucent AnyMediaEM_R1 7 TrapDispatcher bin TrapDispatcher lt setuid root gt Do you want to install these as setuid setgid files y
107. has to do this cf Chapter 3 4 2 page 3 18 before the AEM access bar can be started Start AEM access To start the AEM access bar cf Figure 3 1 page 3 3 after a correct login type in bar a terminal window which you can open via the workspace manager cf Chapter 3 3 8 page 3 11 cd lt GUI base path gt GUI GUI_Main amp A splash screen is displayed and then the AEM access bar is shown AEM R1 7 3 2 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 System management System access One a es a oa Ber pe T Figure 3 1 Workspace with AEM access bar 3 2 2 Logout from operation system This chapter describes how to log out from the system You can log out manually or be logged out automatically after a certain time of mouse and keyboard inactiv ity System logout Complete the following procedure to log out manually Step Procedure 1 Close the AEM access bar window 2 Click on the Exit symbol in the workspace manager or select Log out in the workspace menu 3 A message box pops up Press Return or click OK to confirm the logout Press Cancel not to log out After a logout the login screen is displayed again gt NOTE During the client installation cf Chapter 2 2 1 2 page 2 59 a cron process is installed This cron automatically kills the GUI processes every night due security reason The execution time of the cron can be changed by the ad ministrator only AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00
108. have been found in opt lucent AnyMediaEM _R1 7 Package lt LuTrap gt SystemEventDist LuTrap_36_1 1 have been found in opt lucent AnyMediaEM _R1 7 Package lt LuLUMRT gt Lumos Build 3 0 run time have been found in opt lucent LUMOS AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 2 53 Software installation and commissioning Installation procedure p See OK No previous package LuAMBB112 have been found Using lt gt as the package base directory Processing package information Processing system information Verifying disk space requirements WARNING The filesystem has 185076 free blocks The current installation requires 203168 blocks which includes a required 150 block buffer for open deleted files 18092 more blocks are needed Do you want to continue with the installation of lt LUAMBB112 gt y n 5 Type and press Return Checking for conflicts with packages already installed Checking for setuid setgid programs This package contains scripts which will be executed with super user permission during the process of installing this package Do you want to continue with the installation of lt LUAMBB112 gt y n 6 Type Y and press Return Installing AnyMedia BB Element Manager Release 1 7 for NE release 112 as lt LUAMBB112 gt Installing part 1 of 1 lt files list gt verifying class lt common gt Executing postinstall script Package lt LuOSRT gt ObjectStore
109. in the AEM configuration equipment NE configuration service and subscriber configuration access to the AEM print reports and backup and restore i e all operations triggered by the user or the AEM and all subsequent actions The results of operations are also logged in the actions log System Internal Events Contains all internal events or actions which report unusual changes in the configuration and state of the AEM or indicate errors that oc curred in the AEM Autonomous Reports Contains all information useful for the equipment supplier about alarms NE and platform the performance and all TL1 messages sent from all managed NEs and which imply changes in the data base Alarms Performance Data feeders Performance Data ADSL Performance Data ATM m Possibility to sort logs It is possible to show items in the logs while visualizing saving or printing EM time and data source The user can set the date amp time of the AEM from the platform clock i e operating system from a network management system or from an exter nal clock source using NTP m SW upgrade The AEM provides an easy and transparent mechanism to upgrade the system to AEM R1 7 m AEM NE loss of communication The AEM periodically polls the NEs heartbeat to detect loss of communi cation and or NE failures Loss of communication is reported as an alarm 2 Security m Possibility of creating deleting modifying AEM
110. installation Please choose one or more Band mode separated by blank 1 LuAMBB112 lt BroadBand R1 1 2 installation gt 2 LuAMBB14 lt BroadBand R1 4 installation gt AEM R1 7 2 52 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 Software installation and commissioning Installation procedure p Se Enter selection q 4 Type 1 and press Return Packages to install LuAMBB112 NE Data support Processing package instance lt LUAMBB112 gt from for R1 1 2 installa lt homelocal tmp lucent AnyMediaEMR1 7 gt tion AnyMedia BB Element Manager Release 1 7 for NE release 112 sparc LuAMBB112_ 36 1 1 kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk AnyMedia Element Manager c 1999 Lucent Technologies kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Package lt LuSysAdm gt SystemAdmin LuSysAdm_36_1 1 have been found in opt lucent AnyMediaEM_R1 7 AnyMedia EM R1 7 path opt lucent AnyMediaEM_R1 7 Package lt LuAM gt Alarms LuAM_36_1 1 have been found in opt lucent AnyMediaEM_R1 7 Package lt LUNER gt NER LuNER_36_1 1 have been found in opt lucent AnyMediaEM_R1 7 Package lt LuNeED gt NetEvenDist LuNeED_36_1 1 have been found in opt lucent AnyMediaEM_R1 7 Package lt LuSec gt Security LuSec_36_1 1 have been found in opt lucent AnyMediaEM_R1 7 Package lt LuShelf gt ConbinedShelf LuShelf_36_1 1 have been found in opt lucent AnyMediaEM_R1 7 Package lt LuSysED gt SystemEventDist LuSysED_36_1 1
111. interaction with the administrator using the installation script provided in the distribution Common tasks Common actions must be make in both cases as follows m You need to be logged on as root m Get ready your distribution medium Insert and mount Insert and mount the CD If the machine is running the vold it will recog the CDROM nize that the CD is in place and mount iton cdrom AnyMediaEMR17 depending on your system configuration cdrom AnyMediaEMR17 might have to be replaced with a different device name Depending on the configuration of vold you may have to append a trailing dot to refer ences to file names on the CD This is due to hs s imposing a suffix on the file names If the machine is not running the vold type mount F hsfs o ro notraildot dev dsk c0t6d0s2 cdrom The device identifier c0t6d0s2 is configuration dependent and as such will vary from machine to machine This will mount the CD on cdrom depending on your system configura tion cdrom might have to be replaced with a different mount point For more information about on how to mount a CD ROM drive refer to your SUN documentation 2 2 1 Full installation This type of installation uses the install_AMEM_ script in order to install all packages contained in the distribution For the following description it is assumed that m The hardware and software requirements to install the AEM R1 7 are pre pared AEM R1 7 software have not
112. ksh gt environment 5 At least the system environment variable PATH MUST include the paths sr bin usr sbin and uas ucb for instance export PATH SPATH usr bin usr sbin usr ucb 6 The time zone MUST be the same for the Any Media Client lt GUI gt LUMOS and Network Element This parameter is needed for installing the Any Media Client AEM R1 7 2 48 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 Software installation and commissioning Installation procedure E Se kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Do you like to continue y n q 3 Type y and press Return to continue or type n or q and press Return to exit AnyMedia NB EM R1 7 installation Please choose one or more Band mode separated by blank 1 LuAMNB17 lt NarrowBand R1 7 installation gt gt Enter selection q 4 Type 1 and press Return Packages to install LuAMNB17 NE telephony sup Processing package instance lt LUAMNB17 gt from port for R1 7 instal lt homelocal tmp lucent AnyMediaEMR1 7 gt lation AnyMedia NB Element Manager Release 1 7 for NE release 17 sparc LuAMNB17_36 1 1 kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkxkkk AnyMedia Element Manager c 1999 Lucent Technologies kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Package lt LuSysAdm gt SystemAdmin LuSysAdm_36_1 1 have been found in opt lucent AnyMediaEM_R1 7 AnyMedia EM R1 7 path opt lucent AnyMediaEM_R1 7 Package lt LuAM gt Alarms LuAM_36_1 1 have
113. logical DSOs to the selected VRT TR303 It also displays on demand the VRT operational state This window shows also the VFDE state enable or disable and datalink protection informa tion Figure 6 5 VRT TR303 window The following table shows the view edit option of this window Parameters Buttons Description NE Name NE name of the selected NE max 30 characters VRT VB id This option menu lists all VRT VB ids of the selected type AEM R1 7 6 8 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 Service provisioning Service provisioning telephony p Se Parameters Buttons Description VFDE Two radio buttons Enable Disable are used to modify the VFDE status by clicking on Apply The Apply button is available only if the VFDE status has been modified Network Loss The Network Loss slider can be used to define the network Information loss value Possible values 0 6 The Set button is used to set the network loss value Datalinks amp Pro Primary Link Secondary Link Displays the logical DS1 id tection of the primary and secondary link These entries are avail able if logical DS1 id is present Possible values are v3fdr 1 1 28 The Edit Logical DS1 buttons provide access to the Logi cal DS1 window to change the timing reference EOC Datalink m Working Standby EOC Displays the logical DS1 id used by the working standby EOC embedded opera tions channel Possible values are v3
114. m n where m is the issue number and n the series number CLEI Code assigned by Bellcore that provides information about the functionality of the pack ECI Code that corresponds to the bar coded label on the faceplate of the pack There is a one to one correspondence between CLEI and ECI codes Operation amp Slot Required displays the required state of the shelf slot Protection This state can be changed by the user as long as the pack is not inserted Default state for iods1 Not Required with the exception of iods1p whose default is Required The Apply button is available only if the IO DS1 is not in serted and the required state of the IO DS1 has been modi fied by the user The read only text field Protection State shows whether the selected IO DS1 is working or not Possible values Working providing service or Standby not in service The O DS1 Protection button provides access to the Shelf Protection window tab IO_DS1 AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 5 55 NE management equipment configuration 5 56 Version 1 00 Parameters Buttons Physical DS1 Information 06 00 Equipment configuration Description The information in this field is displayed in a table 4 rows one per physical DS1 gt NOTE For the protection IO DSithese fields are empty and the buttons are disabled Physical DS1 id Physical address of the DS1 feeders Format ds1 slot port e g ds1 1 1 5 1
115. management System administration Figure 3 13 Edit DMG window Actions The following table lists all actions which are possible in the Edit DMG window Table 3 17 Actions for editing a DMG If you want to then Result launch the DMG select the check box Launch on Pack Next time when any package containing when the package age Start Up and press Apply the DMG is started the DMG is starts up launched not launch the DMG deselect the check box Launch on Next time the package is started the when the package Package Start Up and press Apply DMG is not launched starts up 3 4 6 Editing module groups Overview The Edit MG window displays the modules contained in the module group The processes which make up a module can be added or removed from the module These processes can also be killed or recovered Add a process Each process in the module has a certain load level assigned The load level is the number of clients that require service from this process If the load level be comes higher it can be useful to add more processes to the module so that the load can be distributed among the processes AEM R1 7 3 28 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 System management System administration Recover process When a process has an operational state of out of service OOS it can be re covered Kill process It is also possible to kill the physical process The AEM process is not automati cally removed Remov
116. maps be allocated to each group to depict the group s child items on it To implement this each group must have the following parameters m Group name This identifier must be unique within the group level groups with the same parent group m Group icon to graphically identify the group when displaying the items of the group s parent group m Background map map on which the group s child items are displayed m Group coordinates to specify the position of the group icon on the back ground map of the group s parent group Allowed names Two different groups can have the same group name except when their parent groups are the same It is therefore possible to have two groups named Group C with Group A and Group B as their parent groups respectively see Figure 5 9 page 5 25 AEM R1 7 5 24 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 NE management equipment configuration Groups and NEs management Root Group not allowed N N N N Figure 5 9 Group names allowed Group identifier To uniquely identify a group a concatenation of all the group names from the root group to the group being identified is necessary e g the identifier of Group 1 2 1 in the Figure 5 8 page 5 24 is Root group Group 1 Group 1 2 Group 1 2 1 However when logging data related to a group that identifier will be truncated due to log requirements Only the name of the group and the name of the parent group will be logged as the identif
117. may be removed 1 4 3 3 Performance monitoring Tasks of Performance management guarantees that the transmission quality does not fall performance below a minimum performance threshold monitoring Another task is the recording of data for analysis at a later date e g storing alarms in logs and print them AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 1 29 Functional description 1 4 4 Protection from unauthorised access User groups Access rights System security and user groups Working with AEM The AEM provides mechanisms which protect the system from unauthorised ac cess The user groups play a very important role in this context as they define dif ferent levels of access rights for the individual users By default there are 3 user groups the administrator maintenance and monitoring user group Further groups can be added Table 1 1 provides an overview of the access permissions the user groups should have Table 1 1 Assignment of user groups to applications tasks Application Task User Group System Process Management Administrator Administration User Administration and Profiling Access Policy Management Administrator Domain Management Administrator Log Management Actions Administrator Maintenance System Internal Events Administrator Maintenance Autonomous Report Administrator Maintenance Monitoring Alarm Management Acknowledge Administrat
118. ofthe NE is rejected Otherwise the Domain Selection window is activated The window remains on the screen until you make a decision AEM R1 7 363 211 454 NE management equipment configuration Equipment configuration p Se The NE Management button is now enabled 6 Press the NE Management button The NE Management window pops up NE Management Figure 5 15 NE Management window tab Telephony The following steps describe the procedure for the telephony agent The procedure for data agents is similar The corresponding window NE Man agement tab Data is described in Chapter 5 5 3 3 page 5 44 NE provisioning 7 Enter the IP Address and TID Target ID the name of the NE to which the data connection is addressed of the new NE in the field Communications Info IP Address format xxx xxx xxx xxx where x is a numeric 0 9 the TID has a range from 1 to 20 characters gt NOTE Once the connection is established these fields can not be edited unless the connection is interrupted 8 Enter the Login and Password in the Authentication Information field AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 5 37 NE management equipment configuration Equipment configuration gt NOTE Once the connection is established these fields can not be edited unless the connection is interrupted The Provision button becomes available when the Communications Info and or the Authentication Information fields have
119. on the SAME SUBNET DOMAIN 4 The install_AMEM script runs on K shell lt ksh gt environment 5 At least the system environment variable PATH MUST include the paths sr bin usr sbin and uas ucb for instance export PATH PATH usr bin usr sbin usr ucb 6 The time zone MUST be the same for the Any Media Client lt GUI gt LUMOS and Network Element This parameter is needed for installing the Any Media Client KRKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK Do you like to continue y n q 3 Type y and press Return to continue or type n or q and press Return to exit AnyMedia NB EM R1 7 installation CopyRight c 2000 Lucent Technologies Inc All Rights Reserved Please choose the installation mode 1 ADM lt Administration package installation gt 2 GUI lt Client package installation gt Enter selection q 4 Type 2 and press Return AEM R1 7 2 60 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 Software installation and commissioning Installation procedure Packages to be installed LuJRERT LuOXWRT LUNETSCP LuGUI30 Java 1 2 2 05 runt Processing package instance lt LuJRERT gt from ime installation lt homelocal tmp lucent AnyMediaEMR1 7 JRE 1 2 2 05 for AnyMedia EM R1 7 sparc solaris 1 2 2 05 OK No previous package LuJRERT have been found Applications to install 1 gt jre version 1 2 2_05 2 gt symantec classes 3 gt report pro classes 4 gt all 5 gt exit Selection 5 Type 4
120. one or two MDSUs that in effect extend the PCM highway from the AnyMedia Access System backplane to the MDS2 MDS2B An MDSU can be located in any AP slot however the MDSUs will normally be located in AP slots 14 and 15 to simplify shelf cabling One MDSU extends 1 5 PCM highways to a metallic shelf controller MSC in the MDS2 MDS2B shelf In order to extend 3 PCM highways to both sections of the MDS2 MDS2B shelf two MDSUs must be installed MSU100 SAPQADMBAA AEM R1 7 5 2 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 NE management equipment configuration Overview of the controlled systems gO voo e Fusing IO_DS1 Application Pack Application Pack Application Pack Application Pack Application Pack Application Pack Application Pack Application Pack Application Pack Application Pack Application Pack Application Pack Application Pack Application Pack Application Pack Application Pack COMDAC COMDAC IO_DS1 o oo X o oa oO oO N wo gt o D Figure 5 1 AnyMedia shelf layout 5 2 1 1 MDS2 MDS2B shelf layout Connection with The use of the metallic distribution shelf MDS2 or MDS2B is optional If it is main shelf used one or two AnyMedia Access System AP slots are equipped with the MDSU each of which connects to an MSC in the MDS2 MDS2B shelf The MDS2 MDS2B shelf based on the SLC 2000 MDS has the capacity to hold 24 SL
121. only with the connections and un der the environmental conditions as described in the documentation The removal or disabling of safety facilities the clearing of faults and errors and the maintenance of the equipment must be carried out by specially qualified personnel only The respective parts of the documentation must be strictly observed The documentation must also be consulted during the selection of measur ing and test equipment AEM R1 7 363 211 454 About this document General safety information Transport storage and operation of the unit system must be under the permissible conditions only See accompanying documentation and information on the unit system m Calibrations special tests after repairs and regular safety checks must be carried out documented and archived m Only use tested and virus free diskettes Do not place the shelves on an unstable cart stand or table The product may fall causing serious damage to the equipment Never push objects of any kind into this product through cabinet slots as they may touch dangerous voltage points or short out parts that could result in a risk of fire or electrical shock Never spill liquid of any kind on the product 6 2 1 Safety symbols and labels All safety instructions have a uniform appearance They include a signal word that classifies the danger and a text block that contains descriptions of the type and cause of the danger the consequences of ignori
122. p Se Parameters Buttons Description Active Timing If the Get button has not been pressed the following field is Reference empty Active Timing Sync Source Shows the active timing sync source of the NE Possible values Free Running Loop Timed PRI Loop Timed SEC External DS1 Ext1 External DS1 Ext 2 Exter nal Clock Ext1 External Clock Ext 2 The Get button can be used to retrieve the Active Timing Synchronization Source and the operational state of pri mary and secondary sources if applicable from the NE gt NOTE During the get operation the Apply and Switch but tons are disabled The provisioned timing reference subpane will also be updated as a result of this opera tion The Switch button can be used to switch between the work ing and standby sources of synchronization In other words the standby source becomes the working source and the working source becomes the standby source This button is disabled if the Active Timing Sync Source is Free Running or the Active Timing Sync Source field is empty because the Get button has not been pressed yet or the operational state of the secondary source is Not Operational gt NOTE During the switch operation the Apply and Get but tons are disabled All fields will be updated as a result of this operation AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 5 131 NE management equipment configuration ee 5 5 6 5 Procedure 5 132 Version 1 00
123. p SeSe 5 5 5 Configuration of the packs 5 5 5 1 IO DS1 window The IO DS1 pack provides four physical DS1 interfaces to accommodate tele phony via standard TR 08 TR 303 and INA network interfaces Figure 5 21 IO DS1 window This window can be displayed even when the pack is not inserted AEM R1 7 5 54 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 NE management equipment configuration Equipment configuration p ee The following table shows the view edit options of the O_DS1 window Parameters Buttons Description NE Name NE name of the selected NE max 30 characters Slot This option menu lists all IO DS1 of the NE Slot format iods1 1 shelf slot e g iods1 1 2 4 for working IO DS1s and iods1p shelf e g iodsp1 1 for the protection IO DS1 Possible values iods1 1 1 5 for working IO DS1 iods1p 1 for protection IO DS1 Inventory Infor The following fields are empty if no pack is inserted Other mation wise the read only text fields provide the following informa tion Card Type 11 character mnemonic used to identify the gen eral type of function provided Possible value IODS1 Serial Number 12 character alphanumeric code that in cludes the date and place of manufacture Apparatus Code Specifies the function of the pack Possible values are FAC100 ICC InterChangeability Code Indicates the interchange ability among packs to specify forward backward compatibil ity Format of the ICC is
124. permissions to all tasks and this access permissions cannot be modified 5 Click OK or Apply to save the changes After clicking OK the window will be closed If you want to reject the changes click Close before OK or Ap ply 4 4 3 Delete user groups Introduction This chapter describes the process to remove a user group from the AEM Before removing a user group please pay attention to the following remarks m The AEM administrator must have a system login m The administrator user group is protected against deletions m After a user group deletion all related information is removed from the AEM This does not include the contained users or their information but these users will lose the ability to invoke the applications tasks devices and maps for which the user group had permission Procedure Complete the following procedure to remove a user group Step Procedure 1 Login as AEM administrator and start the AEM access bar as described in Chapter 3 2 1 The access bar will be shown 2 Select the User Administration amp Profiling icon The User Administration amp Profiling window pops up 3 Select View gt User Groups via menu bar The User Groups Table appears AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 4 23 User management User groups User Administration amp Profiling File View Administrator Administrator Group Description Maintenance Maintenance Group Description Monitoring Monitoring Group
125. process will finish when the group status of a group remains unchanged or the root group is reached Moving groups A group can be moved between parent groups All the items included in the group are also moved There are two constraints to this feature m The new parent group cannot be a descendant of the group to be moved to avoid inconsistencies m The group name of the group being moved is not allowed to exist in the new parent group After having moved a group both old and new parent groups check if their group status have changed If a group status has changed the system will rebuild the group status for both parent groups and for the groups above them in the tree hier archy of groups 5 4 2 NEs management Group identifier NEs management involves the addition of a new NE to the set of NEs that can be managed by the AEM as well as the deletion and edition of their attributes It also involves the movement of an NE from an old group to a new group The user can create NEs within the groups The NEs are also represented by an icon and coordinates to situate it on the background map of the parent group Each NE must therefore have the following parameters when being created m NE name This identifier must be unique in the whole tree m NE icon to graphically identify the NE when displaying the items of its par ent group Domains m NE coordinates to specify the position of the NE icon on the background map of its parent gr
126. provides the line side interface functionality that pro vide service to end users Channel Unit Figure 5 28 Channel Unit window The corresponding window contains all information related to CU packs It can be displayed even when the pack is not plugged in The following table shows the view edit options of the CU window Parameters Buttons Description Action NE Name NE name of the selected NE max 30 characters Slot Id This option menu shows the slot in which the CU is inserted in the MSD2 MSD2B Possible values cu 1 1 24 AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 5 75 NE management equipment configuration Equipment configuration p See Parameters Buttons Inventory Infor mation Description Action The read only text fields provide the following information Card Type 11 character mnemonic used to identify the gen eral type of function provided Possible values cf Table 5 1 page 5 78 Serial Number 12 character alphanumeric code that in cludes the date and place of manufacture Apparatus Code Specifies the function of the pack Possi ble values cf Table 5 1 page 5 78 ICC InterChangeability Code Indicates the interchangea bility among packs to specify forward backward compatibility Format of the ICC is m n where m is the issue number and n the series number CLEI Code assigned by Bellcore that provides information about the functionality of the pack ECI Code that
127. re eral backups from stored the name of this backup must be known and the tape must be positioned tape at the beginning of this backup The name can be determined by using the tar command For example tar tvf dev rmt Omn The positioning is done as described below Position tape If you know the order of the backups on tape you can position the tape at the be ginning of the desired backup as follows Rewind the tape e g with mt f dev rmt Om rewind and issue a tar command see example above until the backup which comes before the one which shall be restored is displayed If you do not know the order of the backups on the tape it can be deter mined as follows Rewind the tape and then repeatedly issue a tar command see example above until the backup to be restored is displayed while you note the order of the backups on tape Then you can position the tape as shown above 3 6 3 3 2 Full restoration procedure When the restore command is executed the user must decide which image type should be restored The restore script displays the following message Please enter the type of the image to be restored backup archive Type backup or archive and press Enter Copy of originals Copies of the original databases are saved to allow for a cancellation of the oper ation If such a copy could not be made the appropriate image can nevertheless be restored but a warning is issued For each database for which no copy could be made the followi
128. secondary input as its alternate source If the primary reference fails the NE hardware switches to the alternate source providing synchronization reference source protection is available cf Chapter 5 5 11 page 5 142 AEM R1 7 5 128 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 NE management equipment configuration Equipment configuration 5 5 6 4 Timing Source Control window This window provides the operator with the facilities needed to configure the NE timing source for telephony service Timing Source Control Telephony Figure 5 42 Timing Source Control window The following table shows the view edit options of this window Parameters Buttons Description NE Name NE name of the selected NE max 30 characters Provisioned Timing Sync Mode This option menu displays the current Timing Refer timing synchronization mode ence Possible values Free Running Loop Timed External Clock External DS1 In case of Free Running the next two fields Primary Source and Secondary Source are disabled AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 5 129 NE management equipment configuration Equipment configuration p See Parameters Buttons Description Provisioned Primary Source If Timing Sync Mode is Loop Timed the Timing Refer primary source working and optionally the secondary ence continued source standby can be selected Possible values ds1 1 1 5 1 4 Once the source s of synchronization has h
129. selection The window will be closed AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 4 7 User management Domains 4 3 Domains 4 3 1 Create domains Introduction This chapter describes the process to create a new domain Before creating a new domain please pay attention to the following remarks m The AEM administrator must have a system login m The controlled objects are defined as sets of managed NEs m Only EM and NE controlled object types are supported gt NOTE An EM object is generated by default with Type EM and Value AnyMedia which cannot be deleted Procedure Complete the following procedure to create a new domain 4 8 Version 1 00 Step Procedure 1 Login as AEM administrator and start the AEM access bar as described in Chapter 3 2 1 The access bar will be shown 2 Select the User Administration amp Profiling icon The User Administration amp Profiling window pops up 3 Select View gt Domains via menu bar The Domains Table appears AEM R1 7 06 00 363 211 454 User management Domains User Administration amp Profiling File View Domain 1 Domain 1 description Domain 2 Domain 2 description Figure 4 7 User Administration amp Profiling window Domains Table 4 Click New The Domain Profile window pops up Domain Profile Domain Name Description Controlled Objects Controlled Objects Not Assigned Assigned a oc User Groups User Groups Not Ass
130. specific applications The OAM components provide the following functionality features 1 Operation Administration Maintenance m Standard reports The system allows the user to generate a set of predefined reports from the information kept by the AEM The reports cover the following areas alarms equipment configuration service provisioning _ NE inventory performance The reports are available for displaying printing and saving in a postscript file m Standard reports on multiple NEs These reports are applicable to one NE as well as to a list of NEs m Backup and restore of system relevant data Relevant data includes all information necessary to restore the situation in case ofan AEM crash m AEM software upgrades Provides an established release cycle for AEM software upgrades in a way that minimizes incompatibility with NE software releases and allows for up grades to provide for OS compatibility This upgrade does not affect the services provided by NEs AEM R1 7 1 14 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 Functional description System and software architecture p Se m Log administration The logs are capable of being printed and visualized The system limits the size of the system logs It is possible to make backups of the logs and to re move them from the system There are logs for Actions Contains all the information on actions performed by users or the AEM and which imply changes
131. states of the autonomous click on Get in the field Autonomous outputs Output States use the check boxes to define the states and press Apply exit the window Click on Close AEM R1 7 5 124 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 NE management equipment configuration Equipment configuration p See 5 5 6 2 Data agent 5 5 6 2 1 Configuration information synchronization General The data agent is able to inform the AEM of its internal configuration changes The data agent sends traps to the AEM to inform it about these changes Cur rently the data agent only generates traps when specific changes occur Besides that the traps are not responded to by the AEM so the data agent does not know if the AEM has received the trap or not As a result the AEM does not show an up dated view of the data agent To solve this problem the AEM periodically polls the data agent in order to retrieve the internal information the data agent stores in its NVDS This process is launched in a scheduled way as well as on user demand Autonomous re Each time a configuration synchronization process is done the AEM retrieves all ports the configuration information from the data agent and then updates the AEM data base to reflect the current state of the configuration information in the data agent During the process the data agent state will be moved from COMM_ESTABLISHED to COMM_ESTABLISHED_SYNCHRONIZING Two NE configuration data synchronization states ca
132. step 2 No Correct the IP address AEM R1 7 7 48 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 Fault management and maintenance Alarms mm ee 2 Check for correct sysObjectld MIB variable Yes Call Lucent Technologies Technical Support No Correct the IsysObjectld MIB variable 3 Is the alarm now cleared Yes O K No Call Lucent Technologies Technical Support 7 5 5 11 NB_ASSOC_FAILED Meaning The communication association with the telephony agent has failed Abbreviation NE ASSOC_FAILED Severity Critical Service affecting No This alarm covers the following alarms m TCP IP_CON_REFUSED cf Chapter 7 5 5 14 page 7 51 m TL1_COMM_DENIED cf Chapter 7 5 5 15 page 7 52 m NB ASSOC _LOST cf Chapter 7 5 5 12 page 7 49 gt NOTE This alarm is only used in NBI applications 7 5 5 12 NB_ASSOC_LOST Meaning The AEM lost the management association with the telephony agent Abbreviation NEASSOC_LOST Severity Critical Service affecting No The alarm will be cleared when the TCP IP connection and TL1 communication session are available and the software version currently stored in the NE is sup ported by the AEM i e when the association process between the AEM and the NE is completed NE state is CONNECTED Effects It is not possible to manage the telephony agent The TL1 communication session and the TCP IP connection are lost Possible cause s A loss of the TCP IP connection has been detected or the TCP IP connection
133. storage NVDS located at CM nefiles NVDS and the config uration files cfg are not backed up by the AEM_backup command A backup of these files can be done manually e g with the tar command System message After each backup archive or restore command a result message is displayed which indicates whether the operation was successful or not This message is dis played only if the command was entered on the command line Command syntax In the following description of the commands square brackets e g c indicate optional parameters The pipe symbol indicates alternative options from which one has to be chosen e g INC FULL All parameters not enclosed in brackets are mandatory Each command is entered without enclosing parameters in brackets AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 3 39 System management Backup and restore mm ee Backup files Use the following command to make a backup of a database or directory If you enter none of the optional parameters a backup of all data necessary to restore the AEM will be done AEM backup c h H p backup_file_path f backup_file_name t backup_type 1 dump_level Parameter description C Aborts a running backup operation h H Display command syntax h or additional help H p backup_file_path The backup_file_path is the directory or device to back up Default value of the variable OAM backup backupDirec tory which is set in the file AnyMediaEM c
134. tabs C Window MDS2 B View MDS2 B Packs MSC TU CU User Port L Set of windows Figure 5 13 Screen navigation for equipment configuration AEM R1 7 5 34 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 NE management equipment configuration Equipment configuration p ee 5 5 1 Add a network element The following steps are necessary to add an NE m Create NE m Assign Domain To add an NE the following requirements must be fulfilled m The PC based GSI is used to set the NE to a state where NVDS non vola tile data storage is populated with the minimum values i e target id IP ad dress user id m All these parameters are assumed to be known by the user m The data communication network DCN link with the NEs is available cf Appendix A m Domains are already created cf Chapter 4 3 1 gt NOTE The windows shown in this chapter are merely meant as an example The contents text within a window as well as the window itself may slightly dif fer from the window as shown on your system Procedure Complete the following procedure to add an NE Step Procedure 1 Select the NE in the Network Browser or on the background map and New or Edit via the cursor menu or select File gt New or View gt Object via the menu bar or click on the open icon in the tool bar The Groups amp NEs window tab NEs pops up cf Figure 5 11 page 5 27 2 Fill in all NE information for a ne
135. the AEM provisionable with the AEM GUI via cut through A 6 1 4 AEM client configuration Client IP parame The workstation with the AEM client has the following IP parameters configured ters Note that if the client is located at the same machine as the server these parame ters are already configured m P address e g 135 88 20 230 m subnet mask e g 255 255 240 0 m default router e g 135 88 17 1 The client workstation has to be configured as a client machine of the server workstation where the AEM server is going to run The SystemPreferences ini file includes the LOGTELNET PASSTELNET and SERVER variables that have to be configured only it the user wants to open a cut through session in the AEM client A 6 1 5 Local digital switch configuration Management operations have to be performed on the LDS to create the SPLL ser vice and associate this service to the DSO channel which will be cross connected with the ROC The provisioning of this DSO channel will be static with TR 08 and dynamic with TR 303 A separate SPLL needs to be established with every NE which shall be managed AEM R1 7 A 8 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 Data communications network DCN configuration Recommended DCN configurations Configuration of the Up to 24 ROCs DS1 SPLL service in the T1 Router AEM Server GUI LDS and associate to ____ r the ps0 channel pe related to ROC Oe la
136. the AFM performance monitoring 8 7 8 4 ATM traffic monitoring 89 8 4 1 ATM Traffic Monitoring window 8 9 8 4 2 Modify the ATM traffic monitoring 8 10 AEM R1 7 VIII Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 Contents A Data communications network DCN configuration A 1 A 1 Overview A 1 A 2 DCN introduction A 1 A 3 Terms used in this chapter A 2 A 4 NE communication capabilities A 3 A 5 AEM communication capabilities A 5 A 6 Recommended DCN configurations A 5 A 6 1 ROC over semi permanent leased lines DCN A 6 A 6 2 Communication with remote NEs using inband ATM PVC A 9 es B Configuration parameters B 1 B 1 Overview B 1 B 1 1 AnyMedia server configuration variables B 11 B 1 2 AnyMedia client GUI configuration variables B 7_ C Northbound interface C 1 C 1 Overview C 1 C 2 Northbound interface basics C 1 C 2 1 Northbound interface description C 1 C 3 Northbound interface specific TL1 messages C 3 C 3 1 REPT ALM Report Alarm C 4 C 3 2 RTRV ALM Retrieve Alarms C 9 0 3 3 RTRV ALM ENV Retrieve Alarm Environment C 16_ AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 IX ee Contents AB Abbreviations AB 1_ GL Glossary GL 1 IN Index IN 1 AEM R1 7 X Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 D Ieo About this document 1 Overview Purpose This user service manual USM provides the following information for Lucent Technologies AnyMedia Element Manager 24 Channel AEM Release 1 7 m A product overview and a functional product de
137. the following normal completion response is returned sid date time M ctag COMPLD AID AIDTYPE NTFCNCDE CONDTYPE SRVEFF OCRDAT OCRTM CONDDESCR r 06 00 AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Northbound interface Northbound interface specific TL1 messages mm ee C325 Output format parameters AID Access identifier This parameter appears in the Access ID Block Type Access ID Required Yes Default Type Fixed Default It all This is the address of the equipment and or facility for which an alarm condition is being reported Abbreviation Meaning ap 1 1 16 Application Pack comdac 1 1 2 COMDAC ctu 1 Craft Test Unit cu 1 1 24 Channel Unit drop 1 1 16 1 32 Drop ds1 1 1 5 1 4 DS1 narrowband port feeder side ext 1 1 2 External DS1 Synchronization iat 1 32 Integrated Access Terminal iatfdr 1 32 1 1 Integrated Access Terminal iatsp 1 1 16 1 2 Integrated Access Terminal Server Port iods1 1 1 5 DS1 Circuit Pack iods1p 1 DS1 protection pack m2drop 1 1 24 1 4 Metallic Distrib 2 Shelf Drop mds2 1 Metallic Distrib 2 Shelf msc 1 1 2 Metallic Shelf Controller ptu 1 1 2 Power Test Unit pwrf 1 1 2 48V Fast Distribution Bank pwrm 1 1 2 48V MDS2 Distribution Bank sh 1 Shelf telnet 1 2 Telnet virtual port tr8dl 1 20 1 TR 008 Mode 1 Data Link v08 1 20 TR 008 VRT v303 1 GR 303 VRT AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 C 11 Northbound interface spe
138. the following two configura tions are recommended m ROC over semi permanent leased lines DCN cf Chapter A 6 1 page A 6 Communication with remote NEs using inband ATM PVC cf Chapter A 6 2 page A 9 AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 A 5 Data communications network DCN configuration Recommended DCN configurations mm ee A 6 1 ROC over semi permanent leased lines DCN Configuration The assumptions for this configuration are m TheLAN based element manager is located in the central office collocated with the Local Digital Switch LDS m The NEs are located at remote locations m The OAM amp P information mapped in the 64 kbit s ROCs is transported from the AEM in the central office to the remote locations via a semi per manent leased line SPLL using either TR 08 or TR 303 access technolo gies m A router bridge is used for interfacing the channelized T1 I F to the LAN in the central office The router bridge performs the translation from LAN to HDLC DSO access via channelized T1 interfaces m For layer 2 the HDLC Protocol is used between 24 channel NEs and the router m One remote operation channel is used for communicating with each NE 64 kbit s ROC carried on a SPLL For managing up to 24 NEs connected to the LDS a single T1 interface for the router bridge is sufficient A 6 1 1 Router configuration Configuration The minimal requirements for the router bridge for supporting this scenario are m Min
139. the number of information IN alarms m Total Displays the total number of alarms all severities Additionally the frame contains two option menus which show the filter cf Chapter 7 3 4 3 page 7 19 and view cf Chapter 7 3 4 2 page 7 18 currently being used In this two option menus the user can select filters and views AEM R1 7 7 14 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 Fault management and maintenance Alarm monitoring Figure 7 5 General Information frame 7 3 3 4 Alarm table The last section in the Alarm Viewer window is a table that contains zero or more alarms belonging to a domain This table allows the user to sort the alarms cf Chapter 7 3 3 4 2 page 7 17 by clicking on a specific table header The user also can select them for acknowledgment or clearance The mechanism to acknowl edge or clear is the same the user has to select one or more alarms After select ing the alarms click on Acknowledge or Clear in the tool bar or select Actions gt Acknowledge or Actions gt Clear via the menu bar r mi mi r Fr rc r F mi Figure 7 6 Alarm list section 7 3 3 4 1 Alarm parameters For each alarm the following alarm fields depending on the selected view can be displayed m Index Sequence number for each different alarm reported to the AEM the maxi mum sequence number is 100 000 m Probable Cause Identifies the probable cause of the alarm This field contains a unique identification strin
140. the option menu Provisioned Ap paratus Code in the field Provision ing Information to select None The Common AP window pops up cf Chapter 5 5 5 5 page 5 63 change the required state use the check box Slot required add a cross connection select a row in the Physical Server Port Information list with no cross connection and press Add X Connec tion The Subshelf window pops up cf Chapter 5 5 5 19 page 5 87 AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 5 85 NE management equipment configuration Equipment configuration ee If you want to then edit a cross connection select a row in the Physical Server Port Information list with an existing cross connection use the option menu near the Edit but ton to select X Connection and press Edit The Subshelf window pops up cf Chapter 5 5 5 19 page 5 87 edit a physical port select a row in the Physical Server Port Information list use the option menu near the Edit but ton to select Physical Port and press Edit The IAT Server Port window pops up cf Chapter 5 5 5 21 page 5 92 remove a cross connection select the corresponding Physical Server Port Id in the Physical Server Port Information list and press Re move X Connection A Warning win dow pops up displaying the following message Cross Connection will be removed Ok to proceed If you decide to continue the remove operation will be started The informa tion displayed wi
141. the physical DS1 logical DS1 cross connection selected in the list AEM R1 7 6 18 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 Service provisioning Service provisioning telephony 6 2 2 1 Modify the physical DS1 list Procedure Complete the following procedure to modify the physical DS1 list Step Procedure 1 Select NE in the Network Element Browser and List gt Physical DS1 via the menu bar The Physical DS1 List window pops up This window can also be reached from the VRT VB List window cf Chapter 6 2 1 1 page 6 6 and the VRT VB windows Chapter 6 2 1 3 page 6 8 Chapter 6 2 1 5 page 6 13 Chapter 6 2 1 7 page 6 15 2 Use the radio buttons in the Selection Criteria field to choose a desired VRT VB If you want to then add a logical DS1 select the desired physical DS1 id and press Add Logical DS1 The Logical DS1 window pops up cf Chapter 6 2 3 3 page 6 26 The same result is obtained by double click ing in the corresponding row edit a logical DS1 select the desired logical DS1 id and press Edit Logical DS1 The Logical DS1 window pops up cf Chapter 6 2 3 3 page 6 26 The same result is obtained by double click ing in the corresponding row edit a physical DS1 select the desired physical DS1 id and press Edit Physical DS1 The Physical DS1 window pops up cf Chapter 6 2 3 1 page 6 21 remove a logical DS1 Click on Remove Logical DS1 A Warning window pops up displaying the
142. the state of the ADSL drop obtained on demand by the user Possible values Enabled Disabled Testing Unknown Dor mant The Get button can be used to update the display of the Op erational State Service Man Number of ATM Cross Connections This field indicates agement the number of ATM cross connections related to the ADSL port The ATM Cross Connections button provides access to the ATM Cross Connection window Test Manage The Apply button can be used to start the Port BIST Test or ment the Corrupted CRC Test The desired test is selected by means of the option menu ADSL PM Data This button provides access to the ADSL Performance Moni toring Data window AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 5 111 NE management equipment configuration Equipment configuration p See 5 5 5 32 Modify an ADSL drop data applica tion This window is reached from the ADSL Pack window cf Chapter 5 5 5 29 page 5 104 by pressing the Edit Drop button in the ADSL Drop Information field Procedure Complete the following procedure to modify an ADSL drop Step Procedure 1 Use the option menus Physical Drop Id to select the desired ADSL drop If you want to then edit a transmission profile use the option menu Transmission Profile to select the desired profile and press Edit The Transmission Profile window pops up cf Chapter 5 5 5 33 page 5 114 Back in the ADSL Drop window after modifying the profi
143. time cf Chapter 2 2 1 page 2 7 gt NOTE The packages must be re installed in the same paths as the original instal lation otherwise the data cannot be restored 5 If any AEM variable was customized remember to reset it the installation sets all values to default Start the AEM server and at least one client All application windows Users Alarms Configuration should open but will show only the initial information 6 Shut down the AEM Restore the latest backup available cf Chapter 3 6 page 3 38 Re start the AEM server and at least one client Now the re stored data shall be shown and the system will be back at the status prior to the latest backup The process between step 2 and step 6 should not take more than 4 hours If the recovery is not successful call Lucent Technologies Technical Support A good backup policy is imperative in order to minimize the data loss some exam ples can be found in cf Chapter 3 6 4 page 3 43 AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 3 53 System management Disaster recovery mm ee AEM R1 7 3 54 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 User management Contents 4 1 Introduction 41 4 2 User 4 3 4 2 1 Create user 4 3 4 2 2 Modify user 4 5 4 2 3 Delete user 4 7 4 3 Domains 4 8 4 3 1 Create domains 4 8 4 3 2 Modify domains 4 10 4 3 3 Delete domains 4 12 4 4 User groups 4 14 4 4 1 Create user groups 4 14 4 4 2 Modify user groups 4 19 4 4 3 Delete user groups 4 23
144. to a clock until the action has finished This clock pointer is shown over the browsers and over the background map window group map AEM R1 7 06 00 363 211 454 NE management equipment configuration Initial windows E Se The old parent group and the new parent group update their group status to the new group status high severity alarm this group status depends on the domain to which the operator belongs 5 3 4 Status bar Feedback from the NE is displayed on screen as is progress information related to the commands issued by the AEM This feedback is provided by the status bar incorporated at the bottom of screens which execute commands Message area feedback Progress area Progress bar Modify timing source reference Successful Data are being reloaded MN eal Information field Stop Cancel button A Figure 5 6 Status bar example The status bar is composed of four sub areas m Information field Used to display monitoring information by means of two icons i J ae Information not updated Information updated m Message area Used to display feedback It indicates what is being done The last feedback message sent by the NE is displayed until a new com mand is sent or the window is closed There is a tooltip available to show the complete message if the message area is smaller than the message m Progress area Informs the user there are jobs running m Stop Cancel button For comma
145. to deprovision an already provisioned subshelf Cross Connec AP Server This option menu shows all free IAT servers tion Information slot_Id that can be cross connected to the IAT subshelf creation mode or that are cross connected to the provi sioned IAT subshelf edit mode The value NONE can be used to delete the cross connection to the subshelf Server Port This option menu shows all free server ports drop_id that can be cross connected to the selected IAT server creation mode or that are cross connected to the selected IAT server edit mode The value NONE can be used to delete the cross connection to the subshelf Feeder Port This option menu is used to select the feeder port to be used to cross connect the IAT subshelf A grey background indicates that the selected server port is already in use The Label button is used to confirm the changes Provision cross connect the provisioned subshelf Deprovision remove the cross connection to the provi sioned subshelf Vitual Drop In This field contains a table displaying virtual drop information formation This information is presented in a 3 column table The table is sorted by Virtual Drop Id A scroll bar allows navigation through the table Rows in the table can be selected to edit add and remove single row selection logical DSO through the use of the buttons described below m Virtual Drop Id Identifies the port within the AP m Logical DS
146. to install LuAMBB14 NE Data support Processing package instance lt LUAMBB14 gt from for R1 4 installation lt homelocal tmp lucent AnyMediaEMR1 7 gt AnyMedia BB Element Manager Release 1 7 sparc LuAMBB14_36 1 1 kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk AnyMedia Element Manager c 1999 Lucent Technologies kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Package lt LuSysAdm gt SystemAdmin LuSysAdm_36_1 1 have been found in opt lucent AnyMediaEM _R1 7 AnyMedia EM R1 7 path opt lucent AnyMediaEM _R1 7 Package lt LuAM gt Alarms LuAM_36_1 1 have been found in opt lucent AnyMediaEM_R1 7 Package lt LUNER gt NER LUNER_36_1 1 have been found in opt lucent AnyMediaEM_R1 7 Package lt LuNeED gt NetEvenDist LuNeED_36_1 1 have been found in opt lucent AnyMediaEM_R1 7 Package lt LuSec gt Security LuSec_36_1 1 have been found in opt lucent AnyMediaEM_R1 7 Package lt LuShelf gt ConbinedShelf LuShelf_36_1 1 have been found in opt lucent AnyMediaEM_R1 7 Package lt LuSysED gt SystemEventDist LuSysED_36_1 1 have been found in opt lucent AnyMediaEM _R1 7 Package lt LuTrap gt SystemEventDist LuTrap_36_1 1 have been found in opt lucent AnyMediaEM _R1 7 Package lt LuLUMRT gt Lumos Build 3 0 run time have been found in opt lucent LUMOS OK No previous package LuAMBBl4 have been found Using lt gt as the package base directory Processing package information AEM R1 7 363
147. to the user interface become valid only after the restart of the workspace manager The restart must be acknowledged in a window Log out A logout from the system can be initiated 3 3 10 Controls in AEM windows Introduction The windows of the AEM display certain controls buttons text fields etc These controls are the same in all AEM windows and explained in this chapter Grayed controls All controls within a window can be activated by clicking on them only if they are not grayed AEM R1 7 3 12 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 System management General information on keyboard Shelf Protection Tab Text box Menu button Radio button Push button Figure 3 8 Example of an AEM window Convention The following font is used when a button is mentioned e g Close The following elements are used within windows m Push button Each pushbutton is provided with a designation describing its function If you click on the pushbutton the function will be executed If you click on a pushbutton the designation of which is followed by three dots e g Help a window will open where you may set further parameters Push buttons which alter their designation depending on context are also called Label buttons m Check box Check boxes have the same function as an on off switch Each time you click on a check box you will change its toggle status A pressed check box containing a check mark means that th
148. totally in dependent from each other because they are operating on different NEs To open a remote session with an ITM SNC the operator must provide the con nection information Login and Password as for the login into an ITM SNC ses sion for more information cf ITM SNC User Manual Fiber Reach GUI The AEM GUI behavior but not necessarily the performance is not affected by independence any simultaneous Fiber Reach connection running on the platform The operator using the AEM GUI does not need to know about any Fiber Reach ses sions running on the AEM platform The performance of the system could be affected by the load of the hardware but the behavior of the GUI is the same in both cases 5 5 17 1 Start a Fiber Reach session Complete the following procedure to start a Fiber Reach session 1 Type fr ina terminal window which you can start via the workspace manager cf Chapter 3 3 8 page 3 11 and press Return The following message is shown List of available hosts 1 mahp1 2 mascusal4 a Add Host d Del Host q Quit Enter Selection 2 Enter the host number where the ITM SNC is installed from the list of available hosts or enter a for include a new one cf Chapter 5 5 17 2 page 5 172 3 Enter the Login and Password defined on the ITM SNC documentation Now you are able to use the ITM SNC application AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 5 171 NE management equipment configuration Equipment conf
149. trying to open a connection with the telephony agent AEM R1 7 5 38 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 NE management equipment configuration Equipment configuration p ee m CONNECTED The connection between the AEM and the telephony agent is available and the software version currently stored in the telephony agent is supported by the AEM When the association process between the AEM and the data agent is completed the telephony agent state changes to CONNECTED and remains like this until the TL1 communication session is closed on user request or the connection is lost closed 5 5 2 1 Changing connection states The connection state changes can be initiated by the user via the GUI cf Chapter 5 5 1 page 5 35 section Add a network element or they are initiated by the AEM Communication The AEM communicates with the telephony agent by using TL1 commands and file transfer protocol FTP over TCP IP Not connected The user can initiate the connection establishment process with an telephony agent in connection state NOT_CONNECTED After initiating this process the connection state changes to TRYING Trying When the connection state is TRYING the AEM tries to establish a connection with the telephony agent After the successful connection the AEM checks if the AEM supports the software version of the telephony agent If the software version is supported the connection state becomes CONNECTED if not it remains TRY ING and the AEM c
150. up cf Chapter 6 2 3 3 page 6 26 use the corresponding buttons Manual Switch Forced Switch change the network loss value use the slider Network Loss and click on Set get the current service states of the VRT VB click on Get in the Operational State field add a logical DS1 AEM R1 7 use the option menu at the right hand side of the Add button to choose Logi cal DS1 and click on Add The Logical DS1 window pops up cf Chapter 6 2 3 3 page 6 26 Version 1 00 06 00 6 11 Service provisioning Service provisioning telephony p See If you want to then add a logical DSO use the option menu at the right hand side of the Add button to choose Logi cal DSO and click on Add The Logical DSO window pops up cf Chapter 6 2 4 1 page 6 31 open the Physical DS1 List window click on Physical DS1 List The Physical DS1 List window pops up cf Chapter 6 2 2 page 6 17 open the Logical DSO List window click on Logical DSO List The Logical DSO List window pops up cf Chapter 6 2 4 1 page 6 31 close the window Click on Close AEM R1 7 6 12 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 Service provisioning Service provisioning telephony a rss 6 2 1 5 VRI TRO8 window This window provides access to the lists of physical DS1s and logical DSOs as well as allows addition of logical DS1s and logical DSOs to the selected VRT TRO8 Figure 6 6 VRT TR08 window The fol
151. window pops up for IAT Server Setting Loopback for a feeder can be service affect ing Do you want to continue for Physical DS1 Set or Clear Loopback may be service affecting Do you want to continue 4 Enter y and press Return to confirm AEM R1 7 7 32 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 Fault management and maintenance Test management eee ees eae 7 4 2 Data tests 7 4 2 1 ADSL test list Procedure Proceed as follows to view the ADSL test list Step Procedure 1 Select NE in the Network Element Browser and Lists gt ADSL Test via the cursor menu The ADSL Test List window pops up ADSL Test List Figure 7 11 ADSL Test List window This window lists all the tests stored in the data agent In this window it is possible to delete stored tests AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 7 33 Fault management and maintenance Test management p See The following table shows the parameters of this window Parameters Buttons Description NE Name NE name of the selected NE max 30 characters Table This table shows all tests currently stored in the data agent The table is sorted by entities m Test Identifier Indicates the test identifier inside the AFM test number m Access Identifier Indicates the object for which the test has been executed m Type Indicates the test type which has been executed Possible values CRC test BIST Built in shelf test LED test m Status Resul
152. without affecting the functioning of other ap plications Line Test Also called drop test This checks for open circuits short circuits leakages to ground foreign voltages or other faults on the subscriber line that connects an AP port circuit to the CPE The results are used to detect broken or bad quality wires even before the customer realizes a lack of quality LL PLL Permanent Leased Lines A service in which resources are used permanently for the transmission of data between two points The switch is not responsible for setting up this service Locale This is a geographic or political region that shares the same language and customs In this document a locale is also used to refer to the definition of the subset of a user s information technology environment that depends on language and cultural conventions Local Digital Switch LDS This is a switching machine that terminates a TR 303 VRT An example of an LDS is the Lucent 5ESS switch AEM R1 7 GL 6 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 Glossary Localization This is the process of adapting a program for use in a specific locale LOG File This is the file used for listing all actions that have occurred in a system This information is generated and re corded concurrently and sequentially as transactions and events are processed in the system Logical DSO The descriptor used in this document to refer to parameters affecting a DSO 64 kbps service or facility TR 303 logic
153. you click on the Help icon the help index is displayed AEM R1 7 3 4 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 System management General information on keyboard mm ee 3 2 4 Capacity For the recommended server and client platforms the AEM allows for a maximum of m 30 simultaneous users m 600 NEs to be managed 3 3 General information on key board and windows 3 3 1 Keyboard The keyboard offers special keys which are pressed individually or in combination with others to perform specific actions Special keys The most important special keys are m Return to confirm an entry or to start a new line when a text consisting of several lines is entered m Esc Escape to initiate an escape sequence i e the keys pressed after pressing Esc are interpreted as an instruction and not as entered text m Ctrl Control to initiate a control sequence Ctr1 is always used in combination with one or several other keys and represents an instruction m Alt Alternate is pressed in combination with one or more other keys thereby assigning these keys another meaning m Backspace or Del Delete to delete all characters to the left of the cursor Conventions The keys on the keyboard are represented in the text in the following way Ctr1 Backspace A B Two or more of these keys connected by a hyphen indicate that they must be pressed simultaneously Shift Ctr1 A for example means that the A key must be typed while holding d
154. 00 363 211 454 Software installation and commissioning Installation procedure lt files list gt verifying class lt bin gt lt files list gt verifying class lt lib gt Executing postinstall script You have the installation logfile in tmp EM_Install_LuOXNSRT 1log Installation of lt LuOXNSRT gt was successful ObjectStore 5 1 in Processing package instance lt LuOSRT gt from stallation lt home bldr17 LOAD_36 1 1 build lucent AnyMediaEMR1 7 gt ObjectStore 5 1_SP2 Runtime for AnyMedia EM R1 7 sparc solaris 5 1_SP2 Run Time OK No previous package LuOXNSRT have been found Here is a list of your partitions and the free space in each of them Filesystem kbytes used avail capacity Mounted on dev dsk c0t0d0s0 143927 36990 92545 29 dev dsk c0t0d0s4 625262 401569 167420 71 usr dev dsk c0t0d0s3 96455 11359 75451 14 var dev dsk c0t0d0s6 6591133 4383673 2141549 68 homelocal dev dsk c0t0d0s5 240399 8597 207763 4 var cache swap 1201288 72 1201216 1 tmp masstc1 export1 b1d 2 b1dr17 51014048 49193336 1480632 98 home bldr17 masstcl export1 bld 2 syi_pl 51014048 49193336 1480632 98 home syi_pl Enter install directory opt lucent OS51_SP2 q 20 Type a valid path where the package files must be placed and press Re turn Or press Return to accept the default path Using lt gt as the package base directory Processing package information Processing system information
155. 05181 15 105669 07 105284 25 patches recommended by SUN and 106255 01 patch 3 TCP ports The following ports MUST be available in order to succesfully run the AnyMedia EM 1570 Orbix daemon uses the TCP port 1570 in order to wait for incoming connections that use the Orbix protocol 1591 to 1641 As Corba servers are activated by the Orbix daemon they are assigned a port so that clients can communicate with it It is essential that these ports are not used by any process on the SAME SUBNET DOMAIN 4 The install_AMEM script runs on K shell lt ksh gt environment 5 At least the system environment variable PATH MUST include the paths sr bin usr sbin and uas ucb for instance export PATH SPATH usr bin usr sbin usr ucb 6 The time zone MUST be the same for the Any Media Client lt GUI gt LUMOS and Network Element This parameter is needed for installing the Any Media Client KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK Do you like to continue y n q 3 Type y and press Return to continue or type n or q and press Return to exit AnyMedia NB EM R1 7 installation Please choose one or more Band mode separated by blank 1 LuAMBB112 lt BroadBand R1 1 2 installation gt 2 LuAMBB14 lt BroadBand R1 4 installation gt Enter selection q AEM R1 7 2 56 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 Software installation and commissioning Installation procedure p See 4 Type 2 and press Return Packages
156. 1 00 06 00 3 31 System management System administration mm ee Table 3 21 Module group types in a certain package Package Module group type Narrowband AMU_NB_R121 Narrowband AMU_NB_R122 Narrowband AMU_NB_R170 Broadband AMU_BB_R112 Broadband AMU_BB_R14 Narrowband Broadband CommAgentEventDistributor Narrowband Broadband ConfigEventDistributor Administration Narrowband Broadband AccessPolicyManager Administration Narrowband Broadband AuthorizationService Administration Narrowband Broadband SecurityEventDistributor Administration Narrowband Broadband LogRead Administration Narrowband Broadband LogWrite Broadband LogWritePerf Administration Narrowband Broadband FileBrowser Narrowband Broadband CombinedShelf Broadband TrapDispatcher Broadband PerformanceConfig Administration Narrowband Broadband SystemAdmin Administration Narrowband Broadband WatchDaemon Administration Narrowband Broadband SystemEventDistributor Administration Narrowband Broadband NamingService Administration Narrowband Broadband OrbixDaemon Narrowband Broadband TestScheduler Table 3 22 Module types in a certain module group type Module group type Module type AlarmRead AlarmRead AlarmUpdate AlarmUpdate RemoveAlm AlarmDistributor AlarmDistributor AlarmEventDistributor HighestSeverityAlarmEventDis HighestSeverityAlarmEventDistributor tributor NER NER NEE
157. 1 454 Version 1 00 06 00 7 III ee Contents AEM R1 7 1 7 IV Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 Fault management and maintenance 7 1 Overview This chapter provides you with informations about m basics on the alarm management m basics on alarms m maintenance actions if certain alarms are pending m using the Alarm Viewer m performing test actions with the test management m basics on information management e g connection states 7 2 Alarm management 7 2 1 Overview The main function of the alarm management is to manage the AnyMedia Element Manager AEM and network element NE related alarms that are registered in the element manager system EMS For the list of the alarms generated by the management system refer to Chapter 7 5 4 page 7 41 For the list of alarms concerning network element refer to Chapter 7 5 5 page 7 43 Once the communication connection between the AEM and an NE is established the AEM clears the not connected NE alarm indication if it exist and starts an alarms and environment alarms synchronization process between the AEM alarm database and active NE alarms Finally the AEM will try to update its view of NE configuration data and will start a synchronization process between the AEM data set and the NE configuration information NE NVDS The NE database is always the master AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 7 1 Fault management and maintenance Alarm management p ee The database does no
158. 1 Logical DS1 window The following table shows the view edit option of this window Parameters Buttons Description NE Name NE name of the selected NE max 30 characters AEM R1 7 6 26 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 Service provisioning Service provisioning telephony Parameters Buttons Logical DS1 Logical DS1 In formation Description These fields display the logical DS1 id by means of two op tion menus m The first menu contains the VRT VB list in where it is possible to create a logical DS1 Possible values v3fdr 1 for TR 303 v8fdr 1 20 for TR 08 ina 1 20 for INA m The second menu contains the logical DS1 number in side the corresponding VRT VB Selecting a VRT VB first option menu results in an update of the second option menu logical DS1 number gt NOTE Logical DS1 numbers which are not yet cross con nected are marked with a white background add function is possible the other feeders are marked with a grey background edit function is possible Frame Format This option menu shows the possible frame formats Three possible values ESF Extended SuperFrame FS SuperFrame with Datalink or SF SuperFrame Default values are m ESF for TR 303 not reprovisionable m FS for TR 08 DS1 a not reprovisionable m SF for TR 08 DS1 b d not reprovisionable m ESF for INA ESF or SF Values are only changeable for INA VB Line Code This option menu shows the l
159. 14 Cancel 3 14 Close 3 14 OK 3 14 5 18 5 C CD ROM XVIII Channel Unit 5 5 Check box 3 13 CIT port protocol profiles A 3_ Click mouse 3 5 Client application 3 16 Close button 3 14 COMDAC protection mode simplex 5 140 5 143 COMDAC Protection State 5 141 COMM_PROBLEM 7 45 Comments on document XIX COMMUNICATION_LOST 7 45 CONFIG_AO_NOT_PROCESS 7 46 CONFIG_EVENT_NOT_PROCESS 7 47 Connection states BB agent AEM 5 38 5 42 Control key 3 5 Controlled Objects 4 25 Craft interface terminal A 3_ Create domain 4 8 user 4 3 user group 4 14 Cursor aspects 3 6_ Cursor menu 3 10 CX_CONN_NOT_VISIBLE 7 48 Cancel button 3 14 5 D Data Communications Network definition A 2 AEM R1 7 Version 1 00 06 00 IN 1 Index Database Archive 3 38 Backup 3 38 Full backup 3 38 Incremental backup 3 38 Off line backup 3 38 On line backup 3 38 Restore 3 38 DCN configurations A 5_ DCN introduction A 1 Delete domain 4 12 user 4 7 user group 4 23 Delete key 3 5 disk space 2 2 Documentation XVIII Comment procedure XIX Packaging and format XVIII Domain Create 4 8 Delete 4 12 Modify 4 10 Double click mouse 3 5_ Drag mouse 3 6 Drop down list box 3 14 U E Environment Alarms 7 39 Escape key 3 5 External LAN AEM system interface A 5_ External LAN interface profiles A 4 External system LAN interface A 3_ F Fault clearance 1 27 identification 1 26 source 1 27 fa
160. 2 Creating data bases Starting PCDbCreate process exit OK 2692 Killed orbixd daemon pid 2692 have been killed Was mine You have the installation logfile in tmp EM_Install_LuPerCo log Installation of lt LuPerCo gt was successful AEM R1 7 2 38 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 Software installation and commissioning Installation procedure p Se NE Event Distribu Processing package instance lt LuNeED gt from tor installation lt homelocal tmp lucent AnyMediaEMR1 7 gt AnyMedia Element Manager Auxiliar Even Dist Release 1 7 administration sparc LuNeED_36_1 1 kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk AnyMedia Element Manager c 1999 Lucent Technologies kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Package lt LuSysAdm gt SystemAdmin LuSysAdm_36_1 1 have been found in opt lucent AnyMediaEM_R1 7 OK No previous package LuNeED have been found Using lt gt as the package base directory Processing package information Processing system information 1 package pathname is already properly installed Verifying disk space requirements Checking for conflicts with packages already installed Checking for setuid setgid programs Installing AnyMedia Element Manager Auxiliar Even Dist Release 1 7 administration as lt LuNeED gt Installing part 1 of 1 lt files list gt verifying class lt common gt Installation of lt LuNeED gt was s
161. 2 3 5 FX S TI 1 2 3 5 Service Details windows Overview The DX4 N R 4 wire duplex signaling normal simplex and reverse simplex is applicable to the AUA41B channel unit which provides one channel of service to be used in the MDS2 MDS2B The FX O P 1 2 3 5 4 wire foreign Xoffice no toll diversion with toll diversion LSNS LSRS GSNS LSNS is applicable to the SPQ444 channel unit which is intended for use in non locally switched loop and ground start special services loop start normal simplex loop start reverse simplex ground start normal sim plex ground start reverse simplex The FX S T 1 2 3 5 4 wire foreign exchange no toll diversion with toll diversion LSNS LSRS GSNS LSNS is applicable to the AUA41B channel unit which provides one channel of service to be used in the MDS2 MDS2B loop start nor mal simplex loop start reverse simplex ground start normal simplex ground start reverse simplex ce Details Information Figure 6 24 Logical DSO window DX4N Service Details Parameters Description Transmit Atten uator This slider can be used to define the transmit attenuator pa rameter Possible values 0 16 5 step 0 1 Default 16 5 Receive Attenu This slider can be used to define the receive attenuator pa ator rameter Possible values 0 16 5 step 0 1 Default 16 5 AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 6 51 Service provisioning Service provisioning te
162. 2 of 4 contains the telephony specific part of the AEM product Source Path tmp lucent AnyMediaEMR1 7 L_ readme txt LuAMNB17 I license txt L_ install AMEM_nb Figure 2 2 AEM R1 7 distribution tree CD ROM 2 AEM R1 7 2 4 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 Software installation and commissioning General Installation scripts TCP ports Time zone Update process en vironment 363 211 454 AnyMedia Element Manager 24 Channel AEM Release 1 7 Disk 3 of 4 contains the data specific part of the AEM product Source Path tmp lucent AnyMediaEMR1 7 readme txt LuAMBB112 license txt LuAMBB14 install_ AMEM_bb Figure 23 AEM R1 7 distribution tree CD ROM 3 AnyMedia Element Manager 24 Channel AEM Release 1 7 Disk 4 of 4 contains the PC GUI application of the AEM product Source Path tmp lucent readme txt license txt install_AMEM bat anymediaemr1 7 zip jre 1_2 2 005 win i cc32d473 Figure 2 4 AEM R1 7 distribution tree CD ROM 4 The install_ AMEM_gen install_ AMEM_nb or install_ AMEM_bb scripts run in the korn shell lt ksh gt environment The install_AMEM bat on CD ROM 4 runs on Mi crosoft windows NT The following TCP ports must be available in order to successfully run the AEM R1 7 m 1570 Orbix daemon uses the TCP port 1570 in order to wait for incoming connections that use the Orbix protocol m 1575 Used by Lumos
163. 20 INA VBs AEM R1 7 Version 1 00 06 00 6 1 Service provisioning Service provisioning telephony E SeSe in any combination not exceeding 20 feeder DS1s 4 DS1 feeders for each IO DS1 T1 cross connec T1 cross connections provide feeder bandwidth to VRTs and VBs A maximum of tions 20 T1 cross connections can be created they are limited by the maximum num ber of DS1 feeder ports in the system Logical BW management entities in the AnyMedia Access System Physical distribution port circuits in APs and CUs LLN CRV 1 Feeder 1 PLN 1 LOG FDR DS1 1 Feeder 4 LLN CRV 2048 Feeder 1 LOG FDR DS1 1 TR 08 bg LOG FDR DS1 4 Feeder 4 T1 Cross TO Cross connection connection function function LOG FDR DS1 1 TR 08 LOG FDR DS1 4 VRT 20 Feeder 1 INA VB 1 Feeder 4 Physical DS1 feeder port circuits in I O DSis INA VB 20 Provisionable LLNs gt 640 LOG FDR Logical feeder LLN Logical line PLN Physical line Figure 6 1 _Cross connection diagram TO cross connec TO cross connections link a distribution port a tip ring pair to a VRT or VB A tions maximum of 609 TO cross connections 608 one for the ROC can be created in the AnyMedia Access System they are limited by the maximum number of distri bution ports in the system DSO data Each logical DSO may contain provisioning data for its associated physical sub scri
164. 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 2 57 Software installation and commissioning Installation procedure p See Processing system information 2 package pathnames are already properly installed Verifying disk space requirements WARNING The filesystem has 185076 free blocks The current installation requires 203474 blocks which includes a required 150 block buffer for open deleted files 18398 more blocks are needed Do you want to continue with the installation of lt LUAMBB14 gt y n y 5 Type Y and press Return Checking for conflicts with packages already installed Checking for setuid setgid prograns This package contains scripts which will be executed with super user permission during the process of installing this package Do you want to continue with the installation of lt LUAMBB14 gt y n 6 Type Y and press Return Installing AnyMedia BB Element Manager Release 1 7 as lt LUAMBB14 gt Installing part 1 of 1 lt files list gt verifying class lt common gt Executing postinstall script Package lt LuOSRT gt ObjectStore 5 1_SP2 Run Time have been found in opt lucent OS51_SP2 AEM R1 7 2 58 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 Software installation and commissioning Installation procedure Creating data bases You have the installation logfile in tmp EM_Install_LuAMBB14 1log Installation of lt LuAMBBl4 gt was successful The package lt LUAMBB14 gt is n
165. 2FXLS 2FX 2RVO 2NOS ISDN 4DO only for ROC Data EBS AC LR NO1 NO2 BRI TO DPT DX4 N R FX O P 1 2 3 5 FX S T 1 2 3 5 EM4 C H PLR 1 2 ETO4 FXO OCU 1 2 3 SW56 TD O SI A B C D TO4 2RVT 2LO COIN2 DFLT2 DPO DS01 DS02 FXS EMO FXOD FXSO NO OCUO Unknown The Add Logical DS0 button provides access to the Logi cal DSO window cf Chapter 6 2 4 3 page 6 35 In this case the physical DSO id will be transferred This button is enabled only if a physical DSO id is selected with no cross connection to a logical DSO id The Edit Logical DSO button provides access to the Logi cal DSO window cf Chapter 6 2 4 3 page 6 35 where the operator will be able to edit the logical DSO parameters whenever this is possible This button is enabled only if a physical DSO cross connected to a logical DSO is selected The Remove Logical DSO button removes the cross con nection selected in the list see above AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 5 77 NE management equipment configuration Equipment configuration p See Table 5 1 CU Cards Possible Values Card Type Apparatus Code CLEI SPQ429 SPQ429 SAC1AKOAAA SPQ442 SPQ442 SAC1AHOAAA AUA41B AUA41B 5SC3HJEAAA AUA45B AUA45B S5SCUUJ5AAB AUA75 AUA75 5SC1FF2AXX SPQ452 SPQ452 5SCTFFGAAB AUA200 AUA200 5SCTBODAAA AUA232 AUA232 5SCTCBOAAA SPQ444 SPQ444 SAC1BFOAAB SPQ454 SPQ454 SAC1BGOAAB MCU 5205 MCU 5205 5SC26TI 2
166. 3 page 5 94 Figure 5 34 AFM Feeder window The following table shows the view edit options of this window Parameters Buttons Description NE Name NE name of the selected NE max 30 characters AFM Feeder This option menu displays the available feeder ports which Port can be selected AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 5 99 NE management equipment configuration Equipment configuration p See Parameters Buttons Description Feeder Parame Timing Source This text field shows the used timing ters source Free Running or Looped Timed Line Length This option menu can be used to select the desired line length Possible value Low Level 0 224 feet High Level 225 450 feet Frame Format This option menu is used to select one of the two frame formats HEC PLCP Cell Scrambling This check box can be used to enable dis able the scrambling of cells HSC Single Bit Error Second This check box can be used to discard all cells with uncorrected header errors Possible values Enabled Disabled PM Enable This check box can be used to enable disable the creation of performance monitoring data Operational The option menu Administrative State provides the possi State ble states that can be used Locked and Unlocked gt NOTE The communication with daisy chained NEs can be lost when changing from Unlocked to Locked The field Service State shows the state of the AFM feeder obtai
167. 3 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 7 3 Fault management and maintenance Alarm management ee m Shelf View Window This window cf Figure 7 2 page 7 6 provides general inventory provi sioning and alarm information through the circuit packs LEDs Each slot shows the card type inserted and its alarms via a red FLT LED if avail able If the slot is empty no card will be shown See table below for the list of LEDs provided in each pack The table de scribes the color used when the LED is ON or blinking If the LED is OFF the color black is used Table 7 1 LED meanings Pack IO DS1 Meanings m Lit during pack failure m Flashes when the pack executes off line self test ACT green Lit when the pack is service active yellow Lit when a fault or facility alarm occurs on the in service received DS1 port 1 yellow Lit when a fault or facility alarm occurs on the in service received DS1 port 2 CLF3 yellow Lit when a fault or facility alarm occurs on the in service received DS1 port 3 yellow Lit when a fault or facility alarm occurs on the in service received DS1 port 4 COMDAC FLT m Lit when a fault is detected on the pack m Flashes during software download and turn up Indicates that this COMDAC is active CR red Lit when the highest severity alarm is critical MJ red Lit when the highest severity alarm is major Lit when the highest severity alarm is minor NE yellow Lit when th
168. 3 Page Setup dialog actions If you want to then select the orientation of the print out click one of the radio buttons below Orientation start printing and close the window click on OK close the print window without printing click on Cancel 3 5 2 Print dialog Print dialog The Print cf Figure 3 16 and the Page Setup cf Figure 3 15 dialog pop up af ter the selection of Print Table in a window Figure 3 16 shows an example of the Print dialog Print Copies in Print to Printer a2 len Nava Printing Print Command options EEE Print Cancel Figure 3 16 Print dialog Actions in print The following table provides an overview of the possible actions which can be per dialog formed in the Print dialog Table 3 24 Print dialog actions If you want to then print multiple copies enter the number of copies in Copies print to a printer enter the name of the printer in Printer print to a file enter the name of the file in File have a title over the printed pages enter the title in Banner Page Title AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 3 35 System management Print out reports mm ee Table 3 24 Print dialog actions If you want to then apply UNIX print options enter the options in Print Command Options start printing and close the window click on Print close the print window without printing click on Cancel 3 5 3 Preview Frame dialo
169. 3 Transmission Profile window data ap plication This window is used to create modify remove ADSL transmission profiles Figure 5 38 Transmission Profile window The following table shows the view edit options of this window Parameters Buttons Description NE Name NE name of the selected NE max 30 characters Profile This option menu contains the available profiles for editing and NEW for creating a new profile Format txp 1 128 gt NOTE The first four default profiles txp 1 to txp 4 can nei ther be edited nor removed 1 lite_flexible_ default 2 full_flexible_default 3 lite_explicit_default 4 full_explicit_default AEM R1 7 5 114 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 NE management equipment configuration Equipment configuration p Se Parameters Buttons Description Profile Data Profile Pattern This option menu is used to get an example for a new profile It is enabled only if NEW is selected in the option menu above Otherwise the name of the selected pro file is displayed Line Type This option menu shows the possible sub types for a new profile Full Lite Type of Rate Adaption This option menu is used to select one of the following values Explicit default Flexible Profile Data Op The parameters in this field are enabled or disabled depend tions Rate ing on the selected value in the Type of Rate Adaption field The following two parameters are enabled only if the Typ
170. 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 1 31 Functional description Network configuration 1 5 2 AEM server with clients and without external OS LAN AEM server and one or more clients connected to the NEs using a LAN Client AEM server TCP IP LAN Figure 1 10 AEM server with clients and without external OS LAN AEM R1 7 1 32 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 Functional description Network configuration E Se 1 5 3 AEM server without clients and with external OS WAN AEM server connected to the NEs using a LAN and connected to one or more ex ternal OSs using a WAN link WAN LINK ISDN PSTN X 25 SONET SDH ATM TCP IP PPP Bridge Router TCP IP DO p i ee AEM server TCP IP LAN NE Sy fe fe fe ye fe fe NE NE Figure 1 11 AEM server without clients and with external OS WAN AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 1 33 Functional description Network configuration p SeSe 1 5 4 AEM Server with Clients and external OS WAN AEM server and one or more clients connected to the NEs using a WAN link and connected to one ore more external OSs using a LAN connection m OT cy OW AE oy Client Clien Client ee eid Pr Z N N odem ISDN
171. 5 5 1 page 5 54 CTU DTP100 Chapter 5 5 5 4 page 5 61 AP Telephony LPU116 LPA300 LPA380 Chapter 5 5 5 7 page 5 66 LPA350 LPA300B LPA300C LPA150 IAT Server LPS100 Chapter 5 5 5 17 page 5 83 AFM_DS3 LPA900 Chapter 5 5 5 23 page 5 94 ADSL LPA400 LPA400B LPA408 Chapter 5 5 5 29 page 5 104 The Shelf View window displays different colors for different types of LEDs The following table describes the colors that are used for each LED type inside every card type The table describes the colors used when the LED is ON or flashing If the LED is OFF the color black is used Pack LED Color Meanings IO DS1 FLT red m Lit during pack failure m Flashes when the pack executes off line self test ACT green Lit when the pack is service active CLF1 yellow Lit when a fault or facility alarm occurs on the in service received DS1 port 1 CLF2 yellow Lit when a fault or facility alarm occurs on the in service received DS1 port 2 CLF3 yellow Lit when a fault or facility alarm occurs on the in service received DS1 port 3 CLF4 yellow Lit when a fault or facility alarm occurs on the in service received DS1 port 4 COMDAC FLT red m Lit when a fault is detected on the pack m Flashes during software download and turn up ACT green Indicates that this COMDAC is active CR red Lit when the highest severity alarm is critical MJ red Lit when the highest severity alarm is major MN yellow Lit when the
172. 5 Equipment configuration Overview Configuration of specific equipment data is the process of preparing the AEM for control of the AnyMedia Access System by configuring and setting the required parameters First the AEM must have some knowledge of the equipment The AEM gets this data during the NE creation process which is usually followed by pack configura tion Then during NE management some other tasks regarding equipment configura tion can be performed by the AEM e g date amp time management timing synchro nization management protection management etc Finally if the NE is no longer managed by the AEM it is deleted from the AEM da tabase Provisioning model The AnyMedia Access System uses a provisioning model to provide service which means that the circuit must be prepared to provide service by defining its function and setting of required options For example for creation of a service for a subscriber line it is first necessary to provision the corresponding application pack AP AP provisioning set up a desired pack type in a desired slot To be fully functional an AP must not only be inserted but also provisioned and the provisioned pack type must fit the actual type of the inserted pack A pack can be provisioned and configured by the AEM even when the slot is still empty The description of equipment configuration is divided in three main sections m Add a network element cf Chapter 5 5 1 page 5 35 m Edit v
173. 51014048 49174256 1499704 98 home syi_pl Enter install directory opt lucent LUMOS q 5 Type a valid path where the package files must be placed and press Re turn Or press Return to accept the default path Checking your DNS domain name The DNS domain name found was es lucent com What is your DNS domain name default es lucent com q 6 Type your DNS domain name and press Return or press Return to ac cept the default name AEM R1 7 2 10 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 Software installation and commissioning Installation procedure p Se Select owner and group for package files NBR USER GROUP 1 halt other 2 root other 3 smtp root 4 verl staff Enter selection q 7 Type 4 and press Return User verl and Group staff have been selected Using lt gt as the package base directory Processing package information Processing system information Verifying disk space requirements Checking for conflicts with packages already installed Checking for setuid setgid prograns This package contains scripts which will be ex ecuted with super user permission during the process of installing this package Do you want to continue with the installation of lt LuLUMRT gt y n 8 Type y and press Return Installing Lumos Runtime for AnyMedia EM R1 7 as lt LuLUMRT gt Installing part 1 of 1 lt files list gt verifying class lt none gt Executing posti
174. 54 Version 1 00 06 00 2 51 Software installation and commissioning Installation procedure E See 1 Before attempting to install the application please read the readme txt file 2 AnyMedia EM R1 7 runs on SUN SPARC Solaris 2 computers running Solaris 2 6 plus security and Y2000 and packs 105490 07 105568 13 105210 19 106040 12 105633 21 106409 01 105181 15 105669 07 105284 25 patches recommended by SUN and 106255 01 patch 3 TCP ports The following ports MUST be available in order to succesfully run the AnyMedia EM 1570 Orbix daemon uses the TCP port 1570 in order to wait for incoming connections that use the Orbix protocol 1591 to 1641 As Corba servers are activated by the Orbix daemon they are assigned a port so that clients can communicate with it It is essential that these ports are not used by any process on the SAME SUBNET DOMAIN 4 The install_AMEM script runs on K shell lt ksh gt environment 5 At least the system environment variable PATH MUST include the paths sr bin usr sbin and uas ucb for instance export PATH PATH usr bin usr sbin usr ucb 6 The time zone MUST be the same for the Any Media Client lt GUI gt LUMOS and Network Element This parameter is needed for installing the Any Media Client KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK Do you like to continue y n q 3 Type y and press Return to continue or type n or q and press Return to exit AnyMedia NB EM R1 7
175. 6 00 1 27 Functional description Working with AEM p Se Interactions Faults software or hardware the cause of which the AEM cannot eliminate itself between operator by means of a recovery mechanism must then be handled by the user The AEM and AEM supports this The AEM first displays the fault on the user interface The user then initiates appropriate measures to clear the fault and or to maintain network opera tion This includes access to faulty network units and the redirection of the net work traffic The AEM supports both Initiation of main Sometimes additional maintenance actions are necessary to clear a fault For ex tenance actions ample some network disturbances can also originate in hardware faults Such hardware faults often require the faulty component to be replaced and this can only be done by maintenance personnel gt NOTE More detailed information about maintenance actions is provided in Chapter 7 Fault clearance Once the fault has been cleared the alarm is reset automatically 1 4 3 2 Network modification Types of network Usually network operation amp surveillance requires structural modifications in the modification network The AEM supports this There are two types of network modifications m installation or removal of NEs m modification of NEs 1 4 3 2 1 Installation and removal of an NE Installation of an For installing a new NE in an existing network the following steps must be carried
176. 63 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 6 31 Service provisioning Service provisioning telephony p See Parameters Buttons Selection Crite ria E E Logical DSO List Description Radio buttons are used to define the list that will be dis played in the field Logical DSO List see below All VRT The list displays all logical TOs currently present in the NE for all VRT VBs TR 303 TR 08 INA In all these cases except TR 303 a non editable option list is available showing the pos sible options Selection of one of these VRT VB ids au tomatically sets the corresponding radio button If no VRT VB id is selected the radio button is not editable i e the user will not be able to set it Possible values vrt303 or ALL for TR 303 1 20 or ALL for TR 08 1 20 or ALL for INA The information in this field is displayed in a table Logical DSO id Indicates the logical DSO id within the VRT VB id Possible values v3dp 1 1 2048 for TR 303 v8dp 1 20 1 96 for TR 08 inadsO 1 20 1 24 for INA Physical DSO Id Displays the physical DSO id cross connected to the logical DSO id shown in the row Possible values drop 1 1 16 1 32 for APs m2drop 1 1 24 1 4 for CUs GSFN Generic signalling function The following val ues are possible DFLT default 2LS 2GS Coin 2FXLS 2FX 2RVO 2NOS ISDN 4DO only for ROC Data EBS AC LR NO1 NO2 BRI TO DPT DX4 N R FX O P 1
177. 7 4 1 4 page 7 31 Loopback test at the feeder side cf Chapter 7 4 1 5 page 7 31 The following test options are available for data application ADSL test list cf Chapter 7 4 2 1 page 7 33 ADSL corrupted CRC test cf Chapter 7 4 2 2 page 7 35 ADSL port built in self test cf Chapter 7 4 2 3 page 7 37 AEM R1 7 Version 1 00 06 00 7 25 Fault management and maintenance Test management IT eee ae Groups and NEs M Figure 7 8 Groups and NEs Management window 7 4 1 Telephony tests 7 4 1 1 Port test Purpose By means of a port test you are able to run a series of self diagnostic routines for a particular port on a specified AP except AFM ADSL APs and CUs on MDS2 or MDS2B subshelves NE R1 7 0 gt NOTE The port test can be executed via GUI and via TL1 command 7 4 1 1 1 Port test via GUI Procedure Proceed as follows to start a port test and view the test result Step Procedure 1 Open one of the following windows m Telephony Application Pack window cf Chapter 5 5 5 7 m Logical DSO window cf Chapter 6 2 4 3 AEM R1 7 7 26 Version1 00 06 00 363 211 454 Fault management and maintenance Test management y y yj ees eee 2 Select the user port where you intend the test to run 3 Use the option menu in the Test Management field to select Port Test and click on Apply After confirming the test execution a Warning window pops up showing the following message Port Tes
178. A 6 2 1 Configuration of the router The router at central office need to be configured The minimal requirements for the router for supporting this scenario are a Minimal WAN interface requirements The router must have one or more ATM DS3s interfaces with the ATM net work or any other physical interface e g STM 1 DS1 depending on the edge ATM switch to interface with It is in charge of mediating from 10BaseT MAC amp LLC1 IP to DS3 ATM AALS 802 2 LLC 802 2 SNAP IP The logical WAN interface should be compatible with that of the connected ATM switch e g Support of UNI 3 1 ATM cell switching This router must support RFC 1483 multiprotocol over ATM encapsulation since AFM sup ports it m Minimal LAN interface requirements The router must have one or two for cascading purpose Ethernet IEEE 802 3 10BaseT 100BaseT ports In case of two LAN ports LAN to LAN routing should be supported The configuration tasks to be performed on router are m Configure ATM DS3 interface m Configure LAN interface m Configure ATM PVCs inside the ATM DS3 interfaces m Create routing tables for both AFM and COMDAC e g those IP packets to be sent to COMDAC and AFM addresses should be routed to the IP ad dress of the related PVC AEM R1 7 A 10 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 Data communications network DCN configuration Recommended DCN configurations mm ee A 6 2 2 Configuration of AnyMedia Access System A 6 2 2 1 Configurat
179. A router is more powerful than a bridge it reduces the traffic on a LAN more than a bridge because the IP address is evaluated for traffic control S Security Management This restricts access based upon the establishment of log in procedures and an associated set of passwords Screen locks are used as well User access is based upon domain partitioning Controls the access to the data and capabilities inherent within a fixed partition of the network including unbundling Server A network element that waits for requests from clients to perform specific tasks This is the function performed by the AnyMedia Access System Server Application This is a set of server processes that perform a certain function AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 GL 9 Glossary ee Server Host This is the machine where the system server modules are installed Server Module This is the module that provides a subset of the system services Service This is a piece of functionality provided by a server module ServiceState of an object or entity This represents the current availability status of an associated resource or service in the NE from the management point of view e g memory administration maintenance Session This is the active communication link between a client in the context of this document the client will be the AEM NB and a server in the context of this document the server will be the AnyMedia Access System for Narr
180. AA MCU 5405 MCU 5405 5SC26TO2ZAA 5 5 5 14 Modify a CU Procedure Complete the following procedure to view edit the CU data Step Procedure 1 Select NE gt MDS2 MDS2B Shelf gt CU in the Network Element Browser and Edit via the cursor menu or single click on the pack CU in MDS2 MDS2B Shelf View window The Channel Unit window pops up If you want to then change the required state use the check box Slot required add a logical DSO select a row in the Physical DSO Infor mation list with no cross connection and press Add Logical DSO0 The Logical DSO window pops up cf Chapter 6 2 4 3 page 6 35 AEM R1 7 5 78 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 NE management equipment configuration ee If you want to Equipment configuration then edit a logical DSO remove a cross connection select the desired Logical DSO id in exit the window select a row in the Physical DSO Infor mation list with an existing cross con nection and press Edit Logical DSO The Logical DSO window pops up cf Chapter 6 2 4 3 page 6 35 The same result will be obtained by double clicking in the corresponding row the Physical DSO Information list and press Remove Logical DSO0 A Warning window pops up displaying the following message Logical DSO will be removed Ok to proceed gt NOTE If the logical DSO is red lined the following warning message pops up Redlined logical DSO
181. AM VCI This field shows the VCI used to communicate with the NE Possible values 32 63 only 32 if OAM VPI Shelf VPI The Apply button is used to confirm the changes in the text fields above gt NOTE If one of the parameters is changed the communica tion with the NE could be lost The information in this field is displayed in a table m AFM Feeder Id Id of the feeder port m Administrative State Administrative state of the feeder port Locked Unlocked AFM Feeder The Edit button provides access to the AFM Feeder window This button is enabled only if a feeder has been selected Reset This button is used to reset the AFM pack AEM R1 7 5 96 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 NE management equipment configuration 5 5 5 24 Procedure 363 211 454 Modify an AFM data application Equipment configuration Complete the following procedure to modify an AFM pack Step Procedure 1 Select NE gt Main Shelf gt LPA900 in the Network Element Browser and Edit via the cursor menu or select View gt Object via the menu bar or single click on AFM _DS3 in the Shelf View window The AFM window pops up If you want to then edit the location information edit the parameters in the field Loca tion Information and press Apply edit the service information edit the inband management channel gt NOTE If one of the parameters is changed the communication with
182. B provides a transport mechanism that makes connected servers loca tion platform and implementation transparent to their clients making applications easier to distribute and scale Protocol The protocol used by the ORB is the internet interoperability protocol IIOP 1 3 1 3 2 Repository Introduction The repository contains all the AEM information that must be persistent It is sup ported by an object oriented database ObjectStore and the underlying operating file system All components of the system have direct access to the repository to store retrieve their own data Contained Information in the repository includes information m NE inventory for each NE the hardware identifiers and the software versions m equipment and service provisioning data m history and security logs m external system communication parameters m AEM configuration data m alarms cache 1 3 1 4 Graphical user interface GUD Introduction The Java based GUI is responsible for putting up forms collecting user input commands and data and routing it on to the correct component It also receives data from the relevant process which it uses to update its display The GUI has di rect access to the services provided by the AEM through the ORB Functionality The GUI provides the following functionality features features AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 1 17 Functional description System and software architecture p Se m Support TL1 mes
183. C SPQ or AUA channel units and to serve up to 96 DSO rate services The MDS2 MDS2B Shelf is used to provide specials via SPQ AUA Channel Units A maximum of one MDS2 MDS2B Shelf is supported per AnyMedia Access Sys tem The shelf can serve up to 96 DSOs in 24 slots each MDSU pack on the AnyMedia Access System shelf can serve up to 48 DSOs and up to 12 channel units CU The MDSU APs primarily serve as pass through for the PCM trans mission and the UART messages All control messages to and from the MDS2 MDS2B shelf are routed through the MDSU packs the MDSU 1 pack serves the first 12 slots slots 1 through 12 on the MDS2 the MDSU 2 pack serves the remaining 12 slots 13 through 24 The MDS2 MDS2B shelf may be equipped so that only half of the shelf is opera tional 12 channel units In this case only one MDSU is needed in the AnyMedia shelf A partially equipped half MDS2 MDS2B shelf requires one power test unit PTU and one MSC The MDSUs utilize the same timing signals as the narrowband APs A single 8 MHz clock and 8 kHz sync are supplied by an MDSU to an MCS in the MDS2 AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 5 3 NE management equipment configuration Overview of the controlled systems ee MSD2B for timing the MDS2 MSD2B link Side selection of the clock and sync from the COMDACs is performed by the MDSU The MDS2 shelf shown in Figure 5 2 is arranged to accommodate 12 CU packs one PTU and one MSC pack per section
184. C in the Network Element Browser and Edit via the cursor menu or single click on the pack MSC in MDS2 MDS2B Shelf View window The MSC window pops up If you want to then unprovision the MSC use the option menu Provisioned Ap paratus Code in the field Provision ing Information to select None The Common AP window pops up cf Chapter 5 5 5 5 page 5 63 change the required state use the check box Slot required exit the window click on Close AEM R1 7 5 72 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 NE management equipment configuration Equipment configuration p Se 5 5 5 11 PTU Window The power test unit PTU pack provides power converters to distribute 5V and 5V power to the CUs and 5V power to the MSC Figure 5 27 PTU window This window contains all information related to PTU pack It can be displayed even when the pack is not plugged in The following table shows the view edit options of the PTU window Parameters Buttons Description Action NE Name NE name of the selected NE max 30 characters Slot Id This text field shows the slot in which the PTU is plugged in Possible values ptu 1 1 2 AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 5 73 NE management equipment configuration Equipment configuration p See Parameters Buttons Description Action Inventory Infor The read only text fields provide the following information mation Card Type 11 character mnemonic used to id
185. Chapter 6 2 3 3 page 6 26 add a logical DSO use the option menu at the right hand side of the Add button to choose Logi cal DSO and click on Add The Logical DSO window pops up cf Chapter 6 2 4 3 page 6 35 open the Physical DS1 List window click on Physical DS1 List The Physical DS1 List window pops up cf Chapter 6 2 2 page 6 17 open the Logical DSO List window click on Logical DSO List The Logical DSO List window pops up cf Chapter 6 2 4 1 page 6 31 close the window Click on Close AEM R1 7 6 16 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 Service provisioning Service provisioning telephony a Voss 6 2 2 Physical DS1 List window This window displays physical DS1 id list based on a selection criteria It provides access to the Physical DS1 window for parameter modification and to the Logical DS1 window for logical DS1 parameter and cross connection modification Figure 6 8 Physical DS1 List window The following table shows the view edit option of this window Parameters Buttons Description NE Name NE name of the selected NE max 30 characters AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 6 17 Service provisioning Service provisioning telephony p See Parameters Buttons Description Selection Crite Radio buttons are used to define the list that will be dis ria played in the field Physical DS1 List m All The list displays all logical DS1s currently present in the NE fo
186. DSO window pops up cf Chapter 6 2 4 3 page 6 35 The same result will be obtained by dou ble clicking in the corresponding row AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 5 69 NE management equipment configuration Equipment configuration ee If you want to then remove a cross connection select the desired Logical DSO id in the Physical DSO Information list and press Remove Logical DSO0 A Warning window pops up displaying the following message Logical DSO will be removed Ok to proceed gt NOTE If the logical DSO is red lined the following warning message pops up Redlined logical DSO will be removed Ok to proceed If you decide to continue the remove operation will be started The informa tion displayed will be updated once the remove operation is finished to show the current list exit the window click on Close AEM R1 7 5 70 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 NE management equipment configuration Equipment configuration p Se 5 5 5 9 MSC window The metallic shelf controller MSC pack provides the required shelf interface and central control for half of the MDS2 shelf or MDS2B shelf Sit Reonired Figure 5 26 MSC window This window contains all information related to MSC It can be displayed even when the pack is not plugged in The following table shows the view edit options of the MSC window Parameters Buttons Description NE Name NE name of the selected
187. Description group 7 group 7 description group 3 test group Figure 4 20 User Administration amp Profiling window User Groups Table 4 Select the user group which shall be deleted in the User Group Name field and click Delete gt NOTE The administrator user group is protected against deletion 5 Confirm your selection The window will be closed AEM R1 7 4 24 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 User management Controlled objects 4 5 Controlled objects 4 5 1 Modify controlled objects Introduction This chapter describes the process to modify the information about existing con trolled objects The controlled object creation and deletion are not covered by this document For NE creation and deletion refer to Chapter 5 5 1 and Chapter 5 5 18 Before modifying the information about any controlled object the AEM administra tor must have a system login Procedure Complete the following procedure to modify the information about existing con trolled objects Step Procedure 1 Login as AEM administrator and start the AEM access bar as described in Chapter 3 2 1 The access bar will be shown 2 Select the User Administration amp Profiling icon The User Administration amp Profiling window pops up 3 Select View gt Controlled Objects via menu bar The Controlled Objects Table appears Controlled Object Type View object Successful Figure 4 21 User Administration amp
188. EM R1 7 2 24 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 Software installation and commissioning Installation procedure p e OK No previous package LuSysAdm have been found Package lt LuOX23RT gt OrbixMT Version 2 3c02MT Run Time have been found in opt lucent OrbixMT_2 3c2 Package lt LuOXNSRT gt OrbixNames Version 1 1c Run Time have been found in opt lucent OrbixNames1 1c Package lt LuOSRT gt ObjectStore 5 1 SP2 Run Time have been found in opt lucent OS51_SP2 Package lt LuLUMRT gt Lumos Build 3 0 run time have been found in opt lucent LUMOS Package lt LuRWRT gt RogueWave Tools and Threads std0130u thr0130u t1s0710u tpr0112u have been found in opt lucent rw Where should System Admin be installed opt lucent AnyMediaEM_R1 7 q 9 Type a valid path where the package files must be placed and press Re turn or press Return to accept the default path The installation path selected for AnyMedia EM R1 7 is opt lucent AnyMediaEM_R1 7 NBR USER GROUP 1 halt other 2 root other 3 smtp root 4 verl staff Enter selection q 10 Type 4 and press Return User verl and Group staff have been selected Boot processes Do you like install the SystemAdmin process on the system boot y n q AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 2 25 Software installation and commissioning Installation procedure p ee 11 Type y and press Return Clean up tasks for the AnyMedia EM system will
189. Forthe ordering address see Chapter 8 How to order this document 7 1 Print copy hard copy Document All listed documents are available in print packaging and format 7 2 CD ROM The User Service Manual and the Functional Description are available in PDF for mat on CD ROM and an Adobe Acrobat Reader is provided to view them Table 2 Customer documentation on CD ROM Component CD ROM AEM R 1 7 Customer Documentation on CD ROM includes User Service Manual USM Functional Description a For the ordering address see Chapter 8 How to order this document CIC Ordering number 363 211 455 1 Acrobat Reader is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated AEM R1 7 XVIII Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 About this document How to order this document 8 How to order this document Ordering number The ordering number for the AEM User Service Manual is 363 211 454 Order procedure To order additional hard copies of this document and or to request placement on the standing order list send or call in an order as follows Telephone Order Monday through Mail Order Friday Lucent Technologies Within USA 1 888 LUCENT8 7 30 a m to 6 30 p m EST FAX from USA Attention Priscilla Stanley 1 800 566 9568 email pfstanley lucent com FAX Worldwide 2855 N Franklin Road P O Box 19901 Eee USA Indianapolis IN 46219 Customer Information Center a For ordering a purchase order number or charge
190. Glossary Cross Connection Several types of cross connections are present in the AnyMedia Access System m T1 cross connections provide links between physical DS1 feeder ports and the logical feeder ports of the VRTs and INA Virtual Banks VB They are created and deleted using the TL1 commands ENT CRS T1 and DLT CRS T1 The creation of a T1 cross connection acts as a trigger within the NE to instantiate the associ ated VRT or VB m TO cross connections provide links between the logical ports of a VRT or an INA VB and the physical distri bution ports of the NE They are created and deleted by the TL1 commands ENT CRS TO and DLT CRS TO m Finally the undifferentiated term cross connection describes an actual bandwidth assignment within the system s TSI fabric Such bandwidth assignments are administered dynamically by the TR 303 TMC they are administered semi permanently by the TR 303 EOC and they are created automatically by the NE in re sponse to provisioning activities on TR 08 VRTs and INA VBs Circuit This refers to the devices and functions built on or provided by an AP for one port In some documents this is also called facility The subscriber line is not included Client An entity that initiates requests to a server For the AnyMedia Access System a client could be a PC with a GUI in terface a telnet session or an OS like the AEM NB Client Application A group of one or more user modules that offer related functionality
191. I 1 3 1 5 Northbound interface 1 3 1 6 Southbound interface 1 3 2 Hardware platform 1 3 2 1 Architecture 1 3 2 2 Requirements 1 4 Working with AEM AEM R1 7 363 211 454 _ _ N mah N are o _ a k ee A gt A i o1 rs _ N _ N oe _ A _ N _ SQ _ N f _ co _ ko i N oO ah N ik 1 N 1 N D Version 1 00 06 00 1 I ee Contents 1 4 1 Network planning and physical installation 1 4 2 Configuration management 1 4 3 Network Operation amp Surveillance 1 4 3 1 Fault management 1 4 3 1 1 Fault identification 1 4 3 1 2 Fault localisation and diagnosis 1 4 3 1 3 Fault clearance 1 4 3 2 Network modification 1 4 3 2 1 Installation and removal of an NE 1 4 3 2 2 Modification of NEs 1 4 3 3 Performance monitoring 1 4 4 System security and user groups 1 5 Network configuration 1 5 1 1 5 2 1 5 3 1 5 4 1 II Version 1 00 AEM server without clients and external OS LAN AEM server with clients and without external OS LAN AEM server without clients and with external OS WAN AEM Server with Clients and external OS WAN AEM R1 7 06 00 N o _ N E N on N o ui N oOo _ N N _ N N N oe N ec mit N co ok N de ee oO _ oo _ _
192. If the version is invalid one of the following messages could appear Package lt Required_Package_Name gt have been found but INSTALL PATH is not defined Package lt Required_Package_Name gt have been found but with version lt Package_Version gt not valid for lt Package_Name gt AEM R1 7 2 72 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 Software installation and commissioning Installation procedure p Se In both cases the installation will prompt again for the required package m Also the path where the Orbix cfg file is located is requested in the Or bixNames OrbixTalk and AnyMedia Servers packages installation after the request for the installation path of the OrbixMT the file will be modified by both installations Where is Orbix cfg file located Orbix_path cfg q m Finally after the ObjectStore installation the user must execute the oscon fig server command to configure the ObjectStore daemon 2 2 3 Cancel installation There are two ways to cancel the installation as follows m internal cancellation when the install_AMEM or pkgadd command de tect through information files or installation scripts that something is invalid m external cancellation if the administrator kill the process kill 9 or Ctrl C In both cases the system informs about if files have been installed on the sys tem In this case the administrator must use the pkgrm command to remove the installation 2 2
193. Information GSFN DOA ervice Details Information Trunk Condition Idle 0 0 115 Tanmi cun 115 Ef sl ReloadSuccesfll Figure 6 30 Logical DSO window TDOA Service Details Parameters Description Trunk Condi This option menu can be used to determine whether the AP tion or CU sets the signaling state toward the CO to the Idle state Busy or the DSO remote alarm indication Rai code during a fault condition Default Idle Transmit Atten This slider can be used to define the transmit attenuator pa uator rameter Possible values 0 11 6 step 0 1 Default 11 6 AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 6 59 Service provisioning Service provisioning telephony p SeSe 6 2 4 23 TO4 Service Details window Overview The T04 4 wire transmission only function is used in voice or data private lines It is applicable to the AUA41B channel unit which may be used in the MDS2 MDS2B interfacing with a switch other transmission equipment data equipment or cable T04 Service Details Information S Figure 6 31 Logical DSO window TO4 Service Details Parameters Description Sealing Current When a check mark is set the channel unit applies a current from tip to ring or across the transmission lead simplex of the subscriber interface Possible values Set Not set Default Set 7 dB Transmit This option menu can be used to control a 7 dB pad in the transmit
194. Initial windows ee A status bar is incorporated at the bottom of every single screen except of Network Browser and menu bar cf Chapter 5 3 4 page 5 19 m The cursor menu will pop up at the cursor position when the right mouse button is pressed cf Chapter 5 3 5 page 5 20 5 3 1 Menu bar The menu bar entries are enabled disabled depending on the object selected in one of the browser list NE Browser or Network Browser The following table de scribes the menu bar s main entries and subsequent submenus The right column identifies the item that needs to be selected to have this menu option available Menu entries Enable Disable File gt New Any item in Network Browser Group or NE File gt _Remove Any item in Network Browser Group or NE File gt Print gt Print window Always File gt Print gt Print table Always File gt Print gt Preview Always File gt Exit Always Edit gt Cut Text editing field Edit gt Copy Text editing field Edit gt Paste Text editing field Edit gt Clear Text editing field View gt Object Always View gt Toolbar Always View gt Reload Always gt NOTE This operation is not supported for the Network Browser The menu appears only when no other Groups amp NEs Management window is open Window gt Window 1 Window gt Window 2 Help gt Contents Always displays the help index for naviga tion through the EM help informat
195. Lucent Technologies Bell Labs Innovations AnyMedia Element Manager 24 Channel AEM Release 1 7 User Service Manual 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 Copyright 2000 Lucent Technologies All rights reserved Printed in U S A This material is protected by the copyright and trade secret laws of the United States and other countries It may not be reproduced distributed or altered in any fashion by any entity either internal or external to Lucent Technologies except in accordance with applicable agreements contracts or licensing without the express written consent of the Customer Training and Information Products organization and the business management owner of the material Notice Every effort was made to ensure that the information in this document was complete and accurate at the time of printing However information is subject to change Ordering Information The order number for this document is 363 211 454 For more ordering information refer to How to order documents in the section About this document How to Comment on This Document A feedback form is located immediately after the legal page of this document Please send or fax your comments and suggestions to Lucent Technologies Network Systems GmbH Fax no 49 911 526 3545 Trademarks Acrobat Reader is registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated AnyMedia is a trademark of Lucent Technologies Internet Explorer is a copyright of Micr
196. MDAC NVDS Restore Figure 5 57 COMDAC NVDS Restore window 2 Click on the Browse button to open the File Browser window cf Chapter 5 5 15 5 page 5 168 to select the directory example of the file structure NE Files NVDS lt NE_Name gt COMDAC R1 and file name of the restore file 3 Click on OK to confirm The chosen file name appears in the field Filename in the COMDAC NVDS Restore window 4 Click on Apply this command button is available only after having se lected the file name to start the restore A Warning window pops up NVDS Restore may be service affecting and the command can not be cancelled while the execution Continue anyway 5 Press Yes to confirm this message An In Progress window pops up NVDS restore on lt NE Name gt in progress After finishing the backup process successfully the In Progress window disappears 6 Press Close to exit the COMDAC Restore window AEM R1 7 5 166 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 NE management equipment configuration Equipment configuration gt NOTE When an NVDS restore process is started all AEM variables are set to their initial values to provoke a FULL synchronization The NE synchronization state goes to ASYNC The association between AEM and NE is lost and recovered The FULL synchronization is launched for that NE Finally the NE is connected and perfectly synchronized 5 5 15 4 Data restore data agent Procedure Complete the following pr
197. Management Domain Management Administrator AEM R1 7 4 16 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 User management User groups mm ee Table 4 1 Assignment of user groups to applications tasks Application Task User Group Log Viewer Actions Administrator Maintenance System Internal Events Administrator Maintenance Autonomous Report Administrator Maintenance Monitoring Alarm Viewer Alarms Acknowledge Administrator Maintenance Alarms View Administrator Maintenance Monitoring Alarms Clear Administrator Maintenance Groups and NEs Equipment and Administrator Maintenance Management Service Provisioning Configuration View Administrator Maintenance Monitoring Test Management Administrator Maintenance Monitoring Cut through Manage Administrator ment Groups and NEs Config Administrator Maintenance uration Performance Manage Administrator Maintenance ment Monitoring a Ifthe VIEW task is unassigned but other tasks are still assigned these tasks are left as assigned to this user group But the user is not able to perform any kind of operation over these tasks until the VIEW task is assigned again The most of the task names are self described but other tasks needs a deeper description Access Policy Management provides the functionality to m create modify delete AEM users m create modify delete AEM user groups m create modify delete AEM domains m create modify delete assignme
198. NE max 30 characters Slot Id This text field shows which one of the two slots available for the MSC is being used Possible values msc 1 1 2 AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 5 71 NE management equipment configuration Equipment configuration p See Parameters Buttons Description Inventory Infor mation The read only text fields provide the following information Card Type 11 character mnemonic used to identify the gen eral type of function provided Possible values MSC Serial Number 12 character alphanumeric code that in cludes the date and place of manufacture Apparatus Code Specifies the function of the pack Possi ble value MSC100 ICC InterChangeability Code Indicates the interchangea bility among packs to specify forward backward compatibility Format of the ICC is m n where m is the issue number and n the series number CLEI Code assigned by Bellcore that provides information about the functionality of the pack ECI Code that corresponds to the bar coded label on the faceplate of the pack There is a one to one correspondence between CLEI and ECI codes Operation The check box Slot Required displays the required state of the shelf slot This state can be changed by the operator only if the card is not inserted 5 5 5 10 Modify an MSC Procedure Complete the following procedure to configure the MSC data Step Procedure 1 Select NE gt MDS2 MDS2B Shelf gt MS
199. NE Name NE name of the selected NE max 30 characters AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 6 21 Service provisioning Service provisioning telephony p See Parameters Buttons Description Physical DS1 These fields display the physical DS1id by means of three option menus m The first menu contains the ds1 shelf ds1 1 m The second menu contains the slot number inside NE 1 5 m The third menu shows the feeders 1 4 inside the se lected slot Possible values ds1 1 5 1 4 Selecting a slot number second option menu results in an update of the third option menu feeder gt NOTE Feeder which are not yet cross connected are marked with a white background add function is possible the other feeders are marked with a grey background edit function is possible Physical DS1 Equalization This slider can be used to define the cable Information length in ft to the DSX 1 Possible values are 0 to 655 Degrade Threshold This slider can be used to define the physical DS1 signal degrade threshold Possible values are 10E 7 10E 6 10E 5 10E 4 The Apply button is used to confirm the changes It is availa ble only if the Equalization and or the Degrade Threshold has been modified Loopback This field displays the current loopback state clear or set for loopback details see Chapter 7 4 1 5 page 7 31 The Label button is used to set or clear the physical DS1 loopback Depending on the loopback s
200. NOTE The first four default profiles can not be removed In case one of these profiles has been selected the Remove button is disabled 2 Click on Close to exit the window AEM R1 7 5 118 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 NE management equipment configuration Equipment configuration 5 5 5 35 Threshold Profile window data appli cation This window is used to create modify remove threshold profiles PM Threshold Profile Window N App Remove Reload Successful CU 9l Figure 5 39 Threshold Profile window The following table shows the view edit options of this window Parameters Buttons Description NE Name NE name of the selected NE max 30 characters Profile This option menu contains the available profiles for editing and NEW for creating a new profile Format pmtp 1 128 gt NOTE The first two default profiles can neither be edited nor removed 1 disable_all_Thresholds 2 default_PM_Thresholds AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 5 119 NE management equipment configuration Equipment configuration p See Parameters Buttons Profile Data Description Profile Pattern This option menu is used to select a profile to get an example for a new profile It is enabled only if NEW is selected in the option menu above Otherwise the name of the selected profile is displayed ES Four text fields show the values for two different time pe riods 15 min one day for the t
201. Network Adapter an N TCP IP PPP D WAN LINK ISDN PSTN X 25 SONET SDH ATM Modem ISDN Network Adapter u TCP IP PPP Bridge Router Hub TCP IP LAN NE EREEREER NE NE Figure 1 12 AEM server with clients and external OS WAN AEM R1 7 1 34 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 Software installation and commissioning Contents 2 1 General 2 1 2 1 1 Introduction 2 2 2 2 Installation procedure 27 2 2 1 Full installation 27 2 2 1 1 Server side installation 2 8 2 2 1 1 1 Installation of the third party software 2 8 2 2 1 1 2 Installation of the common packages 2 20 2 2 1 1 3 Installation of the telephony R1 7 agent optional 2 48 2 2 1 1 4 Installation of the data R1 1 2 agent optional 2 51 2 2 1 1 5 Installation of the data R1 4 agent optional 2 55 2 2 1 2 Client side installation 259 2 2 1 3 Post install actions 2 71 2 2 1 3 1 AEM server 2 71 2 2 2 Installing individual packages 2 71 2 2 3 Cancel installation 2 73 2 2 4 Remove AnyMedia package installations 273 2 2 5 PC GUI client installation 2 73 2 2 5 1 Customizing SystemPreferences ini 2 75 AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 2 I ee Contents AEM R1 7 2 II Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 Software installation and commissioning 2 1 General 363 211 454
202. O Id Indicates the logical DSO id within the VRT VB id shown in the row AEM R1 7 5 88 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 NE management equipment configuration Equipment configuration p Se Parameters Buttons Description Physical DS0 m GSFN The generic signalling function identifies the sig Information nalling and transmission function of the provided ser vice The following values are possible DFLT default 2LS 2GS Coin 2FXLS 2FX 2RVO 2NOS ISDN 4DO only for ROC Data EBS AC LR NO1 NO2 BRI TO DPT DX4 N R FX O P 1 2 3 5 FX S T 1 2 3 5 EM4 C H PLR 1 2 ETO4 FXO OCU 1 2 3 SW56 TD O SI A B C D TO4 2RVT 2LO COIN2 DFLT2 DPO DS01 DS02 FXS EMO FXOD FXS0 NO OCUO Unknown The Label button provides access to the Logical DSO win dow cf Chapter 6 2 4 3 page 6 35 Two possible values are available Add Logical DSO enabled only if a physical DSO id is se lected with no cross connection to a logical DSO id and Edit Logical DSO enabled if a physical DSO is selected which is cross connected with a logical DSO continued The Remove Logical DSO button can be used to remove the cross connection selected in the list see above 5 5 5 20 Modify an IAT subshelf Procedure Complete the following procedure to modify an IAT subshelf Step Procedure 1 Select NE in the Network Element Browser and Create Subshelf gt IAT via the cursor menu or selec
203. O to that time slot For time slot management the TR303 VRT supports the following process Dynamic time slot assignment a time slot assignment made via the timeslot management channel TMC for locally switched application This time slot as signment deassignment is done on a per call basis under control of the LDS Semi permanent time slot assignment a time slot assignment made via the embedded operation channel EOC for providing a dedicated voice data path This time slot assignment deassignment is done on a per service order basis The LDS will manage the semi permanent cross connections in the TR 303 VRT TR 08 VRT A TR 08 VRT supports up to 96 physical lines The logical lines are identified by logical line numbers LLNs which are integer values ranging from 1 to 96 A physical distribution port may be assigned to any LLN within any TR 08 VRT There is a fixed mapping between TR 08 LLN number and the TR 08 feeder DSO used for the circuit This allows the FAST to make the cross connection between the TR 08 physical port and the feeder DSO without explicitly provisioning the feeder DSO to be used INA VB An INA VB supports a maximum of 24 physical lines The logical lines are num bered from 1 to 24 A physical distribution port may be assigned to any logical line within any INA VB There is a fixed mapping between the INA LLN number and the INA feeder DSO used for the circuit This allows the AnyMedia Access System to make the cross
204. OAM backup backupLogDirec Location of the log files of the backup ar tory chive restore scripts execution Default value tmp OAM backup numberOfLog Maximum number of log files per type al Files lowed in the OAM backup backupLogDirec tory Range of values 1 to Default value 10 files per script file OAM log directoryCurrentLogs Default path where the restored AnyMedia logs will be placed from a previous archive Default value log OAM log directoryRestored Location of the AnyMedia log files restored Logs from a previous backup or archive Default value restored AEM R1 7 B 6 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 Configuration parameters Overview mm ee Name Description OAM log minimumDaysKept Number of days a log file should be kept in the system before being removed If space is needed and the log file is still within this pe riod a platform alarm is raised and the file is removed Possible values 1 to Default value 7 days OAM sysadmin clientldieTime Period of inactivity after that a client is forced to log out Possible values 60 to Default value 240 seconds B 1 2 AnyMedia client GUI configuration variables The following table provides an alphabetical list of the configuration parameters for AnyMedia GUI Table 2 2 SystemPreferences ini configuration file Name Description Site settings SITE The city or the location where the AEM is working This value is used fo
205. PROG2W PRCOIN ISDN AFM_DS3 ADSL4 TAP MDSU Result List Port Id Identifies the port within the AP Possible values Port 1 Port 32 Result Shows the result of the test Possible values PASS or FAIL 4 Click Close to dismiss the AP Card Test Result window AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 7 29 Fault management and maintenance Test management p ee 7 4 1 3 Stand by card test scheduling Side switch and During the execution of a standby card test scheduling a COMDAC side switch off Jine and off line diagnostics for the standby COMDAC or off line diagnostics for the diagnostics protection feeder IO DS1 pack are performed Possible user The AEM provides the opportunity to set up the periodicity and the time of the day settings cf Table 7 11 to perform a standby card test over m the standby COMDAC pack or m the protection IO DS1 pack gt NOTE Stand by card test scheduling can be executed only via TL1 command 7 4 1 3 1 Test scheduling via TL1 commands Procedure Proceed as follows to define the test scheduling via TL1 command Step Procedure 1 Enter the following TL1 command by using the TL1 command line inter face cf Chapter 5 5 16 See lH Staging parameter Command code blocks Common block The SCHED EX Schedule Exercise command instructs the system to set up an exercise schedule exercise interval and start time of the day of exercise to perform a COMDAC side
206. Procedure 1 Check for correct data agent state Yes Continue with step 2 No Call Lucent Technologies Technical Support 2 Check for DCN being in service Yes Call Lucent Technologies Technical Support No Put the DCN into service 3 Is the alarm now cleared Yes O K No Call Lucent Technologies Technical Support 7 5 5 17 UNABLE_TO_SYNC_CONFIG Meaning The Configuration Synchronization process has failed n times Abbreviation UNABLE_TO_SYNC_CONFIG Severity Major Service affecting No Effects An updated view of the configuration data of the data agent cannot be uploaded Possible cause s The communication with the data agent may be interrupted Corrective actions Proceed as follows to clear the alarm Step Procedure 1 Check for correct data agent state Yes Continue with step 2 No Call Lucent Technologies Technical Support 2 Check for DCN being in service Yes Call Lucent Technologies Technical Support No Put the DCN into service AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 7 53 Fault management and maintenance Alarms mm ee 3 Is the alarm now cleared Yes O K No Call Lucent Technologies Technical Support 7 5 5 18 UPLOAD_PROBLEM Meaning Some configuration data have been lost during synchronization Abbreviation UPLOAD_PROBLEM Severity Critical Service affecting No Effects Some configuration data are not available in the AEM database Possible cause s AFM problem Corrective action
207. R1 1 2 BB and R1 4BB Network topologies shelf views and self ex plaining menus are navigating the operator to configure the following services m telephony POTS ISDN m data AfM virtual paths and ATM virtual channel connections carried over ADSL lines The following main functionalities are offered for more detail see Chapter 1 3 1 1 page 1 8 m inventory management m equipment provisioning and maintenance subshelves packs ports m narrowband and data service provisioning m clock synchronization m system equipment service status m software download m NE database backup and restore m system date time synchronization 1 2 2 2 Fault management The fault management supports the operator in detecting displaying localizing and logging any faults occurring in the managed network The following main functionalities are offered for more detail see Chapter 1 3 1 1 page 1 8 m handling of alarm severity critical major minor warning m receiving of autonomous alarm messages m retrieving of alarms per NE pack application pack m retrieving of alarm and event logs from NE initialization of tests for fault analysis purposes a filters to display pre selected alarm types only AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 1 3 Functional description Introduction 1 2 2 3 Performance management The performance management provides facilities for retrieving storing and print ing of the NE performance
208. S1 not cross connected white background Add Logical DS1 For logical DS1 cross connected gray background Edit Logical DS1 This function is available only in the following situations m VRT VB type is TR 08 and the Line Code has been modified m VRT VB type is INA and the Frame Format and or Line Code has been modified AEM R1 7 6 28 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 Service provisioning Service provisioning telephony 6 2 3 4 Modify logical DS1 The Logical DS1 window can be reached from the IO DS1 window cf Chapter 5 5 5 1 page 5 54 Physical DS1 window cf Chapter 6 2 3 1 page 6 21 VRT VB List window cf Chapter 6 2 1 1 page 6 6 VRT VB windows cf Chapter 6 2 1 3 page 6 8 Chapter 6 2 1 7 page 6 15 Physical DS1 List window cf Chapter 6 2 3 1 page 6 21 Procedure Complete the following procedure to modify the logical DS1 window Step Procedure 1 Use the option menus Logical DS1 to select the desired DS1 id If you want to then add a logical DS1 use the option menu Logical DS1 to select a logical DS1 with a white back ground and click on Apply change the frame format only possible use the option menu Logical DS1 to for INA select the desired logical DS1 grey background use the option menu Frame Format to change the value and click on Apply change the line code only possible for use the option menu Logical DS1 to INA or TR 08 select the desired logical DS1 grey
209. SCR Condition description Type String Required Yes Min chars 1 Max chars 68 This is the text description for the reported alarm condition This information can be found in the Correlations Tables The 68 characters included a pair of escaped quotes C 3 2 6 Generic error responses cLos NE Connection Not Available Connection with the lt NE TID gt is not available IITA Input Invalid Target Identifier TID does not match with SID has unallowed characters or string is too long IICT Input Invalid Correlation Tag Incorrect CTAG ICNV Input Command Not Valid The command verb or a modifier is invalid not recogniz able by the system PICC Privilege Illegal Command Code Command not supported at this interface a only available via AEM AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 C 15 Northbound interface Northbound interface specific TL1 messages E SeSe C 3 3 C 3 3 1 C 3 3 2 C 3 3 3 tid ctag RTRV ALM ENV Retrieve Alarm En vironment Purpose The RTRV ALM ENV Retrieve Alarm Environment command instructs the sys tem to retrieve all currently active environment alarms Input format RTRV ALM ENV tid ctag ALMTYPE Abortable Yes Privilege Code Reports Only GSI Confirmation Required No File Transfer No Related Autonomous Message None Input format parameters Target ID This parameter appears in the TID Block Type String Required No Default Ty
210. SSOC_FAILED Assoc with NE failed POLL Not responding to poll PRCDERR Procedural error PWR Power fault RINGF Ringing source input failed SFTCRRPT Software program corrupt SFTERR Software version mismatch SWFTDWNF Software download failed SYNC Synchronization input failed SYNCOOS System free running T BERL BER exceeds threshold TSTRELAY Stuck Test Access Relay UNLATCH Pack unlatched YEL Yellow Alarm a only available via AEM AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 C 13 Northbound interface Northbound interface specific TL1 messages mm ee SRVEFF Service effect This parameter appears in the Common Block Type List Required Yes This indicates the reported alarm condition is service effecting or non service ef fecting Abbreviation Meaning NSA Non service affecting SA Service affecting OCRDAT Occurrence date This parameter appears in the Common Block Type Date Required Yes This indicates the date of the condition being reported and has the format YY MM DD year month day 70 lt yy lt 99 maps to 1970 through 1999 respectively 00 lt yy lt 37 maps to 2000 through 2037 respectively OCRTM Occurrence time This parameter appears in the Common Block Type Time Required Yes This indicates the time of the condition being reported and has the format hours minutes seconds AEM R1 7 C 14 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 Northbound interface Northbound interface specific TL1 messages CONDDE
211. ST 6 Bangladesh Standard Time 21 more menu choices to follow lt RETURN gt for more choices lt CTRL D gt to stop display D Enter selection q 2 26 Type the desired time zone and press Return gt NOTE The time zone must be the same for the AnyMedia Client GUI LUMOS Network Element and OS AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 2 69 Software installation and commissioning Installation procedure p See Using lt gt as the package base directory Processing package information Processing system information Verifying disk space requirements Checking for conflicts with packages already installed Checking for setuid setgid programs This package contains scripts which will be executed with super user permission during the process of installing this package Do you want to continue with the installation of lt LuGUI30 gt y n y 27 Type y and press Return Installing AnyMedia Element Manager Release 1 7 Client as lt LuGUI24 gt Installing part 1 of 1 lt files list gt verifying class lt channels_24 gt Executing postinstall script kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Execute AnyMediaEM_GUI sh to set the environment kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk You have the installation logfile in tmp EM_Install_LuGUI24 log Installation of lt LuGUI24 gt was successful Installation of AnyMedia EM R1 7 was succes
212. System Network Element NEM Network Element Management Subsystem AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 GL 7 Glossary ee Non Volatile Data Storage NVDS This refers to a capability of the AnyMedia Access System to store information in such a way as to survive indefi nite periods of total power failure The current values for all provisionable parameters are stored in the NVDS and hence are the parameter values that will be used on subsequent NE power up Non Volatile Program Storage NVPS This keeps software program data It resides in the COMDAC Normal Hour Load The average load expected during the lifetime of the system O Off line Backups These are backups performed automatically via any scheduling mechanisms e g cron file On line Backups These are backups performed on user demand Operator This refers to the AnyMedia Element Manager users Operator Mode Testing initiated by staff from the EM using the NE integrated capabilities These tests can last some time e g some measurements can be executed several times during a test session The results in this mode usually are val ues e g resistance voltage and pass fail decisions Overload The load that causes the system to take drastic measures to ensure its integrity During overload normal system function is disrupted and certain inputs the ones causing the overload are ignored After clearing the overload sit uation the system is left in asyn
213. The Logi cal DSO window pops up cf Chapter 6 2 4 3 page 6 35 edit a logical DSO select a row in the Physical DSO Infor mation list with an existing cross con nection and press Edit Logical DSO The Logical DSO window pops up cf Chapter 6 2 4 3 page 6 35 The same result will be obtained by double clicking in the corresponding row AEM R1 7 5 90 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 NE management equipment configuration Equipment configuration p Se If you want to then remove a logical DSO select the desired Logical DSO id in the Physical DSO Information list and press Remove Logical DSO A Warn ing window pops up displaying the fol lowing message Logical DSO will be removed Ok to proceed gt NOTE If the logical DSO is red lined the following warning message pops up Redlined logical DSO will be removed Ok to proceed If you decide to continue the remove operation will be started The informa tion displayed will be updated once the remove operation is finished to show the current list exit the window click on Close AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 5 91 NE management equipment configuration Equipment configuration p SeSe 5 5 5 21 IAT Server Port Information window NE R1 7 This window is used to change the parameters of the IAT server physical port con figuration IAT Server Port Figure 5 32 IAT Server Port Information window The followi
214. Using lt opt lucent AnyMediaEM_R1 7 gt as th package base directory Processing package information Processing system information Verifying disk space requirements Checking for conflicts with packages already installed Checking for setuid setgid programs This package contains scripts which will be executed with super user permission during the process of installing this package Do you want to continue with the installation of lt LuNBI gt y n 20 Type y and press Return Installing AnyMedia North Bound Element Manager Release 1 7 Administration as lt LuNBI gt Installing part 1 of 1 opt lucent AnyMediaEM_R1 7 NBI bin PassThrough opt lucent AnyMediaEM_R1 7 NBI bin PassThroughConfig AEM R1 7 2 34 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 Software installation and commissioning Installation procedure p Se opt lucent AnyMediaEM_R1 7 NBI cfg NBIDomains cfg opt lucent AnyMediaEM_R1 7 NBI cfg NBILog log verifying class lt common gt Executing postinstall script Installation of lt LuNBI gt was successful Log Management Processing package instance lt LuLogg gt from installation lt homelocal tmp lucent AnyMediaEMR1 7 gt AnyMedia Element Manager Logging Release 1 7 Administration sparc LuLogg_36_1 1 kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk AnyMedia Element Manager c 1999 Lucent Technologies kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk
215. Yes O K No Call Lucent Technologies Technical Support 7 5 5 15 TLICOMM_DENIED Meaning User login for a TL1 communication session was denied by the telephony agent for all TCP IP connections opened Abbreviation TL1_COMM_DENIED Severity Critical Service affecting No The alarm will be cleared when a TL1 communication session between the AEM and the telephony agent has been successfully opened Effects It is not possible to manage the telephony agent because there is no TL1 commu nication session available Possible cause s A user login error is stopping the TL1 communication session establishment proc ess between the AEM and the telephony agent Corrective actions Proceed as follows to clear the alarm Step Procedure 1 Check for correct user identification user login password and telephony agent target identifier TID 2 Check with the GSI that the four VCs in the telephony agent are not busy RTRV STATUS TL1 command 7 5 5 16 UNABLE_TO_SYNC_ALARM Meaning The Alarm Synchronization process has failed n times Abbreviation UNABLE_TO_SYNC_ALARM Severity Major Service affecting No Effects An updated view of the alarm data of the data agent cannot be uploaded Possible cause s The communication with the data agent may be interrupted AEM R1 7 7 52 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 Fault management and maintenance Alarms mm ee Corrective actions Proceed as follows to clear the alarm Step
216. _ESTABLISHED The AEM and the data agent are able to communicate with each other The AEM is able to request data to the data agent and the data agent is able to respond to AEM queries and to send traps to the EM COMM_ESTABLISHED_SYNCHRONIZING The EM is trying to update its internal information by uploading data from the BB agent COMM_STOPPED_RELEASING The EM is deleting all the information related to the communication being stopped COMM_STOPPED and COMM_STOPPED_RELEASING are sub states of the general state Communication Stopped COMM_TRYING and COMM_TRYING_PROBLEM_DETECTED are sub states of the general state Communication Trying COMM_ESTABLISHED and COMM_ESTABLISHED_SYNCHRONIZING are sub states of the general state Communication Established 5 5 3 1 Changing connection states The connection state changes can be initiated by the user via the GUI or they are initiated by the AEM Communication The communication protocol used between the AEM and the data agent is simple protocol network management protocol SNMP over user datagram protocol UDP IP COMM_STOPPED The user can initiate the communication establishment process with a data agent in connection state COMM_STOPPED After initiating this process the connection state changes to COMM_TRYING COMM_TRYING When the communication state goes COMM_TRYING the AEM tries to establish a connection with the data agent by sending a SNMP PDU After the successful connection t
217. ace for subscribers Note that more than one port can be housed on an AP e g the LPZ100 provides 32 Z ports Port Test Also called circuit test Verifies the ability of an AP port to provide proper transmission and signaling It is the test ing of the port hardware The functions of the port test rather depend on the hardware function of the circuit e g POTS pulse metering ISDN These tests are performed on each AP using part of their self test capabilities R RDT This refers to the physical Remote Digital Terminal A Remote Digital Terminal is a physical section of the NE that interfaces to the LDS at DS1 rate Response Time The real elapsed time between detectable start of an action and its completion Restore The process of copying backup files from removable media to a working directory replacing the original files which could have been damaged ROC Remote Operations Channel The bearer channel that conveys management information for a remote system AnyMedia NE The ROC is in tended to be used when the system is installed at locations where no local Ethernet LAN and no separate network e g X 25 exists Router A network layer device that forwards packets from one network to another based on network layer information OSI layer 3 Data packets are only transferred through the router if the participant is connected to another port of the router With a router data traffic can be kept from certain parts of a LAN
218. ackus Naur Form BCL Bank Controller Link BITS Building Integrated Timing Supply BRA Basic Rate Access U SS C CD Compact Disk CDE Common Desktop Environment CFL Customer Feature List CIT Craft Interface Terminal CIU Communication Interface Unit CLEI Code assigned by Bellcore CMIP Common Management Information Protoco co Central Office COMDAC Common Dada and Control COT Central Office Terminal CPE Customer Premises Equipment CR Critical alarm severity CRV Call Reference Value CSA Customer Serving Area CTAG Correlation Tag AEM R1 7 AB 2 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 Abbreviations CTRL Control CTU Craft Test Unit CU Channel Unit D DB Database DC Direct Current DCN Data Communication Network DDS Digital Data System DFL Default DID Direct Inward Dial DMT Discrete Multitone DPT Dial Pulse Termination E ECI Code that corresponds to the bar coded label on the faceplate of the plug in EIA Electronic Industries Association EM Element Manager EM AM Element Manager AnyMedia ENT Enter EOC Embedded Operations Channel AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 AB 3 Abbreviations a ______ ee EQPT Equipment ESF Extended Super Frame ETO Equalized Transmission Only EVT Event U SoS F FAF Facility Failure FEF Family of Equipment Failure FDL Facility Data Link FLT Fault FS S
219. act operations 3 6 3 Backup archive and restore proce dures This section gives an overview of the steps necessary for a backup archive or re store operation Prerequisite for The backup archive or restore commands require that some path system vari backup restore and ables are properly set This is done by the command AnyMediaNBEM sh during archive the installation of AEM NB If this command was not executed the backup archive or restore commands will not work Different users When different users perform backup archive or restore operations the system will display a message asking whether temporary data which remained from the previous user should be deleted If such a message is displayed you must confirm the deletion of these data AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 3 41 System management Backup and restore mm ee 3 6 3 1 Backup procedure The backup operation needs no user interaction after the backup command was executed 3 6 3 2 Archive procedure The archive operation needs no user interaction after the archive command was executed 3 6 3 3 Restore procedure 3 6 3 3 1 General Default locations When a backup is restored all files are restored to their original location When for restored data archives are restored they are copied into the directory restored relative to the main installation directory Restore one of sev When more than one backup is placed on a tape and a particular one shall be
220. age startup Once the AEM is up the administrator can start up from a GUI any non running package For example if only Administration package is started up on AEM start up NB and BB packages can be started up later DMG startup Those DMGs which are not mandatory for the AEM to be up can be as well started up and shutdown by the AEM administrators Process startup The set of processes running under the AEM is also visible to the administrator and he has the opportunity to start up new processes up to a maximum number Process recovery An AEM process is able to detect that its associated physical process is not work ing properly and in that case a recovery is automatically initiated on it If the recov ery fails the AEM process enters OOS state The user can request an on demand recovery on any OOS process MG recovery An MG is able to detect that a module under it is not working properly its opera tional state is OOS and in that case a recovery is automatically initiated on it If the recovery fails the MG enters OOS state The user can request an on demand recovery on any OOS MG AEM recovery The AEM is able to detect that a package that is ON is not working properly its operational state is OOS and in that case a recovery is automatically initiated on it If the recovery fails the package remains OOS state The user can request an on demand AEM recovery The AEM recovery command can be manually issued via the System Administration wi
221. ailable NEs list 4 Set the check box Standby Comdac Automatic Copy if you want to copy automatically the software from the working COMDAC to the standby COMDAC after the software download is completed successfully the copy can also be done later by means of the COMDAC Program Copy window cf Chapter 5 5 13 page 5 158 AEM R1 7 5 152 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 NE management equipment configuration Equipment configuration 5 Click on the Browse button in the Download Information field to open the File Browser window cf Chapter 5 5 15 5 page 5 168 to select the file example of the file structure NE Files NVPS COMDAC R1 that should be downloaded 6 Click on OK to confirm The chosen file name appears in the field Filename in the COMDAC Software Download window 7 Click on Apply to initiate the download process A Warning window pops up the Software Download window remains on the screen after the download is finished SW Download is service affecting and the command can not be cancelled while its execution Continue anyway If you decide to continue the AEM starts the download procedure The COMDAC SW Download In Progress window pops up COMDAC SW Download In Progress n Eme ditional Info Result Figure 5 50 COMDAC SW Download In Progress window This window provides the following information NE Name percent of the software download FTP operation executed feedback Additional infor mati
222. ains from the Selected NEs list The Add gt gt button and the lt lt Remove button are available only after having selected an NE from the corresponding list Three radio buttons can be used to define the download pro cedure m FTP only only download Activate after next reboot download and automatic activation after the next reboot Activate and reboot now download and automatic activation immediately Download Infor Directory name This text field shows the name of the file mation which will be downloaded The Browse button opens the File Browser window where the directory can be selected Apply This button is used to start the software download 5 5 12 5 Software download to data agent Procedure Complete the following procedure to start the software download Step Procedure 1 Select NE in the Network Element Browser and Software Download gt Data via the cursor menu The AFM Software Download window pops up 2 Use the radio buttons in the field Selection Criteria to define single or multiple download For single download proceed with step 4 for multiple download proceed with step 3 3 Use the Add gt gt button in the field Target to move the desired NEs to the Available NEs list AEM R1 7 5 156 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 NE management equipment configuration Equipment configuration 4 Use the radio buttons FTP only Activate after next reboot or Activate and reb
223. al line DSO Logical DS1 The descriptor used in this document to refer to parameters affecting a DS1 1 544 Mbps service or facility TR 303 logical feeder DS1 Logical Feeder DS1 Numbers These are the identifiers 1 to 28 for the TR 303 VRT of the VRT feeder DS1s that are used by the real time call processing software of the TR 303 Local Digital Switch LDS and in communicating with the VRT over the TMC and or EOC about these feeder DS1s The AnyMedia Access System provides only 20 physical feeder DS1 ports so only a subset of the logical feeder DS1s can be in service Logical Line This is a logical customer termination provided by the NE on either a TR 303 TR 08 VRT or an INA VB Logical Line Number LLN This is the Access IDentifier AID used externally by the Element Manager to identify uniquely a VRT or INA Vir tual Bank distribution side logical drop M MAC Address This is a 6 byte hardware address which identifies a unique participant worldwide in an Ethernet LAN A MAC ad dress is used in OSI layer 2 Manual normal Switch This refers to an Element Manager initiated switch command that instructs the NE to perform a switch only if the protection unit COMDAC and IO_DS1 circuit packs only is in service and not faulty Migration This refers to converting an NE from one software release to another by installing a different software release Module An executable installed on a Host N NE AnyMedia Access
224. alarms three fields are defined and maintained for each alarm AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 7 7 Fault management and maintenance Alarm management ee m First Raised Time m Last Changed Time m Number of Occurrences The alarm viewer can obtain the following information m The Number of Occurrences is the number of times the alarm has been raised between when it was first raised and the current time only the raised alarms are counted In this period the alarm has been raised all the time or it may have been raised cleared several times it is not relevant to distinguish both cases Correlated dupli Alarms coming from the same NE through telephony and data agents i e the cated alarms same alarm reported via both controller cards are correlated into a unique new alarm Although the result alarm is generated by the AEM it is handled as an NE alarm The perceived severity of the result alarm is the highest severity value of the re ceived source alarms The service affecting of the result alarm will be the highest value of the received source alarms where service affecting SA is the highest value and not service affecting NSA is the lowest 7 2 6 Manage alarm acknowledgment Alarms can only be acknowledged by a user at the user interface It is possible to acknowledge all alarms types If an alarm is acknowledged its state is updated ac cordingly and the user identification is registered Acknowledging a
225. ameters Buttons Description NE Name NE name of the selected NE max 30 characters Physical Drop This field shows the port of the drop affected by the test Id Possible values drop 1 1 15 1 x subdrop 1 8 1 8 1 x x is the number of drops supplied by the server Provisioned This code identifies the type of the provisioned pack Pack Type Possible value ADSL Test Results Test Results This field shows the test result Possible values PASS PASS WARNING FAIL IN PROGRESS ABORTED NOT STARTED INVALID TEST 5 Click on Close to exit the window AEM R1 7 7 38 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 Fault management and maintenance Alarms 7 5 Alarms 7 5 1 Overview An alarm is reported for any condition that needs user attention since it may im pact the normal operations of any system under user responsibility e g AEM NE 7 5 2 Alarm types Alarm classification Detected alarms are classified as one of the following m Platform Alarm Alarm related to the AEM application or its hardware software platform Generated raised by any object of the AEM when it detects an abnormal condition to be reported to the user Information provided Probable Cause Severity Service Affecting AEM Object Identifier Alarm Type Identifier Occurrence Time m NE AM Alarms Generated raised by the NE AM Refer to Chapter 7 2 5 page 7 7 to see how the information comes from the NE AM to the AEM
226. anceTranslator cfg PerformanceTranslator cfg verifying class lt common gt Executing postinstall script Installation of lt LuPerTr gt was successful Test Scheduler in Processing package instance lt LuTeSc gt from stallation lt homelocal tmp lucent AnyMediaEMR1 7 gt AnyMedia Element Manager TestScheduler Release 1 7 administration sparc LuTeSc_36_1 1 kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkxkkk AnyMedia Element Manager c 1999 Lucent Technologies kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk AEM R1 7 2 46 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 Software installation and commissioning Installation procedure p Se Package lt LuSysAdm gt SystemAdmin LuSysAdm_36_1 1 have been found in opt lucent AnyMediaEM _R1 7 OK No previous package LuTeSc have been found Using lt gt as the package base directory Processing package information Processing system information 1 package pathname is already properly installed Verifying disk space requirements Checking for conflicts with packages already installed Checking for setuid setgid programs Installing AnyMedia Element Manager TestScheduler Release 1 7 administration as lt LuTeSc gt Installing part 1 of 1 opt lucent AnyMediaEM_R1 7 TestScheduler bin TestScheduler opt lucent AnyMediaEM_R1 7 TestScheduler cfg TestScheduler cfg verifying class lt common gt Installation of lt L
227. and data to ensure the quality of service 1 2 2 4 Security management The security management functions which are based on UNIX control the ac cess to the AEM and to the managed NEs The following main functionalities are offered for more detail see Chapter 1 3 1 1 page 1 8 m AEM user administration m AEM user security profile m No additional NE login for current AEM user m AEM access via login name and password m Inactivity user session time out 1 2 3 Applications The AEM provides 6 applications which give access to the management function ality as described in Chapter 1 2 2 page 1 3 The following applications are avail able m System administration m User administration and profiling m Log management m Alarm management m NEs amp Groups management Each application is composed by one or more tasks The default user group as signment to the individual applications tasks is described in Chapter 1 4 4 page 1 30 1 UNIX is a registered trademark in the United States and other countries licensed exclu sively through X Open Company Limited 2 provided by the OS System SUN Solaris AEM R1 7 1 4 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 Functional description Introduction 1 2 4 System working modes The AEM can work in the following two modes m stand alone Mode m integrated management mode These modes are not mutually exclusive i e the AEM is always able to perform the element management tasks even
228. and the connection state also becomes TRYING 5 5 3 2 Association maintenance Association An communication between the AEM and an data agent is established if the AEM can send SNMP input commands and can receive SNMP output commands to from the data agent for management purposes The connection state is COMM_ESTABLISHED Agent monitoring The AEM monitors the communication state with the data agent by periodically sending messages to the data agent If the AEM does not receive a response to a certain number of messages within a certain time it assumes that the connection to the data agent is lost and tries to connect to the data agent again Default values for By default these messages are sent by the AEM every five minutes The response monitoring to a message must be received within four minutes and not more than two re sponses may be lost otherwise the connection is closed by the AEM These values can be configured by the user via the system variables NEM asso ciation heartBeatNumber and NEM association heartBeatTime in the file ANYMEDIAPATH cfg AnyMediaEM cfg 5 5 3 3 NE Management window tab Data This window shows the provisioning information and allows the provisioning and deprovisioning of an NE data agent AEM R1 7 5 44 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 NE management equipment configuration Equipment configuration p Se NE Management Polson BEZ Darel S Da Er al 1 Figure 5 17 NE Management windo
229. appears in the Common Block Type List Required Yes SRVEFF indicates the effect of the reported alarm on service Abbreviation Meaning NSA Non Service Affecting SA Service Affecting OCRDAT Occurrence date This parameter appears in the Common Block Type Date Required Yes OCRDAT indicates the date of the condition being reported and has the format YY MM DD year month day 70 lt yy lt 99 maps to 1970 through 1999 respec tively 00 lt yy lt 37 maps to 2000 through 2037 respectively AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 C 7 Northbound interface Northbound interface specific TL1 messages GE OCRTM Occurrence time This parameter appears in the Common Block Type Time Required Yes OCRTM indicates the time of the condition being reported and has the format HH MM SS hours minutes seconds CONDDESCR Condition description Type String Required Yes Min chars 1 Max chars 68 This is the text description for the reported alarm condition This information can be found in the Correlations Tables The 68 characters included a pair of escaped quotes AIDTYPE Access identifier type Type List Required Yes MODIFIER is the message modifier to the REPT ALM message Abbreviation Meaning r T EQPT Equipment AEM R1 7 C 8 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 Northbound interface Northbound interface specific TL1 messages C 3 2 RTRV ALM Retrieve Alarms C 3 2 1 Purpose The RTRV ALM R
230. are retrieved and stored every 24 hours from each enabled NE The 24 hour data for feeders is updated every 15 minutes in the AFM The data are stored per day in a separate log file AdsIDsxE3StatisticsLog_YYYYMMDD where YYYY year MM month and DD day located in ANYMEDIAPATH og The file contains also hints about start logging stop logging and error messages 8 3 1 AFM Performance Monitoring win dow This window displays the AFM performance monitoring parameter of the selected feeder This window also allows to select data collection for all the feeders in the NE or clear counters of one feeder AFM Performance Monitoring ds8 1 16 1 7 Figure 8 2 AFM Performance Monitoring window The following table shows the view edit options of this window Parameters Buttons Description NE Name NE name of the selected NE max 30 characters AEM R1 7 8 6 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 Performance monitoring AFM feeder performance monitoring p Se Parameters Buttons Description Feeder Id This option menu can be used to select an appropriate feeder Possible values ds3 1 16 1 2 Log Perform This check box can be used to define whether the AEM is ance Data collecting and logging the performance monitoring data for all the feeders in the NE or not Performance Three text fields show the values for three different time peri Data ods Current 15 minutes Previous 15 minutes Previous day PSES
231. are versions used in each of the COMDACs Slot_Id Identifies which COMDAC is where e g Working COMDAC in slot 1 and Standby COMDAC in slot 2 SW Version Obtained from the NE The SW version of the working COMDAC will be taken as the NE SW version 2 Press Apply to start the software copying An n Progress window pops up Program Copy from COMDAC 1 to COMDAC 2 on lt NE NAME gt in Progress After finishing the copying process successfully the In Progress window disappears 3 Press Close to exit the COMDAC Program Copy window AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 5 159 NE management equipment configuration Equipment configuration p SeSe 5 5 14 AFM program copy and validation Overview This function is used to exchange the newly loaded software with the currently ac tive version in the flash memory and reboot the AFM to activate the new software This should always be the next step after software download except when the copying and validation is started automatically after software download cf Chapter 5 5 12 4 page 5 155 Procedure Complete the following procedure to exchange the new software with the currently active version Step Procedure 1 Select NE in the Network Element Browser and Program Copy gt Data via cursor menu The AFM Program Copy amp Validation window pops up AFM Program Copy amp Validation SHELFI7BBO Figure 5 54 AFM Program Copy amp Validation window The f
232. ate and Time of the first severity change m Date amp Time Last Change Date and Time of the last severity change in the life cycle of one alarm m Number Raises Number of times the alarm has been raised between the first raised time and the current time AEM R1 7 7 16 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 Fault management and maintenance Alarm monitoring p ee Correlation State This field reflects if one alarm has been correlated or not In the case of correlated alarms it also identifies if it is a source or a result alarm of the correlation process For this release only duplicated alarms are consid ered 7 3 3 4 2 Sorting alarms Summary The user can sort alarms by the different fields by clicking on the respective header The sort can be ascending or descending order The sort order is re versed by clicking on the respective header All alarm fields are sorted by alphanumeric order except date and time field Effects The alarms are re arranged according to the selected criteria Sorting alarms Proceed as follows to sort the alarm display Step Procedure 1 Click on the header according to which the alarms are to be sorted Response The alarms are sorted according to the selected alarm field in ascending or descending order 2 Check if the list was sorted as desired Yes O K No Continue with step 3 3 Click again on the header to sort the list in the reverse order The sort can be in ascending or descend
233. ate can be changed by the user from REQUIRED to NOT REQUIRED or vice versa as long as the pack is not inserted However it is not possible to set both COMDACs to not required The Apply button is available if a change in the Slot Re quired check box has been made Protection State This non editable field shows whether the selected COM DAC is working or not Possible states are Working providing service or Standby not in service or Not Equipped slot is un equipped COMDAC Pro This button provides access to the Shelf Protection window tection COMDAC tab to allow modification of the current protec tion scheme or for performing protection switching cf Chapter 5 5 11 1 page 5 142 5 5 10 2 Set the COMDAC protection to sim plex Procedure Complete the following procedure to set the COMDAC protection to simplex Step Procedure 1 Select NE gt Main Shelf gt COM101 in the Network Element Browser and Edit via the cursor menu or select View gt Object via the menu bar or single click on the pack COMDAC in the Shelf View window The COMDAC window pops up 2 Deselect the check box Slot Required 3 Click on Apply to confirm the window remains on screen for further use 4 Click on COMDAC Protection to open the Shelf Protection window COMDAC tab cf Chapter 5 5 11 1 page 5 142 or click on Close to exit the window AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 5 141 NE management equipment c
234. ate modify remove an ADSL threshold profile Step Procedure Select NE in the Network Element Browser and Profiles gt ADSL PM Thresholds via the cursor menu The ADSL Threshold Profile window pops up cf Chapter 5 5 5 35 page 5 119 This window can also be reached Chapter 5 5 5 31 page 5 109 by old profile from the ADSL Drop window cf pressing the Edit button for the thresh then If you want to modify a threshold profile not possible for the two default pro files create a new threshold profile remove a threshold profile not possible for the two default pro files 2 Click on Close to exit the window AEM R1 7 use the option menu Profile to select the desired profile edit the parameters in the field Profile Data and click on Apply to confirm use the option menu Profile to select NEW use the option menu Profile Pattern to select an available profile as an example define the parameters in the fields Profile Data and click on Apply to confirm use the option menu Profile to select the desired profile and press Remove gt NOTE The first two default profiles can not be removed In case one of these profiles has been selected the Remove button is disabled Version 1 00 06 00 5 121 NE management equipment configuration Equipment configuration gt E 5 5 6 Network element synchronization 5 5 6 1 Telephony agent 5 5 6 1 1 Configurati
235. ated not defined will be displayed In this case the Add Edit operation is disabled Drop VPI Shows the VPI used to create the cross connec tion on the drop side Drop VCI Shows the VCI used to create the cross connec tion on the drop side This field can be empty if the row is a VP cross connection Administrative State This field shows the current adminis trative state of the cross connection Locked Unlocked The button Add Edit provides access to the ATM Cross Connection window cf Chapter 6 3 2 page 6 68 If a cross connection has been selected Edit if no cross connection has been selected Add gt NOTE This button is disabled if the selected cross connec tion is not associated with a drop The Remove button can be used to remove a selected cross connection This button is enabled only if a cross con nection is selected AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 6 67 Service provisionin Service provisioning data p g p ee 6 3 2 ATM Cross Connections window This window is used to create remove or edit ATM cross connections over an ADSL drop Figure 6 35 ATM Cross Connection window The following table shows the view edit options of this window Parameters Buttons Description NE Name NE name of the selected NE max 30 characters AEM R1 7 6 68 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 Service provisioning Service provisioning data Parameters Buttons Physical
236. ations bound interfaces m general northbound interface all types of autonomous messages received from the NE are send to the OS None NE autonomous messages will be inhibited m alarm only northbound interface only alarm and environment alarm autonomous message received from the NE are sent to the OS the AEM will inhibit the rest of NE autonomous mes sages database changes events etc AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 C 1 Northbound interface Configure terminal for session Restrictions with multiple sessions Avoid interference with other EM Start northbound interface session Close northbound interface session Maintaining au thentication infor mation Close virtual cir cuits with NEs Routing of TL1 messages Messages from NEs C 2 Version 1 00 06 00 Northbound interface basics p See Before the telnet session for the northbound interface is opened the TERM variable must be set correctly Set the TERM variable either to dtterm xterm or vt100 While a northbound interface session is already open another session of a differ ent type must not be opened for the same NE When a northbound interface session is opened it is recommendable to send the message ALW MSG vc all ALL to avoid that changes in the configura tion of the NE introduced by another manager could interfere with our application To start a northbound interface session the OS must open a TCP IP connection
237. atus Code lists all AP Info types available for the NE release in the view selected COMDAC or AFM The default value is NONE so this window is launched when there is not any provisioned pack in the selected slot It shows only telephony or data APs depending on the view se lected COMDAC or AFM Once the operator has selected the provisioned apparatus code pack type this window will be replaced by the specific AP window e g IAT Server window Possible values for telephony None IAT_Server Possible values for data None ADSL AFM AEM R1 7 5 64 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 NE management equipment configuration Equipment configuration p ee 5 5 5 6 Provisioning a slot via common AP Procedure Complete the following procedure to provision a non provisioned slot Step Procedure 1 Select NE gt Main Shelf Subshelves gt not provisioned AP in the Network Element Browser and Edit via the cursor menu or select View gt Object via the menu bar or single click on a non provisioned AP in the Shelf View window The Common AP window pops up 2 Use the option menu Provisioned Apparatus Code to select the desired AP The corresponding AP window pops up IAT Server cf Chapter 5 5 5 17 page 5 83 ADSL cf Chapter 5 5 5 29 page 5 104 AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 5 65 NE management equipment configuration Equipment configuration p Se 5 5 5 7 Telephony Application Pack window
238. ault must be identified and on the other hand the fault informa tion must be processed as alarm notifications to be displayed on the user inter face Detection of faults If an NE fault is detected the NE notifies the AEM The notification comprises the type of fault and the address of the originating NE The AEM detects and proc esses such a notification automatically AEM R1 7 1 26 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 Functional description Working with AEM If the circuit of an NE fails that is responsible for the communication with the AEM the fault is identified differently No alarm notification will be sent to the AEM The AEM detects the fault by testing at regular intervals whether the association to the particular NE is dropped In this case the AEM itself raises an alarm Alarm display on A complete alarm overview and a detailed alarm description is provided by the the user interface alarm viewer All relevant alarm data e g alarm severity are shown Alarm logs The AEM keeps alarm logs to store the alarm notifications Alarm logs are used among other things for long term observations e g of the fault behaviour in the network Alarm logs exist for pending alarms for the alarm history and for clock events in the network 1 4 3 1 2 Fault localisation and diagnosis Reaction to fault When a fault has been detected it is necessary to localise its source and diag identification nose its cause in order to initiate appropriate
239. ave been se lected click on the Apply button Secondary Source If Timing Sync Mode is Loop Timed and Primary Source has been selected the secondary source can be selected as a protection timing synchroniza tion source if the primary source fails Possible values ds1 1 1 5 1 4 Once the protection source of synchronization has been se lected click on the Apply button gt NOTE The secondary source must be different from the pri mary source Otherwise there is no protection availa ble Line Code This option menu is available only if the Syn chronization Mode is External DS1 Possible values B8ZS ZCS Not Applicable can not be se lected Once the Line Code has been changed the Apply button has to pressed for confirmation Framing Format This option menu is available only if the Synchronization Mode is External DS1 Possible values ESF SF Not Applicable can not be se lected Once the Line Code has been changed the Apply button has to pressed for confirmation The Apply button is available only if m Timing Sync Mode has been changed m Synchronization Mode is Loop Timed and at least one source has been modified gt NOTE During the apply operation the Get and Switch but tons see below are disabled The whole subpane will be updated as a result of the operation AEM R1 7 5 130 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 NE management equipment configuration Equipment configuration
240. avings starting month Month is O based e g O for January The daylight savings starting day of month The daylight savings starting day of week in month Day of week are 1 based 1 is SUNDAY 2 is MONDAY and so on TZ_startTime The daylight savings starting time in local wall time which is standard time in this case TZ_endMonth The daylight savings ending month Month is O based e g O for January TZ_endDay TZ_endDayOfWeek TZ_endTime USERVIEW The daylight savings ending day of month The daylight savings starting day of week in month Day of week are 1 based 1 is SUNDAY 2 is MONDAY and so on The daylight savings ending time in local wall time which is daylight time in this case Default view in User Administration and Profiling application Possible values users user groups do mains or objects Default value users ALM_VIEW Default view of the Alarm Viewer Range of values 1 to 5 Default value 3 ALM_FILTER Default alarm filter of the Alarm Viewer Possible values 0 Last 24 hours 1 Critical raised alarms 2 Raised alarms 3 Alarm from a Host s 4 Critical alarms not cleared 5 Owned acknowledge alarms 6 All ac knowledge alarms 7 None filter all alarms Default value 3 AEM R1 7 06 00 363 211 454 Configuration parameters Overview mm ee Name Description DEFAULT _LOG_TYPE Default Options Window of Log Viewer Possible values Ac
241. aviour of the GUI is the same in both cases AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 5 169 NE management equipment configuration Equipment configuration p See Procedure Complete the following procedure to start a TL1 session 1 Select NE in Network Element Browser 2 Select Cut through gt Telephony via the menu bar to start a TL1 ses sion The Cut through window pops up Cut Through SHELF17_NB Telephony Figure 5 60 Cut Through window 3 Enter the Login and Password as defined in the NE Management win dow cf Figure 5 15 page 5 37 Now you are able to enter the appropriate TL1 commands The TL1 descriptions syntax formats parameters are available on line using the GSI help on AnyMedia Access System AEM R1 7 5 170 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 NE management equipment configuration Equipment configuration 5 5 17 Fiber Reach Overview The AEM provides an interface to a integrated transport management sub net work controller ITM SNC session with any DDM 2000 Fiber Reach component on the transport network that interacts with the AnyMedia Access System Using this software package the user can retrieve alarms and configuration related to the transport sub network The Fiber Reach interface is used by remote login when the operator wants to lo cate a failure or defect that is shown on the access system that have been origi nated in the transport network The GUI interface and the ITM SNC are
242. ays the corresponding contents in the window m Option menu The option menu is used to set a certain option Its designation will indicate the option currently set Handling of the option menu is the same as fora menu Frequently used The table below provides an overview of buttons which have the same function in buttons every AEM window Table 3 3 Function of frequently used buttons Button Function OK Applies changes window is closed Apply Applies changes window stays open for further edits Cancel Discards changes running operation is cancelled window is closed Close Discards changes window is closed AEM R1 7 3 14 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 System management General information on keyboard mm ee The table below provides an overview of menus which have the same function in Frequently Used every AEM window Menus Table 3 4 Function of Frequently Used Menus Menu Function File gt Print gt Print Table Prints the contents of text lists in the window cf Chapter 3 5 page 3 34 Opens the Print Dialog window to set parameters for the print out Prints a screenshot of the whole window cf Chapter 3 5 page 3 34 Opens the Print Dia log window to set parameters for the print out File gt Print gt Print Window Shows how it will be printed if the Print Table option is used Opens directly the Print Preview window File gt Print gt Preview Fi
243. b1d 2 b1dr17 51014048 49193336 1480632 98 home bldr17 masstc1 export1 b1d 2 syi_pl 51014048 49193336 1480632 98 home syi_pl Where should OrbixNames be installed opt lucent OrbixNames1 1c q AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 2 15 Software installation and commissioning Installation procedure ee 16 Type a valid path where the package files must be placed and press Re turn Or press Return to accept the default path Multi threaded Orbix installation detected is this correct y y n 17 Type y and press Return Select owner and group for package files NBR USER GROUP 1 halt other 2 root other 3 smtp root 4 verl staff Enter selection q 18 Type 4 and press Return User lt users gt and Group lt group gt have been se lected Using lt gt as the package base directory Processing package information Processing system information Verifying disk space requirements Checking for conflicts with packages already installed Checking for setuid setgid programs This package contains scripts which will be ex ecuted with super user permission during the process of installing this package Do you want to continue with the installation of lt LuOXNS gt y n 19 Type y and press Return Installing OrbixNames 1 1c Runtime for AnyMedia EM R1 7 as lt LuOXNSRT gt Installing part 1 of 1 verifying class lt names gt AEM R1 7 2 16 Version 1 00 06
244. be executed every day at 2 00 AM Do you like change it y n q 12 Type n and press Return Using lt gt as the package base directory Processing package information Processing system information 16 package pathnames are already properly installed Verifying disk space requirements Checking for conflicts with packages already installed Checking for setuid setgid programs This package contains scripts which will be executed with super user permission during the process of installing this package Do you want to continue with the installation of lt LuSysAdm gt y n 13 Type y and press Return Installing AnyMedia Element Manager System Administration Release 1 7 Administration as lt LuSysAdm gt Installing part 1 of 1 lt files list gt verifying class lt common gt Executing postinstall script xxx WARNING The installation process has not permissions to change the owner and group of the path containing the Object Store transaction log file If you want that AnyMedia automayicaly manages this file the owner and group of its path direcory and all sub directories must be changed to verl and to staff respectively AEM R1 7 2 26 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 Software installation and commissioning Installation procedure p Se s1224 OrbixNames Release 1 1 s1369 OrbixOTM package Release 1 0 Checking AnyMedia EM R1 7 naming contexts Cr
245. be used to reset a fixed receive gain or loss in dB Negative values define loss positive values define gain Possible values 8 1 5 step 0 25 Default 8 This slider can be used to set a fixed transmission gain or loss in dB Negative values define loss positive values de fine gain Possible values 6 75 4 5 step 0 25 Default 4 5 This option menu can be used to define the termination im pedance of the tip ring interface Possible values 600 900 Default 900 Balance Mode 6 46 Version 1 00 06 00 This option menu can be used to define whether the AP or CU uses an adaptive hybrid to control the 4 wire to 2 wire balance or a prescription set value Possible values Auto Fixed Default Fixed AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Service provisioning Service provisioning telephony Service Details Parameters Description Balance This slider can be used to establish the prescription balance setting in case BAL1 is Fixed If BAL1 has value Auto this control will be disabled grayed out Possible values 0 31 step 1 Default 0 Equalization This slider can be used to set the slope equalization for the AP or CU Possible values 0 7 step 1 Default 0 This option menu can be used to determine whether the AP or CU sets the signaling state toward the CO to the Idle state Busy or the DSO remote alarm indication Rai code during a fault condition Default Idle Trunk Condition 6 2 4
246. been changed 9 Click on the Provision button Once the NE is provisioned the Administrative State becomes availa ble 10 Change the Administrative State to Managed The AEM starts the connection and synchronization processes with the NB agent The progress of these processes can be watched in the field Operational State Possible values are Communication Stopped Communication Stopped Releasing Communication Trying Communication Trying Problem De tected Communication Established Communication Established Syn chronizing When the Administrative State has been changed to Managed the More Details button becomes available 11 Click on More Details to open the Synchronization window cf Chapter 5 5 6 page 5 122 in order to view or modify the synchronization data Edit and provisioning actions are only possible once the connection is established Only in this case the NE can be displayed on the Browsers and the background map 5 5 2 Connection states AEM telephony agent There are three AEM telephony agent connection states m NOT CONNECTED Initial connection state when there is no connection between AEM and the telephony agent and the AEM is in a passive state avoiding any possibility of connection establishment with the telephony agent TRYING Initial connection state when the TL1 communication session between the AEM and the telephony agent is not available but the AEM is in an active state
247. been installed previously m Common actions showed above have been made m A new user shall be created on the target system who will be the owner of the AEM R1 7 files The server workstation shall be a NIS server and the client workstations shall be NIS clients All the users shall be included in NIS and exported through the network in order to be recognized by the AEM software For more information about the NIS tools refer to your SUN documentation AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 2 7 Software installation and commissioning Installation procedure m A NIS group is also necessary Typically a new group shall be created to in clude all the AEM users Procedure Complete the following procedure to install the AEM R1 7 application gt NOTE Lines with indentation are the system responses They are included here to guide the installation procedure 2 2 1 1 Server side installation The installation of the AnyMedia server side is divided into the following parts m Installation of the third party software m Installation of the common packages a Installation of the optional packages currently there are 4 optional pack ages 2 2 1 1 1 Installation of the third party software Complete the following procedure to install the third party software Step Procedure 1 Go to the directory where the installation script is placed on CD ROM 1 to 4 2 Type install_AMEM gen and press Return AnyMedia NB EM R1 7 i
248. ber line In addition the DSO data for locally switched services and ISDN lines AEM R1 7 6 2 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 Service provisioning Service provisioning telephony p Se on the TR 303 VRT can be administered by the LDS through its EOC When a physical subscriber line is TO cross connected to a VRT or VB it takes over the characteristics defined by the DSO data for the corresponding logical port e g if a line from a PROG2W LPA380 AP is cross connected to a logical port that is pro visioned for POTS service it provides a loop start interface if the line is then cross connected to a logical port that is provisioned for foreign exchange FX ser vice it provides a ground start interface Logical configura The NE logical configuration supports a combined maximum of 672 DSO records tion among all VRTs and VBs This number exceeds the total number of physical sub scriber lines that the system supports Physical ports The physical ports of the AnyMedia Access System provide feeder DS1 connec tions and subscriber tip ring pairs The physical ports are associated with IO DS1 FAC100 packs and APs respectively Service provision Service provisioning for voice frequency VF services requires that feeder and ing distribution ports be associated with a VRT VB through T1 and TO cross connec tions respectively and that TO provisioning data be entered for the desired ser vice Finally the required physical packs must be
249. ble 4 Select one user group of the User Group Name field and click Open The User Group Profile window pops up with the current information about the selected user group AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 4 19 User management Change user group name Change user group description Adding users Removing users Adding to domains 4 20 Version 1 00 User groups User Group Profile User Group Name Brouns Description estou Users Domains Applications amp Tasks Users Not Assigned Users Assigned Add gt gt Figure 4 17 User Group Profile window tab Users To change the user group name enter the new name in the User Group Name field 3 to 30 characters Any characters are allowed To change the user group description enter the new information in the Descrip tion field 0 to 60 characters Any characters are allowed To assign further users to the selected user group select one or more users in the Users Not Assigned field and click Add gt gt gt NOTE To a create user see Chapter 4 2 3 page 4 7 To remove assigned users from the selected user group select one or more users in the Users Assigned field and click lt lt Remove gt NOTE The last user of user group administrator is protected against deletions To give the selected user group access to further domains change to tab Do mains The window changes its display as shown below AEM R1 7 06 00 363 211 454 Use
250. c code that in cludes the date and place of manufacture Apparatus Code Specifies the function of the pack Possible values LPA900 ICC InterChangeability Code Indicates the interchange ability among packs to specify forward backward compatibil ity Format of the ICC is m n where m is the issue number and n the series number CLEI Not applicable ECI Code that corresponds to the bar coded label on the faceplate of the pack Software Ver This field shows the software version of the inserted sion AFM_DS3 pack Location Infor mation gt NOTE The following text fields must be filled up Empty fields are not supported by the AFM Location This text field is used to define a location name where the NE is placed Contact This text field is used to enter the name of the peo ple who manage the NE Name This text field can be used to enter a name for the mainshelf The Apply button is used to confirm the changes in the text fields above Service Infor Shelf VPI This field is used to show change the VPI used in mation all feeder VCls Possible values 1 255 The Apply button is used to confirm the changed Shelf VPI AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 5 95 NE management equipment configuration Equipment configuration p Se Parameters Buttons Inband Manage ment Channel Description OAM VPI This field shows the VPI used to communicate with the NE Possible values 1 255 O
251. c monitoring 8 4 ATM traffic monitoring Limited ATM traffic measurements for cells received on the ATM feeder are col lected by the AFM The AEM is able to display clear the ATM cell traffic data Interval data are re trieved and stored every 15 minutes from each enabled NE The data are stored per day in a separate log file AdsIATMStatisticsLog_YYYYMMDD where YYYY year MM month and DD day located in ANYMEDIAPATH Iog The file containsalso hints about start log ging stop logging and error messages 8 4 1 ATM Traffic Monitoring window This window is used to display all ATM cell traffic data It also allows to select data collection or to clear the counter ATM Traffic Monitoring SHELF17 BBO Figure 83 ATM Traffic Monitoring window The following table shows the view edit options of this window Parameters Buttons Description NE Name NE name of the selected NE max 30 characters Log Perform This check box can be used to specify whether the AEM is ance Data collecting and logging the traffic monitoring data in the NE or not AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 8 9 Performance monitoring ATM traffic monitoring p Se Parameters Buttons Description Traffic Monitor Two text fields show the values for two different time periods ing Current 15 minutes Previous 15 minutes m Receive Cells Possible values 0 800 000 000 m Errored Cells Possible values 0 800 000 000 Ge
252. cal O Add more examples Add more better quick reference aids O Add more detail Improve the index I I I I Q Please provide details for the suggested improvement Name 00222222 22 mc kes tye Sen Dice nent tes oe Telephone Number __________ ____ ___ _ Company Organization ____LL LLLLLLLLL LI LLLLLLL Dates rer 2 ial ah Address When you have completed this form please fax it to the address on top of this page Title AnyMedia Element Manager 24 Channel AEM Release 1 7 User Service Manual 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 Contents About this document XI 1 Overview xl 2 Intended audience XII 3 How to use this document XIII 4 Conventions used XIV 6 General safety information XV 6 1 General notes on safety XV 6 2 General safety requirements XVI 7 Related documentation XVIII 7 1 Print copy hard copy XVIII 7 2 CD ROM XVIII 8 How to order this document XIX How to comment on this document XIX Ee 1 Functional description ti 1 1 About this subject 1 1 1 2 Introduction 1 2 1 2 1 Main functions 12 1 2 2 ISO functional areas 13 1 2 3 Applications 14 1 2 4 System working modes to 1 2 5 Performance reliability and availability 1 6 1 3 System and software architecture 1 7 1 3 1 Functional groups 1 7 1 3 2 Hardware platform 1 20 1 4 Working with AEM 1 22 1 4 1 Network planning and physical installation 1 23 1 4 2 Configuration management 1 24 1 4 3 Network Operation amp Surveillance 1 25 1 4 4 System
253. card number is required with all orders Make checks payable to Lucent Technologies One time orders One time orders include the contents for the current document issue in effect at the time of order Standing orders You may request an update on the standing order list for all later reissues of any document The standing order list for each document provides automatic distribu tion for all reissues of the document 9 How to comment on this document Document com The first sheet in this manual after the title page is the feedback form How Are ment procedure We Doing Please use this form to fax your comments and suggestions concerning the USM 363 211 454 to Lucent Technologies Network Systems GmbH Fax no 49 911 526 3545 AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 XIX About this document How to comment on this document mm AEM R1 7 XX Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 Functional description Contents 1 1 About this subject 1 2 Introduction 1 2 1 Main functions 1 2 2 ISO functional areas 1 2 2 1 Configuration management 1 2 2 2 Fault management 1 2 2 3 Performance management 1 2 2 4 Security management 1 2 3 Applications 1 2 4 System working modes 1 2 5 Performance reliability and availability 1 3 System and software architecture 1 3 1 Functional groups 1 3 1 1 NE Management 1 3 1 2 General components 1 3 1 3 Software platform 1 3 1 3 1 Software bus 1 3 1 3 2 Repository 1 3 1 4 Graphical user interface GU
254. ccessing the AnyMedia Element Manager 24 Channel AEM R1 7 general handling of the workspace and AEM windows starting up and shutting down applications printing out reports from AEM windows backup and restore tasks basics on log management and how to use the Log Viewer disaster recovery AEM R1 7 Version 1 00 06 00 3 1 System management System access mm ee 3 2 System access To access the AnyMedia Element Manager AEM application you need to have an account in the underlying operating system and this account has to be ac cepted as a user account of AEM The user account has to be NIS network infor mation name service based and the NIS can be provided by the AnyMedia Server or by another machine user accounts are managed by the administrator cf Chapter 4 3 2 1 Login to operation system This chapter describes how to log into the system System login Complete the following procedure to log in Step Procedure 1 The system asks for your user name Enter your user name and press Return or click OK 2 The system asks for your password Enter your password and press Return or click OK Login correct If the login was correct the workspace is displayed Login incorrect If the login was incorrect a warning message appears Login incorrect please try again Confirm the message by pressing Return or clicking OK and repeat the login procedure Start AEM If the AEM was not yet started an administrator
255. ce Trans Processing package instance lt LuPerTr gt from lator installation lt homelocal tmp lucent AnyMediaEMR1 7 gt AnyMedia Element Manager Performance Translator Release 1 7 administration sparc LuPerTr_36_1 1 kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk AnyMedia Element Manager c 1999 Lucent Technologies kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Package lt LuSysAdm gt SystemAdmin LuSysAdm_36_1 1 have been found in opt lucent AnyMediaEM_R1 7 OK No previous package LuPerTr have been found Using lt gt as the package base directory Processing package information Processing system information 1 package pathname is already properly installed Verifying disk space requirements AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 2 45 Software installation and commissioning Installation procedure a Se Checking for conflicts with packages already installed Checking for setuid setgid programs This package contains scripts which will be executed with super user permission during the process of installing this package Do you want to continue with the installation of lt LuPerTr gt y n 25 Type y and press Return Installing AnyMedia Element Manager Performance Translator Release 1 7 administration as lt LuPerTr gt Installing part 1 of 1 opt lucent AnyMediaEM_R1 7 PerformanceTranslator bin ReportTranslator opt lucent AnyMediaEM_R1 7 Perform
256. ceplate of the pack There is a one to one correspondence between CLEI and ECI codes Operation amp The check box Slot Required displays the required state of Protection the shelf slot This state can be changed in the case of CTU regardless of the slot status Default state for CTU Not Required empty check box 2 Use the check box Slot Required to define the slot state 3 Click on Close to exit the window AEM R1 7 5 62 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 NE management equipment configuration Equipment configuration E See 5 5 5 5 Common Application Pack window Background AP provisioning will be performed to establish a desired pack type in a desired slot xx To be fully functional operational an AP must both be inserted and provi sioned In addition the provisioned AP must match the actual type of the inserted pack An AP can be provisioned and configured by the AEM even if the slot is still empty Mixed configura In a mixed configuration telephony data the AP provisioning is performed in a tion separate way telephony provisioning and data provisioning A little pane will be always inserted in the Common Application Pack window and specific AP win dows under the Close button to allow the operator to select what view he wants to see the COMDAC view for telephony or the AFM view for data The default view is the COMDAC view The following window is used to provision a non provisioned slot Common Ap
257. chronous state for those inputs that generated the overload Re synchronization of this input retrieves synchronization OS This is any operations system or Element Manager connected to the AnyMedia Access System Element Manager by some means of communication For the AnyMedia Element Manager R1 0 the communication method is TCP IP U SS P Password PID This is always associated with a login UID PID is a case sensitive string containing 6 to 10 alphabetic numeric and symbolic characters where at least two characters are non alphabetic and one is symbolic PCM Highway The COMDAC pack is connected to each AP by the PCM highway which consists of two 4 096 Mbps serial links a 4 096 MHz clock and an 8 kHz sync signal The AnyMedia Access System uses two PCM highways between the COMDAG the IO_DS1s and each of the 16 AP slots Performance Management For receiving detecting time stamping analyzing displaying and storing performance data Plain Old Telephone Service POTS The conversional 2 wire analog subscriber service AEM R1 7 GL 8 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 Glossary Platform The hardware on which any AnyMedia EM module server or client is running Platform Alarm This is an alarm related to the AnyMedia Element Manager application or its hardware software platform It usually refers to an Element Manager function or hardware software platform object Port This is circuitry built on an AP to provide an interf
258. cific TL1 messages Northbound interface _ _ _ _ __LLLLL Meaning GR 303 Embedded Operations Channel GR 303 Timeslot Management Channel NE TID Target identifier Abbreviation v3eoc 1 1 2 v3tmc 1 1 2 string a only available via AEM AIDTYPE Access identifier type This parameter appears in the Access ID Block Type List Required Yes Abbreviation Meaning TI Ti EQPT Equipment NTFCNCDE Notification code This parameter appears in the Common Block Type List Required Yes This is notification code associated with a single alarm condition Abbreviation Meaning CR Critical alarm MJ Major alarm MN Minor alarm CONDTYPE Condition type This parameter appears in the Common Block Type List Required Yes AEM R1 7 C 12 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 Northbound interface Northbound interface specific TL1 messages mm ee Abbreviation Meaning Als Alarm indication signal BKUPMEMP System data memory mismatch CABLE Cable disconnect CPYMEMF Copy Memory Failed DATASYSCR Data system failed critical DATASYSMJ Data system failed major DATASYSMN Data system failed minor DBCRRPT Data memory corrupt DBMEMTRF Data memory update abort DIGRPF TR 08 major shelf alarm received EXT External IMPROPRMVL Improper removal INT Internal hardware failure INTRMVL Internal Fault or Pack Missing LOF Loss of frame LOS Loss of signal NE_A
259. cify forward backward compatibility Format of the ICC is m n where m is the issue number and n the series number CLEI Code assigned by Bellcore that provides information about the functionality of the pack ECI Code that corresponds to the bar coded label on the faceplate of the pack There is a one to one correspondence between CLEI and ECI codes Provisioning In The option menu Provisioned Apparatus Code lists the formation provisioned pack type and the value None for unprovision ing The None value can be used to unprovision the AP The cur rent window will be closed and the Common Application Pack window pops up cf Chapter 5 5 5 5 page 5 63 Slot Required The check box Slot Required displays the required state of the shelf slot This state can be changed by the operator only if the card is not inserted Physical Server This field contains a table displaying port information This Port Informa information is presented in a 4 column table The table is tion sorted by Physical Server Port Id A scroll bar allows navi gation through the table Rows in the table can be selected to edit add and remove cross connections through the use of the buttons described below m Physical Server Port Id Identifies the port within the server pack in which the IAT subshelf is cross con nected m Feeder Port Id Specifies the IAT subshelf Id Up to 32 IAT cross connections are possible within a Mainshelf Equalizatio
260. click Add gt gt gt NOTE To create user groups see Chapter 4 4 1 page 4 14 6 Click OK or Apply to save the settings the system ensures that the new user does not yet exist in the system After clicking OK the window will be closed If you want to reject the settings click Close before OK or Apply The other fields are described in Chapter 4 2 2 page 4 5 AEM R1 7 4 4 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 User management User 4 2 2 Modify user Introduction This chapter describes the process to modify the information or profile of a user Before modifying the information or profile of a user please pay attention to the following remarks m To modify the information or profile of a user the AEM administrator must have a NIS based login m The AEM administrator is not able to change the system login information of a user i e system login and password Procedure Complete the following procedure to modify the information or profile of a user Step Procedure 1 Login as AEM administrator and start the AEM access bar as described in Chapter 3 2 1 The access bar will be shown 2 Select the User Administration amp Profiling icon The User Administration amp Profiling window pops up showing the Users Table Login Name User Name Description Default EM Administrator useri nkg Figure 4 4 User Administration amp Profiling window Users Table 3 Select one user of the Login Name fi
261. configuration and common functionality alarms logging and administration m Broadband package for BB configuration and common functionality alarms logging and administration m Administration package for common functionality alarms logging and administration Distributed Set of module groups of the same type distributed to provide Module Group load balancing and protection features DMG Module Group Set of modules with strong functional dependencies that influ MG ence the way they are installed and managed Module Executable that provides a subset of services in the AEM and describes a way to handle its process instances Process Entity of the AEM which has an physical operation system process associated AEM R1 7 3 16 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 System management System administration mm ee 3 4 1 2 Start up shutdown and recovery The AEM administrators can control the start up and shutdown at four levels AEM level package level DMG level only for optional DMGs and process level AEM startup The AEM can be started up in two ways m At boot time Root can configure the system to make the AEM start up at boot time indi cating the packages to be started up NB BB Administration or any combi nation of them m Via command line The administrator can start AEM via command line indicating the pack ages to be started up NB BB Administration or any combination of them Pack
262. connection on the AEM side and does a translation to a wide area network WAN via multiple DSOs on the other 5 2 1 4 External interfaces for circuit testing The AnyMedia Access System provides three external interfaces for circuit test ing m Local access for manual testing via jacks on the CTU DTP 100 m Connection to the TAP B Remote test unit RTU 2 via the tip ring leads from two APs VF port cir cuits 5 2 1 5 Synchronization interfaces The AnyMedia Access System supports four timing modes which can be provi sioned by the AEM m External DS1 m External composite office clock m Free running mode m Loop timed mode The provisioning options are described in Chapter 5 5 6 3 page 5 128 5 2 1 6 Plug amp play capabilities Inventory data The packs associated with the AnyMedia Access System have the capability to self identify themselves with inventory data This capability is very useful during the execution of provisioning and maintenance procedures AEM R1 7 5 6 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 NE management equipment configuration Overview of the controlled systems p See For example upon insertion of the new pack in the AnyMedia Access System shelf the inventory data of the new pack as well as its serial number slot and pack entity will be reported to the AEM and or GSI interface The removal of any pack unit will be announced also 5 2 1 7 Equipment configuration related tasks The network eleme
263. corresponds to the bar coded label on the faceplate of the pack There is a one to one correspondence between CLEI and ECI codes Operation The check box Slot Required displays the required state of the shelf slot This state can be changed by the operator only if the card is not inserted AEM R1 7 5 76 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 NE management equipment configuration Equipment configuration p Se Parameters Buttons Description Action Physical DS0 This field contains a table displaying physical DSO informa Information tion This information is presented in a 3 column table The table is sorted by Physical DSO Id A scroll bar allows navigation through the table Rows in the table can be selected to edit add or remove single or multiple row selection the corre sponding Logical DSO s through the use of the Edit Logical DSO Add Logical DSO or Remove Logical T0 buttons see below m Physical DSO Id Identifies the port within the AP Format drop shelf slot port Possible values drop shelf 1 16 1 32 m Logical DSO Id Indicates the logical DSO id within the VRT VB id shown in the row only available if the physi cal port is cross connected Possible values v3dp 1 2048 for TR 303 v8dp 1 20 1 96 for TR 08 inadsO 1 20 1 24 for INA m GSFN The generic signalling function GSFN identi fies the service type provided The following values are possible DFLT default 2LS 2GS Coin
264. cross con nection selected in the list see above AEM R1 7 5 68 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 NE management equipment configuration Equipment configuration a Voss Parameters Buttons Description Test Manage The Apply button is used together with the option menu be ment side it to execute one of the following tests AP card test Port test For more information refer to Chapter 7 4 5 5 5 8 Modify a telephony AP Procedure Complete the following procedure to modify the telephony AP data Step Procedure 1 Select NE gt Mainshelf gt LPA380 LPA380C LPA300 LPA350 LPU116 in the Network Element Browser and View via the cursor menu or select View gt Object via the menu bar or single click on the pack Telephony AP in Shelf View window The Telephony Application Pack window pops up If you want to then unprovision the AP use the option menu Provisioned Ap paratus Code in the field Provision ing Information to select None The Common AP window pops up cf Chapter 5 5 5 5 page 5 63 change the required state use the check box Slot required add a logical DSO select a row in the Physical DSO Infor mation list with no cross connection and press Add Logical DS0 The Logical DSO window pops up cf Chapter 6 2 4 3 page 6 35 edit a logical DSO select a row in the Physical DSO Infor mation list with an existing cross con nection and press Edit Logical DSO The Logical
265. cross connections as well as service configuration and modification Figure 6 14 Logical DSO window tab General The following table shows the view edit option of this window Parameters Buttons Description NE Name NE name of the selected NE max 30 characters AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 6 35 Service provisioning Service provisioning telephony ee Parameters Buttons Description Logical DSO GSFN The generic signalling function identifies the signal General Infor ling and transmission function of the provisioned service mation This option menu provides access to the Service Details windows cf Chapter 6 2 4 7 page 6 41 to Chapter 6 2 4 25 page 6 62 gt NOTE GSFN type is NOT modifiable in R1 7 A change in the GSFN of a logical DSO implies deletion and new cre ation of a logical DSO Depending on the GSFN se lected the list of parameters needed for configuring a subscriber differs The GSFN parameters are dependent on the GSFN type and they are shown in each GSFN group table There are some services which do not have special details COIN ISDN only for TR 303 AC DATA EBS LR NO 1 2 OCUO NE R1 7 NO NE R1 7 COIN2 R1 2 3 DFLT2 R1 2 3 and 2LO R1 2 3 For these GSFNs the More Details but ton is disabled see below Logical DSO Id Three lines show the logical DSO id s by means of a option menu and a text field The option menu contains the VRT VB list
266. ct NE in the Network Element Browser and Backups gt Telephony via the cursor menu The COMDAC NVDS Backup window pops up COMDAC NYDS Backup Figure 5 55 COMDAC NVDS Backup window 2 Click on the Browse button to open the File Browser window cf Chapter 5 5 15 5 page 5 168 to select create the directory example of the file structure NE Files NVDS lt NE_Name gt COMDAC R1 and the file name of the backup file gt NOTE Do not insert any blank in the backup file name Such a file cannot be re stored 3 Click on OK to confirm The chosen file name appears in the field Filename in the COMDAC NVDS Backup window 4 Click on Apply this command button is available only after having se lected the file name to start the backup An n Progress window pops up NVDS Backup on lt NE NAME gt in progress After finishing the backup process successfully the In Progress window disappears 5 Press Close to exit the COMDAC NVDS Backup window AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 5 163 NE management equipment configuration Equipment configuration gt NOTE Pressing the Close button during the backup execution will cancel the backup operation 5 5 15 2 Data backup data agent Procedure Complete the following procedure to initiate data backup for a data agent Step Procedure 1 Select NE in the Network Element Browser and Backups gt Data via the cursor menu The AFM NVDS Backup window pops up
267. cted domain select one or more controlled objects controlled objects in the Controlled Objects Not Assigned field and click Add gt gt gt NOTE Each controlled object consists of two fields Type and Value Removing To remove assigned controlled objects from the selected domain select one or controlled objects more controlled objects in the Controlled Objects Assigned field and click lt lt Remove gt NOTE Each controlled object consists of two fields Type and Value Adding user groups To give further user groups access to the selected domain select one or more user groups in the User Groups Not Assigned field and click Add gt gt gt NOTE To create user groups see Chapter 4 4 1 page 4 14 Removing user To remove assigned user groups from the selected domain select one or more groups user groups in the User Groups Assigned field and click lt lt Remove Click OK or Apply to save the changes After clicking OK the window will be closed If you want to reject the changes click Close before OK or Apply 4 3 3 Delete domains Introduction This chapter describes the process to remove a domain from the AEM Before re moving a domain please pay attention to the following remarks m The AEM administrator must have a system login m Before deleting a domain the AEM ensures that there are no controlled ob jects assigned to this domain If this is the case the deletion request will be rejected m After a domain delet
268. ctionallity q Type a valid login e g ver1 and press Return Password for CutThrough functionallity q Type a valid password e g newuser1 and press Return The name of the location where the EM is working is needed for printing facility What is the name of the location q The location name will appear in the document header of the printing fa cility Type your AEM location name e g Tres Cantos Lab and press Return Code for the representation of names of languages Refer to ISO 639 1988 E F for more information 1 da Danish 2 de German 3 fr French 4 it Italian 5 zh Chinese 6 es Spanish 7 en English Enter selection q 7 Type your language code and press Return Code for the representation of names of countries AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Software installation and commissioning Installation procedure p Se Refer to ISO 3166 for more information 1 DK DENMARK 2 DE GERMANY 3 FR FRANCE 4 IT ITALY 5 CN CHINA 6 ES SPAIN 7 GB UNITED KINGDOM 8 US UNITED STATES Enter selection q 8 25 Type your country code and press Return Code for the representation of names of Time zones 1 GMT 0 Greenwich Mean Time 2 ECT 1 European Central Time 3 EET 2 Eastern European Time 4 ART 2 Arabic Egypt Standard Time 5 EAT 3 Eastern African Time 6 MET 3 5 Middle East Time 7 NET 4 Near East Time 8 PLT 5 Pakistan Lahore Time 9 IST 5 5 India Standard Time 10 B
269. ctions you can perform in the Package tab of the Sys tab tem Administration window Table 3 10 Actions for the administration of packages If you want to then Result select the package in the table and The selected package is started up press Start Up The Administrative State of the package must be OFF start up a package shut down a pack age select the package in the table press The selected package is shut down Shutdown and confirm the shutdown in the warning window which pops up The Administrative State of the pack age must be ON select the package and press DMGs in The DMGs in Package window is dis Package played cf Chapter 3 4 4 determine which DMGs are in the package AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 3 21 System management System administration mm ee 3 4 3 3 Administration of distributed module groups Overview The distributed module groups DMGs tab in the System Administration window allows for start up and shutdown of optional DMGs For each displayed DMG the contained MGs can be viewed and the DMG can be set up to be launched auto matically when its package is started up DMGs information The table in the DMGs tab displays the following information Table 3 11 DMGs information Table entry Meaning Name The internally assigned name of the DMG ID The internally assigned ID of the DMG Type The types of the MGs in this DMG Administrative S
270. d alarms all raised alarms all alarms from a host Alarms for the last 24 hours Critical Raised Alarms Raised Alarms Alarms from a Host s The alarms are dis played according to the selected filter The alarms are dis played according to the selected filter The alarms are dis played according to the selected filter NE selection window will open see details below all not cleared critical alarms Critical Alarms not cleared The alarms are dis played according to the selected filter all owned acknowl edge alarms Owned Acknowledge Alarms The alarms are dis played according to the selected filter all cleared alarms all acknowledge alarms all alarms Clear Alarms All Acknowledge Alarms None Filter All Alarms The same filter option can be selected The alarms are dis played according to the selected filter The alarms are dis played according to the selected filter The alarms are dis played according to the selected filter via the option menu Filters in the general information section cf Chapter 7 3 3 3 page 7 14 If you selected Alarms from a Host s the NE selection window is dis played cf Figure 7 7 page 7 21 and you have to select one or more NEs and or the AEM for which the alarms should be displayed Press OK in the NE selection window to display the alarms from the selected ob jects in the Alarm Viewer or press Cancel to cancel
271. d for used in PBX tie trunks and it can interface with a PBX or other transmission equipment PLR 1 2 4 wire pulse link repeater Type and Type II The primary application of the PLR function is also in PBX tie trunks providing the E amp M signaling interface with inverted polarity It is also applicable to the SPQ454 channel unit EMAC Service Details Information Figure 6 25 Logical DSO window EM4C Service Details Parameters Description Transmit Atten This slider can be used to define the transmit attenuator pa uator rameter Possible values 0 25 5 step 0 1 Default 25 5 Receive Attenu This slider can be used to define the receive attenuator pa ator rameter Possible values 0 25 5 step 0 1 Default 25 5 Trunk Condition This option menu can be used to determine whether the AP sets the signaling state toward the CO to the Idle state Busy or the DSO remote alarm indication Rai code during a fault condition Default Idle AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 6 53 Service provisioning Service provisioning telephony p SeSe 6 2 4 18 ETO4 Service Details window Overview The ETO4 4 wire equalized transmission only function is used in private lines voice or data when equalization of cable transmission characteristics is required It is applicable to the AUA41B channel unit ETO4 Service Details Information Figure 6 26 Logical DSO window ETO4 Service Details
272. d press Return AnyMedia EM R1 7 installation CopyRight c 2000 Lucent Technologies Inc All Rights Reserved Pre requisites AEM R1 7 2 20 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 Software installation and commissioning Installation procedure p Se 1 Before attempting to install the application please read the readme txt file 2 AnyMedia EM R1 7 runs on SUN SPARC Solaris 2 computers running Solaris 2 6 plus security and Y2000 and packs 105490 07 105568 13 105210 19 106040 12 105633 21 106409 01 105181 15 105669 07 105284 25 patches recommended by SUN and 106255 01 patch 3 TCP ports The following ports MUST be available in order to succesfully run the AnyMedia EM 1570 Orbix daemon uses the TCP port 1570 in order to wait for incoming connections that use the Orbix protocol 1591 to 1641 As Corba servers are activated by the Orbix daemon they are assigned a port so that clients can communicate with it It is essential that these ports are not used by any process on the SAME SUBNET DOMAIN 4 The install_AMEM script runs on K shell lt ksh gt environment 5 At least the system environment variable PATH MUST include the paths sr bin usr sbin and uas ucb for instance export PATH PATH usr bin usr sbin usr ucb 6 The time zone MUST be the same for the Any Media Client lt GUI gt LUMOS and Network Element This parameter is needed for installing the Any Media Client
273. d takes also some time to retrieve individual files because the AEM R1 7 3 38 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 System management Backup and restore mm ee backup drive has to move sequentially to the point on the tape where the file is located On the other hand using full backup makes it easier to re trieve small changes in file systems m Incremental backup An incremental backup only includes copies of new files and files that have changed since a previous backup It is available for database files only Re quires less resources but searching for a certain file on the incremental tapes can take time 3 6 2 Commands for backup archive and re store Default locations of If a backup is done the four AEM databases the NVDS and the log files are cop data for backups or ied to the backup medium If an archive is made the log files are moved to the Archives backup medium The files from which a backup or archive is done are shown in the table below The location of the files is relative to the main installation direc tory For changing default locations refer to Appendix B Table 3 27 Default File Names for Backup and Archive File name Backup fails if Database File Directory File file doesn t exist Network registry database NER db yes System Administration database SystemAdministrator db yes NE management database NEM db yes Security database yes Alarm database yes Manual backup The non volatile data
274. data agent Corrective actions Proceed as follows to clear the alarm Step Procedure 1 Check for correct data agent state Yes Continue with step 2 No Call Lucent Technologies Technical Support 2 Check for DCN being in service Yes Call Lucent Technologies Technical Support No Put the DCN into service 3 Is the alarm now cleared Yes O K No Call Lucent Technologies Technical Support 7 5 5 5 COMM_PROBLEM Meaning The data agent does not respond the AEM while trying to establish a communica tion Abbreviation COMM_PROBLEM Severity Critical Service affecting No AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 7 45 Fault management and maintenance Alarms p See Effects It is not possible to manage the data agent Possible cause s Invalid IP address Corrective actions Proceed as follows to clear the alarm Step Procedure 1 Check for DCN being in service Yes Continue with step 2 No Put the DCN into service 2 Check the IP address of the data agent Yes Call Lucent Technologies Technical Support No Correct the IP address 3 Is the alarm now cleared Yes O K No Call Lucent Technologies Technical Support 7 5 5 6 COMM_RES_NOT_AVAILABLE Meaning The communication between AEM and NE cannot be established Abbreviation COMM_RES_NOT_AVAILABLE Severity Critical Service affecting No Effects It is not possible to manage the NE Possible cause s The limit of connections that the AEM can manag
275. default the AEM provides three user groups Administrator Mainte nance and Monitoring m The administrator user group has access permissions to all applications and tasks m Before a user group can be created modified or deleted the AEM adminis trator must have a system login m Applications are divided into tasks A user can be assigned a whole appli cation or only a subset of its tasks Procedure Complete the following procedure to create a new user group Step Procedure 1 Login as AEM administrator and start the AEM access bar as described in Chapter 3 2 1 The access bar will be shown 2 Select the User Administration amp Profiling icon The User Administra tion amp Profiling window pops up 3 Select View gt User Groups via menu bar The User Groups Table ap pears User Administration amp Profiling User Group Name Description Administrator Administrator Group Description Maintenance Maintenance Group Description Monitoring Monitoring Group Description group 7 group 7 description Figure 4 12 User Administration amp Profiling window User Groups Table AEM R1 7 4 14 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 User management User groups 4 Click New The User Group Profile window pops up User Group Name Description Users Domains Applications amp Tasks Users Not Assigned Users Assigned SS Apply Figure 4 13 User Group Profile window tab Users 5 E
276. e NEs managed by the AEM It provides distributed CORBA access which includes implementation and translation of TL1 commands response and autonomous messages into equivalent CORBA requests and events TL1 southbound The TL1 southbound adaptors isolate the main AEM functionality from the specific pro adaptors tocol used by the NEs They are responsible for translating actions and state changes conveyed through CORBA messages from into the NE specific message formats Functionality The southbound interface provides the following functionality features features Southbound TCP IP TL1 client application telephony application Support for the TL1 client application on the southbound TCP IP interfaces TL1 is used for most of the OAM amp P functions see Chapter 1 3 1 2 page 1 14 Southbound TCP IP FTP client applications telephony application Support for the FTP client application on the southbound TCP IP inter faces FTP is required for software download and NE data backup restore Southbound TCP IP Telnet client applications cut through telephony ap plication Support for the Telnet application on the southbound TCP IP interfaces Telnet is used to provide a direct command line into the NE i e an equiva lent ASCII terminal interface Southbound SNMP client applications data application Support for the SNMP application on the southbound TCP IP interfaces SNMP is used for most of the OAM amp P functions on BB agen
277. e GSFN use the option menu GSFN to select the desired generic signalling function and click on More Details The corre sponding Service Details windows pops up for modifying the GSFN Back in the Logical DSO window click on Ap ply to confirm add a cross connection use the option menus Logical DSO id to select a desired VRT VB with a as sociated text field grey background use the option menus Physical DSO id to select the desired physical DSO and click on Apply modify the subscriber parameters use the text field CLEI and the check box Red Line to enter define the corre sponding values and click on Apply exit the window click on Close gt NOTE If the logical DSO is red lined the following warning message pops up after confirming the edit action Edition of Redlined Logical DSO Ok to proceed AEM R1 7 6 40 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 Service provisioning Service provisioning telephony 6 2 4 6 Use the Select Logical DSO window The Select Logical DSO window can be reached only from the Logical DSO win dow cf Chapter 6 2 4 3 page 6 35 Wi Logical DsOId inadso 1 None X Com Figure 6 15 Select Logical DSO window Procedure Complete the following procedure to select a logical DSO Step Procedure 1 Use the option menus Logical DSO Id to select the desired VRT VB and the corresponding logical DSO number 2 Click on OK to confirm the selection The Logical DSO window is on
278. e Idle state Busy or the DSO remote alarm indication Rai code during a fault condition Default Idle Loop Start Ground Start This option menu can be used to define whether loop start or ground start is used Possible values LS GS Default GS AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 6 61 Service provisioning Service provisioning telephony p See 6 2 4 25 DPT Service Details windows Overview The DPT dial pulse terminating function is used for a direct inward dial DID with either dial pulse or multi frequency addressing It is applicable to the SPQ442 channel unit which provides four channels of service which can be used for DID trunks DPT Service Details Information Figure 6 33 Logical DS0 window DPT Service Details Parameters Description Trunk Condi This option menu can be used to determine whether the AP tion or CU sets the signalling state toward the CO to the Idle state Busy or the DSO remote alarm indication Rai code during a fault condition Default Idle Impedance The transmit and receive impedance parameter selects the termination impedance of the channel unit Possible values 600 900 Default 600 Slope This slider can be used to adjust the frequency response of the equalizer Possible values 0 7 step 1 Default 0 Balance This slider can be used to specify the precision network for the 4 wire to 2 wire hybrid balance function Possible values 0 15 step
279. e alarming state of both COMDACs slots is set to Re quired and the AEM is not able to change it until one of the COMDACs is re moved When a COMDAC is removed the AEM is then able to set that slot to Not Required so the COMDAC protection mode will be disabled simplex Figure 5 47 Shelf Protection window tab COMDAC This window provides COMDAC protection information It also provides the mech anisms needed to perform changes in the protection scheme as well as protection switches AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 5 143 NE management equipment configuration Equipment configuration p ee The following table shows the view edit options of the Shelf Protection window tab COMDAC Parameters Buttons Description NE Name NE name of the selected NE max 30 characters Protection Represents the protection scheme used in the NE If only Scheme one COMDAC is present in the shelf the protection scheme is Simplex If both COMDACs are present Duplex is the value shown Only in this case duplex configuration is the Protection Switch pane available see below COMDAC Infor COMDAC 1 2 This non editable fields display the current mation COMDAC working state The following values are possible Working Standby and Not Equipped if there is no COM DAC inserted in the corresponding slot SW Version Shows the SW Version for the respective COMDAC Protection Radio buttons allow protection switching to be speci
280. e data agent of the man aged NE Also it is possible to retrieve the date and time of any NE Figure 5 44 Date amp Time Data window The following values are possible m 12 00 AM to 11 59 PM for time m Jan 1 1980 to Dec 12 2036 The format follows the locale and platform conventions e g for Spain the date for mat is day month year AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 5 135 NE management equipment configuration Equipment configuration p See Procedure Complete the following procedure to retrieve set the date and time of the teleph ony agent of an NE Step Procedure 1 Select the NE in the Network Element Browser and Date amp Time gt Data via the cursor menu The Date amp Time Data window pops up If you want to then to retrieve the current date and time Click on Get in the Current Date amp data Time field The corresponding data will be shown to set the date and time data use the text fields in the New Date amp Time field to enter the corresponding values and press Apply exit the window click on Close AEM R1 7 5 136 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 NE management equipment configuration Equipment configuration p Se 5 5 8 1 NE Inventory window This window provides inventory and summery information for both telephony and data services Two non editable tables display NE inventory information The first table contains per slot data while the second one provides su
281. e g Terminal Calendar Editor Other Workspaces Printer Tools Trash Can Clock File Manager Mailtool Workspace Solaris Help Configuration Figure 3 6 Workspace manager Functions For a detailed description of the offered functions please refer to your Solaris User s Guide and Solaris Common Desktop Environment User s Guide 3 3 9 Workspace menu General The workspace menu opens when you click with the right mouse button on the background of the workspace Figure 3 7 Workspace Menu AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 3 11 System management General information on keyboard mm ee Workspace menu The workspace menu provides the functions listed in the following table functions Table 3 2 Menu items of the workspace menu Menu Item Function Programs A submenu offering several programs Shuffle Up If several windows on the screen are layered on top of one another Shuffle Up brings the window from the very bot tom to the top of the pile Shuffle Down If several windows on the screen are layered on top of one another Shuffle Down moves the window from the top of the pile to the very bottom Refresh The contents of the windows on the screen and the screen backdrop are refreshed Minimize Re The workspace manager window is reduced to an icon or if store Front Panel already iconized restored to a window Restart Work The workspace manager is restarted Some of the changes space Manager
282. e has been reached Corrective actions Proceed as follows to clear the alarm Step Procedure 1 Start new instances of the progress es in charge of communication man agement 7 5 5 7 CONFIG_AO_NOT_PROCESS Meaning The AEM is discarding the configuration AOs coming from the telephony agent Abbreviation CONFIG_AO_NOT_PROCESS Severity Major AEM R1 7 7 46 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 Fault management and maintenance Alarms mm ee Service affecting No Effects The configuration data of the AEM does not match the configuration data of the telephony agent The configuration data synchronization state is moved to ASYNC Possible cause s Configuration buffer overflow Corrective actions Proceed as follows to clear the alarm Step Procedure 1 Perform a manual configuration synchronization process to upload the configuration data and to start processing AOs 2 Is the alarm now cleared Yes O K No Call Lucent Technologies Technical Support 7 5 5 8 CONFIG_EVENT_NOT_PROCESS Meaning The AEM is discarding the configuration traps coming from the data agent Abbreviation CONFIG_EVENT_NOT_PROCESS Severity Major Service affecting No Effects The configuration data of the AEM does not match the configuration data of the data agent Possible cause s Configuration buffer overflow Corrective actions Proceed as follows to clear the alarm Step Procedure 1 Perform a manual configuration synchronizatio
283. e in the field Provision ing Information to select None The Common AP window pops up cf Chapter 5 5 5 5 page 5 63 change the required state use the check box Slot required exit the window click on Close AEM R1 7 5 82 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 NE management equipment configuration Equipment configuration p Se 5 5 5 17 IAT Server window NE R1 7 The integrated access terminal server IATS provides up to 24 equivalent DSO services switched or non switched voice or data per feeder DS1 IAT Server Figure 5 30 IAT Server window The following table shows the view edit options of the IAT Server window Parameters Buttons Description Action NE Name NE name of the selected NE max 30 characters Slot Id This option menu shows the slot which is being used as IAT Server Possible values iat 1 1 24 AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 5 83 NE management equipment configuration Equipment configuration p See Parameters Buttons Description Action Inventory Infor The read only text fields provide the following information manon Card Type 11 character mnemonic used to identify the gen eral type of function provided Serial Number 12 character alphanumeric code that in cludes the date and place of manufacture Apparatus Code Specifies the function of the pack LPS100 ICC InterChangeability Code Indicates the interchangea bility among packs to spe
284. e of Rate Adaption is Flexible Max Bit Rate in kbps Two spin buttons upstream and downstream can be used to define the values for the maxi mum bit rate Possible values upstream 32 1440 steps of 32 downstream 32 13120 steps of 32 Min Bit Rate in kbps Two spin buttons upstream and downstream can be used to define the values for the mini mum bit rate Possible values upstream 32 1440 steps of 32 downstream 32 13120 steps of 32 AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 5 115 NE management equipment configuration Equipment configuration p See Parameters Buttons Profile Data Op tions Rate con tinued Description The following four parameters are enabled only if the Type of Rate Adaption is Explicit Bit Rate kbps Option 1 Two spin buttons upstream and downstream can be used to define the values for the option 1 bit rate Possible values upstream 32 1440 default 640 downstream 32 13120 default 6144 Bit Rate kbps Option 2 Two spin buttons upstream and downstream can be used to define the values for the option 2 bit rate Possible values upstream 32 1440 default 480 downstream 32 13120 default 4608 Bit Rate kbps Option 3 Two spin buttons upstream and downstream can be used to define the values for option 3 bit rate Possible values upstream 32 1440 default 320 downstream 32 13120 default
285. e option at this position is se lected AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 3 13 System management General information on keyboard mm ee m Radio button Radio buttons have the same function as check boxes with the difference that of various radio buttons of the same group only one can be pressed at a time As with a radio set a set button will pop out when you press the next one in m Text box Text boxes are used to input text via the keyboard m List box A list box contains read only data in list form To scroll through a list you have to use the scroll bar at the right of the list box If the list box allows the selection of entries more than one entry can be selected by clicking on all desired entries once while the Ctr1 key is pressed If more entries are se lected you can deselect a certain one by clicking on it again while the Ctrl key is pressed A range of consecutive entries can be selected simul taneously by clicking on the first entry of the range and then on the last while the Shift key is pressed m Drop Down List box A drop down list box allows you to enter data by selecting an entry froma list that drops down after clicking on the triangle on the right of the box m Spin box A spin box only allows a limited set of discrete ordered input values You have to use the up and down arrows to increment or decrement the value m Tab A window can contain a register of several tabs Clicking on a tab displ
286. e process The AEM process the object visible in the Edit MG window can be removed from the module to shutdown the process from the AEM s viewpoint In this case the physical process is automatically killed Module informa Next to MG Name the name of the selected MG is displayed The table under tion Modules in MG displays the following information for all modules in the MG Table 3 18 Module information Table entry Meaning ID The internally assigned ID of the module Name The internally assigned name of the module Type The type of the module Operational State The operational state of the module displayed when the module is running only Possible values IS if the module is in service OOS if it is out of service TRANSITORY otherwise The module is running only if the MG it belongs to has an Administrative State of ON Next to Module Name the name of the selected module is displayed How many processes are expected for this module is indicated next to Expected Number of Processes This is the number of processed which are normally needed to man age the expected workload properly The table under Processes in Module dis plays the following information for the selected module Table 3 19 Process information Table entry Meaning ID The internally assigned ID of the process PID Process ID of this process Operational State The operational state of the process Possible val ues IS if the module is
287. e source of the fault or abnormal condition is near end FE yellow Lit when the source of the fault or abnormal condition is far end CTU FLT red m Lit when a fault is detected on the pack aa cal m Flashes on turn up ACT Lit when a test is in progress MISC yellow Lit when one of the eight miscellaneous alarm inputs is active ACO green For future use AEM R1 7 7 4 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 Fault management and maintenance Alarm management p Se Table 7 1 LED meanings Pack LED Color Meanings All Appli FLT red m Lit when a fault is detected on the pack Calon m Flashes when the AP executes off line Packs shelf tests AP FLT red Lit when a fault is detected on the pack MDSU LNK yellow m Lit when loss of clock sync signal is de tected m Flashes when incorrect MDSU MDS2 MDS82B side association is detected IAT Server FLT red Lit when a fault is detected on the pack NE CFL yellow Lit when a failure of either IAT RT carrier link R1 7 0 from the IAT to the IATS is detected CFG yellow Lit when a configuration error or mismatch is detected as follows m the IATS is placed in an AP slot not pro visioned for the IAT server pack type m the IATS faceplate DS1 cable is discon nected m there is a mismatch between the host TO provisioning and the IAT phantom CU equipage IATO1 only IAT yellow Lit when a failure of either linr from the IATS
288. e the screen again 6 2 4 7 Common parameters in service details windows The following table shows the parameters which are included in all service details windows Parameters Buttons Description GSFN Displays the selected GSFN for the logical DSO Command but The OK button is used to confirm the changes tons The Close button can be used to close the window without changes AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 6 41 Service provisioning Service provisioning telephony 6 2 4 8 DELT Service Details window Overview The DFLT default POTS SPOTS service is primarily applicable to TR 08 applica tions a DFLT Service Details Information GSFN DFLT ervice Details Information Enable Full Time Transmission Loss Mode Auto Figure 6 16 Logical DSO window DFLT Service Details Parameters Description Enable Full When a check mark is set in the check box the transmission Time Transmis circuits in the AP or CU remain active when the subscriber is sion on hook Possible values Set Not set Default Set Loss Mode Use this option menu to specify whether the AP or CU will automatically adjust its transmit receive loss to control the overall loop loss to approximately 2 or 5 dB or use prescrip tion set values Possible values 2 5 Auto Default Auto AEM R1 7 6 42 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 Service provisioning Service provisioning telephony 6 2 4 9 EMO
289. e where PC GUI had been installed in the file Enviroment _Varialbes bat in CURRENT_DIR entrance If java is installed in different directory that the recommended one indicate the path on the bat file Enviroment_Variables bat in the variable JDK_PATH 2 2 5 1 Customizing SystemPreferences ini Please modify the SystemPreferences ini as follows m update the variable IS_NAR_MARKET to true value The SystemPreferences ini variables are described in Appendix B AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 2 75 Software installation and commissioning Installation procedure p See AEM R1 7 2 76 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 System management Contents 3 1 Overview 3 1 3 2 System access oe 3 2 1 Login to operation system 32 3 2 2 Logout from operation system 3 3 3 2 3 AEM Access Bar 3 4 3 2 4 Capacity 25 3 3 General information on keyboard and windows 3 5 3 3 1 Keyboard 3 5 3 3 2 Mouse 35 3 3 3 Different aspects of the cursor 36 3 3 4 Basics on windows 3 6 3 3 5 Window menu 3 9 3 3 6 Menu bar 3 10 3 3 7 Cursor menu 3 10 3 3 8 Workspace manager 3 11 3 3 9 Workspace menu 3 11 3 3 10 Controls in AEM windows 3 12 3 4 System administration 3 16 3 4 1 General 3 16 3 4 1 1 Introduction and definitions 3 16 3 4 1 2 Start up shutdown and recovery 3 17 3 4 1 3 Scaling 3 18 3 4 1 4 Load balancing 3 18 3 4 2 Start up shutdown of server applications via command line 3 18 3 4 3 System administration window 3 19 3 4 3 1 Menu
290. eaning ap 1 1 16 Application Pack comdac 1 1 2 COMDAC ctu 1 Craft Test Unit cu 1 1 24 Channel Unit AEM R1 7 C 4 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 Northbound interface Northbound interface specific TL1 messages E Se Abbreviation Meaning drop 1 1 16 1 32 Drop ds1 1 1 5 1 4 DS1 narrowband port feeder side ext 1 1 2 External DS1 Synchronization iat 1 32 Integrated Access Terminal iatfdr 1 32 1 1 Integrated Access Terminal iatsp 1 1 16 1 2 Integrated Access Terminal Server Port iods1 1 1 5 DS1 Circuit Pack iods1p 1 DS1 protection pack m2drop 1 1 24 1 4 Metallic Distrib 2 Shelf Drop mds2 1 Metallic Distrib 2 Shelf msc 1 1 2 Metallic Shelf Controller ptu 1 1 2 Power Test Unit pwrf 1 1 2 48V Fast Distribution Bank pwrm 1 1 2 48V MDS2 Distribution Bank sh 1 Shelf telnet 1 2 Telnet virtual port tr8dl 1 20 1 TR 008 Mode 1 Data Link v08 1 20 TR 008 VRT v303 1 GR 303 VRT v3eoc 1 1 2 GR 303 Embedded Operations Channel v3tmc 1 1 2 GR 303 Timeslot Management Channel string NE TID Target Identifier a only available via AEM NTFCNCDE Notification code This parameter appears in the Common Block Type List Required Yes AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 C 5 Northbound interface Northbound interface specific TL1 messages ee NTFCNCDE is the alarm level Abbreviation Meaning CL Cleared Alarm CR Critical Alar
291. easy way m NE grouping Special graphical symbols are used to represent NE groups It is also pos sible to expand the NE group level to display the NEs which belong to a specific group as well as to provide access from the NE level to the Config uration Management application m GUI process to be separated The graphical interface driver can be placed on a separate platform from the rest of the EMS application AEM R1 7 1 18 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 Functional description System and software architecture p Se m MDS2 B GUI The AEM is able to detect and display the MDS2 shelf NE R1 2 and the MDS2 b shelf NE R1 5 1 3 1 5 Northbound interface Tasks The northbound interface NBI performs all the tasks needed to communicate to other OSs It allows external OSs access to the NEs managed by the AEM directly through TL1 commands via a NBI This access is controlled by the NBI until the OS is disconnected TL1 northbound The TL1 NBI allows an external OS access to the NEs managed by the AEM di interface rectly through TL1 commands for provisioning testing and alarm purposes Support of alarm forwarding Support of 112 system COBRA north The CORBA NBI allows an external OS access to the NEs managed by the AEM bound interface directly using the IDLs that AEM publishes or via a mediation device 1 3 1 6 Southbound interface Tasks The southbound interface performs all the tasks needed to communicate to th
292. eating data bases Getting the AnyMedia installation path OK Starting SysAdmDbPopulate process Getting SystemAdmin Database path OK Creating SystemAdmin Database OK Population successful 1190 Killed orbixd daemon pid 1190 have been killed Was mine 1196 Killed ns daemon pid 1196 have been killed Was mine kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkxk Once the installation process if finished Please boot the machine and Execute AnyMediaEM sh to set the environment kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk You have the installation logfile in opt lucent AnyMediaEM_R1 7 tmp EM_Install log Installation of lt LuSysAdm gt was successful AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 2 27 Software installation and commissioning Installation procedure p See Alarm Manage Processing package instance lt LuAM gt from lt ment installation homelocal tmp lucent AnyMediaEMR1 7 gt AnyMedia Element Manager Alarms Release 1 7 Administration sparc LuAM_36_1 1 kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkxkk AnyMedia Element Manager c 1999 Lucent Technologies kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkxkxk Package lt LuSysAdm gt SystemAdmin LuSysAdm_36_1 1 have been found in opt lucent AnyMediaEM R1 7 OK No previous package LuAM have been found Using lt opt lucent AnyMediaEM_R1 7 gt as the package base directory Processing package information Processing s
293. ection 6 71 6 3 4 Modify an ATM cross connection 6 72 6 3 5 Remove an ATM cross connection 6 72 U 7 Fault management and maintenance 7 1 7 1 Overview EL 7 2 Alarm management Zi 7 2 1 Overview rau 7 2 2 Maintain up to date alarm information za 7 2 3 Alarm notification to the user 3 7 2 4 Provide access to the current alarm data 7 7 7 2 5 Managing the raising of alarms ce AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 VII ee Contents 7 2 6 Manage alarm acknowledgment 7 8 7 2 7 Managing the clearing of alarms en 7 2 8 Alarm data synchronization 19 7 2 9 AEM alarm log handling 9 7 2 10 Periodical deletion of cleared alarms 79 7 3 Alarm monitoring 7 10 7 3 1 General 7 10 7 3 2 Starting and terminating the Alarm Viewer 7 10 7 3 3 Performing Alarm Viewer functions 11 7 3 4 System management functions 7 18 7 3 5 Alarm Viewer functions 7 24 7 4 Test management 25 7 4 1 Telephony tests 7 26 7 4 2 Data tests 7 33 7 5 Alarms 739 7 5 1 Overview 7838 7 5 2 Alarm types 7 39 7 5 3 Network element alarms 1 41 7 5 4 General element manager platform alarms 7 41 7 5 5 Element manager alarms concerning network element 7 43 7 5 6 Correlated alarms 1 55_ ee 8 Performance monitoring 8 1 8 1 Overview 8 1 8 2 ADSL performance monitoring data 8 1 8 2 1 ADSL Performance Monitoring Data window 8 2 8 2 2 Modify the ADSL performance monitoring 8 65 8 3 AFM feeder performance monitoring 8 6 8 3 1 AFM Performance Monitoring window 8 6 8 3 2 Modify
294. edia Network Register Element Manager Release 1 7 Administration as lt LuNER gt Installing part 1 of 1 lt files list gt verifying class lt common gt Executing postinstall script Package lt LuOSRT gt ObjectStore 5 1_SP2 Run Time have been found in opt lucent OS51_SP2 Oject Store path set to opt lucent OS51_SP2 ostore Package lt LuOX23RT gt OrbixMT Version 2 3c02MT Run Time have been found in opt lucent OrbixMT_2 3c2 Creating data bases Starting CreateNER_db process Getting the AnyMedia installation path OK Getting NER data base path Creating NER data base OK exit OK 2438 Killed orbixd daemon pid 2438 have been killed Was mine You have the installation logfile in tmp EM_Install_LuNER 1log Installation of lt LuNER gt was successful AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 2 33 Software installation and commissioning Installation procedure p Se Northbound Inter Processing package instance lt LuNBI gt from face installation lt homelocal tmp lucent AnyMediaEMR1 7 gt AnyMedia North Bound Element Manager Release 1 7 Administration sparc LuNBI_36_1 1 kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk AnyMedia Element Manager c 1999 Lucent Technologies kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkxkkkkkk Package lt LuSysAdm gt SystemAdmin LuSysAdm 36_1 1 have been found in opt lucent AnyMediaEM_R1 7 OK No previous package LuNBI have been found
295. edure to modify the VRT TR08 Step Procedure 1 Use the option menu VRT VB id to choose a desired VRT VB type If you want to then change the network loss value use the slider Network Loss and click on Set get the current service states of the click on Get in the Operational State VRT VB field add a logical DS1 use the option menu at the right hand side of the Add button to choose Logi cal DS1 and click on Add The Logical DS1 window pops up cf Chapter 6 2 3 3 page 6 26 add a logical DSO use the option menu at the right hand side of the Add button to choose Logi cal DSO and click on Add The Logical DSO window pops up cf Chapter 6 2 4 3 page 6 35 open the Physical DS1 List window click on Physical DS1 List The Physical DS1 List window pops up cf Chapter 6 2 2 page 6 17 open the Logical DSO List window click on Logical DSO List The Logical DSO List window pops up cf Chapter 6 2 4 1 page 6 31 close the window Click on Close AEM R1 7 6 14 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 Service provisioning Service provisioning telephony 6 2 1 7 VB INA window This window provides access to the lists of physical DS1s and logical DSOs as well as allows addition of logical DS1s and logical DSOs to the selected VB INA Figure 6 7 VB INA window The following table shows the view edit option of this window Parameters Buttons Description NE Name NE name of the selec
296. efiles NVPS It is as sumed that the user has a copy of the software currently running in the active COMDAC The software download procedure is as follows m start download m load software into the standby COMDAC For the following description it is assumed that the NE is already connected and the NE hardware platform is prepared to receive and work with the new program version AEM R1 7 06 00 363 211 454 NE management equipment configuration Equipment configuration p Se 5 5 12 2 COMDAC Software Download win dow COMDAC SW Download Add gt gt 2 Remove Figure 5 49 COMDAC Software Download window This window provides the functionality needed to download files to an NE or toa set of NEs with telephony agent The following table shows the parameters of this window Parameters Buttons Description Selection Crite ria Two radio buttons are used to define the target of the down load file Single The target is the pre selected NE only its name is in the Selected NEs list see below The Add and Remove buttons are disabled Multiple The Available NEs list shows all existing NEs By means of the Add button the NEs can be moved to the Se lected NEs list AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 5 151 NE management equipment configuration Equipment configuration p See Parameters Buttons Description Target The Available NEs list shows all existing NEs with teleph ony agen
297. efined logical DSO for this VRT Number of Logical DS1 Informs about the number of already defined logical DS1 for this VRT The Edit VRT VB button provides access to one of the VRT VB windows TR303 or TRO8 or INA Depending on the right hand side option menu provides the Add button access to different windows Logical DS1 win dow Logical DSO window 6 2 1 2 Use the VRT VB List Procedure Complete the following procedure to use the VRT VB list Step Procedure 1 Select NE in the Network Element Browser and List gt VRT VB via the menu bar The VRT VB List window pops up 2 Use the radio buttons to choose a desired VRT VB type If you want to then edit the selected VRT VB click on Edit VRT VB The corre sponding VRT VB window pops up cf Chapter 6 2 1 3 page 6 8 Chapter 6 2 1 7 page 6 15 add a logical DS1 select the desired VRT VB id in the list an click on Add Logical DS1 The Log ical DS1 window pops up cf Chapter 6 2 3 3 page 6 26 add a logical DSO select the desired VRT VB id in the list an click on Add Logical DSO The Log ical DSO window pops up cf Chapter 6 2 4 3 page 6 35 close the window Click on Close AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 6 7 Service provisioning Service provisioning telephony p See 6 2 1 3 VRT TR303 window This window provides access to the lists of physical DS1s and logical DSOs as well as allows addition of logical DS1s and
298. elation correlated_source no_correlated or correlated_result 7 3 4 4 2 Example for filter file The following expressions are examples for filters Alarms which are in the state ack and do not have the severity major ack_state ack amp amp severity major Alarms which have the severity minor or are not service affecting severity minor serv_aff nsa 7 3 4 5 Help Help is provided for every window The help text describes the purpose of the win dow how to use it and a description of each field of the window is given In the Menu Bar of each AEM application there are two help options m Index Displays the help index allowing the user to navigate through the AEM help information AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 7 23 Fault management and maintenance Alarm monitoring p Se m On window Displays the help information of the window where the user is currently working 7 3 5 Alarm Viewer functions Summary The Alarm Viewer provides the user with different functions for managing alarm information m Manual reload of alarms m Acknowledge alarms The user can acknowledge one several or all reported alarms The AEM allows different users to acknowledge the same alarm The name of the last user who has acknowledged the alarm is stored m Clear alarms The user can clear one several or all platform alarms communication alarms are platform alarms that cannot be cleared by t
299. eld and click Open The User Profile window pops up with the current information about the selected user AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 4 5 User management User user2 p Disabled User Groups User Groups Administrator Maintenance Figure 4 5 User Profile window Change user name To change the user name description like last name first name email etc enter description the new information in the User Name Description field 0 to 60 characters Any characters are allowed Adding to To assign the selected user to further user groups select one or more user groups user groups in the User Groups Not Assigned field and click Add gt gt gt NOTE To create user groups see Chapter 4 4 1 page 4 14 Removing from To remove the selected user from user groups select one or more user groups in user groups the User Groups Assigned field and click lt lt Remove Click OK or Apply to save the changes After clicking OK the window will be closed If you want to reject the changes click Close before OK or Apply Other fields The following fields are read only fields to display user data read only Login Name Displays the label which identifies the user User Status Displays if the system login associated to this user is created enabled or deleted disabled Number of sessions opened Displays the number of sessions opened into the AEM by the user AEM R1 7 4 6 V
300. elf 1 16 1 32 m Logical DSO Id Indicates the logical DSO id within the VRT VB id shown in the row only available if the physi cal port is cross connected Possible values v3dp 1 2048 for TR 303 v8dp 1 20 1 96 for TR 08 inadsO 1 20 1 24 for INA m GSFN The generic signalling function GSFN identi fies the service type provided The following values are possible DFLT default 2LS 2GS Coin 2FXLS 2FX 2RVO 2NOS ISDN 4DO only for ROC Data EBS AC LR NO1 NO2 BRI TO DPT DX4 N R FX O P 1 2 3 5 FX S T 1 2 3 5 EM4 C H PLR 1 2 ETO4 FXO OCU 1 2 3 SW56 TD O SI A B C D TO4 2RVT 2LO COIN2 DFLT2 DPO DS01 DS02 FXS EMO FXOD FXSO NO OCUO Unknown The Add Logical DSO button provides access to the Logi cal DSO window cf Chapter 6 2 4 3 page 6 35 In this case the physical DSO id will be transferred This button is enabled only if a physical DSO id is selected with no cross connection to a logical DSO id The Edit Logical DSO button provides access to the Logi cal DSO window cf Chapter 6 2 4 3 page 6 35 where the operator will be able to edit the logical DSO parameters whenever this is possible or even remove the existing cross connection remove logical DSO of the selected phys ical DSO from the list This button is enabled only if a physi cal DSO cross connected to a logical DSO is selected The Remove Logical DSO button removes the
301. ent equipment configuration Equipment configuration p See Parameters Buttons Description Physical Drop These fields display the ADSL drop id by means of three op Id tion menus m The first one contains the drop shelf Format drop 1 or subdrop 1 8 None is also allowed m The second one contains the slot number inside the NE but only for slots in which an ADSL pack is in serted Format 1 16 for FAST shelf 0 19 for BAIU shelf or 1 8 for subshelf None is also allowed m The third one contains the drop number inside the slot indicated on the previous list 1 x Format drop shelf slot port Possible values drop 1 1 16 1 x or drop 1 0 19 1 x or subdrop 1 8 1 8 1 x None is also allowed depending on the ADSL type x can be 4 or 8 Profiles Transmission Profile This option menu lists all available transmission profiles Selection of a profile is possible only if the administrative state is locked The following profiles are available by default m 1 lite_flexible_ default 2 full_ flexible default m 3 lite_explicit_default m 4 full_explicit_default Edit This button provides access to the Transmission Profile window cf Chapter 5 5 5 33 page 5 114 PM Profile This option menu lists all available PM profiles Selection of a profile is possible only if the administrative state is locked The following profiles are available by default m 1 disable_all_ Thresholds m 2 default_PM_Thr
302. entify the gen eral type of function provided Possible values PTU Serial Number 12 character alphanumeric code that in cludes date and place of manufacture Apparatus Code Specifies the function of the pack Possi ble value BDJ200 ICC InterChangeability Code Indicates the interchangea bility among packs to specify forward backward compatibility Format of the ICC is m n where m is the issue number and n the series number CLEI Code assigned by Bellcore that provides information about the functionality of the pack ECI Code that corresponds to the bar coded label on the faceplate of the pack There is a one to one correspondence between CLEI and ECI codes Operation The check box Slot Required displays the required state of the shelf slot This state can be changed by the operator only if the card is not inserted 5 5 5 12 Configure a PTU Procedure Complete the following procedure to view edit the PTU data Step Procedure 1 Select NE gt MDS2 MDS2B Shelf gt PTU in the Network Element Browser and Edit via the cursor menu or single click on the pack PTU in MDS2 MDS2B Shelf View window The PTU window pops up If you want to then change the required state use the check box Slot required exit the window click on Close AEM R1 7 5 74 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 NE management equipment configuration Equipment configuration 5 5 5 13 Channel Unit Window The channel unit CU packs
303. er daemon by hand or re run this utility to configure auto start AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 2 19 Software installation and commissioning Installation procedure a See Would you like to configure automatic server startup and shutdown yes 27 Press Return Successfully created etc rc2 d S80o0store4 Successfully created link from etc rc2 d K80ostore4 to etc rc2 d S80ostore4 Note that you must manually remove or edit existing ObjectStore R3 scripts in etc rc2 d in some situations To run only R4 clients or R3 file database clients remove all R3 scripts in etc rc2 d To run all R4 clients and R3 clients including R3 rawfs clients edit existing R3 scripts in etc rce2 d to run only the R3 Directory Manager but not the R3 Server To run both R3 and R4 clients with separate R3 and R4 Servers see the documentation on editing your OS_ROOTDIR etc ports file This script will now verify the installation The ObjectStore Server daemon process is accessible Schema databases are accessible The cache manager launcher for release 4 homelocal new OS51_SP2 ostore lib oscminit has correct modes and ownership ObjectStore configuration completed 2 2 1 1 2 Installation of the common packages Complete the following procedure to install the common packages Step Procedure 1 Go to the directory where the installation script is placed on the CD ROM number one 2 Type install_AMEM gen an
304. er OSs to retrieve data perform ance data AEM R1 7 1 12 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 Functional description System and software architecture p ee m Displaying printing and storage of the TCA records m Retrieve performance counter thresholds only applicable to BB agents The user can request the NE to report the assignment of the performance counter thresholds Set Modify performance counter thresholds only applicable to BB agents The user can set modify the performance counter thresholds m Retrieve the performance data after selecting the record type 15 minutes or 24 hour only applicable to BB agents a Traffic monitoring only applicable to BB agents The AEM provides the ability to display traffic monitoring data Data performance The data performance management provides the following functions en ae m Collect display ATM layer traffic counters current 15 minutes and previous 15 minutes m Collect display ADSL port performance counters current 15 minutes previous 15 minutes current day and previous day m Collect display DS3 feeder performance counters current 15 minutes previous 15 minutes up to 96 previous inter vals and total day m Management of performance features enabling disabling generation of feeder PM data m clearing of ATM ADSL and DS3 E3 PM counters Test The Test Management provides the following functionality features management m Port test It is possible to
305. er channel that conveys manage ment information for a remote system AnyMedia NE The ROC is expected to be used when the system is installed at locations where no ethernet local area net work LAN and no separate network e g X 25 exists A router is a network layer device that forwards packets from one network to an other based on network layer information OSI layer 3 Data packets are only transferred through the router if the participant is on another port of the router The router can keep data traffic certain parts of a LAN A router is more powerful than a bridge it reduces the traffic on a LAN more than a bridge because the IP address is evaluated for traffic control A bridge is a network layer device that passes packets between two or more net work segments that use the same data link communications protocol OSI layer 2 The network segments appear as one segment to protocol levels higher than the data link layer The bridge recognizes with the help of the MAC address which LAN component is on which port of the bridge Data packets are only trans ferred over the bridge if the participant is on another port of the bridge With a bridge data traffic can be kept from certain parts of a LAN The inband management channel is a bearer ATM PVC that conveys manage ment information for a remote data agent AFM It can also be used for carrying NB management information in mixed configurations AEM R1 7 06 00 363 211 454
306. ersion 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 Software installation and commissioning Installation procedure p Se 18 Type y and press Return Installing AnyMedia Element Manager Backup Release 1 7 Administration as lt LuBack gt Installing part 1 of 1 lt files list gt verifying class lt common gt Executing postinstall script You have the installation logfile in tmp EM_Install_LuBack log Installation of lt LuBack gt was successful File Browser instal Processing package instance lt LuFiBrow gt from lation lt homelocal tmp lucent AnyMediaEMR1 7 gt AnyMedia Element Manager File Browser Release 1 7 administration sparc LuFiBrow_36_1 1 kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk AnyMedia Element Manager c 1999 Lucent Technologies kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Package lt LuSysAdm gt SystemAdmin LuSysAdm_36_1 1 have been found in opt lucent AnyMediaEM_R1 7 OK No previous package LuFiBrow have been found Using lt opt lucent AnyMediaEM_R1 7 gt as the package base directory Processing package information Processing system information 1 package pathname is already properly installed Verifying disk space requirements Checking for conflicts with packages already installed Checking for setuid setgid programs AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 2 31 Software installation and commissioning Installation procedure a SSe Ins
307. ersion 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 User management User mm ee 4 2 3 Delete user Introduction This chapter describes the process to remove a user from the AEM Before re moving a user please pay attention to the following remarks m To remove a user from the AEM the administrator must have a system login m When a user is deleted all related information and profiles are removed from the system This does not include the system login and any other system re sources such as home directories or system files which are not managed by the AEM Furthermore the user is automatically deleted from the user groups it was included in m Before deleting any user assigned to the administrator user group the AEM checks that this is not the last user assigned to the administrator user group If this is the last one assigned the deletion is rejected Procedure Complete the following procedure to remove a user from the AEM Step Procedure 1 Login as AEM administrator and start the AEM access bar as described in Chapter 3 2 1 The access bar will be shown 2 Select the User Administration amp Profiling icon The User Administra tion amp Profiling window pops up showing the Users Table Login Name User Name Description Default EM Administrator Figure 4 6 User Administration amp Profiling window Users Table 3 Select the user which shall be deleted in the Login Name field and click Delete 4 Confirm your
308. erver Network status After completion of these steps the network operator has at his disposal a net after physical work which is connected physically with AEM and which is in principle ready for installation operation AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 1 23 Functional description Working with AEM p See 1 4 2 Configuration management Introduction The configuration management in accordance with the specific operating condi tions of the network operator is performed by special provisioning actions It is as sumed that the NEs and AEM have already been physically connected Provisioning Figure 1 7 provides an overview of the provisioning actions and the text which fol actions lows gives a detailed description Configuration management NE and domain creation Equipment configuration Service provisioning Figure 1 7 Network provisioning NE and domain cre Prior to equipment configuration and service provisioning the NEs must be known ation in the AEM To achieve this the following 4 steps are necessary 1 creation of domains 2 creation of NEs 3 assignment of NEs to any domain s 4 logical connection of NEs All steps are described in detail in Chapter 5 Equipment NEs can be configured if they are known in the AEM The following measures configuration should be performed m selection of the timing synchronization source m selection of the COMDAC simplex duplex and IO DS1 protect
309. es of different entities i e packs ports subshelves NE R1 4 on user demand Service The Service Management provides the following functionality features managenient m NE service status Provides the aliveness status of the individual NEs providing a customer s service across all NEs under the AEM s control AEM R1 7 1 10 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 Functional description System and software architecture p Se m Network interfaces and subscriber service provisioning and activation The AEM supports all provisioning functions related to 2 Mbps network in terfaces and subscriber services Provisioning contains the creation dele tion and parameter setting modification of the different subscriber services The AEM service activation enables and disables the service 2 Mbps network services TR 303 TR 08 INA Telephony subscriber services analogue telephone POTS ISDN Data service The data service management provides the following functions i Aune m Configuration of ATM layer functions shelf virtual path identifier Shelf VPI OAM amp P virtual path virtual channel i e configuration of ATM em bedded management channel m Management of ATM virtual path services creating and deleting virtual path services i e by means of creating and deleting virtual path links and virtual path cross connections changing the administrative state of a virtual path cross connection
310. esholds Edit This button provides access to the Threshold Profile window cf Chapter 5 5 5 35 page 5 119 The Apply button is used to confirm the changes of the se lected profiles It is only enabled if any of the profiles have been modified gt NOTE If the physical drop is in service this operation is not allowed AEM R1 7 5 110 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 NE management equipment configuration Equipment configuration p Se Parameters Buttons Description ADSL Drop This field shows the values of the following ADSL drop pa Communica rameters tion Parameters Current Upstream Rate Current Downstream Rate Current Up SNR Margin dB m Current Down SNR Margin dB Current Up Attenuation dB Current Down Attenuation dB Current Up Physical Layer Defects No AP communication No defect Loss of Framing Loss of Signal Loss of Power Loss of Link Loss of Signal Quality Data init failure Config init failure Proto col init failure No peer ATU present Current Down Physical Layer Defects No AP communication No defect Loss of Framing Loss of Signal Loss of Power Loss of Signal Quality Current Up Output Power Current Down Output Power The Get button can be used to retrieve the current values from the NE Operational The option menu Administrative State provides the possi State ble states that can be used Locked and Unlocked The field Operational State shows
311. ess to the NE via remote operations channel Provisioning the The following actions have to be made to provision the ROC over SPLL manage ROC over SPLL ment interface m Provision the Local Digital Switch LDS that is connected to the NE shelf to associate the DSO channel to a SPLL service m Provision the NE using the ENT TO TL1 command to indicate that the re ceived DSO is a 64 Kbps clear channel gsfn 4do m Provision the NE using the ENT CRS TO command to indicate that the re ceived DSO should be cross connected to the logical ROC port Note that the remote operations port TO cross connection created for a TR 08 VRT will cause system bandwidth to be allocated while for TR 303 this com mand is more an association function than a cross connection No actual cross connection is made in TR 303 until a request to connect the logical line specified in this command is received from the LDS over the EOC data link for semi permanent connections m Provision the NE using the SET IP command to an unique IP address Note that the default router address of the NE must be set to 224 0 0 2 universal router s multicast address so that the NE points to the router on the other side of the ROC interface Example of TL1 The following TL1 commands are an example of ROC over SPLL configuration commands for TR 303 in the NE ent t0 v3dp 1 49 qgsfn 4do ent crs t0 v3dp 1 49 roc 1 ent crs t1 ds1 1 1 1 v3fdr 1 3 set ip she
312. et Default Not set This check box can be used to prevent allow that the channel unit transmit the reverse loop current feed signalling state to ward the digital facility Possible values Set Not set Default Not set Slope Balance Receive Gain This slider can be used to adjust the frequency response of the equalizer Possible values 0 7 step 1 Default 0 This slider can be used to specify the precision network for the 4 wire to 2 wire hybrid balance function Possible values 0 15 step 1 Default 0 This slider can be used to define the receive gain parameter Possible values 8 1 5 step 0 25 Default 8 Transmit Gain 06 00 This slider can be used to define the transmit gain parame ter Possible values 1 6 75 step 0 25 Default 1 AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Service provisioning Service provisioning telephony 6 2 4 20 OCU 1 2 3 Service Details windows Overview The OCU 1 2 3 office channel unit dataport 1 2 or 4 data rates is applicable to the SPQ452 dual OCU data port which is primarily used in an end link of a DDS private line data service Figure 6 28 Logical DSO window OCU 1 Service Details Parameters Description All Zero Code All Zero Code allowed when a check mark is set the chan nel unit will not allow a word containing 8 zeros to be sent to ward the digital facility Possible values OCU1 OCU2 Set Not set Default Not set OCU3
313. eters the AEM log files will be archived AEM_archive c h H p backup_file_path backup_file_name AEM R1 7 3 40 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 System management Backup and restore p ee Parameter description C Aborts a running archive operation h H Display command syntax h or additional help H p backup_file_path backup_file_path is the directory or device to archive De fault value of the variable OAM backup archiveDirectory which is set in the file AnyMediaEM cfg f backup_file_name Location of the backup file backup_file_name can be a lo cal file or a locally mounted file in case of a local tape device is used backup_file_name specifies a soft label Default file name EM_SYSARCH_yyyymmdd arc with yyyy year mm month dd day of the archive TAR command The tar command is used in backup and restore scripts tar c r v tarfile file tar x t v f tarfile Parameter description c Create a tar file An already existing tar file is overwritten r Replace a tar file An already existing tar file is not overwrit ten and the new information is appended at its end x Extract the data from the tar file t Display the table of contents of the tar file v The tar command verbosely displays what it does f tarfile tarfile is the name of the tar file file Name of the file or a list of files separated by blanks which shall be added to the tar file Omitted for extr
314. etrieve Alarms command instructs the system to retrieve 1 all currently active alarms 2 currently active equipment alarms 3 currently ac tive facility alarms or 4 currently active system level alarms from the system C 3 2 2 Input format RTRV ALM AIDTYPE tid ctag TMPER Abortable Yes Privilege Code Reports Only GSI Confirmation Required No File Transfer No Related Autonomous Message None C 3 2 3 Input format parameters tid Target ID This parameter appears in the TID Block Type String Required No Default Type Dynamic Target ID is the name of the system to which the command is addressed ctag Correlation tag This parameter appears in the CTAG Block Type String Required No Default Type Dynamic This field is used to associate the command message to the response message AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 C 9 Northbound interface Northbound interface specific TL1 messages mm ee TMPER Accumulation Time Period This parameter appears in the CTAG Block Type String Required No Default Type none min chars 0 max chars 0 Since the condition type is not supported this field does not pertain and will be ig nored AIDTYPE Access identifier type Type List Required No Default Type Fixed Default ALL Access identifier type Abbreviation Meaning ALL All TE T1 EQPT Equipment C 3 2 4 Output format C 10 Version 1 00 If the command request completes successfully
315. f unauthorized access by appropriate security mechanisms m reduction of operator mistakes by easy to use Graphical User Interface GUI m integration with higher management levels for network service and busi ness purposes 1 2 1 Main functions The AEM provides the following main characteristics functions m support of all AnyMedia Access Systems features telephony and data m equipment overview m telephony and data service provisioning m common alarm handling for all network elements NEs m test management m data performance monitoring m report log backup and restore functions m southband interfaces TL1 NE access via TCP IP for telephony agents based on data com munication network DCN SNMP NE access via UDP IP for data agents based on DCN m user security handling user profiles NE domains online help m multi user access m northbound interfaces TL1 pass through interface for telephony alarm collection and COBRA interface CORBA interface i e AEM CORBA IDLs are published so that a network management system can access to them directly or by means of a mediation device AEM R1 7 1 2 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 Functional description Introduction p Se 1 2 2 ISO functional areas 1 2 2 1 Configuration management The configuration management supports the complete range of graphical func tions to provision and maintain the following NE releases R1 2 2 NB R1 2 3 NB R1 7 0 NB
316. fdr 1 1 28 m Manual Switch This button performs a manual switch between working and standby EOC s It is available only if both working and standby EOCs are present and the standby path is not out of service m Forced Switch This button performs a forced switch between working and standby EOC s It is available only if both working and standby EOCs are present and regardless of the service condition of the standby path TMC Datalink m Working Standby TMC Displays the Logical DS1 id used by the working standby TMC Timeslot Manage ment Channel Possible values v3fdr 1 1 28 m Manual Switch This button performs a manual switch between working and standby TMCs It is available only if both working and standby TMCs are present m Forced Switch This button performs a forced switch between working and standby TMCs It is available only if both working and standby TMCs are present AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 6 9 Service provisioning Service provisioning telephony p SeSe Parameters Buttons Description Operational The Operational State shows the VRT VB service state ob State tained from the NE through the use of the Get button Possible values Enabled Disabled The Secondary Operational State shows the secondary service state obtained from the NE The Get button retrieves the VRT VB service state Command But Three buttons provide access to other windows tons Depending
317. ffect the correct operation of the application To modify the other configuration parameters stored in the configuration files please contact with Lu cent Technologies TCL AnyMedia server configuration vari The following table provide an alphabetical list of the configuration variables for AnyMedia servers The directories can be defined either absolute or relative to the environment vari able SANYMEDIAPATH AEM R1 7 Version 1 00 06 00 B 1 Configuration parameters Overview p See Table 2 1 AnyMediaEM cfg File Name Description Configuration man AM clearHour agement settings AM clearMinute AM correlationRulesPath AM minimumClearPeriod Hour of the day in 24h format at which the re moval process of the alarm database is exe cuted every day It is OPTIONAL If not present default value is taken Possible values 0 to 23 Default value 1 Minute within the AM clearHour at which the removal process of the alarm database is exe cuted every day It is OPTIONAL If not present default value is taken Possible values 0 to 59 Default value 0 AM configuration file location relative to Any media path It contains the correlation rules needed for the reduced correlation process in the AM subsystem It is MANDATORY It should be present in this file Default value AM cfg CorrelationRules cfg Number of days that cleared alarms remain in the database before they are removed It is optio
318. ffic can be kept from a certain part of a LAN Built in Self Test BIST This is a procedure executed by each plug in circuit pack either after power up or on demand The task is to check the functions of the hardware Burst Load Load that can occur in certain well known circumstances where response times are no longer guaranteed but queues handle excess traffic After removing the causes of the burst load and a certain settling time normal oper ation is resumed During burst load there is a graceful degradation no loss of information only a queueing occurs to defer the load to a later moment Busy Hour Load Maximum load that is expected to occur in real life that must be handled with normal response times U SS C Call Reference Value CRV This is a numeric value used to identify a logical line on a TR 303 Virtual Remote Terminal VRT in messages ex changed between the HDT and the TR 303 switch when setting up and tearing down individual calls For TR 303 VRTs the CRV is identical to the last field in the AID for a logical line e g 104 is the CRV for the logical line having AID v3dp 1 104 CRVs are numbered between 1 and 2048 A maximum of 672 provisioned logical lines are sup ported by the AnyMedia Access System R1 2 A CRV can be uniquely associated with a single Distribution Port by setting up a TO cross connection between that port and the logical line specified by the CRV AEM R1 7 GL 2 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454
319. fg f backup_file_name Location of the backup file backup_file_name can be a lo cal file or a locally mounted file in case a local tape device is used backup_file_name specifies a soft label Default file names EM_SYSBCK_yyyymmdd fullbck for full backup EM_SYSBCK_yyyymmdd incbck for incremental backup with yyyy year mm month dd day of the backup t backup_type Type of backup incremental INC or full FULL Default FULL This parameter is ignored if 1 0 is used I dump_level Specifies the backup level Files modified since last backup at a lower level are copied dump_level 0 9 This parame ter is ignored if t FULL is used Restore files Use the following command to restore a database or directory AEM_restore c h H p backup_file_ path f backup_file_name Parameter description C Aborts a running restore operation h H Display command syntax h or additional help H p backup_file_path backup_file_path is the directory or device to which the re stored data should be written Default value of the variable OAM backup backupDirectory which is set in the file Any MediaEM cfg f backup_file_name Location of the backup file backup_file_name can be a lo cal file a locally mounted file or a local tape device Archive files Use the following command to archive log files This function is primarily intended to archive the AEM log files If you enter none of the optional param
320. fied Switch Only the working COMDAC is inhibited With the Forced Switch to Protection request the working COMDAC becomes standby and vice versa All radio buttons are disabled if the current protection scheme is Simplex The NE rejects a switch request if the Protection Mode is Inhibit Therefore before you can switch from Forced Switch to Protection to Inhibit or vice versa you have to Clear the current protection The Apply button is used confirm the changes within this field Protection This field displays the current protection mode which will be Mode updated as a result of a protection switch Possible values Clear Freeze AEM R1 7 5 144 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 NE management equipment configuration Equipment configuration 5 5 11 2 Modify the COMDAC protection mode Procedure Complete the following procedure to modify the protection mode for the COMDAC Step Procedure 1 Select NE gt Main Shelf in the Network Element Browser and Protection via the cursor menu The Shelf Protection window pops up tab COMDAC This window can also be reached from the COMDAC window cf Chapter 5 5 5 3 page 5 59 by clicking on the COMDAC Protection button 2 Use the radio buttons in field Protection Switch to switch the protection Clear or Forced Switch to Protection or Inhibit 3 Press Apply to confirm A Warning window pops up Protection switching may be service affecting Do you want to continue
321. figuration Equipment configuration gt NOTE The software download process cannot be cancelled 8 After the download process is finished click on Close to exit the AFM Software Download window This button is disabled while the SW download process is being executed 5 5 13 COMDAC program copy Overview Duplex configura tion Procedure 5 158 Version 1 00 This function is used to copy a newly loaded software from the currently active COMDAC to the standby COMDAC During normal operation both COMDACs should have the same software version Therefore the software copying should al ways be the next step after software download except when software copying is started automatically after software download cf Chapter 5 5 12 2 page 5 151 For the following description it is assumed that the NE is configured in duplex con figuration Complete the following procedure to copy the new software from the active COM DAC to the standby COMDAC Step Procedure 1 Select NE in the Network Element Browser and Program Copy gt Te lephony via cursor menu The COMDAC Program Copy window pops up Figure 5 53 COMDAC Program Copy window AEM R1 7 06 00 363 211 454 NE management equipment configuration Equipment configuration a Voss This is a dialogue window requesting information from the user to con tinue There are two fields titled Working COMDAC and Standby COM DAC showing the corresponding slot number and softw
322. figuration Equipment configuration p Se 5 5 7 Date amp Time Telephony window This window can be used to set the date and time of the telephony agent of the managed NE Also it is possible to retrieve the date and time of any NE Figure 5 43 Date amp Time Telephony window The following values are possible m 12 00 AM to 11 59 PM for time m Jan 1 1980 to Dec 12 2036 The format follows the locale and platform conventions e g for Spain the date for mat is day month year AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 5 133 NE management equipment configuration Equipment configuration p See Procedure Complete the following procedure to retrieve set the date and time of the teleph ony agent of an NE Step Procedure 1 Select the NE in the Network Element Browser and Date amp Time gt Te lephony via the cursor menu The Date amp Time Telephony window pops up If you want to then to retrieve the current date and time Click on Get in the Current Date amp data Time field The corresponding data will be shown to set the date and time data use the text fields in the New Date amp Time field to enter the corresponding values and press Apply exit the window click on Close AEM R1 7 5 134 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 NE management equipment configuration Equipment configuration p Se 5 5 8 Date amp Time Data window This window can be used to set the date and time of th
323. files in backup for two weeks Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri 1st week ab cd ef h abcdefghi 2nd week jk Imn o p jklmnopqr AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 3 45 System management Log management 3 7 Log management The log management records information on events in the AEM The logged events can be viewed with the Log Viewer 3 7 1 Different log types There are six log types within the Log Viewer m Actions It contains all the information on actions performed by users or the AEM and which imply changes in the AEM configuration equipment NE config uration service and subscriber configuration access to the AEM print re ports and backup amp restore That means all operations triggered by the user or the AEM and all subsequent actions Also the results of operations are logged in the actions log m System Internal Events It contains all internal events or actions which report unusual changes in the configuration and state of the AEM or indicate errors which occurred in the AEM m Autonomous Reports It contains all TCAs Threshold Crossing Alert from NB and BB and all ac tions performed in the NEs that imply changes in the AEM data base m Alarms It contains all alarms received from the platform AEM telephony agent and data agent m ADSL Performance m ATM Performance m Feeders Performance 37 2 Configuration of logs Log size The following values can be configured cf Appendix B
324. following message Deleting Logical DS1 id may be service affecting and may remove existing semipermanent cross connections DSO end points OK to proceed If you decide to continue the AEM will send a delete cross connection mes sage to the NE exit the window click on Close AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 6 19 Service provisioning Service provisioning telephony p ee 6 2 3 Creation of VRT VB logical feeder T1 cross connection Assumptions For the following description it is assumed that the NE is connected a logical feeder is not yet created and the physical feeder DS1 is not in use by any other logical feeder The following figure shows a block diagram of T1 cross connections LOG FDR Logical feeder Physical feeder LOG FDR DS1 1 LOG FDR DS1 28 T1 Cross e connections LOG FDR DS1 1 LOG FDR DS1 4 Figure 6 9 T1 Cross connections AEM R1 7 6 20 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 Service provisioning Service provisioning telephony a rss 6 2 3 1 Physical DS1 window This window displays physical information of single physical DS1 and cross con nection information It provides access to the Logical DST window for adding or editing the logical DS1 depending on the cross connection state of the physical DS1 Physical DS Figure 6 10 Physical DS1 window The following table shows the view edit option of this window Parameters Buttons Description
325. for the IAT ports After changing the drop shelf type first option menu the other two option menus are set None After changing the slot number second option menu the port number third option menu is set to None CLEI In order to provide service the subscriber has to be assigned to the proper AP To ensure that the service re quested will work the user should enter the CLEI code of the AP that is supposed to provide that type of service cf Table 6 1 Red Line This check box is used to identify red lined sub scribers A warning message appears when red lined logical DSOs are to be edited More Details This button provides access to a specific Service Details window The button is enabled only if a GSFN has been selected Operational The Operational State shows the service state obtained State from the NE through the use of the Get button Possible values Enabled Disabled The Secondary Operational State shows the secondary service state obtained from the NE through the use of the Get button The Get button is used to retrieve the service states Port Test This button can be used to start the port test The button is enabled only if a physical DSO has been selected For more information refer to Chapter 7 4 Apply This button is used to confirm edit or add logical DSO AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 6 37 Service provisioning 6 38 Version 1 00 Service provisioning telephony U ee
326. for the log system by the administrator m Minimum number of days incl current day in the log default 7 days m Maximum size of all logged data default 5 Mbyte perNE The maximum log size is configured per log type and applies per NE each NE can have stored logs of a type up to the maximum size configured for that log type Log grows too big The logs are stored as separate files one file holds one day of one log type Ifthe size of the logged data has reached the size limit and a new event to be logged AEM R1 7 3 46 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 System management Log management p Se occurs some of the already logged data has to be deleted The oldest recorded day of one of the logs holding the largest number of days is always deleted Alarms The log system issues an alarm if m one of the logs is shortened to a number of days below the minimum num ber of days l e also if a log is shortened that already holds fewer than the minimum number of days Alarm name LOG_DEL_PART m the current day log is deleted Alarm name LOG_DEL_FULL Restore log files When log files are restored cf Chapter 3 6 page 3 38 the log of the current day is not overwritten 3 7 3 Log Viewer window The logs can be viewed by means of the Log Viewer application The logged en tries in the Log Viewer cannot be edited Start Log Viewer The Log Viewer is started up by clicking on the log viewer icon in the access bar After start
327. formation synchronization 5 122 5 5 6 1 2 Alarm information synchronization 5 122 5 5 6 1 3 Synchronization Telephony window 5 123 5 5 6 1 4 Modify the synchronization telephony parameter 5 124 556 2 Data agent 5 125 5 5 6 2 1 Configuration information synchronization 5 125 5 5 6 2 2 Alarm information synchronization 5 125 5 5 6 2 3 Synchronization Data window 5 126 5 5 6 2 4 Modify the synchronization data parameter 5 127 5 5 6 3 Configuration of timing source for telephony only 5 128 5 5 6 4 Timing Source Control window 5 129 5 5 6 5 Modify the timing source 5 132 5 5 7 Date amp Time Telephony window 5 133 5 5 8 Date amp Time Data window 5 135 5 5 8 1 NE Inventory window 5 137 5 5 8 2 Get the NE inventory data 5 139 5 5 9 Network element working mode 5 139 5 5 10 Simplex COMDAC protection scheme 5 140 5 5 10 1 COMDAC window 5 140 5 5 10 2 Set the COMDAC protection to simplex 5 141 5 5 11 Equipment protection switching 5 142 5 5 11 1 COMDAC protection switching 5 142 5 5 11 2 Modify the COMDAC protection mode 5 145 5 5 11 3 10O DS1 protection switching 5 146 5 5 11 4 Modify the IO DS1 protection mode 5 149 5 5 11 5 Alarm configuration 5 149 5 5 12 Network element software upgrade 5 150 5 5 12 1 Network element software download telephony agent 5 150 5 5 12 2 COMDAC Software Download window 5 151 5 5 12 3 Software download to telephony agent 5 152 5 5 12 4 AFM Software Download window 5 155 5 5 12 5 Software download to data agent
328. g AEM R1 7 363 211 454 oe 00 N co o Oo ee oO o N 00 ko o co 00 Version 1 00 06 00 8 I SS Contents AEM R1 7 8 II Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 Performance monitoring 8 1 Overview This chapter provides you with informations about m ADSL performance monitoring m AFM feeder performance monitoring a ATM traffic monitoring It describes the collection display logging and threshold reporting for perform ance monitoring PM and traffic measurements counts 8 2 ADSL performance monitor ing data The AEM is able to retrieve the ADSL performance monitoring counts from the NE via FTP The interval data are retrieved and stored every 15 minutes the day data are retrieved and stored every 24 hours from each enabled NE The data are stored per day in a separate log file AdslLineStatisticsLog_YYYYMMDD where YYYY year MM month and DD day located in ANYMEDIAPATH Iog The file contains also hints about start log ging stop logging and error messages AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 8 1 Performance monitoring ADSL performance monitoring data mm ee 8 2 1 ADSL Performance Monitoring Data window This window is used to display all ADSL performance monitoring parameter This window also allows to select data collection or clear counters of either the se lected ADSL drop or all the ADSL drops in the NE Because there are perform
329. g Preview Frame The Preview Frame dialog pops up after the selection of Preview in a window The following figure shows an example of the Preview Frame dialog 672900 5 37 PM Tres Cantos Groups and NEs Management SHELF17_BB Figure 3 17 Preview Frame dialog AEM R1 7 3 36 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 System management Print out reports Actions in Preview The following table provides an overview of the possible actions in the Preview Frame dialog Frame dialog Table 3 25 Preview Frame dialog actions If you want to then print out click on the printer icon cancel the print out click on Close view a single page preview click on the single page icon view a multi page preview click on the multi page icon change the magnification of the preview select another magnification with the option menu maximize restore the preview window click on the monitor icon AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 3 37 System management Backup and restore mm ee 3 6 Backup and restore The backup functions of the AEM allow you to copy AEM related file systems to removable media such as tape to safeguard against loss damage or corruption The AEM system files and database backup allows to back up and restore system files and databases belonging to the installed applications e g configuration files Archiving is possible for AEM log files The restore functions allow you to restore file systems by copying reaso
330. g network 1 28 network element 1 29 Mouse 3 5 MSD2 view 5 51 N NE Memory Administration 5 7 NE Software Administration 5 7 NE synchronization 5 122 NE_ASSOC_FAILED 7 49 NE AM Alarms 7 39 NEASSOC_LOST 7 49 Network life cycle 1 22 modifying 1 28 normal operation 1 25 physical installation 1 23 Network Browser 5 17 Network element modifying 1 29 registration 1 24 Network Element Browser 5 18 Network planning 1 23 O3 2 _ __ UUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUU SS Normal Alarms 7 39 NVDS backup backup restore restore data 5 164 telephony 5 163 data 5 167 telephony 5 166 ananasa O ObjectStore Configuration 2 18 2 22 ObjectStore Installation 2 17 Off line backup database 3 38_ OK button 3 14 On line backup database 3 Option menu 3 14 OrbixMT Installation 2 13 OrbixNames Installation 2 15 Ordering Document XIX 38 U SeSe ee P Pass through interface C 1 Password 5 37 Path through interface TL1 messages C 3_ Performance monitoring 1 29 Periodical Alarm Deletion 7 9 Platform Alarm 7 39 Port test 7 26 Port test result 7 27_ Power Test Units 5 5 Print reports 3 34 PRINT_ALARM 7 42 Product safety Classification XVII Programs workspace menu 3 12 protection forced switching 5 142 inhibit switching 5 142 manual switching 5 142 side switching 5 142 Protection mode COMDAC 5 145 Protection Switching COMDAC 5 144 IO DS1 5 147 Provisioning network 1
331. g for each alarm type m Severity Contains the default severity of the alarm Critical CR Major MJ AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 7 15 Fault management and maintenance Alarm monitoring Minor MN Indeterminate N Warning WR Cleared CL m Service Affecting Specifies whether the alarm is subscriber service affecting or not Possible values Yes No m Acknowledge State Reflects if the alarm has been acknowledged by a user m Acknowledge User The login of the last user who has acknowledged an alarm m Node A unique text label For NE alarms it is the NE Name of the NE the alarm belongs to For platform alarms the string EM is used except for commu nication alarms m Source Type Defines the type of alarm reporting source For NE alarms the agent type e g NarrowBand BroadBand NarrowBand Broadband is used For plat form alarms the string EM is used m Entity Object identifier referring to the alarm Examples of objects are network el ements ap 1 1 etc m Alarm Text Contains text briefly describing the alarm The summary text is unique in the Element Manager Description This field contains a full description of the alarm m Agent Description For the NE alarms this field contains the description sent in the TL1 mes sage or in the trap without internationalizing For platform alarms this field is empty m Date amp Time First Change D
332. g this package Do you want to continue with the installation of lt LuJRERT gt y n 8 Type y and press Return Installing JRE 1 2 2 05 for AnyMedia EM R1 7 as lt LUJRERT gt Installing part 1 of 1 lt files list gt verifying class lt jre gt opt lucent JDK_1 2 2_05 symantec symbeans jar verifying class lt symantec gt Executing postinstall script You have the installation logfile in tmp EM_Install_LuJRERT log Installation of lt LuJRERT gt was successful AEM R1 7 2 62 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 Software installation and commissioning Installation procedure OrbixWeb 3 1 in Processing package instance lt LuOXWRT gt from stallation lt homelocal tmp lucent AnyMediaEMR1 7 gt OrbixWeb 3 1 Runtime for AnyMedia EM R1 7 sparc solaris Version 3 1 Run Time Installing Version 3 1 Run Time OK No previous package LuOXWRT have been found Here is a list of your partitions and the free space in each of them Filesystem kbytes used avail capacity Mounted on dev dsk c0t0d0s0 143927 36997 92538 29 dev dsk c0t0d0s4 625262 401583 167406 71 usr dev dsk c0t0d0s3 96455 11974 74836 14 var dev dsk c0t0d0s6 6591133 3401428 3123794 53 homelocal dev dsk c0t0d0s5 240399 8597 207763 4 var cache swap 1194528 8608 1185920 1 tmp masstc1 export1 b1d 2 b1dr17 51014048 44384096 6289872 88 home bldr17 masstc1 export1 b1d 2 syi_pl 51014048 44384096 6289872 88 home syi_pl Enter ins
333. gement Log management a Voss Table 3 35 Information displayed in the Log Viewer table Column Meaning Event Type The event which happened in the AEM Feeder Type Indicates the feeder type E3 or DS3 HBER Up Indicates the High Bit Error Rate data BB HBER Down Index A sequence number for each different alarm reported to the AEM Interval Interval which is used in the performance data This value can be 15 minutes or one day BB IP Address Indicates the IP Address of the data agent BB LOF Indicates the Loss of Frame data BB Login The user name of the user performing an action or EM LOS Up LOS Indicates the Loss of Signal data BB Down Method A string explaining the performed action NE Name Indicates in Autonomous Report Performance Logs and Alarms the NE in which the event has happened EM is displayed if the log messages is related to the AEM Object Id Unique identification of the object for which the log mes sage has been sent Parameters m For Actions and System Internal Events Shows all parameters involved in the action m For Autonomous Reports Shows all TL1 message parameters in the order they were received for TL1 messages sent from NE and the TCAs information from the data agent by SNMP trap m For Alarms Shows the rest of the alarm parameters except de scription Port Id Indicates the Port Id where the performance data has been recollected BB
334. grade 5 2 1 2 Virtual remote terminals The AnyMedia Access System can be configured to be logically divided into a number of separate virtual terminals that provide three types of voice frequency service node interfaces TR 303 TR 08 and INA AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 5 5 NE management equipment configuration Overview of the controlled systems p Se 5 2 1 3 OAM amp P interfaces The AnyMedia Access System provides the following maintenance interfaces for operations administration maintenance and provisioning OAM amp P for telephony services EIA 232D m Local EIA 232D serial port on the CTU DTP100 in the AnyMedia Access System shelf to which a TL1 system interface TL1SI or CIT or a GSI can be connected This interface is typically used during initial installation LAN 10BaseT m A local LAN interface on the AnyMedia Access System shelf provides ac cess to an IEEE 802 3 compliant LAN through a 10BaseT connection All communications through this interface will be over Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol TCP IP and is the way to the AEM ROC m Remote operations channel ROC a remote LAN interface which uses TCP IP to communicate with the AEM The OAM amp P functionality is pro vided via a nailed up DSO link that is part of the DS1 payload connectivity to the AnyMedia Access System shelf The DSO link originates from a data communication network DCN that supports TCP IP over an Ethernet LAN
335. gt from lt homelocal tmp lucent AnyMediaEMR1 7 gt AnyMedia Element Manager Release 1 7 Client sparc LuGUI24 361 1 kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkxkkk AnyMedia Element Manager c 1999 Lucent Technologies kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk OK No previous package LuGUI30 have been found Where should AnyMediaEM GUI be installed opt lucent AnyMediaEM_R1 7 GUI24 q 18 Type a valid path where the package files must be placed and press Re turn Or press Return to accept the default path Package lt LuOXWRT gt OrbixWeb Version 3 1 Run Time have been found in opt lucent OrbixWeb3 1 Package lt LuJRERT gt jre 1 2 2 05 have been found in opt lucent JDK_1 2 2_05 Package lt LuNETSCP gt Netscape Version 4 6 have been found in opt lucent Netscape Select owner and group for package files NBR USER GROUP 1 halt other 2 root other 3 smtp root 4 verl staff Enter selection q 19 Type 4 and press Return User verl and Group staff have been selected What is the AnyMediaEM Server Host masc216 q AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 2 67 Software installation and commissioning Installation procedure a Se 2 68 Version 1 00 20 21 22 23 24 06 00 Type the host name where the AnyMedia AEM servers were installed and press Return or press Return to select the default name masc216 Wait Login for CutThrough fun
336. h connects a main shelf server port with a subshelf feeder port m Subshelf AP and subscriber provisioning The provisioning model of APs and subscribers in the subshelf is according to the existing provisioning model in the mainshelf except the newly intro duced subshelf physical entity AlDs for slots and drops AEM R1 7 5 10 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 NE management equipment configuration Overview of the controlled systems E See 5 2 3 Broadband applications This section gives an overview of the AnyMedia Access System broadband appli cations 5 2 3 1 Data system description Overview The AnyMedia Access System provides data services to subscribers using asyn chronous transfer mode ATM cell transfer and asymmetrical digital subscriber line ADSL interface technology The AnyMedia Mainshelf provides end to end ATM cell transfer between cus tomer premise equipment ADSL modems and network ATM switches A mixed telephony data mainshelf is shown in Figure 5 1 page 5 3 This configuration al lows subscriber access to Internet service providers ISP remote LAN applica tions or any other related ATM services ATM connections are established using permanent virtual channels PVC Full rate ADSL in The full rate ADSL interface is a twisted 2 wire subscriber interface according to terface ANSI T1 413 and ITU T G 992 1 It provides voice and data transmission using discrete multitone DMT technology The connectio
337. has been closed as a consequence of a loss of the TL1 communication session AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 7 49 Fault management and maintenance Alarms p See Corrective actions Proceed as follows to clear the alarm Step Procedure 1 Check the telephony agent state after a waiting period of 1 minute Comment When the NE state is CONNECTED and the TCP IP con nection is lost or closed the NE state is moved to TRY ING and the loop process to re establish the connection with the NE is started by the AEM Is the state CONNECTED Yes O K No Continue with step 2 2 Check for Data Communication Network DCN being in service Is the DCN in service Yes Call Lucent Technologies Technical Support No Put the DCN into service 7 5 5 13 SW_VR_ILLEGAL Meaning The software version currently stored in the agent is not supported by the AEM Abbreviation ILLEGAL_SW_VERSION Severity Critical Service affecting No Effects It is not possible to manage the agent Agent software version is not supported Possible cause s The software version currently stored in the agent is not supported by the AEM or the AEM is trying to establish the communication with a agent while its COM DAC AFM initialization process is in progress Corrective actions Proceed as follows to clear the alarm Step Procedure 1 Check that the correct version of software is installed on the agent s sys tem controller card Yes
338. hat is also running TELNET TELNET is a TCP IP application AEM R1 7 GL 10 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 Glossary Test Access Path TAP There are up to two TAPs one consisting of two pairs TAP B and the other of six pairs TAP A both providing in ternal and external metallic test access to the circuits Test Session This is the procedure including all necessary functions to test a subscriber This includes the setup of the test path as well as the release of the test equipment The test session runs in the NE Time This represents a 24 hour clock function Timeslot Management Channel TMC This is a duplicated DSO data link that a TR 303 VRT and Local Digital Switch LDS use to exchange connection control information with each other as they set up and tear down DSO paths through the system on a per call basis TL1 Transaction Language 1 This is a bellcore standard message language It is the primary means of operating and maintaining the V5DLC system A TL1 message session supports bi directional message transmission and when a TL1 link is established the system can initiate autonomous messages to monitor alarms and changes in system status TR303 VRT TR303 Virtual Remote Terminal This refers to the logical portion of the NE that supports a single TR303 interface acting as a TR303 RDT Only one TR303 VRT can be supported in NE R1 2 U Upgrade Is a type of migration where the software release is changed from an ear
339. he AEM checks if the AEM supports the software version of the data gent If the software version is supported the connection state becomes COMM_ESTABLISHED If the received data from the data agent contains invalid data the state becomes COMM_TRYING_PROBLEM_DETECTED and the whole communication process will be repeated when a timer expires AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 5 43 NE management equipment configuration Equipment configuration p Se COMM ESTABLIS When the communication state is COMM_ESTABLISHED HED COMM_ESTABLISHED_SYNCHRONIZING or COMM_TRYING and the user re quest to finish the communication with the data agent the communication state becomes COMM_STOPPED_RELEASING The AEM deletes all the data related to the communication and the state is moved to COMM_STOPPED When the communication state is COMM_ESTABLISHED or COMM_ESTABLISHED_SYNCHRONIZING and the AEM detects the loss of communication with the data agent the communication state becomes COMM_TRYING The AEM starts the process to re establish the communication with the data agent The user can request to close a connection with an NE via the GUI When the communication session is closed by the AEM the connection state is changed to NOT CONNECTED When the connection state is CONNECTED and the con nection is lost the connection state becomes TRYING If a communication ses sion loss is detected and the connection is still established the AEM closes the connection
340. he administra tive state is Not Managed see below Deprovision If the NE has been provisioned and no value has been changed Operational State The option menu Administrative State shows the possible values Managed Not Managed This option menu is disabled if the telephony agent is not provisioned The text field Operational State shows the current state of the data agent Possible values Communication Stopped Communication Stopped Releasing Communication Trying Communica tion Trying Problem Detected Communication Established Communication Established Synchronizing More Details This button provides access to the Synchronization Telephony window cf Chapter 5 5 6 1 3 page 5 123 It is available only if the administrative state of the agent is Managed AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 5 41 NE management equipment configuration Equipment configuration p See 5 5 2 4 Modify NE Management data teleph ony agent Procedure Complete the following procedure to manage an NE telephony agent Step Procedure 1 Select NE in the Network Browser or in the background map and NE Management via the cursor menu The NE Management window pops up This window can also be reached from the Groups amp NEs window tab NEs by clicking on NE Management cf Chapter 5 4 3 page 5 27 If you want to then provision the NE enter or change the values for IP Ad dress TID Login or
341. he row entry The ADSL Drop window pops up cf Chapter 5 5 5 31 page 5 109 edit create an ATM cross connection select an ADSL drop with an assigned cross connection in the ADSL Drop In formation and click on ATM Cross Connections The ATM Cross Con nection window pops up cf Chapter 6 3 2 AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 5 107 NE management equipment configuration Equipment configuration p See If you want to then start the BIST test use the option menu near the Apply button to select BIST Test and press Apply See also Chapter 7 4 2 3 start the corrupted CRC test use the option menu near the Apply button to select Corrupted CRC Test and press Apply See also Chapter 7 4 2 2 reset the pack Click on Reset The following warning message pops up Resetting the ADSL Pack may be service affecting Do you want to continue 2 Click on Close to exit the window AEM R1 7 5 108 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 NE management equipment configuration Equipment configuration p Se 5 5 5 31 ADSL Drop window data application This screen is used to configure the ADSL drops It can also be used to remove the related cross connections Figure 5 37 ADSL Drop window The following table shows the view edit options of this window Parameters Buttons Description NE Name NE name of the selected NE max 30 characters AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 5 109 NE managem
342. he user If not all se lected alarms could be cleared the user is informed about the alarms for which this action failed m Print alarm lists cf Chapter 7 3 4 1 page 7 18 Before performing alarm acknowledgment and alarm clearance select the alarms you want to acknowledge or clear Starting actions Select the desired alarm viewer action If you want to then select Result Notes manually retrieve View gt Reload Reloads alarms in the table Only alarms which match the filter criteria are included The Alarm Viewer is blocked until the reload is finished alarms Same functionality as Reload in the tool bar To customize the displayed alarm list perform the ac tions described in Chapter 7 3 4 3 page 7 19 and Chapter 7 3 4 2 page 7 18 All selected alarm items are acknowledged Their sta tus immediately changes to acknowledge acknowledge alarms Actions gt Acknowledge Same functionality as Acknowledge in the tool bar For better readability the displayed alarms can be sorted cf Chapter 7 3 3 4 2 page 7 17 clear alarms Actions gt Clear All selected alarm items are cleared Their status im mediately changes to cleared Same functionality as Clear in the tool bar For better readability the displayed alarms can be sorted cf Chapter 7 3 3 4 2 page 7 17 AEM R1 7 7 24 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 Fault management and maintenance 7 4 Test management Main functions Acces
343. he values for four different Monitoring time periods Current 15 minutes Previous 15 minutes Cur rent day Previous day m PSES P bit Severely Errored Second Possible val ues 1 900 for 15 minutes 1 86400 for one day m LOS Loss of Signal Possible values 1 90 for 15 minutes 1 8640 for one day HBER High Bit Error Rate Possible values 1 90 for 15 minutes 1 8640 for one day m LOF Loss of Frame Possible values 1 90 for 15 minutes 1 8640 for one day Valid Data Four check boxes show whether the data for the time period are valid or not Downstream Four text fields show the values for four differ ent time periods Current 15 minutes Previous 15 minutes Current day Previous day m PSES Possible values 1 900 for 15 minutes 1 86400 for one day m LOS Loss of Signal Possible values 1 90 for 15 minutes 1 8640 for one day HBER High Bit Error Rate Possible values 1 90 for 15 minutes 1 8640 for one day RFI Remote Failure Indication Possible values 1 90 for 15 minutes 1 8640 for one day Valid Data Four check boxes show whether the data for the time period are valid or not The Get button is used to retrieve the PM data of the se lected drop The Reset Counts button can be used to restart the per formance monitoring of the selected drop The Reset All Drops Counts button can be used to restart the performance monitoring
344. hen time out Possible values 0 to upper limit not defined Default value 3 Gen directoryTemp Temporary directory of the AEM application Default value tmp Gen orbixTracesInEm Orbix daemon trace level Possible values 0 to 2 Default value 0 Gen timeout Time out in milliseconds for COBRA calls Possible values 0 to Default value 480 000 ms FB Root NVDS_BB Path associate to the root key used by File Browser Default value NVDS_ BB AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 B 3 Configuration parameters Overview mm ee Name Description FB Root NVDS_NB Path associate to the root key used by File Browser Default value NVDS_ NB FB Root NVPS_BB Path associate to the root key used by File Browser Default value NVPS_BB FB Root NVPS_NB Path associate to the root key used by File Browser Default value NVPS_NB FB Root ALARM_FILTERS Path associate to the root key used by File Browser Default value ALARM_FILTERS NEM association timeSync Indicates if the time and date in the agents has to be kept in synchronization with the time and date of the AEM Possible values true false Default value true NEM aoHandler fullSynclnval Maximum number of retries of full synchroni idTimes zations Possible values 0 to 5 times Default value 3 NEM aoHandler queueSize Maximum size of the event s queue Possible values 1 to 1000 elements Default val
345. hich files are backed up A certain level incremental backup will save all the new or changed files since the last backup with a lower level Inhibit Switch This refers to an Element Manager initiated switch command that instructs the NE to inhibit a side switch irrespec tive of the conditions of the active unit COMDAC and IO_DS1 circuit packs only Internationalization This is the process of isolating the language and customs dependent code in a computer program from the lan guage independent code The term internationalization is often abbreviated as i18n IO DS1 Pack IO_DS1 This provides four DS1 interfaces to accommodate telephony via standard TR 08 mode TR 303 and INA network interfaces IO_DS1 Circuit Packs Each circuit pack contains four feeder DS1 port circuits together with the circuitry needed to interface with DS1 sig nals metallic feeder IP Addresses These are distributed according to the worldwide or local configuration The IP address is used in ISO layer 3 A LAN contains tables for making an assignment between MAC address and IP address U SS L Level 1 Applications The minimum set of server applications that have to run together to provide the minimum functionality of the Any Media NB EM These applications must exist before the Level 2 Application can be started If this group is shut down the AEM NB is shut down Level 2 Applications Server applications that can be started up and shut down individually
346. highest severity alarm is minor NE yellow Lit when the source of the fault or abnormal condition is near end FE yellow Lit when the source of the fault or abnormal condition is far end AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 5 49 NE management equipment configuration 5 50 Version 1 00 5 E Equipment configuration Meanings m Lit when a fault is detected on the pack m Flashes on turn up Lit when a test is in progress Lit when one of the eight miscellaneous alarm inputs is active For future use m Lit when a fault is detected on the pack m Flashes when the AP executes off line shelf tests All Appli cation Packs Lit when a fault is detected on the pack m Lit when loss of clock sync signal is de tected m Flashes when incorrect MDSU MDS2 MDS2B side association is detected Lit when a fault is detected on the pack R1 7 0 IAT Server NE yellow Lit when a failure of either IAT RT carrier link from the IAT to the IATS is detected Lit when a configuration error or mismatch is detected as follows m the IATS is placed in an AP slot not pro visioned for the IAT server pack type m the IATS faceplate DS1 cable is discon nected m there is a mismatch between the host TO provisioning and the IAT phantom CU equipqge IAT01 only Lit when a failure of either linr from the IATS to the IAT IAT RT link working is detected AFM
347. ical representation of the NE shelves in case of multiple shelves Procedure Complete the following procedure to display the shelf view Step Procedure 1 Select NE gt Main Shelf in the Network Element Browser and View via the cursor menu or select View gt Object via the menu bar The Shelf View window pops up 24ch Po 15 View sd View FLT FLT FLT 1O P I O 1 COM1COM2 CTU AP 1 AP 2 AP 3 AP amp AP 5 AP 6 AP 7 AP 8 AP 9 AP 10 AP 11 AP 12 AP 13 AP 14 AP 15 AP 16 fe Inserted View _ Provisioned View CONF Ur Figure 5 18 Shelf View window This window provides general inventory information as well as provisioning and alarm information through the LEDs Each slot will show either the apparatus code of the inserted card default view or the apparatus code provisioned in that slot provisioned view or otherwise no apparatus code If the slot is empty no card will be shown otherwise the slot will display the face plate of the inserted card with its LEDs if applicable Single clicking on any slot will launch the card specific window even when the card is not inserted AEM R1 7 5 48 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 NE management equipment configuration Equipment configuration p Se The following tables shows the related sections where the packs are described Card Type Apparatus Code Described in COMDAC COM100 COM101 Chapter 5 5 5 3 page 5 59 IO DS1 FAC100 Chapter 5
348. ields Version Now Running currently running NE software and Version Available for Activation standby software downloaded via FTP display the corresponding versions 2 Click on Get to retrieve the current version information 3 Click on Apply to initiate the validation of the new software the exchange of the software versions and the reboot to make the changes valid A Warning window pops up AFM Program Copy amp Validation is service affecting and the command can not be cancelled while its execution Continue anyway After confirmation an In Progress window pops up AFM Program Copy and Validation from active version to standby version on lt NE NAME gt in Progress AEM R1 7 5 160 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 NE management equipment configuration Equipment configuration p Se After finishing the process successfully the In Progress window disap pears 4 Press Close to exit the AFM Program Copy amp Validation window AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 5 161 NE management equipment configuration Equipment configuration _ e ee eee ee 5 5 15 Nonvolatile data storage NVDS Overview This section describes the backup and restore processes The backup procedure uploads the data from the NE s COMDAC or AFM to the AEM The restore func tion deals with the downloading of a previous backup NVDS from the AEM to the NE Both functions apply to both simplex and duplex NE configurations Backup res
349. ient and server security filters fill in this information When the alarm retrieval operation arrives at the alarm server in addition to the normal input data it also contains the user domain information added by the user interface 7 2 5 Managing the raising of alarms An alarm is raised by different types of agents e g telephony and data or by any object of the AEM When an alarm is raised its state and the relevant transmitted data cf Chapter 7 5 2 page 7 39 are updated The alarm information provided by these agents can be different and with different formats The AEM will convert this information to a common format this common format is based on the ITU T Recommendation X 733 ITU T Special care has to be taken if the alarm is raised repeatedly see Repetitive and fluctuating alarms In this case the already existing alarm is put into the raised state The user acknowledge identification if available is removed from the alarm This way a raised condition of an existing alarm is considered as a new raising not a new alarm The number of occurrences is increased every time the same alarm is raised Repetitive and fluc A repetitive alarm is an alarm that is raised several times before it is cleared A tuating alarms fluctuating alarm is an alarm that is raised and cleared alternatively several times in a short period at least less than the AEM constant for the cleared alarms see Chapter 7 2 10 page 7 9 To handle these
350. ier of a group e g the log identifier of Group 1 2 1 in the Figure 5 8 page 5 24 is Group 1 2 Group 1 2 1 Alarm handling The only items in the tree hierarchy allowed to report alarms are the NEs Groups do not generate alarms by themselves but they show the highest severity of the alarms reported by the contained NEs included in the operator domains This se verity is called group status Example Root Group Group 1 2 Figure 5 10 Alarm handling example Reported group sta For instance supposed that NE1 have reported a critical alarm and NE 2 have re tus ported a minor alarm Group 1 2 will report a minor alarm in its group status be cause that is the highest severity of the alarms it contains Nevertheless group 1 will report a critical alarm in its group status because it contains two NEs NE 2 with minor as its highest severity alarm and NE 1 with critical as its highest sever AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 5 25 NE management equipment configuration Groups and NEs management a See ity alarm If there are no more alarms in the system the root group will inform of a critical alarm Each time a new alarm is reported by a NE or an existing alarm changes its state the following process must be followed calculate the new group status of the parent group a If this group status has changed calculate the group status of the parent group of the parent group the grandparent group and so on The
351. iew The System Administration window provides functions for AEM recovery and shut down Via three tabs Packages DMGs and MGs in this window the packages as well as optional distributed module groups DMGs can be started and shutdown The MGs can be recovered and processed be added to modules or removed from them as well as killed and recovered 3 4 3 1 Menus in the System Administration window Menus and func The following table provides an overview of the menus of the System Administra tions tion window and its functions Table 3 7 Menus and functions Menu Item Function File gt Print gt Print Table Print out all items displayed in the window File gt Print gt Print Window Print a screenshot of the whole window File gt Exit Close the System Administration window and exit the application View gt Reload Update the displayed values with the current ones The values in the System Administration window are not automatically updated Help gt On Window Display help for System Administration Help gt Index Display help index Actions in the Sys The System Administration window displays different information and allows for tem Administra certain actions depending on the selected tab Packages DMGs MGs The fol tion window lowing table shows actions which do not depend on the selected tab Table 3 8 Basic actions in the System Administration window If you want to then Result i
352. iew configuration data cf Chapter 5 5 5 page 5 54 Delete the network element cf Chapter 5 5 18 page 5 173 Screen navigation Figure 5 13 page 5 34 shows an overview of the screen navigation for equipment configuration In this figure is assumed that the NE is already connected cf Chapter 5 5 1 page 5 35 Examples To open the COMDAC Shelf Protection window proceed as follows m Select NE gt Main Shelf gt COMDAC via the Network Element Browser and select Protection via the cursor menu or m Select NE gt Main Shelf gt COMDAC via the Network Element Browser open the COMDAC window by means of the menu bar View gt Object or be means of the tool bar open icon and click on the COMDAC Protection button in the COMDAC window AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 5 33 NE management equipment configuration Equipment configuration COMDAC SW Download AFM SW Download COMDAC Program Copy AFM Program Copy COMDAC NVDS Backup AFM NVDS Backup COMDAC NVDS Restore AFM NVDS Restore Cut Through In Progress NE Management Synchronization Timing Source Control Date amp Time NE Inventory Shelf View AP Telephony User Port IAT NE R1 7 E IAT Server l NE R1 7 IAT Server Port NE R1 7 to Logical DS0 window Service Provisioning cf Chapter 6 2 4 3 page 6 35 oe Windows with S amp S Object Network Browser d Several
353. igned Assigned 1 Maintenance Monitoring N Apply BEER Figure 4 8 Domain Profile window AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 4 9 User management Domains 5 Enter a new domain name in the Domain Name field this is mandatory 3 to 30 characters and extra information in the Description field this is optional 0 to 60 characters Any characters are allowed 6 Select one or more controlled objects that shall belong to the new domain in the Controlled Objects Not Assigned field and click Add gt gt gt NOTE Each controlled object consists of two fields Type and Value Ts Select one or more user groups that shall have access to the new domain in the User Groups Not Assigned field and click Add gt gt gt NOTE To create user groups see Chapter 4 4 1 page 4 14 8 Click OK or Apply to save the settings the system ensures that the new do main does not yet exist in the system After clicking OK the window will be closed If you want to reject the settings click Close before OK or Apply The other fields are described in Chapter 4 3 2 page 4 10 4 3 2 Modify domains Introduction This chapter describes the process to modify the information of a domain e g which devices it includes etc Before modifying the information of a domain the AEM administrator must have a system login Procedure Complete the following procedure to modify the information of a domain Step P
354. iguration ee 5 5 17 2 Add a host Complete the following procedure to add a host for Fiber Reach 1 Type fr in a terminal window which you can start via the workspace manager cf Chapter 3 3 8 page 3 11 and press Return The following message is shown List of available hosts a Add Host d Del Host q Quit Enter Selection 2 Enter a that identifies the option Add Host and press Return The next message pops up Host to be added gt NOTE The host is reachable by Fiber Reach if the user name and the IP address of the AEM user is contained in the rlogin file 3 Enter the name of the host where the ITM SNC is installed 4 Enter q and press Return to exit 5 5 17 3 Delete a host Complete the following procedure to delete a host for Fiber Reach 1 Type fr in a terminal window which you can start via the workspace manager cf Chapter 3 3 8 page 3 11 and press Return The following message is shown List of available hosts 1 mahp1l 2 mascusal4 a Add Host d Del Host q Quit Enter Selection 2 Enter d that identifies the option Del Host and press Return The next message pops up Host to be removed 3 Enter the number that identifies the host on the list Select q and press Return to exit AEM R1 7 5 172 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 NE management equipment configuration Equipment configuration 5 5 18 Delete network element If the NE should not be managed by the AEM any longer i
355. imal WAN Interface Requirements The router bridge must have one or more channelized 1 544 Mbit s T1 in terfaces ITU G 703 G 704 An IP address may be assigned to each time slot or channel group m Minimal LAN Interface Requirements The router must have one or two for cascading purposes Ethernet IEEE 802 3 10BaseT ports In case of two LAN ports LAN to LAN routing is supported For the router bridge the following has to be provisioned m T1 interface functionality line code framing type etc m Time slot mapping each needed serial interface will be a channel group mapped on a time slot of the channelized T1 m Protocols and encapsulations m P addresses for IP routing routing tables m Ethernet media The initial provisioning of a router bridge is typically performed by a VT100 ANSI terminal connected to a RS 232C port When the IP address of the router is pro visioned the router may be configured via LAN TELNET SNMP depending on the router bridge used AEM R1 7 A 6 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 Data communications network DCN configuration Recommended DCN configurations mm ee A 6 12 AnyMedia network element configura tion The ROC over SPLL is the management interface used to access the NE The initial provisioning has to be done via pre provisioning factory settings or a local GSI LAN or RS 232C because the SPLL service carrying the remote operations channel must be in service to get remote acc
356. in service OOS if it is out of service TRANSITORY otherwise The process is running only if the module it belongs to is running Load Level Number of clients which use this process 0 or more The higher the number the higher the work load for the process Service Level Depending on the service the process provides the value FULL or DEGRADED is displayed AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 3 29 System management System administration Table 3 19 Process information Table entry Meaning Reason Short description why the service is DEGRADED Figure 3 14 Edit MG window AEM R1 7 3 30 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 System management System administration Actions The following table lists all actions which can be performed in the Edit MG window Adding killing removing and recovering a process from a module is possible only after the view or change the processes of a module action was performed Table 3 20 Actions for editing an MG If you want to then Result view or change the select the module under Modules in The process information for this module processes of a MG and press Processes in Module is displayed under Processes in Mod module ule These processes can now be ed ited add a process tothe press Add The list of processes must If the maximum number of processes module not be empty which are allowed to run is reached the status bar displays a message
357. indow can be reached from VRT VB windows DSO window cf Chapter 6 2 1 3 page 6 8 Chapter 6 2 1 7 page 6 15 Logical DSO List window cf Chapter 6 2 4 1 page 6 31 Telephony Application Pack window cf Chapter 5 5 5 7 page 5 66 Channel Unit window cf Chapter 5 5 5 13 page 5 75 IAT Subshelf window cf Chapter 5 5 5 19 page 5 87 by clicking on Add Logical DSO Procedure Complete the following procedure to add a logical DSO Step Procedure 1 Use the option menus Logical DSO id to select a desired VRT VB with a associated empty text field white background 2 Click on Apply to confirm 3 Click on Close to exit the window 6 2 4 5 Modify a logical DSO Launch the Logical The Logical DSO window can be reached DSO window from Logical DSO List window cf Chapter 6 2 4 1 page 6 31 Telephony Application Pack window cf Chapter 5 5 5 7 page 5 66 Channel Unit window cf Chapter 5 5 5 13 page 5 75 IAT Subshelf window cf Chapter 5 5 5 19 page 5 87 by clicking on Edit Logical DSO AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 6 39 Service provisioning Service provisioning telephony p Se Procedure Complete the following procedure to edit a logical DSO of a VRT VB Step Procedure 1 Use the option menus Logical DSO id to select a desired VRT VB with a associated text field grey background to select a logical DSO other than the pre selected if desired If you want to then modify th
358. ine coding values Possible values are m ZCS Zero Code Suppression or m B8ZS Bipolar with 8 Zero Suppression The default is B8ZS for TR 303 TR 08 and INA VRT VBs Values only changeable for TR 08 and INA ZCS is blocked for TR 303 VRTs 363 211 454 AEM R1 7 Version 1 00 06 00 6 27 Service provisioning Service provisioning telephony p SeSe Parameters Buttons Description Cross Connec Physical DS1 id These fields display the physical DS1id by tion Information means of three option menus m The first menu contains the shelf number ds1 1 m The second menu contains the slot number inside the shelf 1 5 m The third menu shows the feeders 1 4 inside the se lected slot Possible values ds1 1 5 1 4 Selecting a slot number second option menu results in an update of the third option menu feeder Edit Physical DS1 This button provides access to the Physical DS1 window The button is available only if a physi cal DS1 has been selected Operational The Operational State shows the service state obtained State from the NE through the use of the Get button Possible values Enabled Disabled The Secondary Operational State shows the secondary service state obtained from the NE through the use of the Get button The Get button is used to retrieve the service states Apply Apply Depending on the selected logical DS1 id this button provides different functions For logical D
359. ing Do you want to continue modify the current NE timing source click on Edit button on the right hand reference side of the Timing Source field The Timing Source Control window pops up cf Chapter 5 5 6 4 page 5 129 change the DS1 regeneration state use the label button on the right hand side of the corresponding text field get the current service states click on Get in the Operational State field add a logical DS1 click on Add Logical DS1 The Logical DS1 window pops up cf Chapter 6 2 3 3 page 6 26 AEM R1 7 6 24 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 Service provisioning Service provisioning telephony p Se If you want to then edit a logical DS1 remove a logical DS1 exit the window 363 211 454 AEM R1 7 click on Edit Logical DS1 The Logical DS1 window pops up cf Chapter 6 2 3 3 page 6 26 click on Remove Logical DS1 A Warning window pops up displaying the following message Deleting Logical DS1 id may be service affecting and may remove existing semi permanent cross connections DSO end points OK to proceed If you decide to continue the AEM will send a delete cross connection mes sage to the NE click on Close Version 1 00 06 00 6 25 Service provisioning Service provisioning telephony p See 6 2 3 3 Logical DS1 window This window can be used to add or edit logical DS1 and to cross connect physical DS1 Figure 6 1
360. ing order each time the user clicks on the same header again the list is sorted the other way AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 7 17 Fault management and maintenance Alarm monitoring p See 7 3 4 System management functions The general system management functions comprise the functions for file man agement for defining view options and for getting help These functions are con tained in the following menus m File m Views m Filters m Help 7 3 4 1 File In the file menu you can start the following actions m New Launch a new instance of the Alarm Viewer m Print cf Chapter 3 5 m Close Close the active window but without closing other instances of the Alarm Viewer Same functionality as the Close button m Exit Close all Alarm Viewers opened by the user 7 3 4 2 Views Summary For displaying alarm lists you can select from four pre defined views m View1 Index Node Entity Severity Date amp Time Last Change Alarm Text m View2 Index Node Entity Severity Date amp Time Last Change m Views Index Node Entity Date amp Time First Raise Date amp Time Last Change Ac knowledge User Number Raises a View4 Index Node Entity Severity Date amp Time Last Change Correlation State m Views All alarm fields Effects The alarms are rearranged according to the selected criteria AEM R1 7 7 18 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 Fault management and maintenance Alarm monitoring
361. ion Help gt On Window Always case sensitive online help AEM R1 7 5 16 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 NE management equipment configuration Initial windows p Se Menu entries Enable Disable Help gt About Always The options hidden under the menu name in the menu bar may also be executed via the keyboard This can be done using various methods There are two ways of opening a menu using the keyboard m By simultaneously pressing the Alt key and the underlined character in the menu name e g Alt F for File Then select the desired option by typing in the letter underlined in this op tion The menu will close and the related function is executed Example To execute the About option under Help menu see table above press Alt H followed by A m By using short cuts to cut to copy or to paste text strings The short cuts are the usual ones in the used platform Solaris or Windows 5 3 2 Tool bar The tool bar contains icons that provide quick access to the most commonly used actions New create a new object group NE pack Open edit an existing ob ject group NE pack Remove delete selected object group NE Print Help Exit Reload Show Parent Group Tooltips are also provided for these action QM SG Et 5 5 3 2 1 Network browser The Network Browser displays all groups and NEs created in the AEM in a tree like structure The first level in the tree is the root group Alarm se
362. ion All communications through this interface occur over the transmission control protocol internet protocol TCP IP to the GSI or AEM The protocol profile in the NE for this scenario is shown in Figure A 2 page A 4 AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 A 3 Data communications network DCN configuration NE communication capabilities p See TL1 over TCP COMDAC File Transfer Protocol TL1 over Telnet also SNMP AFM COMDAC and AMF used for cut through TCP at layer 4 TCP at layer 4 UDP at layer 4 IP at layer 3 IP at layer 3 IP at layer 3 MAC amp LLC 1 MAC amp LLC 1 MAC amp LLC 1 at layer 2 at layer 2 at layer 2 10BaseT at layer 1 10BaseT at layer 1 10BaseT at layer 1 Figure A 2 AnyMedia external LAN interface profiles m Remote Operations Channel ROC ROC is a 64 kbps timeslot within the payload of a DS1 link bound to a feeder of the network element The AnyMedia Access System provides ac cess for a remotely located OS if it communicates via TCP The protocol profile in the NE for this scenario is shown in Figure A 1 page A 3 This al ternative can be used if no local ethernet LAN is available or the outside plant OSP environment is too severe for a router It does not need a sep arate DCN then it can be a cheaper solution The protocol profile in the NE for this scenario is shown in Figure A 3 TL1 over TCP File Transfer Protocol TL1 over Telnet also used for
363. ion all related information will be removed from the AEM This does not include the devices NEs or any other type which are grouped in that domain or their information Furthermore the access per mission will be automatically unassigned from the user groups that had ac cess to this domain AEM R1 7 4 12 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 User management Domains mm ee Procedure Complete the following procedure to remove a domain Step Procedure 1 Login as AEM administrator and start the AEM access bar as described in Chapter 3 2 1 The access bar will be shown 2 Select the User Administration amp Profiling icon The User Administration amp Profiling window pops up 3 Select View gt Domains via menu bar The Domains Table appears User Administration amp Profiling Domain Name Description Domain 1 Domain 1 description Domain 2 Domain 2 description Domain 3 description view domain Successful Figure 4 11 User Administration amp Profiling window Domains Table 4 Select the domain which shall be deleted in the Domain Name field and click Delete 5 Confirm your selection The window will be closed AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 4 13 User management User groups 4 4 User groups 4 4 1 Create user groups Introduction This chapter describes the process to create a new user group Before creating a new user group please pay attention to the following remarks m By
364. ion This slider can be used to set the slope equalization for the AP or CU Possible values 0 7 step 1 Default 0 6 2 4 13 BRI Service Details window Overview The BRI basic rate interface transmission extension 3 DSO ISDN BRITE is ap plicable to the AUA293 ISDN BRITE channel unit which uses the U Interface 2B1Q signal comprising two B channels and one D channel plus overhead o_O GSFN BRI ervice Details Information Service VC 2B D PRsload Success f D Figure 6 21 Logical DS0 window BRI Service Details Parameters Service VC Description Switched virtual connection for ISDN This option menu can be used to select the combination of bearer B channels provided to the subscriber Possible values 2B D B1 D B2 D D Default 2B D AEM R1 7 6 48 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 Service provisioning Service provisioning telephony p SSe 6 2 4 14 TO Service Details window Overview The TO transmission only no sealing current is used for a private line application with no DC signal It is applicable to the SPQ442 channel unit which provides four channels of service which can be used for 2 wire non switched private lines Figure 6 22 Logical DS0 window TO Service Details Parameters Description Impedance The transmit and receive impedance parameter selects the termination impedance of the channel unit Possible values 600 900 Default 600 Balance Thi
365. ion of COMDAC On the AnyMedia telephony part of NE the user must configure the local LAN port The initial provisioning has to be done via pre provisioning factory settings or a local GSI RS 232C To do so the user must configure the COMDAC LAN port IP address the default router address address of AFM LAN port and the subnet mask of the NE local LAN port We use TL1 commands to configure the NE as it is shown in the next example set ip shelf 135 88 4 2 defrouter 135 88 17 1 submask 255 255 240 0 A 6 2 2 2 Configuration of AFM On the AFM we must configure the in band ATM permanent virtual connection PVC which is carrying telephony and data management information This ATM PVC will be terminated at AFM and IP packets contained in it will be extracted For this PVC VPI should be 0 and VCI greater than 31 ATM PVCs may be provi sioned in AFM by means of GSI via local CIT altogether with AFM IP addresses one for DS3 interface and another one for LAN port IP Net Mask and Gateway addresses for AFM must be provisioned On the AFM we must configure a routing table i e so that IP packets related to COMDAC are forwarded to the AFM LAN port and IP packets related to AFM are terminated at AFM The user must join AFM LAN port with COMDAC LAN port located on the SCP of the AnyMedia Mainshelf by means of a ethernet cross over cable A 6 2 3 AEM server configuration The AEM server configuration is the same as described in Chapter A 6 1
366. ion scheme m selection of those slots for which an absence of the pack will be alarmed only applicable for COMDAC AEM R1 7 1 24 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 Functional description Working with AEM p Se m include data equipment configuration provisioning of card types and ATU Subshelves ADSL drops configuration m provisioning of card types which are inserted in a slot m configure ISDN in POTS mode via cut through m provisioning of the protection switching All steps are described in detail in Chapter 5 Service If the NEs are configured and integrated in the network cross connections can be provisioning defined The following actions are necessary m creation of VRT VB logical feeders m changing of voice frequency data enhancement VFDE for TR 303 VRTs datalink protection switching for TR 303 VRTs m creation of VRT VB logical lines Subscriber m cross connection logical line to logical feeder m include data service provisioning configuration of shelf vpi creation of VP services creation of VC services All steps are described in detail in Chapter 6 Network Status After the provisioning phase the NEs can now be controlled and monitored by the after Provisioning AEM and start operation amp surveillance 1 4 3 Network Operation amp Surveillance Actions During network operation amp surveillance the administration control and supervi sion of the network mainly include Fault Management m
367. is mainly used in three life cycle phases during network provisioning AEM network modification and network operation amp surveillance The installation phase is Supported by the graphical system interface for telephony services GSI NB AEM R1 7 1 22 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 Functional description Working with AEM p Se 1 4 1 Network planning and physical installation Network planning In the network planning phase all specifications and requirements of the future network operation are translated into a concrete network structure That means the network planning phase during which a decision on the network topology equipment and components is made has to take place before the operation with the AEM starts Physical The installation of the network follows the planning phase The installation in installation cludes the following steps m Physical NE installation This includes the installation of racks packs and cabling of the NEs m Creation of a data communication network DCN plan Communication between the AEM and the NEs is carried out via the DCN A DCN plan should be drawn up before provisioning the network to ensure that the AEM can reach all NEs and that the administration of the DCN does not lead to an undue increase in performance requirements m NE connection to the AEM server OS connection to the AEM server optional a Installation of the third party application and AEM software on the AEM s
368. is release involves MDS2 MDS2B shelf slots alarming configuration AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 5 7 NE management equipment configuration Overview of the controlled systems ee m Retrieve and maintain MDS2 MDS2B inventory information For more information please refer to the network element documentation 5 2 2 Network element releases R1 2 2 and R1 7 0 AnyMedia Access System R1 7 0 adds a set of new features which have to be supported by the AEM i e m New APs and CUs m DS1 regeneration AnyMedia R1 2 2 only m Pack provisioning AnyMedia R1 2 1 and all subsequent releases m Subshelves management integrated access terminals IATs AnyMedia R1 7 0 only The following sections provide some details on these features For more details please refer to the related network element documentation 5 2 2 1 DS1 regeneration AnyMedia R1 2 2 only This feature controls the DSX 1 regeneration feature for an IO_DS1 pack When this feature is activated the designated pack provides two regenerator termina tions When it is deactivated both regenerator terminations are disabled 5 2 2 2 Pack provisioning The AnyMedia Access System has the ability to specify any system slot as an equipment required or non required slot The purpose of this is to give the craft personnel the ability to specify on an individual shelf slot basis that the NE reports an alarm if a pack is removed from that slot AEM R1 7 5 8 Versio
369. ists m Telephony equipment protection The AEM allows the user to provision the equipment information for the protection scheme Also the user can force protection switching NB R1 2 and subsequent releases COMDAC simplex duplex 10 DS1 m NE timing synchronization The AEM supports the user to configure the NE synchronization clock sources m NE date and time The AEM allows the user to set and retrieve the date and time ofthe NE and allows to automatically configure NEs with AEM date and time m Subshelf management IAT Support of NE standby configuration The AEM supports the NE standby configuration via cut through interface The standby configuration is used to select the ISDN mode of operation as well as to configure the country code m NE disaster recovery from the AEM The AEM is able to reconstruct its NE database by polling the NEs for infor mation and from internally maintained backup copies of data m Fiber reach support The AEM supports the fiber reach by providing alarm information m Fibre reach management The AEM is able to launch the DDM 2000 element manager in order to per form DDM 2000 provisioning tasks Data equipment The data equipment management provides the following functions management func tions Configure specific equipment data Circuit pack provisioning configuration AFM management e g reset etc AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 1 9 Functional de
370. it can be assumed that the reader is familiar with this ab breviation Commands Commands and messages are displayed in constant width font e g sysdef grep SEMMNU Trademarks The trademarks used in this document are identified after the title page Trade marks of Lucent Technologies and other companies are in italics and the trade marks modify a noun e g the system name contains a trademark AnyMedia Access System A trademark is not treated as an acronym it is not spelled out or expanded AEM R1 7 XIV Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 About this document General safety information p Se Lucent Technologies trademarks are identified with the registered mark or trademark symbol the first time the trademarks are used in a chapter Lucent Technolo gies trademarks Trademarks of The trademarks of other companies are identified with a footnote reference the other companies first time the trademarks are used in a chapter Typographical con The following table gives examples of the typographical conventions used in this ventions chapter Table 0 5 Typographical conventions Object Example Meaning Keyboard ReturnorA Return or A key on the keyboard Shift Ctrl B Shift Ctrl and B key pressed simultaneously Esc A and B key pressed one after the other Pushbutton Apply Apply pushbutton in a window Menu File gt Exit Menu option Exitin File menu Objects in Date Designates the
371. k state exit the window Use the Equalization slider to define the desired value and click on Apply Use the Degrade Threshold slider to define the desired threshold and click on Apply Press the Labe button at the right hand side of the Loopback field and click on Apply press Close AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 5 93 NE management equipment configuration Equipment configuration ee 5 5 5 23 AFM window data application This screen is used to show modify the AFM parameters It can also be used to reset and to edit the feeder ports AFM Application Pack Figure 5 33 AFM window Parameters Buttons Description NE Name NE name of the selected NE max 30 characters Slot Id This text field shows the slot in which the AFM is inserted Possible values ap 1 1 16 for FAST shelf ap 1 0 19 for BAIU shelf In this release the only possible value is ap 1 16 for FAST shelf and ap 1 0 for BAIU shelf AEM R1 7 5 94 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 NE management equipment configuration Equipment configuration p Se Parameters Buttons Description Inventory Infor The following fields will be empty if no pack is inserted Oth mation erwise the read only text fields provide the following informa tion Card Type 11 character mnemonic used to identify the gen eral type of function provided Possible values AFM_DS3 LPA900 Serial Number 12 character alphanumeri
372. kkkkk Package lt LuSysAdm gt SystemAdmin LuSysAdm_36_1 1 have been found in opt lucent AnyMediaEM_R1 7 OK No previous package LuLogg have been found Using lt opt lucent AnyMediaEM_R1 7 gt as the package base directory Processing package information Processing system information 1 package pathname is already properly installed Verifying disk space requirements Checking for conflicts with packages already installed Checking for setuid setgid programs Installing AnyMedia Element Manager Logging Release 1 7 Administration as lt LuLogg gt AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 2 35 Software installation and commissioning Installation procedure p SSe Installing part 1 of 1 opt lucent AnyMediaEM_R1 7 Logging bin LogReader opt lucent AnyMediaEM_R1 7 Logging bin LogWriter opt lucent AnyMediaEM_R1 7 Logging cfg Logging cfg verifying class lt common gt Installation of lt LuLogg gt was successful Performance Log Processing package instance lt LuPerf gt from ging installation lt homelocal tmp lucent AnyMediaEMR1 7 gt AnyMedia Element Manager Performace Release 1 7 Administration sparc LuPerf_36_1 1 kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk AnyMedia Element Manager c 1999 Lucent Technologies kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Package lt LuSysAdm gt SystemAdmin LuSysAdm_36_1 1 have been found in opt lucent
373. le gt Exit Closes all windows of this application Help gt On Window Displays online help for this window Help gt Index Displays online help index AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 3 15 System management System administration mm ee 3 4 System administration 3 4 1 General 3 4 1 1 Introduction and definitions Introduction The AEM functionality is given by a set of processes of different types whose exe cution is controlled by the System Administration subsystem In order to make possible the managing of all the processes running under the AEM these will be grouped according to functionality start up and recovery dependencies into dif ferent levels The lower one is the process level and the upper one is the AEM level These levels are visible to the AEM administrators who have managing ca pacities as start up or recovery on some of them Definitions The following table gives definitions of terms used in this chapter Table 3 5 Definitions Term Meaning Server applica Set of server processes that perform a certain functionality tion Server applications provide services for client applications Client applica Set of processes that use the services provided by the server tion applications e g GUI and Northbound users Package Logical parts of the AEM which provide specific functionality and can be started up used and shutdown independently There are three packages m Narrowband package for NB
374. le press Apply to confirm the changes edit a threshold profile use the option menu PM Profile to se lect the desired profile and press Edit The Threshold Profile window pops up cf Chapter 5 5 5 35 page 5 119 Back in the ADSL Drop window after modifying the profile press Apply to confirm the changed profile change the administrative state use the option menu Administrative State gt NOTE When changing from Unlocked to Locked the following warning message appears Changing the administrative state of the ADSL drop may be service affecting Do you want to continue add edit remove cross connections click on ATM Cross Connections The ATM Cross Connection window pops up cf Chapter 6 3 2 AEM R1 7 5 112 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 NE management equipment configuration Equipment configuration p Se If you want to then start the BIST test use the option menu near the Apply button to select BIST Test and press Apply See also Chapter 7 4 2 3 start the corrupted CRC test use the option menu near the Apply button to select Corrupted CRC Test and press Apply See also Chapter 7 4 2 2 edit the ADSL PM data click on ADSL PM Data The ADSL Performance Monitoring Data window pops up cf Chapter 8 2 1 2 Click on Close to exit the window AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 5 113 NE management equipment configuration Equipment configuration p SeSe 5 5 5 3
375. lephony p Se Service Details Parameters Description Load Non Load This option menu can be used to select whether the transmit equalizer mast be loaded or non loaded distribution cable Possible values N L Default N Bandwidth BW This slider can be used to control the frequency response characteristic of the transmit equalizer Possible values 0 15 step 1 Default 0 Slope This slider can be used to adjust the frequency response of the equalizer Possible values 0 15 step 1 Default 0 Impedance The transmit and receive impedance parameter selects the termination impedance of the channel unit Possible values 150 600 1200 Default 600 Height This slider can be used to control the amplitude of the trans mit equalizer s transfer function Possible values 0 15 step 1 Default 0 Trunk Condi This option menu can be used to determine whether the AP tion or CU sets the signaling state toward the CO to the Idle state Busy or the DSO remote alarm indication Rai code during a fault condition Default Idle AEM R1 7 6 52 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 Service provisioning Service provisioning telephony p SeSe 6 2 4 17 EMAC EM4H PLR1 PLR2 Service De tails windows Overview EM4 C H 4 wire E amp M Type and Type Il The E amp M function is used in PBX tie trunks to provide the E amp M signaling interface It is applicable to the SPQ454 chan nel unit which is intende
376. lf 135 5 78 2 defrouter 224 0 0 2 submask 255 255 255 0 The nail up of the DSO channel must also be provisioned in the LDS after that the ROC over SPLL is provisioned Once communications with the element man ager is established via the ROC over SPLL remote operations on the NE can be executed as over a connection via LAN Also either the GSI or a standard win dows FTP TELNET can be used A 6 13 AEM server configuration Server IP Parame The server on which the AEM application resides must have its IP parameters ters configured m P address e g 135 88 20 234 m subnet mask e g 255 255 240 0 AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 A 7 Data communications network DCN configuration Recommended DCN configurations p ee m default router e g 135 88 17 1 Configuration In the AEM the following parameters have to be configured to be able to communi cate with the NEs m TCP IP configuration related to NEs For every NE the AEM wants to communicate with its IP address e g 135 88 4 2 must be introduced in the AEM provisionable with the AEM GUI via cut through m Association configuration related to NEs For every NE with which the AEM has to communicate the NEs Tar get Identifier TID must be known by the AEM provisionable with the AEM GUI via cut through For every NE with which the AEM wants to communicate the LO GIN and the PASSWORD information related to that NE must be in troduced in
377. lier release to a later release Upload The process of moving information from a client to a server at the request of a client according to client server par adigm Intended applications of this capability are software updates and restoring databases User The operator who will use the EM to provision maintain and monitor the AnyMedia Access System User Identifier UID This is a unique user login identifier This string is required and cannot be null Grouping of UID string values for this command is not allowed The valid UID value is a 3 to 10 case sensitive alphanumeric character string User Module A module that provides an interface to the users or to other external systems to the AnyMedia EM functionality V VB Virtual Bank This is the entity that groups a feeder and various drops for permanent leased line services in a simi lar way to the VRTs for switched traffic AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 GL 11 Glossary ee Ww Workload or Load A mix of actions and their frequencies from all possible input points that need processing in some way in the sys tem Z Z port A Z port is circuitry built on a POTS AP to provide a Z interface for analog subscribers Note that more than one Z port is housed on an AnyMedia POTS AP e g the LPZ100 provides 32 Z ports Z port for transmission only This is a Z interface normally used for services other than telephony e g data transmission This type of Z in
378. ll be updated once the remove operation is finished to show the current list exit the window click on Close AEM R1 7 5 86 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 NE management equipment configuration Equipment configuration p See 5 5 5 19 IAT Subshelf window NE R1 7 This screen is composed of a set of pull down controls to select the subshelf to be created or edited and the command buttons to provision deprovision the sub shelf IAT Subshelf Figure 5 31 IAT Subshelf window Parameters Buttons Description NE Name NE name of the selected NE max 30 characters Physical Index This option menu provides the Physical Index or the sub shelf identifier Identifiers which have already been created and provisioned in the NE are shown with a grey background This option menu shows the possible subshelf type that can be created in the NE Possible values IAT01 IATO2 The field Subshelf Version shows a 12 character alphanu meric code that includes the subshelf version Subshelf Type Inventory Infor mation The Get van be used to obtain the subshelf version AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 5 87 NE management equipment configuration Equipment configuration p See Parameters Buttons Description Command but The Provision button is used to provision a new subshelf tons This button is enabled only in case of creating a new sub shelf The Deprovision button is used
379. logical DS1 6 2 4 Creation of VRT VB logical TO subscriber 6 2 4 1 6 2 4 2 6 2 4 3 6 2 4 4 6 2 4 5 6 2 4 6 6 2 4 7 6 2 4 8 Logical DSO list window Modify the logical DSO list Logical DSO window Add a logical DSO Modify a logical DSO Use the Select Logical DSO window Common parameters in service details windows DFLT Service Details window AEM R1 7 Version 1 00 06 00 6 1 ee Contents 6 2 4 9 EMO FXSO Service Details windows 6 43 6 2 4 10 2LS 2GS 2FXLS 2FX Service Details windows 6 44 6 2 4 11 2RVO Service Details window 6 46_ 6 2 4 12 2NOS Service Details window 6 47 6 2 4 13 BRI Service Details window 6 48 6 2 4 14 TO Service Details window 6 49 6 2 4 15 2RVT Service Details window 6 50_ 6 2 4 16 DX4N DX4R FX O P 1 2 3 5 FX S T 1 2 3 5 Service Details windows 651 6 2 4 17 EMA4C EM4H PLR1 PLR2 Service Details windows 6 53 6 2 4 18 ETO4 Service Details window 6 54 6 2 4 19 FXO Service Details window 6 55 6 2 4 20 OCU 1 2 3 Service Details windows 6 57_ 6 2 4 21 SW56 Service Details window 6 58 6 2 4 22 TD O S A B C D Service Details windows 6 59 6 2 4 23 TO4 Service Details window 6 60 6 2 4 24 FXOD Service Details window 6 61 6 2 4 25 DPT Service Details windows 6 62 6 2 4 26 Overview of APs and GSFNs 6 63 6 2 4 27 Remove VRT VB logical DSO Subscriber 6 63 6 3 Service provisioning data 6 65_ 6 3 1 ATM Cross Connections List window 6 65_ 6 3 2 ATM Cross Connection
380. lowing table shows the view edit option of this window Parameters Buttons Description NE Name NE name of the selected NE max 30 characters VRT VB id This option menu lists all VRT VB ids of the selected type Mode This text field shows the version of the TR 08 Network Loss The Network Loss slider can be used to define the network Information loss value Possible values 0 6 The Set button is used to set the network loss value Operational The Operational State shows the VRT VB service state ob State tained from the NE through the use of the Get button Possible values Enabled Disabled The Secondary Operational State shows the secondary service state obtained from the NE The Get button retrieves the VRT VB service state AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 6 13 Service provisioning Service provisioning telephony p ee Parameters Buttons Description Command But Three buttons provide access to other windows tons Depending on the right hand side option menu provides the Add button access to different windows Logical DS1 win dow Logical DSO window Physical DS1 List This button provides access to the Physical DS1 List window Logical DSO List This button provides access to the Log ical DSO List window 6 2 1 6 Modify the VRT TR08 The VRT TRO8 window can be reached only from the VRT VB List window via Edit VRT VB button Procedure Complete the following proc
381. m MJ Major Alarm MN Minor Alarm CONDTYPE Condition type This parameter appears in the Common Block Type List Required Yes CONDTYPE is a code denoting the condition type A message reporting the clear ing of an alarm has the same condition type as the one reporting the alarm Abbreviation Meaning AIS Alarm indication signal BKUPMEMP System data memory mismatch CABLE Cable disconnect CPYMEMF Copy Memory Failed DATASYSCR Data system failed critical DATASYSMJ Data system failed major DATASYSMN Data system failed minor DBCRRPT Data memory corrupt DBMEMTRF Data memory update abort DIGRPF TR 08 major shelf alarm received EXT External IMPROPRMVL Improper removal INT Internal hardware failure INTRMVL Internal Fault or Pack Missing LOF Loss of frame LOS Loss of signal NE _ASSOC_FAILED Assoc with NE failed POLL Not responding to poll PRCDERR Procedural error PWR Power fault AEM R1 7 C 6 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 Northbound interface Northbound interface specific TL1 messages mm ee Abbreviation Meaning RINGF Ringing source input failed SFTCRRPT Software program corrupt SFTERR Software version mismatch SWFTDWNF Software download failed SYNC Synchronization input failed SYNCOOS System free running T BERL BER exceeds threshold TSTRELAY Stuck test access relay UNLATCH Pack unlatched YEL Yellow Alarm a only available via AEM SRVEFF Service effect This parameter
382. m A 11 A 6 2 2 1 Configuration of COMDAC A 11 A 6 2 2 2 Configuration of AFM A 11 A 6 2 3 AEM server configuration A 11 A 6 2 4 AEM client configuration A 11 A 6 2 5 Transport elements configuration A 11 A 6 2 6 Connection diagram A 12 AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 A I ee Contents AEM R1 7 A II Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 Data communications network DCN configuration A 1 Overview This appendix provides you with information about Data communication network DCN introduction m general definitions of terms m network element management communications m AnyMedia Element Manager management communications m Sample DCN configurations A 2 DCN introduction AEM features Communication of AEM and NE DCN 363 211 454 The AnyMedia Access System is designed to provide a full range of telephony access services like POTS ISDN and leased lines and data services The AnyMedia Element Manager 24 Channel AEM R1 7 will provide the stan dard management configuration equipment configuration fault and testing per formance and security functions capabilities to do service management monitor ing generate reports and printouts do backup and restore functions for example to improve the customer s day to day business The AEM communicates with the telephony agents by using TL1 commands and file transfer protocol FTP over TCP IP The AEM communicates with the data agents by using simple ne
383. ministrator with all information necessary to admin ister the AEM so that it can be used as a centralized management system Chapter 4 User Management Describes all actions necessary to create modify delete users user groups and domains and the handling of controlled objects Chapter 5 NE management Equipment configuration Describes the database and software management the default system configuration parameters and the provisioning and service activation the inventory management clock synchronization management and protection switching Chapter 6 Service provisioning Describes all actions necessary for provisioning both telephony and data services Chapter 7 Fault Management Maintenance Describes alarms and events how to use the Alarm Viewer how to perform tests and trouble clearing procedures Chapter 8 Performance monitoring Describes the display of performance monitoring data and traffic measure ments counts Appendix A Describes the Data Communications Network DCN configurations Appendix B Provides information about the configuration parameters AEM R1 7 Version 1 00 06 00 XIII About this document Conventions used mm ee m Appendix C Describes the TL1 Northbound Interface m Abbreviations and Acronyms Lists all abbreviations and acronyms used in this manual m Glossary Defines special terms used in this manual m Index Alphabetical index to quickly search for paragraphs in the manual which pro
384. mmarized informa tion per card type NE Inventory JESA a E a e E PECK E NICH A E Figure 5 45 NE Inventory window Parameters Buttons Description NE Name NE name of the selected NE max 30 characters AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 5 137 NE management equipment configuration Equipment configuration p See Parameters Buttons Description NE Inventory Shelf Number Slot Number Numeric field that identifies data the position of each pack Shelf Type Circuit Pack Type Mnemonic that identifies the shelf type and the pack type Possible shelf types AnyMedia AS IAT Possible values COMDAC IO_DS1 CTU IATS PROG2W POTS32 PRCOIN ISDN16_U AFM_DS3 ADSL MDSU MSC PTU ATU Apparatus Code Identifies the specific function provided by the pack Possible values COM101 FAC100 DTP101 LPS100 LPA380 LPA300 LPA350 LPU116 LPA900 LPA400 LPA400B LPA404 LPA408 LPA414 MSU100 Serial Number A 12 character alphanumeric code that identifies each pack It includes the date and place of manu facture ECI Code that corresponds to the bar coded label on the faceplate of the pack There is a one to one correspondence between CLEI and ECI codes CLEI Code assigned by Bellcore that provides information about the functionality of the pack ICC Indicates the interchangeability among packs to specify forward backward compatibility Format of the ICC is m n where m is the issue number and n
385. mon circuitry Procedure Proceed as follows to start an AP card test and view the test result Step Procedure 1 Open the Telephony Application Pack window cf Chapter 5 5 5 7 2 Use the option menu in the Test Management field to select AP Card Test and click on Apply After confirming the test execution a Warning window pops up showing the following message AP Card Test may be service affecting Do you want do continue After confirming this warning the following In Progress message pops up AP Card Test execution in progress on lt NE Name gt lt Slot ID gt lt Card Type gt 3 Wait until the AP Card Test Result window cf Figure 7 10 page 7 29 appears and view the test result AEM R1 7 7 28 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 Fault management and maintenance Test management Test result The AP Card Test Result window shows the test results of a series of self diag nostic routines for all port circuits on a specified AP plus its common circuitry AP Card Test Result Figure 7 10 The AP Card Test Result window The text fields are display only and have the following meaning Parameters Buttons Description NE Name NE name of the selected NE max 30 characters as speci fied at NE creation time Slot This field shows the slot number of the AP being used Possible values AP 1 16 Card Type Mnemonic used to identify the general type of function pro vided AP card type Possible values
386. mp Interval LOF LOS Up ES Up HBER Up RFI LOS Down ES Down HBER Down Parameters Alarms Date amp Time NE Name Index Probable Cause Sever ity Object Id Date amp Time Last Parameters ATM Performance Date amp Time NE Name IP Address Time Stamp Rcv Cells High RcvCells Low RevErroredCells Up RevErroredCells Low Parameters Autonomous Reports Date amp Time NE Name Parameters Feeders Performance Date amp Time NE Name IP Address Shelf Id Port Id Time Stamp Interval Feeder Type ES PSES UAS Parameters System Internal Events Date amp Time Object Event Type Parameters AEM R1 7 3 50 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 System management Log management Menus and func The following table provides an overview of the menus of the Log Viewer and their tions functions Table 3 37 Menus and Functions Menu Item Function File gt New Start up a new Log Viewer File gt Print gt Print Table Print out all logged items displayed in the table of the Log Viewer File gt Print gt Print Window Print a screenshot of the whole window File gt Print gt Preview Shows how it will be printed if the Print Table option is used Opens directly the Print Preview window File gt Close The selected Log Viewer window is closed Other open Log Viewer windows stay open File gt Exit Close all Log Viewer windows Viewer gt Reload Log Data Update the displayed Log Viewe
387. n E g default router to NEs etc must be available How to install SUN Solaris is described in SUN support SUN Solaris Installation Guide Assumptions For the following description it is assumed that m the hardware required to install the AEM R1 7 is prepared m the AEM R1 7 consists of a number of server and client applications The software installation may imply the installation of all these applications or only some of them JRE m the AEM R1 7 includes as part of its environment the Java Runtime Envi ronment JRE Release 1 1 7 JRE is included here free of charge for the fi nal user 2 1 1 Introduction System require This document is intended as a guide for the person s who will be responsible for ments the installation and configuration of the hardware and software required for the AEM R1 7 installation The AnyMedia distribution can be divided into two parts server side installation and client side installation Both include specific third party applications needed to run the AnyMedia successfully The server side application includes obligatory modules and optional ones which will be installed depending upon the customer needs Disk space To store the AEM R1 7 files your system must have the following amount of free disk space m AEM client 60MB m AEM server The space will depend upon the number of NEs managed by the system because of the data size The recommended size for n NEs is obtained from adding the foll
388. n q 23 Type y and press Return This package contains scripts which will be executed with super user permission during the process of installing this package Do you want to continue with the installation of lt LuTrap gt y n 24 Type y and press Return Installing AnyMedia Element Manager Trap Dispacher Release 1 7 Administration as lt LuTrap gt Installing part 1 of 1 opt lucent AnyMediaEM_R1 7 TrapDispatcher bin TrapDispatcher verifying class lt common gt Executing postinstall script Package lt LuOXNSRT gt OrbixNames Version 1 1c Run Time have been found in opt lucent OrbixNames1 1c Package lt LuOX23RT gt OrbixMT Version 2 3c02MT Run Time have been found in opt lucent OrbixMT_2 3c2 Package lt LuOSRT gt ObjectStore 5 1_SP2 Run Time have been found in opt lucent OS51_SP2 AEM R1 7 2 44 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 Software installation and commissioning Installation procedure p ee ln cannot create usr lib libos so sun 4 0 File exists ln cannot create usr lib liboscol so sun 4 0 File exists In cannot create usr lib libosqry so sun 4 0 File exists ln cannot create usr lib libosthr so sun 4 0 File exists Package lt LuRWRT gt RogueWave Tools and Threads std0130u thr0130u tls0710u tpr0112u have been found in opt lucent rw You have the installation logfile in tmp EM_Install log_2937 Installation of lt LuTrap gt was successful Performan
389. n Indicates the cable length in feed to the DSX 1 Degrade Threshold Identifies the signal degrade threshold of the physical port AEM R1 7 5 84 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 NE management equipment configuration Equipment configuration Parameters Buttons Physical Server Port Informa tion continued Description Action The Add X Connection button provides access to the IAT Subshelf window cf Chapter 5 5 5 19 page 5 87 This but ton is enabled only if a physical server port id is selected which is not cross connected Edit This button is connected with an option menu Possible values X Connection and Physical Port X Connection is enabled if the selected row is cross con nected and provides access to the IAT Subshelf window cf Chapter 5 5 5 19 page 5 87 Physical Port provides access to the AT Server Port Infor mation window cf Chapter 5 5 5 21 page 5 92 The Remove X Connection button removes the cross con nection selected in the list see above 5 5 5 18 Modify an IAT Server Procedure Complete the following procedure to modify the IAT server data Step Procedure 1 Select NE gt Mainshelf gt IAT Server in the Network Element Browser and View via the cursor menu or single click on the pack IAT Server in Shelf View window The AT Server window pops up 2 Use the option menu Slot Id to select the desired IAT If you want to then unprovision the IAT server use
390. n 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 NE management equipment configuration Contents 5 1 Overview 5 2 Overview of the controlled systems 5 2 1 Network element releases R1 2 1 5 2 1 1 MDS2 MDS2B shelf layout 5 2 1 2 Virtual remote terminals 5 2 1 3 OAM amp P interfaces 5 2 1 4 External interfaces for circuit testing 5 2 1 5 Synchronization interfaces 5 2 1 6 Plug amp play capabilities 5 2 1 7 Equipment configuration related tasks 5 2 2 Network element releases R1 2 2 and R1 7 0 5 2 2 1 DS1 regeneration AnyMedia R1 2 2 only 5 2 2 2 Pack provisioning 5 2 2 3 Subshelves management Integrated access terminal IAT AnyMedia R1 7 0 only 5 2 2 3 1 IAT provisioning model 5 2 3 Broadband applications 5 2 3 1 Data system description 5 2 3 2 Network DS3 interfaces 5 2 3 3 DS3 framing and synchronization 5 2 3 4 Broadband synchronization and timing 5 2 4 AEM R1 7 new equipment configuration features 5 2 4 1 Telephony agent narrowband 5 2 4 2 Data agent broadband 5 2 4 3 Configuration of combined tasks 5 3 Initial windows 5 3 1 Menu bar AEM R1 7 363 211 454 mi ih ro p p on ind amp p D p D ing amp m N p ma p p p il oO a fare a mere on ils ae gt o T o ba oo P oo T oo on Er A q ai o1 es ak D Version 1 00 06 00 5 I ee Contents 5 3 2 Tool bar 5 3 2 1
391. n 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 NE management equipment configuration Overview of the controlled systems p See 5 2 2 3 Subshelves management Integrated access terminal IAT AnyMedia R1 7 0 only Overview The integrated access terminal server IATS feature supports DS1 fed IATs hosted by IATS APs in the RT These terminals are fed by one or more in some cases up to eight DS1 feeders and provide up to 24 equivalent DSO services switched or non switched voice or data per feeder DS1 Up to two DS1 fa The IATS AP hosts up to two DS1 facilities using the signalling and facility data cilities link FDL services provided by the extended superframe ESF DS1 format The DS1 facilities connect to IATs via existing transmission infrastructure or via lines on a transmission network with DS1 add drop capability Supported services POTS switched and non switched voice services and data services are sup ported by the IATS Timeslots supporting voice telephony services use robbed bit signalling between the AnyMedia host and the IAT data services are supported on 64Kb clear signal timeslots NxDSO e Fusing Application Pack Application Pack Application Pack Application Pack Application Pack Application Pack Application Pack Application Pack Application Pack Application Pack Application Pack Application Pack Application Pack IAT Server Application Pack IAT Server COMDAC COMDAC
392. n Established Communication Established Synchronizing More Details This button provides access to the Synchronization Data win dow cf Chapter 5 5 6 2 3 page 5 126 Itis available only if the Administrative State of the agent is Managed AEM R1 7 5 46 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 NE management equipment configuration Equipment configuration 5 5 3 4 Modify NE Management data data agent Procedure Complete the following procedure to manage an NE data agent Step Procedure 1 Select NE in the Network Browser or in the background map and NE Management via the cursor menu The NE Management window pops up This window can also be reached from the Groups amp NEs window tab NEs by clicking on NE Management cf Chapter 5 4 3 page 5 27 If you want to then provision the NE enter or change the values for IP Ad dress or Security Id in the Provision ing Information field and press Provi sion deprovision an provisioned NE click on Deprovision in the Provision ing Information field change the administrative state use the corresponding option menu in the Provisioning Information field show edit the synchronization data click on More Details exit the window click on Close AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 5 47 NE management equipment configuration Equipment configuration p SeSe 5 5 4 Shelf View The purpose of this window is to provide a simple graph
393. n alarm causes a change to the alarm database Therefore the alarm was logged before in the action log It is possible to acknowledge an alarm that has already been ac knowledged The user identification and the new acknowledge time are registered as well overwriting the previous acknowledge data 7 2 7 Managing the clearing of alarms General The NE alarms are cleared by the NE AMS Platform alarms are cleared automat ically e g NE AEM association alarms or by a user at the user interface e g log alarms Users can only clear specific platform alarms Users cannot clear the as sociation alarms for the NE alarms When an alarm is cleared its severity is up dated and the time is registered too Clearing an alarm causes a change to the alarm database Therefore the alarm is logged beforehand in the alarms log if the user clears an alarm this will be logged in the action log if an alarm is cleared by the NE it will be logged in the action log If the raise is newer then it is a repetitive raise the alarm state is set to the raised state If the raise is older then this message is ignored the alarm state stays in the cleared state and the relevant data is updated Automatic alarm Alestanice If network and platform alarms are cleared at their source the AEM clears them af ter a variable period of time in the AEM database This period of time is set by de AEM R1 7 7 8 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 Fault management and mainte
394. n be identified PROCESSING The AEM is processing all the traps concerning configura tion changes and is updating the AEM database in accordance with the traps NOT_PROCESSING The AEM is discarding the configuration traps com ing from the data agent In this case it is possible that the AEM database and the data agent configuration data are out of synchronization 5 5 6 2 2 Alarm information synchronization Overview The data agent informs the AEM of changes in alarms the data agent has gener ated by using alarm traps Alarms can be considered independent of one of an other any alarm trap can be processed by the AEM independent of other alarm traps The data agent can not assure that the AEM has received each of the alarm traps because the AEM does not confirm receipt of the traps The AEM periodically polls the data agent in order to retrieve all the alarms reported by the data agent and to update the AEM database to reflect the current state of the alarms in the data agent This process is called an alarm synchronization process This process is launched in a scheduled way as well as on user demand During the process the data agent state changes from COMM_ESTABLISHED to COMM_ESTABLISHED_SYNCHRONIZING Two data agent alarm processing states can be considered m PROCESSING The AEM is processing all the alarm traps coming from the data agent and is updating the AEM database in accordance with the traps The AEM alarm database i
395. n can carry ADSL traffic as well as the POTS signal ADSL lite interface The ADSL lite interface is a twisted 2 wire subscriber interface according to ITU T G 992 2 It provides voice and data transmission using DMT technology The con nection can carry ADSL traffic as well as the POTS signal User interfaces ADSL customer premise equipment is provided by an outside vendor for the Any Media Access System The following end user interfaces are available m 10BaseT Ethernet for LAN interface applications single or multiple users m Universal serial bus 5 USB m PC network interface card NIC The ADSL transmission is based on ANSI T1 413 Issue 2 In later releases the system supports ADSL transmission based on ADSL lite ATM traffic The AFM pack AFMDSS3 interfaces up to x ADSL APs which may be installed in the AnyMedia mainshelf x is 15 for a FAST shelf and 19 for a BAlU shelf ATM traffic multiplexed to and from the ADSL APs is interfaced to the ATM network via an DS3 link The DS3 link can connect the ATM switch directly to the transmission network 5 2 3 2 Network DS3 interfaces DS3 connections The AFM DS3 feeder interface on the AFM has the following connections m Two DS3 ports Port 1 is used to interface toward the ATM network Port 2 is used to connect to any other AnyMedia Mainshelf that may be daisy chained AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 5 11 NE management equipment configuration Overview of the con
396. n field The Apparatus Code is related to a certain card LPA400B whereas the Provisioned Pack Type is related to a family of cards ADSL Operational The option menu Administrative State provides the possi State ble states that can be used Locked Unlocked The field Service State shows the state of the AFM feeder obtained on demand by the user Possible values Enabled Disabled Fault Condition NE R1 4 Under Reboot Under testing Under SW Download NE R1 4 Dormant NE R1 4 The Get button can be used to update the display of the Op erational State AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 5 105 NE management equipment configuration Equipment configuration ee Parameters Buttons Drop Informa tion Description A table shows the ADSL drops and the created cross con nections The table is sorted by ADSL drops m Physical Drop Id Identifies the ADSL drop within the AP Administrative State Shows the current state of the drop Possible values Locked Unlocked ATM Cross Connections Indicates the number of created cross connections The Edit Drop button provides access to the ADSL Drop window It is enabled if a drop is selected in the table above The ATM Cross Connections button provides access to the ATM Cross Connection window It is enabled if a drop is se lected in the table above The Apply button can be used to start the Port BIST Test or the Corrupted CRC Test The desired test i
397. n process to upload the configuration data and to start processing traps 2 Is the alarm now cleared Yes O K No Call Lucent Technologies Technical Support AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 7 47 Fault management and maintenance Alarms mm ee 7 5 5 9 CX_CONN_NOT_VISIBLE Meaning Some cross connections in the AFM are not visible Abbreviation CX_CONN_NOT_VISIBLE Severity Minor Service affecting No Effects There are cross connections in the data agent which cannot be managed by the AEM Possible cause s There are cross connections in the AFM associated to non provisioned ports This kind of cross connections are ignored by the AEM upload procedure and therefore they are not visible in the AEM Corrective actions Proceed as follows to clear the alarm Step Procedure 1 Use the CIT or the MIB browser to provision the needed APs or to remove the affected cross connections 2 Request a resynchronization after AP provisioning 7 5 5 10 INVALID_MIB_IDENTIFIER Meaning The data agent to communicate with is not a valid data agent Abbreviation INVALID_MIB_IDENTIFIER Severity Critical Service affecting No Effects It is not possible to start the communication with the data agent Possible cause s The sysObjectld MIB variable retrieved from the data agent is not valid Corrective actions Proceed as follows to clear the alarm Step Procedure 1 Check the IP address of the data agent Yes Continue with
398. n to the user Overview Whenever incorrect data out of range values inappropriate value types etc is entered at the graphical user interface GUI a new alarm occurs or the status of any alarm changes to raised again an alarm message is reported to the AEM The alarms are indicated if defined visually Visual alarm indi The occurrence of a new alarm of a defined severity default value critical is vis cation ually indicated in different ways a Notification icon displayed in the AEM access bar This icon consists of a flag If new alarms are received the flag is raised and an audible signal is issued If the user clicks on the icon the flag goes down m Via the Network Browser The Network Browser displays all groups and NEs created in the AEM by the use of icons cf Figure 7 8 page 7 26 The icons change their color to reflect the highest severity alarm critical major minor indeterminate or warning alarms The highest severity alarm of a group is the highest severity alarm of all the alarms of its child groups and NEs The alarm status color is in accordance with the alarm viewer color set red for critical and major yellow for minor white for indeterminate and warning Select Group in the Network Browser and Alarm Monitoring in the cursor menu to look at the group specific alarms Select NE in the Network Browser and Alarm Monitoring in the cur sor menu to look at the NE specific alarms AEM R1 7 36
399. nably cur rent backup files from removable media to a working directory 3 6 1 Basics on backups and AEM databases Definitions The following table gives definitions of terms used in this chapter Table 3 26 Definitions Term Meaning Backup process of copying file systems to removable media Such as tape to safeguard against loss damage or corruption Archive process of copying file systems to removable media Such as tape and deleting the original files once they have been backed up Restore process of copying backup files from removable media to a work ing directory replacing the original files which could have been damaged Full Backup copies a complete file system or directory Incremental copies new files and files that have changed since a previous Backup backup The incremental backups are usually given a dump level which determines which files are backed up A certain level incre mental backup will save all the new or changed files since the last backup with a lower level On line backups performed on user demand Backup Off line backups performed automatically via any scheduling mecha Backup nisms e g cron file Backup types There are three different backup types The following list shows their differences and advantages m Full backup A full backup copies a complete file system or directory e g all AEM data This method requires large numbers of backup tapes that take a long time to write an
400. nal If not present default value is taken Possible values 1 to Default value 3 AM platformAlarmTablePath AM configuration file location relative to Any media path It contains the static information of the platform alarms It is MANDATORY It should be present in this file Default value AM cfg PlatformAlarmTable cfg gt NOTE All CM variables in this file are mandatory and must be defined here AEM R1 7 B 2 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 Configuration parameters Overview mm ee Name Description CM directoryNVDS NVDS files location This files store informa tion in such a way as to survive indefinite peri ods of total power failure The current values for all provisionable parameters are stored in the NVDS directory and hence are the param eter values that will be used on subsequent NE power up Default value CM nefiles NVDS gt NOTE The path is relative to the AnyMedia in stallation path CM directoryNVPS NVPS files location It keeps software program data It resides in the NE lt COMDAC gt Default value CM nefiles NVPS gt NOTE The path is relative to the AnyMedia in stallation path CM FTPtimeOut Time out in seconds for all FTP commands The FTP command is aborted if there is no progress of file transfer during the interval Possible values 90 to 900 seconds Default value 300 CM maxTriesCounter Maximum number of SNMP PDUs retransmis sions w
401. nance Alarm management p Se fault to 3 days and can be configured by the user via the system variable AM min imumClearPeriod in the file ANYMEDIAPATH cfg AnyMediaEM cfg 7 2 8 Alarm data synchronization The AMS is responsible for the performance of NE alarm synchronization To ac complish this the AMS requests all the current alarms normal and environment of the NE that is being synchronized Once the AMS has received these alarms it compares them with the alarms stored in the AEM alarm database At the end of the synchronization the alarms stored in the alarm database must be the same as the alarms retrieved from the NE AMS Only one synchronization per NE can be performed at the same time The AMS rejects any synchronization request for the same NE if the first one has still not finished 7 2 9 AEM alarm log handling If the user wants to know the different states throughout the alarm life the user will have to see the Log System cf Chapter 3 7 page 3 46 in which all alarm changes are stored Three types of logs are used The AMS logs the following situations m Actions log periodical database deletion of cleared alarm s start and end alarm s synchronization start and end periodical deletion of cleared alarms manual clear manual acknowledge The user identification that per forms these actions is also logged automatically clear and acknowledgement m System internal events log exce
402. ndow AEM Recovery button The manual AEM recovery request is ignored if none of the packages with administrative state ON has the operational state out of service OOS Package DMG and The AEM administrator can shutdown from the GUI packages optional DMGs and process shutdown processes AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 3 17 System management System administration p Se AEM shutdown An AEM shutdown terminates all server applications and all graphical user inter faces running at the moment This command can be issued via the System Ad ministration window AEM Shutdown button or the command line CLEAN 3 4 1 3 Scaling Several NEs and us The number of users the AEM supports and the number of NEs being managed is ers flexible Several processes The scaling feature is provided by the existence of several DMGs several module groups in each DMG and several processes per module which allow the load dis tribution The concept of several DMGs is used to distribute the set of NEs into dif ferent disjoint subsets of NEs This process is automatically done by the AEM However the AEM R1 7 is not yet distributed among several hosts 3 4 1 4 Load balancing General This functionality of the AEM is provided by different types of processes Depend ing on the AEM workload i e the activity due to user requests and NE AEM com munication level less or more processing has to be done by each type of process Administrator
403. nds allows cancellation of commands Note that Cancel does not imply undo If the user tries to close the window and the last command executed has not fin ished yet they will be informed Warning window that there are still jobs running You have running jobs Do you want to continue The user has to decide whether to continue or wait until the job is finished Note that closing the window does not imply cancelling the action Additional mes The following can be displayed in the message area sages m Feedback see above AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 5 19 NE management equipment configuration Initial windows ee m Error messages Any time a wrong data is entered in the GUI out of range values inappropri ate value types etc an error message indicates the nature of the error The checking of wrong data is performed when the Apply or Ok button is clicked m Failed window opening m Failed window refresh For windows without status bar the error message will be shown by means of a warning window This window will be automatically closed after a time default 10 seconds which is configurable If the error cannot be identified a general error message recorded in a catalog will be presented e g Last Operation or Data request could not execute 5 3 5 Cursor menu Menu at the cursor Some objects in windows have a menu associated with them This menu will pop position up at the cursor position when the right mo
404. ned on demand by the user Possible values Enabled Disabled Testing Unknown Dor mant The Get button can be used to update the display of the Op erational State PM Data This button provides access to the AFM Feeder PM Data window PM Thresholds This button provides access to the AFM Feeder PM Threshold window AEM R1 7 5 100 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 NE management equipment configuration Equipment configuration 5 5 5 26 Modify an AFM feeder data applica tion This window is reached from the AFM window cf Chapter 5 5 5 23 page 5 94 by pressing the Edit button Procedure Complete the following procedure to modify an AFM feeder Step Procedure 1 Use the option menu Feeder Port to select the desired port If you want to then change the feeder parameters use the option menus and check boxes to change the corresponding parame ters get the performance monitoring data click on PM Data The AFM Perform ance Monitoring window pops up cf Chapter 8 3 1 modify the performance monitoring click on PM Thresholds The AFM thresholds Feeder PM Threshold window pops up cf Chapter 5 5 5 27 page 5 102 change the administrative state use the option menu Administrative State of Second Feeder gt NOTE The communication with daisy gt NOTE chained NEs can be lost when When changing from Unlocked changing from Unlocked to to Locked the following warning Locked messages a
405. ng Installation procedure p See Successfully created link from etc rc2 d K80ostore4 to etc rc2 d S80ostore4 Note that you must manually remove or edit existing ObjectStore R3 scripts in etc rc2 d in some situations To run only R4 clients or R3 file database clients remove all R3 scripts in etc rc2 d To run all R4 clients and R3 clients including R3 rawfs clients edit existing R3 scripts in etce rc2 d to run only the R3 Directory Manager but not the R3 Server To run both R3 and R4 clients with separate R3 and R4 Servers see the documentation on editing your OS_ROOTDIR etc ports file This script will now verify the installation The ObjectStore Server daemon process is accessible Schema databases are accessible The cache manager launcher for release 4 opt lucent OS51_SP2 ostore lib oscminit has correct modes and ownership ObjectStore configuration completed Packages to install LuSysAdm LuAM LuBack LuFiBrow LuNER LuNBI LuLogg LuPerf LuPerCo LuNeED LuSec LuShelf LuSysED LuTrap LuPerTr LuTeSc System Adminis Processing package instance lt LuSysAdm gt from tration installation lt home bldr17 LOAD_36 1 1 build lucent AnyMediaEMR1 7 gt AnyMedia Element Manager System Administration Release 1 7 Administration sparc LuSysAdm_36_1 1 kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkxkxkk AnyMedia Element Manager c 1999 Lucent Technologies kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk kkkkkxkk A
406. ng message is displayed Actual lt DATABASE TYPE gt is not present or ObjectStore copy operation failed The AnyMedia NB EM system state cannot be recovered if a cancellation is requested Do you want to continue y n Type y and press Enter to continue with the restore procedure If you type n the restore command stops with an error message no data are restored and the sys AEM R1 7 3 42 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 System management Backup and restore mm ee tem will not work unless a correct restore is performed When the original data bases are present the message above is not displayed Additional incre While the different databases are restored certain information is displayed on the mental backups screen Then the restoration tool asks whether additional databases should be re stored Do you wish to restore from any additional incremental backups yes no Type no and press Enter After that the execution of the restore tool finishes and the restoration is complete 3 6 3 3 3 Incremental restoration procedure Before a certain incremental backup can be restored the previous full backups and possibly some previous incremental backups must be restored The procedure to restore an incremental backup is the same as the above de scribed procedure for a full backup except for the last Additional Incremental Backups step In that step the restore tool asks for a confirmation that all needed full backups which are a
407. ng table shows the view edit options of the IAT Server Port Information window Parameters Buttons Description Action NE Name NE name of the selected NE max 30 characters Port Informa Physical Server Port Id Identifies the port within the AP tion Equalization This slider can be used to define the cable length in feed to the DSX 1 Possible values O 655 Degrade Threshold This slider can be used to define the signal degrade threshold of the physical port Possible values 107 104 Loopback This field displays the current loopback state clear or set This state can be changed via the label button on the right hand side Label This button is used to set or clear the physical DS1 loopback It is labeled Set if the current loopback state is clear and vice versa Command But The OK button is used to confirm the changes and to leave tons the window The AT Server window is visible again The Apply button is used to confirm the changes AEM R1 7 5 92 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 NE management equipment configuration Equipment configuration p See 5 5 5 22 Configure an IAT server port The AT Server Port Information window can be reached only from the IAT Server window cf Chapter 5 5 5 17 page 5 83 by clicking on Edit Physical Port but Procedure tom If you want to then change the value of the cable length change the degrade threshold change the loopbac
408. ng the safety instruction and the measures that can be taken to minimize the danger In some safety instructions a warning symbol is placed underneath the signal word Classification There are five classes of safety instructions Danger Warning Caution Im portant and Notice The classification is shown in the following table DANGER Serious injury is definite or likely WARNING Serious injury is possible CAUTION Minor injury is definite likely or possible or material damage to the product or in the product environment is definite or likely IMPORTANT Material damage to the product or in the product environment is possible NOTICE A fault i e considerable impairment to operation will be caused or may be caused AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 XVII About this document Related documentation 7 Related documentation Document List The following is related documentation for the AEM and for additional compo nents Table 1 List of documents CIC ordering Component Manual type Comcode number AnyMedia Access System Applications Planning and 108298639 363 211 101 Ordering Guide APOG AnyMedia Access System Installation Manual IM 108298654 363 211 102 AnyMedia Access System Commands and Procedures 108361155 363 211 103 AnyMedia Access System User Service Manual USM 108543380 363 211 115 Vol 2 Broadband Services Issue 2 for R1 4 AEM R1 7 Functional Description 363 211 453 a
409. nitiate an AEM press AEM Shutdown and confirm the The AEM is shut down Shutdown shutdown in the warning window which pops up initiate an AEM Re press AEM Recovery The AEM recovery starts covery close the System select File gt Exit or press Close The System Administration window is Administration win closed dows AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 3 19 System management System administration U SeSe 3 4 3 2 Administration of packages Overview The Package tab in the System Administration window allows for start up and shutdown of packages For each displayed package the contained DMGs can be viewed Package informa The table in the Package tab displays the following information tion Table3 9 Package information Table entry Meaning Name The internally assigned name of the package Administrative State The administrative state of the package Possible values ON if the package is up OFF otherwise The Administrative State is changed whenever a startup or shutdown command is issued Operational State The operational state of the package displayed when the Administrative State is ON only Possible values IS if the package is in service OOS if it is out of service TRANSITORY otherwise AEM R1 7 3 20 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 System management System administration Figure 3 9 System Administration window Packages Actions in Package The following table lists all a
410. nownPackType unknown ap 1 1 16 pack detected subap 1 8 1 8 DUP_PACK_MISMATCH incompatible Major yes ap 1 1 16 illegal pack in pack type Minor no subap 1 8 1 8 AP slot IMPROPRMVL improper re Major yes ap 1 1 16 missing pack in moval Minor no subap 1 8 1 8 AP slot amasAFMPackRe AP has been Minor yes ap 1 1 16 movedAlarmCS removed subap 1 8 1 8 DUP_PACK_RMVL pack removal Major yes ap 1 1 16 missing pack in Minor no subap 1 8 1 8 AP slot AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 7 55 Fault management and maintenance Alarms mm ee Table 7 13 Correlated alarms Probable Cause Summary Severity Object_Id Description PRCDERR mismatch of Critical subsh 1 8 logical sub shelf number amasSubShelfAssocia association Major subsh 1 8 tionMismatchAlarm mismatch re ported DUP_SUBSHELF_MISM incompatible Critical subsh 1 8 illegal subshelf ATCH subshelf type type in parent slot AEM R1 7 7 56 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 Performance monitoring Contents 8 1 Overview 82 ADSL performance monitoring data 8 2 1 ADSL Performance Monitoring Data window 8 2 2 Modify the ADSL performance monitoring 8 3 AFM feeder performance monitoring 8 3 1 AFM Performance Monitoring window 8 3 2 Modify the AFM performance monitoring 8 4 ATM traffic monitoring 8 4 1 ATM Traffic Monitoring window 8 4 2 Modify the ATM traffic monitorin
411. nstall script You have the installation logfile in tmp EM_Install_LuLUMRT log Installation of lt LuLUMRT gt was successful AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 2 11 Software installation and commissioning Installation procedure ee RogueWave 1 0 7 amp Processing package instance lt LuRWRT gt from 1 1 2 installation lt home bldr17 LOAD_36 1 1 build lucent AnyMediaEMR1 7 gt RogueWave Libraries Runtimes for AnyMedia EM R1 7 sparc std0130u thr0130u t1s0710u tpr0112u OK No previous package LuRWRT have been found Filesystem kbytes used avail capacity Mounted on dev dsk c0t0d0s0 143927 36990 92545 29 dev dsk c0t0d0s4 625262 401569 167420 71 usr dev dsk c0t0d0s3 96455 11256 75554 13 var dev dsk c0t0d0s6 6591133 4294968 2230254 66 homelocal dev dsk c0t0d0s5 240399 8597 207763 4 var cache swap 1202064 48 1202016 1 tmp masstcl export1 bld 2 bldr17 51014048 49185848 1488120 98 home bldr17 masstc1 export1 b1d 2 syi_pl 51014048 49185848 1488120 98 home syi_pl Enter install directory opt lucent rw q 9 Type a valid path where the package files must be placed and press Re turn Or press Return to accept the default path Select owner and group for package files NBR USER GROUP 1 halt other 2 root other 3 smtp root 4 verl staff Enter selection q 10 Type A and press Return User verl and Group staff have been selected Using lt gt as the package base directory
412. nstallation CopyRight c 2000 Lucent Technologies Inc All Rights Reserved Pre requisites 1 Before attempting to install the applica tion please read the readme txt file 2 AnyMedia EM R1 7 runs on SUN SPARC Solaris 2 computers running Solaris 2 6 plus security and Y2000 and packs 105490 07 105568 13 105210 19 106040 12 105633 21 106409 01 105181 15 105669 07 105284 25 patches recom mended by SUN and 106255 01 patch 3 TCP ports The following ports MUST be available in order to succesfully run the AnyMedia EM 1570 Orbix daemon uses the TCP port 1570 in order to wait for incoming connections that use AEM R1 7 2 8 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 Software installation and commissioning Installation procedure p Vossss the Orbix protocol 1591 to 1641 As Corba servers are activated by the Orbix daemon they are assigned a port so that clients can communicate with it It is essential that these ports are not used by any process on the SAME SUBNET DOMAIN 4 The install_AMEM script runs on K shell lt ksh gt environment 5 At least the system environment variable PATH MUST include the paths usr bin usr sbin and usr ucb for instance export PATH SPATH usr bin usr sbin usr ucb 6 The time zone MUST be the same for the Any Media Client lt GUI gt LUMOS and Network Element This parameter is needed for installing the Any Media Client kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Do
413. nt NE equipment configuration facilities provided by the AEM cover the operations that control and provision the NE including the following tasks a Configuration specific equipment data which involves m NE creation and deletion m Pack management COMDAC management 1l0_DS1s management physical feeder management CTU management AFM management AP management m Protection management m Slot alarming configuration m Date amp time management m NE security configuration m Timing synchronization provisioning m Maintaining a local copy of the NE inventory which includes m Initializing the local copy when an NE is added to the AEM m Maintaining the local copy of equipment changes m Synchronizing the local copy with the equipment data maintained by the NE and reporting differences m Inventory management system activity of collecting updating and re porting data on AnyMedia Access System equipment and system status including providing users with access to the entire equipment information whether locally maintained or not NE memory administration this means the management of the nonvola tile data storage NVDS of the AnyMedia Access System for backup and restore NE software administration this involves tasks to manage the nonvola tile program storage NVPS of the AnyMedia Access System for software download copying the NVPS between controller packs etc MDS2 MDS2B management which in th
414. nter a new user group name in the User Group Name field this is man datory 3 to 30 characters and extra information in the Description field this is optional 0 to 60 characters Any characters are allowed 6 Select one or more users that shall belong to the new user group in the Users Not Assigned field and click Add gt gt gt NOTE To create user see Chapter 4 2 1 page 4 3 7 Change to tab Domains The window changes its display as shown be low AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 4 15 User management User groups group test groug Domains Domains Domain 1 Domain 2 Domain 3 Figure 4 14 User Group Profile window tab Domains 8 Select one or more domains the user group shall has access to in the Do mains Not Assigned field and click Add gt gt gt NOTE If access permission to a domain is granted to a user group that permis sion will be automatically granted for each controlled object within that do main gt NOTE To create domains see Chapter 4 3 1 page 4 8 For carrying out the next three steps 10 11 and 12 please pay attention to Table 4 1 It provides an overview about the access permissions the user groups shall have Table 4 1 Assignment of user groups to applications tasks Application Task User Group System Process Management Administrator Administration User Administration Access Policy Administrator amp Profiling
415. ntrols a specific device such as a cartridge tape DAT Distribution Port The circuitry that provides narrowband access i e up to the 1 544 Mbps DS1 rate to a single network interface over one 2 or 4 wire metallic facility and converts between the format seen by this network interface e g analog voice frequency ISDN U interface etc and the internal format i e 4 Mbps timeslots Distribution Ports are con tained in Application Packs Channel Units for the AnyMedia Access System A maximum of 32 Distribution Ports are supported on POTS COIN Application Packs APs and a maximum of 16 Distribution Ports are supported on ISDN APs Download The process of moving information from a server to a client at the request of a client according to client server par adigm Expected applications of this capability are database retrievals Drop This comprises the wire to the customer and customer premises equipment CPE In some documents this is also called equipment DS1 ports DS1 circuits are used to provide the AnyMedia Access System shelf virtual remote terminal VRT or INA Virtual Bank feeder facilities and are physically located on the IO_DS1 circuit packs in the NE shelf DU Development Unit E EAS Element Access Server This is a CORBA server developed by Lumos Technologies which provides an interface between TL1 messages and CORBA methods EM Application A group of one or more modules that offers related functionality
416. nts between AEM users and AEM user groups m create modify delete access assignments between AEM user groups and applications tasks m create modify delete access assignments between AEM user groups and domains m modify assignments between domains and controlled objects AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 4 17 User management User groups ee Domain Management provides the functionality to m modify assignments between domains and controlled objects Autonomous Reports provides the functionality to m view logs od log types autonomous reports alarm and performance logs Groups and NEs Configuration provides the functionality to m create modify delete NEs m create modify delete groups of NEs 9 Change to tab Applications amp Tasks The window changes its display as shown below orun test groug Applications Applications System Administration User Administration amp Profiling Log Viewer Alam Viewer Grounc and MEc Mananaman t Figure 4 15 User Group Profile window tab Applications amp Tasks 10 Select one or more applications the user group shall has access to in the Applications Not Assigned field and click Add gt gt The corresponding tasks are displayed for selection 11 Select one or more tasks the user group shall has access to in the Tasks Not Assigned field and click Add gt gt 12 Click OK or Apply to save the settings the sy
417. o control NEs with the following configuration shelf configuration m Telephony only configuration m Data only configuration m Mixed telephony and data configuration AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 5 1 NE management equipment configuration Overview of the controlled systems e nee 5 2 1 Network element releases R1 2 1 The architecture of the AnyMedia Access Systems is a single shelf with the follow ing main components as shown in Figure 5 1 page 5 3 Packs m Upto6 O_DS1 packs m Upto two common data and control COMDAC packs m One craft test unit CTU pack m Upto 16 application packs APs 32 line 2WCF programmable PROG2W POTS 32 512 or PROG32 32 line 2WCF POTS only POTS32 24 line 2W programmable special Coin PRCOIN or PROG1_CF 16 line ANSI ISDN ISDN AP or SDN16_u AFMDS3 The access feeder multiplexer card provides a DS3 ATM interface for ADSL traffic data application The AFMDS3 is inserted in slot 16 FAST shelf or slot 0 BAIU shelf ADSL The ADSL packs provide four eight ADSL subscriber line ter minations each LPA400 LPA408 data application Metallic distribution server units MDSUs The AnyMedia Access System supports the MDS2 and MDS2B shelves Chapter 5 2 1 1 page 5 3 for installation of subscriber loop carrier SLC channel units Only narrowband transmission is planned for these shelves They are connected via an electrical in terface through
418. o direct the input focus to a defined window Click on a position within the window or place the cursor on the window The window shown in Figure 3 3 page 3 7 labels the different window controls which allow the user to change the aspect of the window on the screen and the process represented by the window AEM R1 7 3 6 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 System management General information on keyboard Window menu button Title bar Minimize button Maximize button Text Editor unnamed File Edit Search Format Menu bar Slider Window frame with Slider Horizontal scroll bar Vertical scroll bar resize corners Figure 3 3 Specimen window and window controls The individual window controls shown in Figure 3 3 are Figure 3 4 Controls in a window Window part Function Window frame The frame delimits the window on the screen and its colour indicates whether this with resize cor window contains the input focus Drag the frame to shift and resize the window By ners dragging the window corners the window size may be modified to both limiting sides at the same time Title bar The title bar informs you about the function of the window Drag the title bar to shift the window on the screen Minimize button If you click on the minimize button the window will be displayed in its minimum size i e it will appear as an icon on the screen though the process represented by the window will continue running AEM R1
419. o the system please pay attention to the following remarks m The AEM administrator must have a system login m The user must be created via OS m The AEM administrator should know the login ID of the user to be created and the group the user shall belong to Procedure Complete the following procedure to add a new user Step Procedure 1 Login as AEM administrator and start the AEM access bar as described in Chapter 3 2 1 The access bar will be shown 2 Select the User Administration amp Profiling icon The User Administration amp Profiling window pops up showing the Users Table Login Name User Name Description vert Default EM Administrator user useri nkg Figure 4 2 User Administration amp Profiling window Users table 3 Click New The User Profile window pops up AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 4 3 User management User User Profile Login Name User Name Description User Status Number of sessions opened User Groups Not Assigned User Groups Assigned Monitoring Figure 4 3 User Profile window 4 Enter a new login name in the Login Name field this is mandatory 3 to 12 characters and extra information like last name first name email etc in the User Name Description field this is optional 0 to 60 characters Any characters are allowed 5 Select one or more user groups the user shall belong to in the User Groups Not Assigned field and
420. object Date in a window e g windows text field check box spin box etc 6 General safety information This section lists the safety information needed for the AnyMedia Access System for system turn up after installation has been completed operating provisioning and maintaining the system 6 1 General notes on safety This system has been developed in line with the present state of the art and fulfils the current national and international safety requirements It is provided with a high degree of operational safety resulting from many years of development expe rience and continuous stringent quality checks in our company The system is safe in normal operation There are however some potential sources of danger that cannot be completely eliminated In particular these arise during the m opening of housings or equipment covers manipulation of any kind within the equipment even if it has been discon nected from the power supply m disconnection of optical or electrical connections through possible contact with m live parts m laser light AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 XV About this document General safety information m hot surfaces m sharp edges or m devices sensitive to electrostatic discharge 6 2 General safety requirements XVI Version 1 00 In order to keep the technically unavoidable residual risk to a minimum it is imper ative to observe the following rules 06 00 Installati
421. ocedure to initiate data restore from a data agent Step Procedure 1 Select NE in the Network Element Browser and Restore gt Data via cur sor menu The AFM NVDS Restore window pops up AFM NVDS Restore Figure 5 58 AFM NVDS Restore window 2 Click on the Browse button to open the File Browser window cf Chapter 5 5 15 5 page 5 168 to select the directory example of the file structure NE Files NVDS lt NE_Name gt AFM an the file name of the re store file 3 Click on OK to confirm The chosen file name appears in the field Filename in the AFM NVDS Restore window 4 Click on Apply this command button is available only after having se lected the file name to start the restore A Warning window pops up NVDS Restore may be service affecting and the command can not be cancelled while the execution Continue anyway 5 Press Yes to confirm this message An n Progress window pops up AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 5 167 NE management equipment configuration Equipment configuration ee NVDS restore on lt NE Name gt in progress After finishing the backup process successfully the In Progress window disappears 6 Press Close to exit the AFM Restore window 5 5 15 5 File Browser window This window is composed of a list where all files and or subdirectories are shown included in the selected directory The File Browser can be launched from m the Software Download windows m the Backup windows
422. ock Type List Required Yes Alarm Type Use alarm type instead of condition type for RTRV ALM ENV Abbreviation Meaning ACF AC Loss AC Input Power Failure BD Battery on Discharge FAN Fan Unit Failed MISC1 Miscellaneous 1 MISC2 Miscellaneous 2 MISC3 Miscellaneous 3 MISC4 Miscellaneous 4 MISC5 Miscellaneous 5 MISC6 Miscellaneous 6 MISC7 Miscellaneous 7 MISC8 Miscellaneous 8 MJF Fuse Major MNF Fuse Minor NONE None PMJ Power Major PMN Power Minor PWR One of the 48V power feeds failed TAMPER Intrusion Door Open AEM R1 7 C 18 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 Northbound interface Northbound interface specific TL1 messages mm ee OCRDAT Occurrence date This parameter appears in the Common Block Type Date Required Yes This indicates the date of the condition being reported and has the format YY MM DD year month day 70 lt yy lt 99 maps to 1970 through 1999 respec tively 00 lt yy lt 37 maps to 2000 through 2037 respectively OCRTM Occurrence time This parameter appears in the Common Block Type Time Required Yes This indicates the time of the condition being reported and has the format HH MM SS hours minutes seconds ALMMSG Alarm message This parameter appears in the Common Block Type String Required Yes Min chars 1 Max chars 40 Alarm Message Use alarm message instead of condition description Refer to the Correlation Tables for the default environmental alarm
423. of the first four default profiles This button is used to confirm the changes The window re mains open for further use Apply AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 5 117 NE management equipment configuration Equipment configuration p e 5 5 5 34 Modify the ADSL transmission pro file data application Procedure Complete the following procedure to create modify remove a transmission profile Step Procedure 1 Select NE in the Network Element Browser and Profiles gt ADSL Trans mission via the cursor menu The ADSL Transmission Profile window pops up This window can also be reached from the ADSL Drop window cf Chapter 5 5 5 31 page 5 109 by pressing the Edit button for transmis sion profile If you want to then modify a transmission profile use the option menu Profile to select the desired profile edit the parameters in the fields Profile Data and Profile Data Option Rate and click on Apply to confirm not possible for the four default pro files create a new transmission profile use the option menu Profile to select NEW use the option menu Profile Pattern to select an available profile as an example define the parameters in the fields Profile Data and Profile Data Option Rate and click on Apply to confirm remove a transmission profile use the option menu Profile to select not possible for the four default pro the desired profile and press Remove files gt
424. of lt LuOX23RT gt y n 15 Type y and press Return Installing Orbix 2 3c02 Runtime for AnyMedia EM R1 7 as lt LuOX23RT gt Installing part 1 of 1 AEM R1 7 2 14 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 Software installation and commissioning Installation procedure p Se lt files list gt verifying class lt none gt lt files list gt verifying class lt bin gt lt files list gt verifying class lt cfg gt lt files list gt verifying class lt lib gt Executing postinstall script You have the installation logfile in tmp EM_Install_LuOX23RT log Installation of lt LuOX23RT gt was successful OrbixNames 1 1c Processing package instance lt LuOXNS gt from installation lt home bldr17 LOAD_36 1 1 build lucent AnyMediaEMR1 7 gt OrbixNames 1 1c Runtime for AnyMedia EM R1 7 sparc solaris Version 1 1c Run Time OK No previous package LuOXNSRT have been found Package lt LuOX23RT gt OrbixMT Version 2 3c02MT Run Time have been found in opt lucent OrbixMT_2 3c2 Here is a list of your partitions and the free space in each of them Filesystem kbytes used avail capacity Mounted on dev dsk c0t0d0s0 143927 36990 92545 29 dev dsk c0t0d0s4 625262 401569 167420 71 usr dev dsk c0t0d0s3 96455 11326 75484 14 var dev dsk c0t0d0s6 6591133 4355134 2170088 67 homelocal dev dsk c0t0d0s5 240399 8597 207763 4 var cache swap 1201416 64 1201352 1 tmp masstc1 export1
425. of a package 3 26 3 4 5 Editing distributed module groups 3 27 3 4 6 Editing module groups 3 28 3 4 7 Contents of packages and distributed module groups 3 31 3 5 Print out reports 3 34 3 5 1 Page Setup dialog 3 34 3 5 2 Print dialog 3 35 3 5 3 Preview Frame dialog 3 36_ 3 6 Backup and restore 3 38 3 6 1 Basics on backups and AEM databases 3 38 3 6 2 Commands for backup archive and restore 3 39 3 6 3 Backup archive and restore procedures 3 41 3 6 4 Examples for backup schedules 3 43 3 7 Log management 3 46_ 3 7 1 Different log types 3 46_ 3 7 2 Configuration of logs 3 46 3 7 3 Log Viewer window 3 47 3 8 Disaster recovery 3 53 FE 4 User management 4 1 4 1 Introduction 4 1 4 2 User 4 3 4 2 1 Create user 4 3 4 2 2 Modify user 4 5 4 2 3 Delete user 4 7 4 3 Domains 4 8 4 3 1 Create domains 4 8 4 3 2 Modify domains 4 10 4 3 3 Delete domains 4 12 AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 V ee Contents 4 4 User groups 4 14 4 4 1 Create user groups 4 14 4 4 2 Modify user groups 4 19 4 4 3 Delete user groups 4 23 4 5 Controlled objects 4 25 4 5 1 Modify controlled objects 4 25 ee 5 NE management equipment configuration 5 1 5 1 Overview 1 5 2 Overview of the controlled systems 5 1 5 2 1 Network element releases R1 2 1 5 2 5 2 2 Network element releases R1 2 2 and R1 7 0 5 8 5 2 3 Broadband applications 5 11 5 2 4 AEM R1 7 new equipment configuration features 513 5 3 Initial windows 5 15 5 3 1 Menu bar 5 16 5 3 2 Tool bar
426. of all ADSL drops within the NE AEM R1 7 8 4 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 Performance monitoring ADSL performance monitoring data 8 2 2 Modify the ADSL performance moni toring Procedure Complete the following procedure to modify the ADSL performance monitoring Step Procedure 1 Select NE in the Network Element Browser and Performance gt ADSL via the cursor menu or click on the ADSL PM Data button in the ADSL Drop window The ADSL Performance Monitoring Data window pops up 2 Use the option menus Physical Drop Id to select the desired ADSL drop 3 Use the check box Log Performance Data to define whether the monitor ing data should be logged or not If you want to then retrieve the performance monitoring click on Get data restart the monitoring data counter for click on Reset Counts the selected drop restart the monitoring data counters for click on Reset ALL Drops Counts all drops within the NE exit the window click on Close AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 8 5 Performance monitoring AFM feeder performance monitoring 8 3 AFM feeder performance monitoring The AFM feeder performance monitoring consists of retrieving displaying provi sioning and storing DS3 E3 performance measurements detected by the AFM The AEM is able to retrieve the DS3 E3 performance monitoring counts from the NE The interval data are retrieved and stored every 15 minutes the day data
427. on This variables defines if the AnyMedia ap plication is being used either in the NAR market true or in the international market false Default value true Groups amp NEs set The RELEASE_MAP_X options define a list of key value pairs used to map each ings release related object to the corresponding class which implements the function ality for that object Using this mapping several releases can be mapped to the same class if possi ble allowing for code reuse Agent related classes RELEASE _MAP_4 BB_R112 guinemanage AgentBB RELEASE MAP_5 BB_R14 guinemanage AgentBB RELEASE _MAP_6 NB_R17 RT guinemanage AgentNB24ch RELEASE MAP_7 NB_R17 COT guinemanage AgentNB24ch Shelf related classes RELEASE_MAP_8 sh guinemanage NEsh RELEASE_MAP_9 subsh guinemanage NEsubsh Pack related class RELEASE_MAP_10 TAP100 guinemanage NEslotTAP Table 2 3 AnyMedia ini configuration file Name Description LV_READLINES Line number of server log messages read in Log Viewer Possible values 1 to 50 Default value 50 AEM R1 7 B 10 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 Northbound interface Contents C 1 Overview C 2 Northbound interface basics C 2 1 Northbound interface description C 3 Northbound interface specific TL1 messages C 3 1 REPT ALM Report Alarm C 3 1 1 Purpose C 3 1 2 Output format C 3 1 3 Output format parameters C 3 2 RTRV ALM Retrieve Alarms C 3 2 1 Purpose 0 3 2 2 Input format
428. on configuration and disassembly must be carried out only by expert personnel and with reference to the respective documenta tion Due to the complexity of the unit system the personnel requires special training The unit system must be operated by expert and authorized users only The user must operate the unit system only after having read and under stood the chapter on safety and the parts of the documentation relevant to operation For complex systems additional training is recommended Any obligatory training for operating and service personnel must be carried out and documented Any conversions or changes to the system or parts of the system in cluding the software must be carried out by qualified Lucent Tech nologies personnel or by expert personnel authorized by Lucent Technologies All changes carried out by other persons lead to a complete exemption from liability No components spare parts must be used other than those recommended by the manufacturer and those listed in the procurement documents The unit system must not be operated unless it is in perfect working order Any faults and errors that might affect safety must be reported immediately by the user to a person in responsibility The equipment must be supplied with Safety Extra Low Voltage SELV of 48 V and the positive terminal of this source must be cor rectly connected to the protective earth Never connect to 60 V The unit system must be operated
429. on Equipment configuration p See Parameters Buttons Description Autonomous Check boxes show the state of the autonomous outputs Output States check box is marked disabled check box is not marked en abled TCA Events Disabled Switch Reports Disabled DB Changes Disabled Other Events Disabled Alarms Disabled Environmental Alarms Disabled This information is obtained from the NE by means of the Get button After pressing this button the states can be changed by clicking in the boxes Apply This button confirms the changes of the autonomous output states The button is enabled only after the Get button has been pressed for the first time Get This button is used to get the current values of the autono mous output states from the NE 5 5 6 1 4 Modify the synchronization telephony parameter Procedure Complete the following procedure to modify the synchronization telephony param eter Step Procedure i Select NE in the Network Element Browser and Synchronization gt Te lephony via the cursor menu The Synchronization Telephony window pops up This window can also be reached from the NE Management window tab Telephony cf Chapter 5 5 2 3 page 5 40 by pressing the More De tails button If you want to then change the processing state use the Label button in the field Configuration re synchronize the alarm processing use the Resync button in the field state Alarms change the
430. on in the first option menu None third menu drop numbers inside the selected slot None Selecting a radio button updates the cross connection table except None is selected in one of the related option menus The same will happen when a value except None is se lected in the right most option menu the corresponding ra dio button is activated and the cross connection list is up dated Please note the following relation between the associated option menus Physical drop can be selected only if a slot id has been selected beforehand and a slot id can be selected only if a shelf subshelf id has been selected beforehand AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Service provisioning Service provisioning data mm ee Parameters Buttons Description ATM Cross This list shows the cross connection parameters The Connections In number of displayed cross connections depends on the se formation lected filter see radio buttons above Feeder Id Shows the feeder involved in the ATM cross con nection e g ds3 1 16 1 Feeder VPI Shows the VPI used to create the cross con nection on the feeder side Feeder VCI Shows the VCI used to create the cross con nection on the feeder side This field is empty if the row represents a VP cross connection Physical Drop Id Indicates the VCI used to create the cross connection on the feeder side It will be the drop se lected in this window e g drop 1 5 4 gt NOTE If no drop is cre
431. on information synchronization Overview The possibility exists for the AEM database to become inconsistent with the infor mation stored locally in the telephony agent non volatile data storage NVDS A database re synchronization capability provides a mechanism for the AEM data base to be made consistent synchronized with the locally stored NE information Two NE configuration data synchronization states can be identified m SYNC The AEM database is consistent with the locally stored telephony agent information and all the autonomous messages concerning configura tion changes are enabled database changes LED status reports switch reports and some events of type protection switches lockout and loop back m ASYNC The AEM database and the telephony agent configuration data are out of synchronization and or configuration reports are inhibited and or the AEM configuration message buffer is overflowing For more information refer to the NE documentation for the NE releases 5 5 6 1 2 Alarm information synchronization Overview In general alarms can be considered independently of each other any alarm re port can be processed by the AEM independent of other alarm reports The AEM distinguishes two possible states for alarm handling alarms from telephony agent are enabled or they are inhibited Two telephony agent alarm processing states can be considered m PROC The AEM alarm database is consistent with the current telephony
432. on such as write software FTP copy memory and the result of the software download operation Successful or unsuccessful This information is shown for each NE for which the software download is being performed gt NOTE The software download process cannot be cancelled AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 5 153 NE management equipment configuration Equipment configuration 5 154 Version 1 00 8 After the download process is finished click on Close to exit the COMDAC Software Download window This button is disabled while the SW download process is being executed gt NOTE The following errors will stop the download process 06 00 NE does not match login and password The AEM returns operation failed to the AEM NE detects that the side switch to the standby COMDAC is not pos sible e g 2nd COMDAC not present and rejects the SW download operation If the download of the data fails an alarm is issued and manual inter vention will be required to restart the download procedure from the beginning or write from the active COMDAC to the standby COMDAC to back out the partial load duplex configuration see Chapter 5 5 13 page 5 158 If the software program is not installed successfully on the standby COMDAC In duplex configuration an alarm will be sent to the AEM and man ual intervention will be required to restart the download procedure from the beginning or write f
433. on the right hand side option menu provides the Add button access to different windows Logical DS1 win dow Logical DS0 window Physical DS1 List This button provides access to the Physical DS1 List window Logical DSO List This button provides access to the Log ical DSO List window AEM R1 7 6 10 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 Service provisioning 6 2 1 4 Procedure 363 211 454 Modify the VRT TR303 Service provisioning telephony The VRT TR303 window can be reached only from the VRT VB List window via Edit VRT VB button Complete the following procedure to modify the VRT TR303 Step Procedure 1 Use the option menu VRT VB id to choose a desired VRT VB type If you want to edit the VFDE state change the timing reference for primary and or secondary link change the switch mode of EOC and or TMC then use the radio buttons Enable Disable and click on Apply gt NOTE Switching to disable will cause a warning message that this action can be service affecting VFDE disabling of a TR303 may be service affecting Do you want to continue If you decide to continue the AEM will send an allowed VFDE message in case of enable or an inhibit VFDE message in case of disable to the NE The following In Progress message will be shown in the status bar Disable Enable VFDE launched click on the corresponding Edit Logi cal DS1 The Logical DS1 window pops
434. onfiguration Equipment configuration ss nn 5 5 11 Equipment protection switching General Protection switching provides an automatic recovery mechanism in the AnyMedia Access System when a fault is detected NE entities that are involved in carrying service to a large number of end users are generally required to be protected with a redundant unit However the NE provides customer options to have none or some entities protected with redundant units These entities can be either 1 1 or 1 N protected For 1 1 protected entities one of them serves as the active or pri mary unit and the other serves as a protection or standby unit For 1 N protected entities one entity serves as the protection or standby unit for all N active units If an active unit fails the failure is detected and service is automatically protection switched to the protection unit The protection switching can also be requested on demand Revertive non re Protection switching can be revertive or non revertive Revertive protection switch vertive ing implies that the active and standby units will return to their original configura tion once the failure causing the protection switch has been repaired Non rever tive switching does not return the entities to their original configuration With non revertive switching the repaired unit becomes the new standby unit The AnyMedia Access System supports the following protection features m COMDAC 1 1 protection non
435. ons that provide quick access to most commonly used ac tions such as new open copy and print cf Chapter 5 3 2 Tooltips are also pro vided for these action icons Window menu Click this button to open the window menu cf Figure 3 5 page 3 9 Double click to button exit the application AEM R1 7 3 8 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 System management General information on keyboard ses rn 3 3 5 Window menu A window can be provided with a window menu The window menu allows to alter the appearance of the window or to exit the application represented by the win dow Restore Alt F5 Move Alt F7 Size Alt F8 Minimize Alt F9 Maximize Alt F10 Lower Alt F3 Close Alt F4 Figure 3 5 Window menu To open the window menu shown in Figure 3 5 click on the window menu button or click with the right mouse button on the window frame The menu options in the window menu are listed in the following table Table 3 1 Window Menu Items and their Function Menu Item Function Restore A window currently being represented as an icon or in its maxi mum size is restored to its original size Move Allows you to move the window interactively on the screen The window frame will follow the mouse movements until you press the left mouse button Size Allows interactive resizing of the window Move the cursor appear ing in the window to the window edge you wish to move The edge will follow the mouse movements until
436. ontinues its attempts to establish a connection The user can cancel these attempts via the GUI which will change the connection state to NOT_CONNECTED Connected The user can request to close a TL1 communication session with a telephony agent via the GUI When the communication session is closed by the AEM the connection state is changed to NOT_CONNECTED When the connection state is CONNECTED and the connection is lost the connection state becomes TRYING If a TL1 communication session loss is detected and the TCP IP connection is still established the AEM closes the TCP IP connection and the connection state also becomes TRYING 5 5 2 2 Association maintenance Association An association between the AEM and an telephony agent is established if the TCP IP connection and the TL1 communication session is open The connection state changes to CONNECTED Agent monitoring The AEM monitors the association state of the telephony agent by periodically sending messages to the telephony agent If the AEM does not receive a re sponse to a certain number of messages within a certain time it assumes that the connection to the telephony agent is lost and tries to connect to the telephony agent again AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 5 39 NE management equipment configuration Equipment configuration ee By default these messages are sent by the AEM every five minutes The response to a message must be received within four minutes and no
437. oop Testing MM Module Manager MN Minor alarm severity AEM R1 7 AB 6 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 Abbreviations B S MON Degraded Signal MR Modification Request MSC Metallic Shelf Controller N NB Narrow Band NE Network Element NEM Network Element Management AnyMedia EM subsystem NIC Network Interface Card NM Network Management NMA Network Monitoring and Analysis NMS Network Management System NVDS Nonvolatile Data Storage NVPS Nonvolatile Program Storage O OAM Operations Administration and Maintenance OCU Office Channel Unit OMG Object Management Group OODB Object Oriented Database OOS Out Of Service AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 AB 7 Abbreviations E S OPS Operations System ORB Object Request Broker OS Operation System U P PBX Private Branch Exchange PC Personal Computer PCM Pulse Code Modulation PGTC Pair Gain Test Controller PID Password Identifier PLN Physical Line Number PLR Pulse Link Repeater POTS Plain Old Telephone Service PPP Point to Point Protocol PSTN Public Switched Telephone Network PT Power Test PTU Power Test Unit PVC Permanent Virtual Channels R RAM Random Access Memory AEM R1 7 AB 8 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 Abbreviations BE ee RCV Receive RDLD Red Lined REPT Report ROC Remote Operations Channel ROM Read Only Memo
438. oot now in the Target field to define the desired download man ner Please note thatthe copying and activation can also be done later by means ofthe AFM Program Copy amp Validation window cf Chapter 5 5 14 page 5 160 5 Click on the Browse button in the Download Information field to open the File Browser window cf Chapter 5 5 15 5 page 5 168 to select the directory example of the file structure NE Files NVPS AFM R1 that should be downloaded 6 Click on OK to confirm The chosen file name appears in the field Direc tory name in the AFM Software Download window 7 Click on Apply to initiate the download process A Warning window pops up the Software Download window remains on the screen after the download is finished SW Download is service affecting and the command can not be cancelled while its execution Continue anyway If you decide to continue the AEM starts the download process An AFM SW Download In Progress window pops up Figure 5 52 AFM SW Download In Progress window This window provides the following information NE Name percent of the software download FTP operation executed feedback additional Infor mation such as write software FTP copy memory and the result of the software download operation Successful or unsuccessful This information is shown for each NE to the software download is being performed AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 5 157 NE management equipment con
439. or Maintenance View Administrator Maintenance Monitoring Clear Administrator Maintenance Groups and NEs Management Equipment and Service Provisioning Administrator Maintenance View Administrator Maintenance Monitoring Test Administrator Maintenance Monitoring Cut through Administrator Groups and NEs Config uration Administrator Maintenance Performance Manage ment Administrator Maintenance Monitoring 1 Ifthe VIEW task is unassigned but other tasks are still assigned these tasks are left as assigned to this user group But the user is not able to perform any kind of operation over these tasks until the VIEW task is assigned again AEM R1 7 1 30 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 Functional description Network configuration 1 5 Network configuration The network configuration depends on the user applications The most probable configurations are described below and illustrated in Figure 1 9 page 1 31 to Figure 1 12 page 1 34 gt NOTE If there are various configuration options of the DCN these are shown in the figures by means of dashed lines The hubs are optional depending on the number of client platforms and NEs 1 5 1 AEM server without clients and exter nal OS LAN AEM server connected to the NEs using a local area network LAN AEM server TCP IP LAN Figure 1 9 AEM server without clients and external OS LAN AEM R1 7
440. orm internal functions and alarm management functions These functions can be initiated via m Menu m Toolbar In most cases the choice depends on the user s personal preference AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 7 11 Fault management and maintenance Alarm monitoring 7 3 3 1 Menu bar The menu is used to activate alarm viewer functions gt NOTE The executable functions depend on your user privileges Alarm Viewer T File View Filter Actions Options Help Figure 7 4 Menu bar of the Alarm Viewer Selection is achieved m By opening the menu by pressing the left mouse button and dragging the cursor to the desired option in the menu or m By opening the menu via the keyboard by entering alt plus the underlined letter of the relevant menu to open the menu option and then entering the letter underlined in the desired menu option Table 7 2 File menu Menu displa Menu option Meanin Information in play P 8 New Launch a new instance of the Alarm Viewer Chapter 7 3 4 1 page 7 18 Print gt Print Ta Print all alarm items displayed in the cur ble rently displayed table or save the items into an ASCII file The Print dialog cf Chapter 3 5 2 is opened Print gt Preview Show the Preview Frame window cf Chapter 3 5 3 Print gt Print Print a screen shot of the whole window Window The Page Setup dialog is opened cf Chapter 3 5 1 Close Dismiss this window b
441. osoft Corporation Netscape Navigator is a trademark of Netscape Communications Corporation Windows 95 and Windows 98 are copyrights of Microsoft Corporation Quality Management System The Quality Management System QMS for Lucent Technologies Product Realization Center PRC Access has been registered to ISO 9001 under the Norwegian Scheme by Det Norske Veritas DNV since June 1993 ISO 9001 is an international quality standard recognized by more than 90 countries worldwide It is a model for quality assurance in design development production installation and servicing Telefax to Lucent Technologies Network Systems GmbH How Are We Doing Fax no 49 911 526 3545 Lucent Technologies welcomes your feedback on this document Your comments can be of great value in helping us improve our documentation Please use a copy of this page for your comments 1 Please rate the effectiveness of this document in the following areas Excellent Ease of Use Clarity Completeness Accuracy Organization Structure Appearance Examples Illustrations Overall Satisfaction 2 Please check the ways you feel we could improve this document O Improve the overview introduction O Make it more brief concise O Improve the tables of contents Add more step by step procedures tutorials O Improve the organization structure Add more troubleshooting information I Include more figures Make it less techni
442. ot installed in the system Please try install_AMEM again and install the package lt LuAMBBl4 gt to complete the installation gt NOTE The last message is an error and can be ignored 2 2 1 2 Client side installation Complete the following procedure to install the AnyMedia client side Step Procedure 1 Go to the directory where the installation script is placed DC ROM 1 of 4 2 Type install_AMEM_gen and press Return AnyMedia EM R1 7 installation CopyRight c 2000 Lucent Technologies Inc All Rights Reserved Pre requisites 1 Before attempting to install the application please read the readme txt file 2 AnyMedia EM R1 7 runs on SUN SPARC Solaris 2 computers running Solaris 2 6 plus security and Y2000 and packs 105490 07 105568 13 105210 19 106040 12 105633 21 106409 01 105181 15 105669 07 105284 25 patches recommended by SUN and 106255 01 patch AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 2 59 Software installation and commissioning Installation procedure a Se 3 TCP ports The following ports MUST be available in order to succesfully run the AnyMedia EM 1570 Orbix daemon uses the TCP port 1570 in order to wait for incoming connections that use the Orbix protocol 1591 to 1641 As Corba servers are activated by the Orbix daemon they are assigned a port so that clients can communicate with it It is essential that these ports are not used by any process
443. otection Switch Parameters Buttons Description NE Name NE name of the selected NE max 30 characters AEM R1 7 5 146 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 NE management equipment configuration Equipment configuration p Se Parameters Buttons Description Protection Displays the protection scheme used in the NE for IO DS1 Scheme Possible values Enabled IO DS1 p present or Disabled no IO DS1 p Only in the case of protection scheme Enable the Protec tion Switch field is available Protection In The IO DS1 option menu shows all IO DS1s present or ab formation sent in the NE Selecting one of these IO DS1 enables the Active Switch Request and Protection State read only fields see below The possible values for Active Switch Request are m Clear No active switch in effect Any protection switch is allowed for the specified IO DS1 m Lockout If this is selected for the protection IO DS1 access to the protection pack for the group is not al lowed When applied to a service IO DS1 access to the protection pack is prevented No protection switches will be done on the specified service slot until the switch is reset Only Clear protection switch will be allowed m Forced Switch to Protection Applicable to IO DS1 only No automatic or manual switches will be done un til the forced switch is reset m Automatic Switch to Protection A switch provoked by a failed or missing IO DS1 to the protection
444. oup The NE shows the highest severity of all the alarms it reports The NEs can be edited deleted and moved When an NE is moved from an old parent group to a new parent group the group status of both parent groups must be updated AEM R1 7 5 26 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 NE management equipment configuration Groups and NEs management 5 4 3 Groups and NEs window This window is used to create edit and delete NEs and Groups The window is subdivided in two panes Groups and NEs gt NOTE The windows shown in this chapter are merely meant as an example The contents text within a window as well as the window itself may slightly dif fer from the window as shown on your system 5 4 3 1 Groups window Group amp NE Figure 5 11 Groups amp NEs window tab Groups AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 5 27 NE management equipment configuration Groups and NEs management p Se The following table shows the view edit options of the group parameters Parameters Buttons Description Group Name This option menu shows all defined group names belonging Selection to the user domain The first option is NEW If NEW is se lected all parameters within the fields Group Identification and Group Representation are deleted for a new definition Group Identifi Group Name This text field shows the selected group name cation or is empty in case of NEW is selected Parent Group This option menu shows
445. ow Band Side Switching This refers to the operation of deactivating the active core entity and activating the standby core entity COMDAC and IO_DS1 circuit packs Software Download The transport of the information required to upgrade update a given NE s generic program SPLL Semi Permanent Leased Lines A service in which resources are used permanently for the transmission of data between two points The switch is responsible for setting up this service System AnyMedia EM software It provides a set of services allowing an operator to manage the AnyMedia NE System Failure Any problem that prevents the EM system from continuing to work T TO This is the descriptor used for the TL1 interface to refer to parameters concerning a DSO 64 kbps service or facil ity T1 This is the descriptor used for the TL1 interface to refer to parameters concerning a DS1 1 544 Mbps service or facility TAS Terminal Access Server This adapts local area networks LAN to wide area networks WAN TASs have the ability to integrate remote net work elements in a local network TASs support different LAN protocols e g Ethernet and WAN protocols e g PPP TCA Threshold Crossing Alert A crossing of a parameter threshold that is generally considered to be a transient condition TELNET This ia a remote terminal interface protocol which allows remote login capability into a system on a network from any other node on that network t
446. owing numbers in kbyte software 1000 aprox logs 35000 per NE databases 0 8 n transactions 2 0 8 0 35 n n 25 The size calculated is based on maximum configurations and includes the overhead necessary for the temporary data used in operation It is recommended to create a separate partition to locate the transaction log file needed by ObjectStore This partition would be used for this purpose only It must not be deleted or managed because this file is only created and managed by Ob jectStore Note that without this file ObjectStore is not able to work and also if a new partition or location is chosen it needs write permissions for the AnyMedia AEM R1 7 2 2 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 Software installation and commissioning General p Se user login If you choose a directory under AnyMedia location the correct owner and permits will be automatically provided in the installation process of AnyMedia The following table shows the recommended size of the partitions for a maximum of 10 40 100 and NEs NEs part 1 part 2 10 475 MB 11 MB 40 500 MB 37 MB 100 530 MB 100 MB 600 700 MB 230 MB where part1 contains all the AEM server software and data bases and the part2 is dedicated to the transaction log Distribution media The AEM R1 7 distribution media is on CD ROMs which contain all the software plus information and installation scripts Figure 2 1 page 2 4 to 2 1 page 2 1 show the full
447. own Shift and Ctrl Keys that are separated by blanks only must be pressed one after the other Esc A B for example means that Esc must be pressed first followed by A and then B 3 3 2 Mouse Conventions When using the mouse you will frequently find the following terms m Click or Select Position the cursor on an object and press the left mouse button Double click Click the left mouse button twice in rapid succession AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 3 5 System management General information on keyboard mm ee m Drag Move the mouse keeping the left mouse button pressed 3 3 3 Different aspects of the cursor The aspect of the cursor will vary to indicate the actions you may currently under take using the mouse The following symbols show examples for possible cursor aspects AN The arrow up pointing to the left is used to select objects and to press buttons I The I beam is used within a text field to indicate the position where text is to be inserted The clock cursor indicates that in the window where the cursor is positioned a D process requiring a lot of processing time is running and no mouse or keyboard inputs are possible 3 3 4 Basics on windows The window which contains the input focus evaluates all keyboard and mouse in puts The window containing the input focus is easy to distinguish from other win dows opened on the screen by the different colour of its window frame Use the mouse t
448. ows for R1 5 Procedure Complete the following procedure to remove a logical DSO 1 Select the logical DSO in the corresponding list 2 Click on Remove Logical DS0 A Warning window pops up AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 6 63 Service provisioning Service provisioning telephony Logical DSO will be deleted OK to proceed gt NOTE If the chosen logical DSO has been configured as red lined cf Chapter 6 2 4 5 page 6 39 the following Warning message will pop up Redlined Logical DSO will be deleted OK to proceed If you decide to continue the AEM will send a delete message to the NE AEM R1 7 6 64 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 Service provisioning Service provisioning data p p Se 6 3 Service provisioning data The data service functionality covers the connection establishment process be tween an ADSL subscriber interface and an E3 network interface This functionality is performed in the same way for all the AFM releases managed by AEM R1 7 Pre provisioning of ATM links and cross connections is possible i e if the packs and ports are pre provisioned the ATM links and cross connections can also be pre provisioned even if the related card is not inserted This chapter describes the creation modification and deletion of ATM virtual path channel links and cross connections in an NE 6 3 1 ATM Cross Connections List window This window displays all ATM cross connections
449. p 2 No Define a default printer 2 Check if the printer is working properly Yes Call Lucent Technologies Technical Support for check ing the network or the AEM No Have the printer repaired 7 5 5 Element manager alarms concerning network element This chapter provides alarm descriptions of the AEM platform alarms concerning the data agent including proposals for corrective maintenance actions Alphabetical order In the following the AEM platform alarms are listed alphabetically 7 5 5 1 ALARM_AO_NOT_PROCESS Meaning The AEM is discarding the Alarm AOs coming from the telephony agent Abbreviation ALARM_AO_NOT_PROCESS Severity Major Service affecting No Effects The alarm data of the AEM does not match the alarm data of the telephony agent The alarm synchronization state is moved to ASYNC Possible cause s Alarm buffer overflow detection Corrective actions Proceed as follows to clear the alarm Step Procedure 1 Perform a manual alarm synchronization process to upload the alarm data and to start processing AOs 2 Is the alarm now cleared Yes O K No Call Lucent Technologies Technical Support AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 7 43 Fault management and maintenance Alarms mm ee 7 5 5 2 ALARM_EVENT_NOT_PROCESS Meaning The AEM is discarding the alarm traps coming from the data agent Abbreviation ALARM_EVENT_NOT_PROCESS Severity Major Service affecting No Effects The alarm data of the
450. pack to the protection pack if the protection pack is present functional and not carrying traffic Not applicable to the protection pack This protection switch remains in effect till a protection switching Lockout Forced or Clear is entered or an Auto matic Protection Switch occurs The Apply button is used confirm the changes within this field AEM R1 7 5 148 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 NE management equipment configuration Equipment configuration 5 5 11 4 Modify the IO DS1 protection mode Procedure Complete the following procedure to define protection switching for IO DS1 Step Procedure 1 Select NE gt Main Shelf in the Network Element Browser and Protection via the cursor menu The Shelf Protection window pops up This window can also be reached from the O DS1 window cf Chapter 5 5 5 1 page 5 54 by clicking on Protection button 2 Click on tab O DS1 this step is not necessary when coming from the O DS1 window 3 Use the option menu IO DS1 to select an appropriate IO DS1 4 Use the radio buttons in the field Protection Switch to select the desired protection Clear or Inhibit or Forced Switch to Protection or Manual Switch to Protection 5 Press Apply to confirm The Warning window pops up Protection switching may be service affecting Do you want to continue If you decide to continue the switch operation will be started The infor mation displayed will be updated once the switch i
451. parc LuBack_36_1 1 kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkxkkk AnyMedia Element Manager c 1999 Lucent Technologies kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Package lt LuSysAdm gt SystemAdmin LuSysAdm_36_1 1 have been found in opt lucent AnyMediaEM_R1 7 OK No previous package LuBack have been found AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 2 29 Software installation and commissioning Installation procedure ee Do you like install the Backup process as a cron y n q n 15 Type n and press Return Do you like install the Archive process as a cron y n q 16 Type n and press Return Using lt opt lucent AnyMediaEM_R1 7 gt as the package base directory Processing package information Processing system information Verifying disk space requirements Checking for conflicts with packages already installed The following files are already installed on the system and are being used by another package opt lucent AnyMediaEM_R1 7 Backup lt attribute change only gt conflict with a file which does not belong to any package Do you want to install these conflicting files y n q 17 Type y and press Return Checking for setuid setgid programs This package contains scripts which will be executed with super user permission during the process of installing this package Do you want to continue with the installation of lt LuBack gt y n AEM R1 7 2 30 V
452. path When the Black option is selected the chan nel unit supports an input TLP range of 9 0 to 7 5 dB When the White option is selected the channel unit supports an in put TLP range of 16 0 to 0 5 dB Possible values Black White Default Black 7 dB Receive This option menu can be used to control a 7 dB pad in the receive path When the Black option is selected the channel unit supports an input TLP range of 16 to 0 dB When the White option is selected the channel unit supports an input TLP range of 9 5 to 7 dB Possible values Black White Default Black Receive Attenu This slider can be used to define the receive attenuator pa ator rameter Possible values 0 16 5 step 0 1 Default 16 5 Transmit Atten This slider can be used to define the transmit attenuator pa uator rameter Possible values 0 16 5 step 0 1 Default 16 5 AEM R1 7 6 60 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 Service provisioning Service provisioning telephony sss ese 6 2 4 24 FXOD Service Details window The FXOD foreign exchange office GS LS is intended for use in non locally switched special services ground start loop start This GSFN is only available for NE R1 7 0 FXOD Service Details Information Figure 6 32 Logical DSO window FXOD Service Details Parameters Trunk Condition Description This option menu can be used to determine whether the AP or CU sets the signaling state toward the CO to th
453. pe Dynamic Target ID is the name of the system to which the command is addressed Correlation tag This parameter appears in the CTAG Block Type String Required No Default Type Dynamic This field is used to associate the command message to the response message AEM R1 7 C 16 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 Northbound interface Northbound interface specific TL1 messages ee ALMTYPE Alarm Type This parameter appears in the Common Block Type String Required No Default Type none min chars 0 max chars 0 Alarm type is not supported in this release and will be ignored C 3 3 4 Output format If the command request completes successfully the following normal completion response is returned sid date time M ctag COMPLD AID NTFCNCDE ALMTYPE OCRDAT OCRTM ALMMSG C 3 3 5 Output format parameters AID Access identifier This parameter appears in the Access ID Block Type Access ID Required Yes AID is the access identifier of the contact closure Abbreviation Meaning mc 1 1 8 Miscellaneous Contact Closure NTFCNCDE Notification code This parameter appears in the Common Block Type List Required Yes AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 C 17 Northbound interface Northbound interface specific TL1 messages ee NTFCNCDE is the alarm level Abbreviation Meaning CR Critical Alarm MJ Major Alarm MN Minor Alarm ALMTYPE Alarm type This parameter appears in the Common Bl
454. peripherals with the following tasks CD ROM Used for installing the system software Tape drive or another removable device optional Used for backup and restore functions m Printer Used for obtaining hard copies e g configuration alarm reports or perfor mance monitoring measurement information AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 1 21 Functional description Working with AEM 1 4 Working with AEM Goal of this This chapter will outline the management activities and processes in the AEM chapter The main emphasis is on presenting everyday operation processes The chapter is structured with respect to the various network life cycle phases see further be low User profiles There are 3 default user profiles the administrator maintenance and monitoring profile The rights belonging to these profiles are described in Chapter 1 4 4 page 1 30 Life cycle of a The individual life cycle of a telecommunication network has the following phases network planning installation provisioning operation amp surveillance modification and fi nally decommissioning Modification of a network may take the form of fine adjust ment expansion or restructuring of the network and addition of new functionality Figure 1 6 shows the life cycle of a network Installation Provisioning Modification Operation amp surveillance Decommissioning Figure 1 6 Life cycle of a network Support by The AEM
455. plication Pack Figure 5 24 Common Application Pack window The following table shows the view edit options of this window Parameters Buttons Description NE Name NE Name of the selected NE max 30 characters Slot Id Slot number where the AP is plugged in Possible values ap 1 1 16 or subap 1 1 8 BAIU shelf ap 1 0 19 AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 5 63 NE management equipment configuration Equipment configuration p See Parameters Buttons Inventory Infor mation Description The following fields will be empty if no pack is inserted Oth erwise the read only text fields provide the following informa tion Card Type Not applicable Serial Number 12 character alphanumeric code that in cludes the date and place of manufacture Apparatus Code Specifies the function of the pack Possible values LPU116 LPA300 LPA300C LPA380 LPA380C LPA350 LPA400 LPA400B LPA 404 LPA414 LPA408 LPS100 ICC InterChangeability Code Indicates the interchangea bility among packs to specify forward backward compatibility Format of the ICC is m n where m is the issue number and n the series number CLEI Code assigned by Bellcore that provides information about the functionality of the pack ECI Code that corresponds to the bar coded label on the faceplate of the pack There is a one to one correspondence between CLEI and ECI codes Provisioning The option menu Provisioned Appar
456. ppears Changing the administrative state of second AFM feeder may be service affecting if there are daisy chained AFMs Do you want to continue 2 Click on Closeto exit the window AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 5 101 NE management equipment configuration Equipment configuration p SeSe 5 5 5 27 AFM Feeder PM Threshold window data application This screen is used to configure the feeder PM threshold parameters It can be reached from the AFM Feeder window cf Chapter 5 5 5 25 page 5 99 AFM Feeder PM Thresholds Figure 5 35 AFM Feeder PM Thresholds window The following table shows the view edit options of this window Parameters Buttons Description NE Name NE name of the selected NE max 30 characters Feeder Type This field displays the feeder type DS3 PM Thresholds The following parameters are applicable to all feeders PS Errored Second PSES These text fields show the PSES thresholds for 15 minute 1 day periods A PSES is a second with 44 or more PCVs or one or more OOF defects or a detected incoming AIS This gauge is not incremented when UASs are counted The maximum value for 15 minutes is 900 the maximum value for 1 day is 86400 Unavailable Second UAS These text fields show the UAS thresholds for 15 minute 1 day periods The UASs are calcu lated by counting the number of seconds that the interface is unavailable The maximum value for 15 minutes is 900 the maxim
457. prerequisite for the incremental backup are present An swer this question affirmatively After that the execution of the restore tool finishes and the restoration is complete 3 6 4 Examples for backup schedules Introduction This section gives you some examples for typical backup schedules and explains the backup level Backup level Crucial for the understanding of the backup schedules is understanding the backup level The backup level is a number which is assigned by you to every backup you make Each time you make a new backup only those files are put on the back up media which were altered since the last backup with a lower backup level A backup level 0 means a full backup 3 6 4 1 Daily cumulative weekly cumulative backups This is the most commonly used backup schedule It is recommended for most sit uations Schedule character This schedule has the following characteristics BUS m Each weekday backup accumulates all files changed since the end of the previous week or the initial level 0 backup m Each Friday s backup contains all files changed since the first level 0 backup For the level 9 backups the previous level 0 or level 5 is the closest backup at a lower level m Each Friday s backup contains all files changed during the month to that point AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 3 43 System management Backup and restore The following table shows the backup levels for each days backup Once a month
458. ption conditions of the AMS m Alarms log all alarms received from the NE 7 2 10 Periodical deletion of cleared alarms By default alarms with cleared status are maintained for at least three days in cluding the current day in the database This value can be configured by the user via the system variable AM minimumClearPeriod in the file ANYMEDIAPATH cfg AnyMediaEM cfg and is an integer multiple in days The default value is 3 days The AEM performs a periodical deletion of the alarms with cleared status that ex ceed the specified time This is done during the night time period in low load hours AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 7 9 Fault management and maintenance Alarm monitoring 7 3 Alarm monitoring 7 3 1 General Overview The AEM provides a process to monitor and display all alarms stored in the data base Using this system the Alarm Viewer the user is able to see many different alarm attributes such as Alarm Type Severity Status Summary and the date and time when the alarm was raised Via this tool the user can perform actions e g acknowledge clear for some of these alarms What you will find In this chapter you will find the following information m Instructions for starting and terminating the alarm viewer Chapter 7 3 2 page 7 10 m Instructions for handling the alarm viewer Chapter 7 3 3 page 7 11 m Structure of the alarm viewer window Chapter 7 3 3 3 page 7 14 and Chapter 7 3 3
459. r all VRT VBs m TR 303 TR 08 INA In all these cases a option menu is available showing the possible options Selection of one of these VRT VB ids automatically sets the corre sponding radio button If no VRT VB id is selected the radio button is not editable i e the user will not be able to set it gt NOTE For COT NE R1 2 3 VRT TR 303 is not possible and therefore the corresponding radio button is disabled Physical DS1 The information in this field is displayed in a table List m Physical DS1 Id Displays the physical DS1 id within the VRT VB id Possible values ds1 1 1 5 1 4 m Logical DS1 id Indicates the logical DS1 id within the VRT VB id Possible values v3fdr 1 1 28 for TR 303 v8fdr 1 20 a b c d for TR 08 ina 1 20 for INA The Add Logical DS1 button is available only if a VRT VB id has been selected without cross connection to a logical DS1 and the maximum number of logical DS1s has not yet been created max 4 for TR 08 max 20 for TR 303 max 1 for INA This button provides access to the Logical DS1 window to add a new logical DS1 Depending on the right hand side option menu provides the Edit button access to different windows Physical DS1 win dow Logical DS1 window Edit Physical DS1 is always available Edit Logical DS1 is available only if the selected physical DS1 is cross connected to the a logical DS1 The Remove Logical DS1 button can be used to remove
460. r has expired The timer has to be configured by the administra tor m Lock screen The user is able to lock the screen whenever he wants To unlock the termi nal the user has to enter his her password m OS AEM secure access The AEM provides security for other OSs EMs to access the system via northbound interface m AEM specific login and password management The system provides a login and password management independent from the operation system Common servers Common Servers offer general purpose services A common server m manages the AEM history and security logs 1 provided by the OS System SUN Solaris AEM R1 7 1 16 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 Functional description System and software architecture p Se m logs the history and security data of other processes upon request m provides log information upon request m provides a facility to generate and print client reports in the AEM printers m provides event distribution services based on a supplier consumer model 1 3 1 3 Software platform 1 3 1 3 1 Software bus CORBA The communication between the AEM processes is based on the common object architecture request broker architecture CORBA standard The heart of the CORBA architec ture is the object request broker ORB The ORB is a software bus to which differ ent applications can connect to offer their services and or to use other applica tions services from which they are clients The OR
461. r management Removing from domains Adding applications 363 211 454 User groups Jser Group Profile User Group Name Description Users Domains Applications amp Tasks Domains Not Assigned Domains Assigned es o Domains Domain 1 Domain 2 K Figure 4 18 User Group Profile window tab Domains Select one or more domains in the Domains Not Assigned field and click Add gt gt gt NOTE If access permission to a domain is granted to a user group that permis sion will be automatically granted for each controlled object within that do main gt NOTE To create domains see Chapter 4 3 1 page 4 8 To disable the access to domains select one or more domains in the Domains Assigned field and click lt lt Remove gt NOTE The administrator user group has access permissions to all domains and this access permissions cannot be modified To give the selected user group access to further applications change to tab Ap plications amp Tasks The window changes its display as shown below AEM R1 7 Version 1 00 06 00 4 21 User management User groups broun 3 Applications Applications System Administration User Administration amp Profiling Log Viewer Groups and NEs Management Tasks Tasks Alarms View Alarms Acknowledgement Alarms Clear Figure 4 19 User Group Profile window tab Applications amp Tasks
462. r printing pur poses it is mandatory at installation time LOC_LANG en Default locale of the application These LOC_COUNTRY US value cannot be modified The following variable should be used to change the timezone That should be done only if some problems has been detected by default In order to notify to the application that the time zone should be change the value of TZ_userDefined should be set to true In order to set properly the time zone to be used in the AnyMedia application we have to set the following variables TZ_rawOffset TZ_ID TZ_startMonth TZ_startDay TZ_startDayOfWeek TZ_startTime TZ_endMonth TZ_endDay TZ_endDayOfWeek TZ_endTime TZ_userDefined Possible values true false Default value false TZ_rawOffset Defines the difference in milliseconds be tween local time and UTC AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 B 7 Configuration parameters p Se User view settings Alarm viewer set tings B 8 Version 1 00 Name Overview Description TZ_ID TZ_startMonth TZ_startDay TZ_startDayOfWeek The syntax necessary to define a TZ_ID is the following GMTI hh Jmm For example you might specify GMT 14 00 as a custom time zone ID The time zone that is returned when you specify a custom time zone ID does not include daylight savings time then it is necessary to use the rest of variables to set the day light saving time for this time zone The daylight s
463. r table with newly logged items Viewer gt Reload NE List Update the NEs Selection list Help gt On Window Display help for Log Viewer Help gt Index Display help index Actions The following table lists all actions you can perform in the Log Viewer window Table 3 38 Actions in the Log Viewer window If you want to then Result display a certain log select the desired log type with the pull The log of the selected type and date of type of a specific down control Log Type the desired NE is displayed in the Log date and NE Viewer table select the date of interest with the pull down control Date and select the NE by using the Add gt gt button and press Apply view different log start another Log Viewer with File gt A new Log Viewer window displays the types or dates si New and set the desired Type or Date selected log type and date multaneously print displayed log select File gt Print gt Print Table or The Log Viewer table or a screenshot of File gt Print gt Print Window the window is printed out display updated log select View gt Reload Log Data Newly logged entries are displayed display updated select View gt Reload NE List The NEs Selection list is updated NEs Selection list AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 3 51 System management Log management p Se Table 3 38 Actions in the Log Viewer window If you want to then Result
464. ration window allows for re covering an MG Each displayed MG can be edited MG recovery A manual MG recovery should be made for an MG that is in the out of service OOS state If a process of the MG is in the state out of service OOS and its automatic recovery fails the OOS state is propagated to the MG level The work load of this MG could be distributed among the other MGs which then are over loaded but the OOS state would persist for the failed MG until a new recovery is instigated manually or automatically MGs information The table in the MGs tab displays the following information Table 3 13 MGs information Table entry Meaning Name The internally assigned name of the MG ID The internally assigned ID of the MG Type The type of the MG Administrative State The administrative state of the package Possible values ON if the MG is up OFF otherwise The Ad ministrative State is changed whenever a startup or shutdown command is issued Operational State The operational state of the package displayed when the Administrative State is ON only Possible values IS if the package is in service OOS if it is out of service TRANSITORY otherwise AEM R1 7 3 24 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 System management System administration Figure 3 11 System Administration window MGs Actions in MGs tab The following table lists all actions you can perform in the MGs tab of the System Administration
465. re FX ground start is applicable to the PRCOIN LPA350 and PROG2W LPA380 APs ce Details Information Figure 6 18 Logical DSO window 2LS Service Details Parameters Description Enable Full When a check mark is set in the check box the transmission Time Transmis circuits in the AP or CU remain active when the subscriber is sion on hook Possible values Set Not set Default Set Balance Mode This option menu can be used to define whether the AP or CU uses an adaptive hybrid to control the 4 wire to 2 wire balance or a prescription set value Possible values Auto Fixed Default Auto AEM R1 7 6 44 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 Service provisioning Service provisioning telephony p SSe Service Details Parameters Description Balance This slider can be used to establish the prescription balance setting in case BAL1 is Fixed If BAL1 has value Auto this control will be disabled grayed out Possible values 0 31 step 1 Default 0 Loss Mode This option menu can be used to specify whether the AP or CU will automatically adjust its transmit receive loss to con trol the overall loop loss to approximately 2 or 5 dB or use prescription set values Possible values 2 5 Fixed Default 2 Receive TLP This slider is used to reset a fixed receive gain or loss in dB RTLP Negative values define loss positive values define gain Only valid if LOSS is Fixed If LOSS is not fixed
466. repair procedures To locate the cause of fault the AEM provides information gathered from alarm notifications and general network data Fault source Each alarm notification contains the name of the network component from which it originates This network component however need not always be the real fault source 1 4 3 1 3 Fault clearance Background The AEM detects faults automatically and clears various software errors by itself fault recovery The transmission characteristics of the network will not be im paired by this Recovery System recovery protects the AEM and associated users from unnecessary prob mechanisms lems and avoids or reduces manual work Recovery processes vary depending on the type of failure that occurred the struc tures affected and the type of recovery If no files are lost or damaged recovery may amount to no more than restarting an instance If data has been lost recov ery requires additional steps such as database restoration using a previous backup AEM recovery mechanisms are initiated mainly by the following situations m NE software crash m AEM crash Communication between AEM and an NE is interrupted In the case of an NE crash the AEM configures NEs in accordance with the inter nal state of the AEM database In the event of an AEM crash or an interruption in communication the AEM downloads the current NE configuration from the NE to its database AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 0
467. request a test for a particular port on a specific application pack m AP card test It is possible to start a series of self diagnostic routines for all port circuits on a specified Application Pack plus its common circuitry m Standby card test scheduling via cut through It is possible to schedule a test to perform a COMDAC side switch or off line diagnostic for the standby COMDAC or the protection Built in self test Each NE performs a built in self test of plug in circuit packs periodically m Loopback test on the feeder side It is possible to set or clear a loopback on particular feeders AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 1 13 Functional description System and software architecture p See m Testing on daisy chained NEs The AEM is able to perform tests on any line of any NE sharing one TAP100 Data test manage m The data test management provides the following tests ment ADSL port BIST tests ADSL port corrupted CRC tests administration of the set of tests stored in the AFM 1 3 1 2 General components The components of this group do not have or require any knowledge of the NEs the AEM is managing They provide a platform on which the other AEM compo nents can operate and isolate them from the underlying customer platform OAM components The OAM components provide operation administration maintenance and secu rity functionality This is based on third party tools i e orbix and a set of
468. revertive switch cf following section m O_DS1 1 N protection 1 lt N lt 5 revertive switch cf Chapter 5 5 11 3 page 5 146 m Synchronization reference source 1 1 protection non revertive switch cf Chapter 5 5 6 3 page 5 128 Definitions The different kinds of switching COMDACs and IO_DS1 packs are defined as follows m Side switching refers to the operation of deactivating the active core en tity and activating the standby core entity Manual normal switch refers to an AEM initiated switch command that instructs the NE to perform a switch only if the protection unit is in service and there are no known faults m Forced switch refers to an AEM initiated switch command that instructs the NE to perform a switch no matter what the conditions of the protection unit a Inhibit switch refers to an AEM initiated switch command that instructs the NE to inhibit a side switch no matter what the conditions of the active unit are 5 5 11 1 COMDAC protection switching Overview The COMDAC is the core pack of the AnyMedia Access System The NE supports both duplex and simplex operations i e the COMDAC can be protected or unpro tected In duplex operation the COMDAC will run in an active and standby mode AEM R1 7 5 142 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 NE management equipment configuration Equipment configuration The NE automatically sets the COMDAC protection mode when both COMDACs are plugged in Then th
469. riteria field to choose a desired VRT VB If you want to then add a logical DSO click on Add Logical DS0 The new VRT VB id will be inserted into the Logical DSO List edit a logical DSO select an appropriate row in the Logi cal DSO List and press Edit Logical DS0 The Logical DSO window pops up cf Chapter 6 2 4 3 page 6 35 AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 6 33 Service provisioning Service provisioning telephony p Se If you want to then remove a logical DSO select an appropriate row in the Logi cal DSO List and press Remove Logi cal DSO A Warning window pops up displaying the following message Logical DSO will be removed Ok to proceed gt NOTE If the logical DSO is red lined the following warning message pops up Redlined logical DSO will be removed Ok to proceed If you decide to continue the remove operation will be started The informa tion displayed will be updated once the remove operation is finished to show the current list exit the window click on Close AEM R1 7 6 34 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 Service provisioning Service provisioning telephony 6 2 4 3 Logical DSO window This window is used to add or modify logical DSO The parameters shown in this window are enabled or disabled depending on the action selected and where this action has been selected from This window allows cross connection of physical DS0O logical DSO TO
470. rities is defined m Critical CR m Major MJ m Minor MN m Warning WR m Indeterminate IN m Cleared CL Alarm identifica The multiple key that uniquely identifies an alarm is tion es Host identifier Identifies where the alarm comes from If it comes from an NE then this identifier is the NE name If the alarm is reported by the AEM the host iden tifier is EM For association alarms the host identifier is NE_name m System object identifier Identifies the alarm affected object within the host which is identified by the host identifier For association alarms the system object identifier is ASSOC m General alarm identifier Unique identifier within each type of alarm In order to ease possible communication between different users an index number is provided as a temporal alarm identification It is temporal because the index number will be used as a circular sequence the maximum sequence number is 100 000 It is provided only for user convenience It will not be used to identify an alarm within the AMS For this purpose the multiple key defined above has to be used AEM R1 7 7 40 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 Fault management and maintenance Alarms mm ee 7 5 3 Network element alarms Alarm descriptions Please refer to the network element documentation for detailed alarm descriptions of network element alarms 7 5 4 General element manager platform alarms This chapter provides alarm descrip
471. rocedure 1 Login as AEM administrator and start the AEM access bar as described in Chapter 3 2 1 The access bar will be shown 2 Select the User Administration amp Profiling icon The User Administration amp Profiling window pops up 3 Select View gt Domains via menu bar The Domains Table appears AEM R1 7 4 10 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 User management Domains User Administration amp Profiling File View Domain 1 description Domain Z Domain 2 description Domain 3 Domain 3 description me o EE Figure 4 9 User Administration amp Profiling window Domains Table 4 Select one domain in the Domain Name field and click Open The Domain Profile window pops up with the current information about the selected domain Domain Profile Domain Name Description Controlled Objects Controlled Objects Not Assigned Assigned te vane _ tye vane EM lAnymedia User Groups User Groups Not Assigned Assigned Apply Ee Figure 4 10 Domain Profile window AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 4 11 User management Domains U Se Change domain To change the domain name enter the new name in the Domain Name field 3 to name 30 characters Any characters are allowed Change domain To change the domain description enter the new information in the Description description field 0 to 60 characters Any characters are allowed Adding To assign further controlled objects to the sele
472. rom the active COMDAC to the standby COMDAC to remove the downloaded copy see Chapter 5 5 13 page 5 158 The TCP connection between AEM and NE is lost AEM R1 7 363 211 454 NE management equipment configuration Equipment configuration p Se 5 5 12 4 AFM Software Download window AFM SH Do SHELF 17_BB Baar Remove Figure 5 51 AFM Software Download window This window provides the functionality needed to download files to an NE or toa set of NEs with data agent The following table shows the parameters of this win dow Parameters Buttons Description Selection Crite Two radio buttons are used to define the target of the down ria load file Single The target is the pre selected NE only its name is in the Selected NEs list see below The Add and Remove buttons are disabled Multiple The Available NEs list shows all existing NEs By means of the Add button the NEs can be moved to the Se lected NEs list AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 5 155 NE management equipment configuration Equipment configuration p Se Parameters Buttons Description Target The Available NEs list shows all existing NEs with data agents sorted alphabetically The Selected NEs list shows all NEs to which the download is being done The Add gt gt button can be used to move the selected NE from the Available NEs list to the Selected NEs list The lt lt Remove button can be used to remove dom
473. roup status high severity alarm this group status depends on the domain to which the operator belongs Clicking or double clicking on a group icon launches a new background map of the selected group Clicking or double clicking on an NE icon launches a new Network Element Browser displaying the selected NE 5 3 2 2 Network Element Browser The Network Element Browser displays all the components of the previously se lected NE through the Network Browser or by double clicking on NE icons within the background map shelves and packs The Network Element Browser shows the slot_lId if the slot is not equipped If the slot is equipped the apparatus code of the inserted pack is shown 5 3 3 Background Map Move icons 5 18 Version 1 00 In the Group Map a background map of a selected NE group is shown By double clicking on a group icon all components of this group will be displayed The same result can be reached by double clicking on the group name in the Network Browser By clicking on the Show Parent Group icon in the tool bar the background map of the parent group with all its components will be displayed By double clicking on an NE icon the Network Element Browser is displayed with the selected NE as root node It is possible to move an icon group or NE over the background map by Drag and Drop as well as moving icons between Network Browser and the background map Once an NE is dropped the mouse pointer converts
474. rpret analyze or correct failures caused by provisioning data that is configured incorrectly The personnel should at least have the following education level m computer knowledge e g windows applications and or SUN applications m telecommunication network knowledge AEM R1 7 XII Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 About this document How to use this document 3 How to use this document 363 211 454 The guide is divided into a number of sections Subjects clearly separated by numbered tabs The front pages of the guide also describe this division and list the titles of the subjects together with the corresponding tab numbers Through this readers can quickly select the subject of their interests and needs How are we doing A comment form so readers can give feedback to improve the next revision of the document Table of contents list of figures list of tables Overview Defines the purpose of the document and the intended audience Also in cluded are topics about the conventions used in the document related doc umentation how to order documents and how to comment on this docu ment Chapter 1 Functional Description Contains a short overview over the system its features and capabilities Chapter 2 Software Installation Describes the standard procedure to install the AEM R1 7 server package server applications and client package client applications Chapter 3 System Management Provides the system ad
475. rsion 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 System management System administration 3 4 5 Editing distributed module groups Overview The Edit DMG window allows for setting up whether a DMG is automatically launched on system start up It also displays information for each module con tained in the DMG Launch DMG on The Launch on Package Siart Up option allows for the configuration of the sys package startup tem to specific needs If some of the optional DMGs are not needed for a given network configuration they can be set not to be automatically started to save sys tem resources DMGs information Next to DMG Name the name of the selected DMG is displayed The type of the MG is indicated next to MG Type The table under MGs in DMG in the Edit DMG window displays the following information Table 3 16 DMG information Table entry Meaning Name The internally assigned name of the MG ID The internally assigned ID of the MG The ID of an MG contains the ID of the DMG it belongs to Administrative State The administrative state of the MG Possible values ON if the MG is up OFF otherwise The Adminis trative State is changed whenever a startup or shut down command is issued Operational State The operational state of the MG displayed when the Administrative State is ON only Possible values IS if the MG is in service OOS if it is out of service TRANSITORY otherwise AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 3 27 System
476. rts an active system configuration which is currently used and a standby system configuration which is set with the command Set CFG ISDN Possible values for the configurations are POTS or POTS ISDN Mixed The standby system configuration is activated with the switch configuration com mand SW CFG AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 5 139 NE management equipment configuration Equipment configuration p See 5 5 10 Simplex COMDAC protection scheme Overview The NE automatically sets the COMDAC protection mode or duplex mode when both COMDACs are plugged in Then the alarming state of both COMDACs slots is set to Required and the AEM is not able to change it until one of the COMDACs is removed When a COMDAC is removed the AEM is then able to set that slot to Not Required so the COMDAC protection mode will be disabled simplex 5 5 10 1 COMDAC window COMDAC Window Figure 5 46 COMDAC window This window includes hardware and software data inventory as well as the oper ational and protection state The Inventory Information field contains read only fields cf Chapter 5 5 5 3 page 5 59 AEM R1 7 5 140 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 NE management equipment configuration Equipment configuration p See For configuring the protection scheme the field Operation amp Protection is used Parameters Buttons Description Slot Required This check box displays the required state of the shelf slot This st
477. rverity The icons change their color to reflect the highest severity alarm critical major minor indeterminate or warning alarms The highest severity alarm of a group is the highest severity alarm of all the alarms of its child groups and NEs The alarm status color is in accordance with the alarm viewer color set red for critical and major yellow for minor white for indeterminate and warning Expand display Any level of the Network Browser e g Group_1 can be expanded to its compo nents e g groups and NEs by clicking on the symbol related to the object to be expanded only groups can be expanded Any expanded object can be col lapsed by clicking on the symbol related to it The branch can also be ex panded by double clicking on a group AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 5 17 NE management equipment configuration Initial windows Move icons New background group New Network Ele ment Browser gt NOTE The display is not automatically refreshed The changes are only visible af ter re expanding the branch clicking on the sign It is possible to move an NE or a group from an origin group to a target group by drag and drop Once an NE is dropped the mouse pointer converts to a clock un til the action has finished This clock pointer is shown over the browsers and over the background map window group map The old parent group and the new parent group update their group status to the new g
478. ry RT Romote Terminal RTLP Receive Transmission Level Point RTU Remote Test Unit 2RVO 2 Wire Loop Reverse Battery Originate S SCC Secondary Channel SCEC Secondary Channel Error Correction SDEE Supported Entity Exists SDH Synchronous Digital Hierarchy SGE Supported Entity Outage SL Slope SLC Subscriber Loop Carrier SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol SPLL Semi Permanent Leased Line SW Software AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 AB 9 Abbreviations I S T TA Terminal Adapter Test Area TAP Test Access Path TCA Threshold Crossing Alert TCP Transmission Control Protocol TID Target Id TL1 Transaction Language 1 TLP Transmission Level Point TM Timeslot Management TMC Timeslot Management Channel TMN Telecommunication Management Network TNM Total Network Management TO Transmission Only TRMT Transmit Attenuator Parameter TS Test TS Timeslot TTLP Transmit Transmission Level Point TIMT Tandem Transmit Attenuator Parameter AEM R1 7 AB 10 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 Abbreviations B S U UART Universal Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter UAS Unassigned UCC Universal Communication Channel UEQ Unequipped UI User Interface UID User Id UNI User Network Interface UPS Uninterruptable Power Supply USP Universal Serial Bus UX Unix V VB Virtual Bank vc Virtual Connection
479. s Proceed as follows to clear the alarm Step Procedure 1 Check for correct AFM configuration AEM R1 7 7 54 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 Fault management and maintenance Alarms mm ee 7 5 6 Correlated alarms Introduction The following table contains a list of AEM alarms triggered by alarms from the te lephony or and data agent Example The POLL alarm from the telephony agent as well as the amasAFMAPNoRe sponseAlarmCS alarm from the data agent effects the DUP_NO_RESP_POLL alarm in the AEM Table 7 13 Correlated alarms Service Probable Cause Summary Severity Affecting Object_Id Description POLL not respond Major yes ap 1 1 16 ing to poll Minor no subap 1 8 1 8 amasAFMAPNoRespon AP not re Major yes ap 1 1 16 seAlarmCS sponding to Minor subap 1 8 1 8 AFM poll DUP_NO_RESP_POLL not respond Major ap 1 1 16 AP pack not re ing to poll Minor subap 1 8 1 8 sponding to poll INT internal hard Major yes ap 1 1 16 ware failure Minor no subap 1 8 1 8 amasAFMPackFailA AP self test ap 1 1 16 larmCS pack failure subap 1 8 1 8 reported amasAFMAPFailA AFM self test ap 1 1 16 larmCS pack failure subap 1 8 1 8 reported DUP_PACK_FAIL internal hard ap 1 1 16 AP self test ware failure subap 1 8 1 8 pack failure re ported PRCDERR procedural er ap 1 1 16 illegal unknown ror subap 1 8 1 8 pack in AP slot amasUnk
480. s consistent with the current data agent alarms although it is possible that a trap could have been lost AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 5 125 NE management equipment configuration Equipment configuration p See m NOT_PROCESSING The AEM is discarding the alarm traps coming from the data agent The AEM alarm database is only a snapshot of data agent alarm information at a certain moment in time The alarms shown in the AEM do not match the current alarms of the data agent 5 5 6 2 3 Synchronization Data window Synchronization Data SHELF17_BB Figure 5 41 Synchronization Data window The following table shows the view edit options of this window Parameters Buttons Description NE Name NE name of the selected NE max 30 characters The Processing State represents the synchronization state between the AEM and NE This information is automatically updated Possible values PROC and BLOCK The Resync button is used to re synchronize the data from the NE to the AEM database for configuration data Alarms The Processing State represents the alarm processing state between the AEM and NE This information is automat ically updated Possible values PROC and BLOCK The Resync button is used to re synchronize the data from the NE to the AEM database for alarms Configuration AEM R1 7 5 126 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 NE management equipment configuration Equipment configuration p Se
481. s derived from an in ternal crystal oscillator with an accuracy of 20 parts per million ppm DS3 1 failure han If the DS3 1 signal fails all DS3 timing is derived from same timing source used dling when the AFM is provisioned for free running When the DS3 1 failure clears the timing source automatically changes back to loop timed When the timing source is set to free running all DS3 timing is derived from the internal oscillator regardless of the health of the DS3 1 signal ADSL timing Timing for each ADSL interface is derived from an internal crystal oscillator in the ADSL AP This timing reference is used regardless of the status of the DS3 signal from the network AEM R1 7 5 12 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 NE management equipment configuration Overview of the controlled systems 5 2 4 AEM R1 7 new equipment configura tion features 5 2 4 1 Telephony agent narrowband The AEM R1 7 manages the following releases of the AnyMedia telephony agent of the 24 channel families m R1 2 1 R1 2 2 and R1 7 0 The support of all these releases means the following set of new tasks in the equipment configuration area of the AEM m New APs and CUs m DS1 regeneration AnyMedia R1 2 2 only m Subshelves management IATs AnyMedia R1 7 0 only 5 2 4 2 Data agent broadband Unlike previous releases the AEM R1 7 integrates the management of the data agent R1 1 2 and R1 4 in the AnyMedia Access System The NE equipment config
482. s finished to show the current state The following events set off error messages m The NE is not equipped for the requested protection switching i e the pro tecting slot is empty m The NE detects an error in the switch request i e the request cannot be executed due to another activity in the AEM m The NE cannot execute the request as the NE software installation is in progress m The forced switch is denied as the protecting slot is locked out m The manual switch is denied either because there is a higher protection switch active Inhibit Forced or because an automatic switch is already protecting that protected slot 5 5 11 5 Alarm configuration Configuring of the alarm severities is only possible via the cut through interface cf Chapter 5 5 16 page 5 169 The corresponding TL1 commands are available on line using the GSI help on AnyMedia Access System AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 5 149 NE management equipment configuration Equipment configuration ee ee ee e GS 5 5 12 Network element software upgrade This function is subdivided into two parts NE software download for telephony and data agents and program copy only for telephony agent COMDAC 5 5 12 1 Network element software download telephony agent Overview Assumptions 5 150 Version 1 00 There are two software versions the one in the active COMDAC and the new one to be downloaded must be placed in ANYMEDIA CM n
483. s in the System Administration window 3 19 3 4 3 2 Administration of packages 3 20 AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 3 I ee Contents 3 4 3 3 Administration of distributed module groups 3 22 3 4 3 4 Administration of module groups 3 24 3 4 4 View distributed module groups of a package 3 26 3 4 5 Editing distributed module groups 3 27 3 4 6 Editing module groups 3 28 3 4 7 Contents of packages and distributed module groups 331 3 5 Print out reports 3 34 3 5 1 Page Setup dialog 3 34 3 5 2 Print dialog 3 35_ 3 5 3 Preview Frame dialog 3 36_ 3 6 Backup and restore 3 38_ 3 6 1 Basics on backups and AEM databases 3 38 3 6 2 Commands for backup archive and restore 339 3 6 3 Backup archive and restore procedures 3 41 3 6 3 1 Backup procedure 3 42 3 6 3 2 Archive procedure 3 42 3 6 3 3 Restore procedure 3 42 3 6 3 3 1 General 3 42 3 6 3 3 2 Full restoration procedure 3 42 3 6 3 3 3 Incremental restoration procedure 3 43 3 6 4 Examples for backup schedules 3 43 3 6 4 1 Daily cumulative weekly cumulative backups 3 43 3 6 4 2 Daily cumulative weekly incremental backups 3 44 3 6 4 3 Daily incremental weekly cumulative backups 3 45 3 7 Log management 3 46_ 3 7 1 Different log types 3 46 3 7 2 Configuration of logs 3 46 3 7 3 Log Viewer window 3 47 3 8 Disaster recovery 3 53 AEM R1 7 3 II Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 System management 3 1 Overview 363 211 454 This chapter provides you with information about a
484. s of an existing use the option menus Group Name group Selection and Group Identification to select the desired group edit the parameters in the field Group Representation and press Apply create a new group use the option menu Group Name Se lection to select the NEW option enter an appropriate name in the text field Group Name use the option menu Parent Group to select the desired parent group define the parameters in the field Group Representation and press Ap ply 2 Click on Close to exit the window 5 4 3 3 Delete a group Procedure Complete the following procedure to create modify a group Step Procedure 1 Select the group in the Network Browser or on the background map and click on Remove in the cursor menu or select File gt Remove via the menu bar or click on the remove icon in the tool bar A Warning window pops up dis playing the following message You are about to delete Group Name Do you want to continue 2 Enter yand press Return to confirm AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 5 29 NE management equipment configuration Groups and NEs management p See 5 4 3 4 NEs window Group amp NE NEIWIETSBENTENTee Figure 5 12 Groups amp NEs window tab NEs The following table shows the view edit options of the NE parameters Parameters Buttons Description NE Name Selec This option menu shows all defined NEs belonging to the tion user domain The first option is NEW If NEW i
485. s selected all parameters within the fields NE Identification and NE Rep resentation are deleted for a new definition NE Identifica NE Name This text field shows the selected NE name or is tion empty if NEW is selected Parent Group This option menu shows all defined group names of the system One of them must be selected to ena ble the creation of a subordinate group or NE AEM R1 7 5 30 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 NE management equipment configuration Groups and NEs management Parameters Buttons Description NE Representa NE Icon This text field is used to enter the path to the icon tion related to the NE Browse This button is used to open the File Browser win dow in order to select the icon X Coord This text field is used to set the x coordinate to lo cate the icon on the background map of the parent group Y Coord This text field is used to set the y coordinate to lo cate the icon on the background map of the parent group Command but Apply This button provides access to the Domain Selection tons window cf Figure 5 14 page 5 36 to include the NE in one or several domains The button is available only if the NE name is present NE Management This button provides access to the NE Management window cf Figure 5 15 page 5 37 to config ure the selected NE AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 5 31 NE management equipment configuration Groups and NEs management ee
486. s selected by means of the option menu For more information refer to Chapter 7 4 Reset This button can be used to reset the pack If there is a mismatch between the COMDAC view and the AFM view an addi tional field is available Two radio buttons COMDAC View AFM View can be used to select the de sired view A text field explains the type of mismatch AEM R1 7 5 106 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 NE management equipment configuration Equipment configuration 5 5 5 30 Modify an ADSL pack data applica tion Procedure Complete the following procedure to modify an ADSL drop Step Procedure 1 Select NE gt Main Shelf gt ADSL in the Network Element Browser and Edit via the cursor menu or select View gt Object via the menu bar or single click on ADSL in the Shelf View window The ADSL AP window pops up If you want to then unprovision the AP use the option menu Provisioned Ap paratus Code to select NONE and press Apply The Common AP window pops up cf Chapter 5 5 5 5 page 5 63 change the administrative state use the option menu Administrative State gt NOTE When changing from Unlocked to Locked the following warning messages appears Changing the administrative state of the ADSL pack may be service affecting Do you want to continue edit an ADSL drop select the desired ADSL drop in the ADSL Drop Information table and click on Edit Drop or double click on t
487. s slider can be used to specify the precision network for the 4 wire to 2 wire hybrid balance function Possible values 0 15 step 1 Default 3 Receive Gain This slider can be used to define the receive gain parameter Possible values 8 1 5 step 0 25 Default 8 Transmit Gain This slider can be used to define the transmit gain parame ter Possible values 1 6 75 step 0 25 Default 1 Slope This slider can be used to adjust the frequency response of the equalizer Possible values 0 7 step 1 Default 0 AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 6 49 Service provisioning Service provisioning telephony p See 6 2 4 15 2RVT Service Details window Overview The 2RVT 2 wire loop reverse battery CS is applicable to the SPQ442 LPA356 APs This GSFN is only available for NE R1 2 2 2RYT Service Details Information Figure 6 23 Logical DSO window 2RVT Service Details Parameters Loss Description This option menu can be used to determine the bidirectional loss Possible values 0 dB 2 5 dB Default 0 DB Trunk Condition This option menu can be used to determine whether the AP or CU sets the signaling state toward the CO to the Idle state Busy or the DSO remote alarm indication Rai code during a fault condition Default Idle AEM R1 7 6 50 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 Service provisioning Service provisioning telephony 6 2 4 16 DX4N DX4R FXIO PII1
488. s to the test routines TL1 commands Test Options 363 211 454 Test management Test management provides all the general purpose test functionality The main functions are Providing the user with different test options see below Starting the test execution by means of the AEM Displaying the test results on the AEM user interface Setting and clearing of loopbacks The test routines are available via the Groups and NEs Management applica tion To start it click on the Groups and NEs Management icon in the access bar The menu bar the Network Browser and the Background Map pop up cf Figure 7 8 page 7 26 The tests can be executed from AP windows and User Port windows Most of the test routines can also be executed via TL1 commands by using the TL1 command line interface cf Chapter 5 5 16 Please refer to the network element documentation for a detailed description of TL1 commands including an explanation of the input format restrictions error conditions etc The test execution via TL1 commands is described in this manual only for the stand by card test scheduling and the single pulse feeding test be cause these tests cannot be executed via GUI The following test options are available for telephony application Port test cf Chapter 7 4 1 1 page 7 26 AP card test cf Chapter 7 4 1 2 page 7 28 Standby card test scheduling cf Chapter 7 4 1 3 page 7 30 Built in self test cf Chapter
489. s window 6 68 6 3 3 Add an ATM cross connection 81 6 3 4 Modify an ATM cross connection 8 72 6 3 5 Remove an ATM cross connection 6 72 AEM R1 7 6 II Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 Service provisioning 6 1 Introduction This chapter describes the service provisioning possibilities of the AnyMedia ElI ement Manager 24 Channel AEM R1 7 It addresses the following topics m Screen navigation m Service provisioning telephony m Service provisioning data 6 2 Service provisioning tele phony Overview Supported VRTs VBs 363 211 454 Service provisioning deactivation means the setting of those parameters needed to provide service to or disconnect service from an individual end customer For distribution ports such parameters include those that specify a TO cross connec tion between a logical DSO on a VRT VB virtual remote terminal virtual bank and an end customer s physical port and the parameters which can be set on the port Service provisioning is typically initiated by a service order although unprovi sioning is sometimes also needed for maintenance purposes or for re configura tion of an existing network e g load balancing Figure 6 1 page 6 2 shows a conceptual diagram of the cross connections be tween the physical DS1 and subscriber ports of the AnyMedia Access System and the VRTs VBs The AnyMedia Access System supports m up to one TR 303 VRT m upto 20 TR 08 VRTs m and up to
490. sages Supports all TL1 messages for all NE products for dumb terminal access Allows direct input of TL1 messages In some markets direct input of TL1 messages may not be allowed and can be suppressed via the appropriate security permissions m Online help Provides access to online help which contains at least information on the operation of the AEM meaning of the buttons etc m Multiple windowing Provides multiple windowing for access to multiple NE information on a sin gle screen m Multiple user access Provides for multiple users access to the AEM at the same time Multiple users may include multiple OSs or NMSs as well as multiple GUI access m Time and date format Enables the user to use local preferred time and date format For example the local calendar is supported or optional use of 24 hour clock versus a 12 hour clock m User friendly GUIs Provides a user friendly interface and hides the complexities of the infor mation models m Manageable objects organized in a hierarchy The configuration is implemented within a GUI hierarchy Network level containing all groups of NEs NE group level containing a number of NEs or and other NE groups NE level starting with shelf view m Display of NEs in a map The NEs can be displayed in a map The display follows the GUI hierarchy m Map handling It is possible to use maps for displaying NEs The AEM provides a default map Other maps can be loaded in an
491. scription m system turn up procedures and system modifications m user management m configuration management m fault management and maintenance m performance monitoring The purpose of the USM is to provide the provisioning personnel with all informa tion necessary to provision an AnyMedia Access System via the AEM The USM is a network oriented manual and will be shipped to all sites where an AEM is available It provides the provisioning operator s with necessary informa tion to configure or re configure network elements after local installation The philosophy behind the provisioning of network elements within a network is that the network is already installed configured and service has been provided to the network after first installation and that re configuration of the NE is necessary Provisioning takes place from the AEM located in one or more central offices AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 XI About this document Intended audience mm ee 2 Intended audience The USM is intended for personnel who take care of deploying NEs by carrying out all provisioning activities of the NEs using the AEM Tasks to be performed by the Provisioning personnel are m collect information of provisioning data e g check shelf layout units list m put ports in service and out service m assign timeslots Cross Connections m download and upload the provisioning data to and from the NEs m testing of assigned ports m recognize inte
492. scription System and software architecture p See ADSL pack management e g change of administrative state reset etc DS3 E3 feeder management ADSL drop configuration Date and time management Timing synchronization provisioning for this release no timing syn chronization is made since local timing is the only mode supported Enable Disable traps generation m Maintain a local copy of configuration data in the AFM s NVDS _ Initializing the local copy i e by doing an initial configuration up load Synchronizing the local copy with the equipment data maintained by the AFM i e by using audits traps and responses from operations Note that local copy may not be synchronized because not all the configuration changes provoke traps m AFM memory administration Management of non volatile data storage NVDS of the AFM Provides a storage medium for maintaining a copy of the NVDS for backup and restore purposes m AFM software management Management of non volatile program storage NVPS of the AFM software download software validation amp activation etc m Subshelf management NE R1 4 Subshelf creation Subshelf configuration and cross connection Subshelf deletion m ADSL profiles management The AEM allows to create delete or change of the performance monitoring and transmission profiles related to ADSL ports m Obtain operational state and others status attribut
493. security and user groups 1 30 1 5 Network configuration 1 31 AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 III a Contents 1 5 1 AEM server without clients and external OS LAN 1 31 1 5 2 AEM server with clients and without external OS LAN 1 32 1 5 3 AEM server without clients and with external OS WAN 1 33 1 5 4 AEM Server with Clients and external OS WAN 1 34 U SSe 2 Software installation and commissioning 2 1 2 1 General 2 1 2 1 1 Introduction 2 2 2 2 Installation procedure Bey 2 2 1 Full installation 2 7 2 2 2 Installing individual packages 2 71 2 2 3 Cancel installation 2 73 2 2 4 Remove AnyMedia package installations 2 73 2 2 5 PC GUI client installation 2 73 TE 3 System management 3 1 3 1 Overview 3 1 3 2 System access 32 3 2 1 Login to operation system 3 2 3 2 2 Logout from operation system 3 3 3 2 3 AEM Access Bar 3 4 3 2 4 Capacity 3 5 3 3 General information on keyboard and windows 3 5 3 3 1 Keyboard 3 5 3 3 2 Mouse 36 3 3 3 Different aspects of the cursor 3 6 3 3 4 Basics on windows 36 3 3 5 Window menu 39 3 3 6 Menu bar s 1d 3 3 7 Cursor menu 3 10 3 3 8 Workspace manager 311 3 3 9 Workspace menu 3 11 AEM R1 7 IV Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 Contents 3 3 10 Controls in AEM windows 3 12 3 4 System administration 3 16 3 4 1 General 3 16 3 4 2 Start up shutdown of server applications via command line 3 18 3 4 3 System administration window 3 19 3 4 4 View distributed module groups
494. sful lt GUI side installation gt AEM R1 7 2 70 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 Software installation and commissioning Installation procedure p ee 2 2 1 3 Post install actions 2 2 1 3 1 AEM server To be able to start up the server it is necessary previously to execute the following script lt AnyMedia_path gt cfg AnyMediaEM sh This would set all the necessary environment variables It is recommended to in clude this line in the user profile or to create an alias to facilitate the use 2 2 2 Installing individual packages The installation script install_AMEM_ can be used to install individual packages and will take care of the installation dependencies that is if a needed package is not installed previously it will not allow to continue until you install it If the pack age is already installed on the target system the following actions must be done m the package must be de installed previously refer to Remove AnyMedia package installations on page 73 for more information about packages de installation inorder not to affect the rest of the installed packages the package must be re installed in the same directory as the previous one Installation dependencies are not the same than functional dependencies In or der to the AEM R1 7 to work at least all the obligatory packages should be in stalled third parties and common packages for the server and full client installa tion for the client
495. side Possible values 0 255 Drop Side VCI This field is used to define the VCI used to create the cross connection on the drop side Possible values 1 1023 This field can be empty if the cross connection is at VCI level Administrative State This option menu is used to define the administrative state for the NE cross connection Possible values Locked Unlocked default The Reset Form button can be used to reset all values in this field The Apply button is used to create a new cross connection 06 00 AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Service provisioning Service provisioning data E SeSe 6 3 3 Add an ATM cross connection Overview The field New Cross Connection in the ATM Cross Connection window is used to define the parameters for new cross connections over an ADSL drop There are four possibilities to launch the ATM Cross Connection window m via ATM Cross Connection List window Add see below m via ATM Cross Connection List window Edit m via ADSL AP window ATM Cross Connections m via ADSL AP window Edit Drop and ADSL Drop window ATM Cross Connections Procedure Complete the following procedure to add an ATM cross connection Step Procedure 1 Select NE in the Network Element Browser and List gt ATM Cross Con nections via the cursor menu The ATM Cross Connection List window pops up cf Chapter 6 3 1 page 6 65 2 Click on Add The ATM Cross Connection window pops up cf Chapter
496. sion 1 00 06 00 6 73 Service provisioning Service provisioning data mm ee AEM R1 7 6 74 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 Fault management and maintenance Contents 7 1 Overview 7 2 Alarm management 7 2 1 Overview 7 2 2 Maintain up to date alarm information 7 2 3 Alarm notification to the user 7 2 4 Provide access to the current alarm data 7 2 5 Managing the raising of alarms 7 2 6 Manage alarm acknowledgment 7 2 7 Managing the clearing of alarms 7 2 8 Alarm data synchronization 7 2 9 AEM alarm log handling 7 2 10 Periodical deletion of cleared alarms 7 3 Alarm monitoring 7 3 1 General 7 3 2 Starting and terminating the Alarm Viewer 7 3 2 1 Starting the Alarm Viewer 7 3 2 2 Terminating the Alarm Viewer 7 3 3 Performing Alarm Viewer functions 7 3 3 1 Menu bar 7 3 3 2 Toolbar 7 3 3 3 General Information 7 3 3 4 Alarm table 7 3 3 4 1 Alarm parameters 7 3 3 4 2 Sorting alarms 7 3 4 System management functions 7 3 4 1 File 7 3 4 2 Views AEM R1 7 1 363 211 454 N N _ N _ D N o amp N N N N N oo N 00 N co N co N Ko N SQ o N oO N SQ _ SQ N D SQ gt N gt N o on SQ SQ N SQ 00 N co Version 1 00 06 00 7 1 ee Contents 7 3 4 3 Filters 7 19 7 3 4 4 Administrator defined filters 721 7 3 4 4 1 Syntax rules Tel 7 3 4 4 2 Example for filter file 723 7 3
497. sort the log click on one of the column headers to The Log Viewer table is displayed sorted sort the log according to the column en alphabetically or by date and time tries alphabetically or by date and time Click again to reverse the sort order close one Log select File gt Close or press Close The selected Log Viewer window is Viewer window closed close all Log Viewer select File gt Exit All Log Viewer windows are closed windows AEM R1 7 3 52 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 System management Disaster recovery 3 8 Disaster recovery The AEM software has built in auto recovery features that will allow it to continue working after a problem except in the most critical situations i e corrupted files hardware failure In case of a disaster the following steps should be performed by the system administrator to repair the AEM and minimize the data loss 1 Repair replace any hardware and OS components that may be damaged Start the system and check that the workstations and network boot prop erly and the users are able to log into the system 2 Check if the AEM including all third party software remains installed on the machine To list all the packages installed type pkginfo grep application Lu 3 Remove all the listed packages using the pkgrm command cf Chapter 2 2 4 page 2 73 4 Re install the AEM software The procedure is the same as for installing the software for the first
498. source such as in the NEs or in the platform Some platform alarms can be cleared by the user The alarm information will contain the date and time of alarm clearance m Acknowledged alarms The operator can acknowledge a raised alarm alarm still active but being investigated m Alarm colors The management system provides a color scheme based on alarm severi ties m Enable Disable of autonomous alarms on an NE basis m Fault localization Provides fault localization across all NEs under the AEM control The COMDAC LEDs show the highest severity alarm for the system The indi vidual pack unit LEDs show the highest severity alarm for the pack unit Fault localization is performed at AP level m NE alarm log handling The AEM is able to retrieve the NE alarm log via the cut through interface m Customized alarm filters and views It is possible to filter the alarm records for one or for a list of NEs The items to be displayed can be sorted in ascending or descending order m NE alarm cut off functionality via GUI m Alarm audits data application The system performs periodic automatic and on demand audits on the NE to ensure integrity of the alarm data Performance The Performance Management provides the following functionality features management m Handling of performance records Records can be displayed printed and stored in a user defined file m OSs retrieval of data performance data The AEM provides a mechanism for oth
499. ss to the Log ical DS1 window to edit the logical DS1parameters The but ton is available only if there is a logical DS1 cross connec tion to the selected physical DS1 Remove Logical DS1 Removes the selected physical DS1 logical DS1 cross connection Operational The Operational State shows the service state obtained State from the NE through the use of the Get button Possible values Enabled Disabled The Secondary Operational State shows the secondary service state obtained from the NE through the use of the Get button The Get button is used to retrieve the service states AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 6 23 Service provisioning Service provisioning telephony p Se 6 2 3 2 Modify the physical DS1 The Physical DS1 window can be reached from the IO DS1 window cf Chapter 5 5 5 1 page 5 54 Logical DS1 window cf Chapter 6 2 3 3 page 6 26 and Physical DS1 List window Chapter 6 2 2 page 6 17 Procedure Complete the following procedure to modify the physical DS1 Step Procedure 1 Use the option menus Physical DS1 id to select the desired feeder If you want to then change the values for Equalization use the corresponding sliders and and or Degrade Threshold press Apply change the loopback state use the label button on the right hand side of the corresponding text field A Warning window pops up displaying the following message Set or Clear Loopback may be service affect
500. stem ensures that the new user does not yet exist in the system After clicking OK the window will be closed If you want to reject the settings click Close before OK or Apply The other fields are described in Chapter 4 4 2 page 4 19 AEM R1 7 4 18 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 User management User groups 4 4 2 Modify user groups Introduction This chapter describes the process to modify the properties of a user group Be fore modifying the properties of a user group please pay attention to the following remarks m The AEM administrator must have a system login m The administrator user group has access permissions to all applications and tasks and these access permissions cannot be modified Procedure Complete the following procedure to create a new user group Step Procedure 1 Login as AEM administrator and start the AEM access bar as described in Chapter 3 2 1 The access bar will be shown 2 Select the User Administration amp Profiling icon The User Administration amp Profiling window pops up 3 Select View gt User Groups via menu bar The User Groups Table ap pears User Group Name Description Administrator Administrator Group Description Maintenance Maintenance Group Description Monitoring Monitoring Group Description group 7 group 7 description test group New user group Successful Figure 4 16 User Administration amp Profiling window User Groups Ta
501. sue number and n the series number CLEI Code assigned by Bellcore that provides information about the functionality of the pack ECI Code that corresponds to the bar coded label on the faceplate of the pack There is a one to one correspondence between CLEI and ECI codes The option menu Provisioned Apparatus Code lists the provisioned packs and the value None for unprovisioning Provisioning In formation The None value can be used to unprovision the AP The cur rent window will be closed and the Common AP window pops up cf Chapter 5 5 5 5 page 5 63 There are two different Provisioned Apparatus Codes for the MDSU unit These indicate whether the pack is the left hand or the right hand unit Operation The check box Slot Required displays the required state of the shelf slot This state can be changed by the operator only if the card is not inserted AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 5 81 NE management equipment configuration Equipment configuration ee 5 5 5 16 Modify an MDSU Complete the following procedure to modify the MDSU server data Step Procedure 1 Select NE gt Main Shelf gt MDSU in the Network Element Browser and View via the cursor menu or single click on the pack MDSU in Shelf View window The MDSU window pops up 2 Use the option menu Slot Id to select the desired MDSU If you want to then unprovision the MDSU use the option menu Provisioned Ap paratus Cod
502. switch or off line diagnostics for the stand by COMDAC Parameters in the The parameters in the common block have the following meaning common block Table 7 11 Common block parameters for SCHED EX Possible Values x 1 365 Parameter Meaning Format INVL Periodicity The number x DAY Interval of days between two stand by card tests STM The time of day when hh mm Start time stand by card tests shall be performed hh 0 23 hour of day mm 0 59 minute of hour AEM R1 7 7 30 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 Fault management and maintenance Test management p SSe Please refer to the network element documentation for a detailed description of TL1 commands including an explanation of the input format restrictions error conditions etc Result Depending on the standby card test result the following behaviour can be ob served m Ifthe test is successful the side switch will be performed m If the test fails then no side switch will be performed Additionally an alarm will be raised in this case 7 4 1 4 Built in self test Test Request Each NE performs a built in self test of plug in circuit packs periodically gt NOTE The built in self test is not requested from the AEM it will be always started from the NE Procedure If a failure occurs the NE will raise an alarm REPT ALM which contains the AID of the failed pack The alarm is then visible in the Alarm Viewer of the AEM
503. t Indicates the status of the test Possible values In_Progress Passed Could not be started Passed with warning Aborted m Start Time Indicates the date and time when the test was Started Command but The Get Test List button is used to display the list above fons The Remove button can be used to remove a test from the list in the data agent It is enabled only if a test has been se lected 2 Click on Get Test List to display the list of the ADSL tests stored in the data agent 3 Select an entry in the test list and click on Remove to remove a test from the list or proceed with step 4 4 Click on Close to exit the window gt NOTE If a test is already running status In_Progress a new start ADSL cor rupted CRC test cf Chapter 7 4 2 2 page 7 35 ADSL BIST test Chapter 7 4 2 3 page 7 37 of the same kind of test will provoke a warning If the text exists in the table remove it and launch the test again Therefore it is recommended to remove a test from the list after the execu tion has been finished AEM R1 7 7 34 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 Fault management and maintenance Test management mm ee 7 4 2 2 ADSL corrupted CRC test Procedure Proceed as follows to set up an ADSL corrupted CRC test Step Procedure 1 Open one of the following windows m ADSL AP window cf Chapter 5 5 5 29 m ADSL Drop window cf Chapter 5 5 5 31 2 Use the option menu near the Apply button to selec
504. t Corrupted CRC Test and click on Apply The ADSL Corrupted CRC Test window pops up ADSL Corrupted CRC Test Figure 7 12 ADSL Corrupted CRC Test window The following table shows the parameters of this window Parameters Buttons Description NE Name NE name of the selected NE max 30 characters Physical Drop This field shows the port of the drop affected by the test Id Possible values drop 1 1 15 1 x subdrop 1 8 1 8 1 x x is the number of drops supplied by the server AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 7 35 Fault management and maintenance Test management p SeSe Parameters Buttons Description Provisioned This code identifies the type of the provisioned pack Pack Type Possible value ADSL Test Program ming Directionality This option menu is used to define the direc tion of the test Possible values Upstream Downstream Test Duration in Seconds This option menu is used to define the test duration in seconds Possible values 0 511 Test Results This field shows the test result Possible values PASS PASS WARNING FAIL IN PROGRESS ABORTED NOT STARTED INVALID TEST Additional Information This field shows additional informa tion related to the CRC test If the CRC has been passed the number of the detected CRC is displayed Apply This button is used to execute the corrupted CRC test Test Results 3 Use the option menus in the Test Programming
505. t NE gt Subshelves in the Network Element Browser and Edit via the cursor menu or select View gt Object via the menu bar The IAT Subshelf window pops up If you want to then provision an IAT subshelf click on Provision deprovision a subshelf use the option menus Physical Index and Subshelf Type to select the de sired subshelf and click on Deprovision AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 5 89 NE management equipment configuration Equipment configuration p See If you want to then create a cross connection to the IAT use the option menu Physical Index to subshelf select the desired subshelf use the option menus in the field Cross Connection Information to se lect the corresponding server and ports of the desired cross connection and click on Provision in the Cross Con nection Information field delete a cross connection to the sub use the option menus Physical Index shelf and Subshelf Type to select the de sired subshelf use the option menus in the field Cross Connection Information to se lect the corresponding values for AP Server NONE Server Port NONE and Feeder Port and click on Deprovision in the Cross Connection Information field A Warning window pops up displaying the following message Cross connection will be removed Ok to proceed add a logical DSO select a row in the Physical DSO Infor mation list with no cross connection and press Add Logical DSO
506. t This button is used to retrieve the ATM traffic data This button can be used to restart the traffic data of the se lected NE Reset Counts 8 4 2 Modify the ATM traffic monitoring Procedure Complete the following procedure to modify the ATM traffic monitoring Step Procedure 1 Select NE in the Network Element Browser and Performance gt ATM Traffic via the cursor menu The ATM Traffic Monitoring window pops up 2 Use the check box Log Performance Data to define whether the monitor ing data should be logged or not If you want to then retrieve the traffic monitoring data click on Get restart the traffic monitoring data coun click on Reset Counts ter exit the window click on Close AEM R1 7 8 10 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 Data communications network DCN configuration Contents A 1 Overview A 1 A 2 DCN introduction AA A 3 Terms used in this chapter A 2 AA NE communication capabilities A 3 A 5 AEM communication capabilities A 5 A 6 Recommended DCN configurations A 5 A 6 1 ROC over semi permanent leased lines DCN A 6 A 6 1 1 Router configuration A 6 A 6 1 2 AnyMedia network element configuration A 7 A 6 1 3 AEM server configuration A 7 A 6 1 4 AEM client configuration A 8 A 6 1 5 Local digital switch configuration A 8 A 6 2 Communication with remote NEs using inband ATM PVC A 9 A 6 2 1 Configuration of the router A 10 A 6 2 2 Configuration of AnyMedia Access Syste
507. t be provided External composite office clock m Free running mode For free running operation the NE derives timing from an internal crystal oscillator XO with an accuracy not worse than 32 parts per million ppm over full power supply temperature and life time The free running mode is intended only for turn up and failure condi tions m Loop timed mode In this mode a selected feeder DS1 signal synchro nizes an internal phase locked loop The NE can loop time to any feeder DS1 input as required by TR303 However the system will only use two timing inputs selected via provisioning for protection reasons Timing Inputs The two timing inputs are identified as Primary reference source and Second ary protection source The first DS1 feeder of the first IO_DS1 pack is the de fault primary input and the first feeder of the second IO_DS1 pack is the default secondary input The network provider can tailor the set of valid timing inputs and their priorities via provisioning The primary and secondary reference signals can be selected from any physical feeder inputs on any two IO_DS1 packs or from two feeder inputs on the same pack The NE can continue to derive timing from the reference inputs if one or both of the physical inputs are switched to the pro tection IO_DS1 pack For more information refer to the network elements documentation Upon initialization the NE selects the primary input as the active reference and the
508. t lucent OS51_SP2 AEM R1 7 2 40 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 Software installation and commissioning Installation procedure p Se Oject Store path set to LuOSRT ObjectStore Release 5 1 Service Pack 3 5 1_SP2 Run Time bin lib osversion Package lt LuOX23RT gt OrbixMT Version 2 3c02MT Run Time have been found in opt lucent OrbixMT_2 3c2 Creating data bases OK Creating Database 2839 Killed orbixd daemon pid 2839 have been killed Was mine You have the installation logfile in tmp EM_Install_LuSec log Installation of lt LuSec gt was successful Combined Shelf in Processing package instance lt LuShelf gt from stallation lt homelocal tmp lucent AnyMediaEMR1 7 gt AnyMedia Element Manager Shelf Release 1 7 Administration sparc LuShelf_36_1 1 kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk AnyMedia Element Manager c 1999 Lucent Technologies kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Package lt LuSysAdm gt SystemAdmin LuSysAdm_36_1 1 have been found in opt lucent AnyMediaEM_R1 7 OK No previous package LuShelf have been found Using lt gt as the package base directory Processing package information Processing system information AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 2 41 Software installation and commissioning Installation procedure p SSe 1 package pathname is already properly installed Verifying disk space requirements Checking
509. t maintain the alarm history it only stores the current alarm statuses An alarm can be in one of the following states m Severity states m raised m cleared m Acknowledgment states m acknowledged m not acknowledged The main responsibilities of the alarm management subsystem AMS are the fol lowing m maintain up to date alarm information notify alarm changes to alarm clients m provide access to the current alarm data m manage alarm raising m manage cleared alarms m manage acknowledgment of alarms m synchronization of the alarm data per NE m AEM alarm log handling m periodical deletion of cleared alarms 7 2 2 Maintain up to date alarm information During the alarm life time the AEM updates the following information m the date and time of the last severity change Date amp Time Last Change m the last alarm severity change Perceived Severity m the last alarm acknowledge status change Acknowledge State m the last user id which has acknowledged an alarm Acknowledge User m the number of raises the alarm has been raised between the first raised time and the actual time Number Raises m the last alarm correlation state change Correlation State During an alarm life the severity status can change from raised to cleared and vice versa AEM R1 7 7 2 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 Fault management and maintenance Alarm management Raise Clear Figure 7 1 Life cycle of an alarm 7 2 3 Alarm notificatio
510. t may be service affecting Do you want do continue After confirming this warning the following In Progress message pops up Port Test execution in progress on lt NE Name gt lt Slot ID gt lt Provisioned Apparatus Code gt lt Port id gt 4 Wait until the Port Test Result window appears and view the test result Test result The Port Test Result window shows the test results of a series of self diagnostic routines on a specific port circuit Port Test Result Figure 7 9 Port Test Result window The text fields are display only they have the following meaning Parameters Buttons Description NE Name NE name of the selected NE max 30 characters as speci fied at NE creation time This field shows the port ofthe AP affected by the test Possible values drop 1 1 16 11 x subdrop 1 8 1 8 1 x x depends on the card type Provisioned Ap This code identifies the type of the provisioned card for ex paratus Code ample LPA380 LPA300 etc Result This field displays the result of the test routines Possible values PASS or FAIL Physical Drop Id 5 Click on Close to exit the Port Test Result window AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 7 27 Fault management and maintenance Test management p See 7 4 1 2 AP Card Test Purpose By means of an AP card test you are able to start a series of self diagnostic rou tines for all port circuits on a specified AP plus its com
511. t more than two re sponses may be lost otherwise the connection is closed by the AEM Default values for monitoring These values can be configured by the user via the system variables NEM asso ciation heartBeatNumber and NEM association heartBeatTime in the file ANYMEDIAPATH cfg AnyMediaEM cfg 5 5 2 3 NE Management window tab Tele phony This window shows the provisioning information and allows the provisioning and deprovisioning of an NE telephony agent NE Management Orus Dziz Figure 5 16 NE Management window tab Telephony Parameters Buttons Description NE Name NE name of the selected NE max 30 characters AEM R1 7 5 40 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 NE management equipment configuration Equipment configuration p Se Parameters Buttons Provisioning In formation Description Once the connection is established the following fields can not be edited unless the connection is interrupted connec tion state Not Managed Communications Info This field contains the editable text fields IP Address and TID This information is mandatory to get a AEM NE connection Authentication Information This field contains the text fields Login and Password This information is also manda tory to get a AEM NE connection The Label button is used to provision deprovision the NE Provision f the NE is not provisioned or any value has been changed Provisioning is enabled only if t
512. t shall be deleted from the AEM database Procedure Complete the following procedure to delete an NE Step Procedure 1 Select NE in the Network Element Browser and Remove via the cursor menu or select File gt Remove via the menu bar A Warning window pops up You are about to delete lt NE Name gt Do you want to continue If you select No the deletion of the NE is rejected Otherwise the NE will be deleted gt NOTE When an NE is deleted from the AEM database it is still fully functional The TL1 and TCP IP links between the AEM and the NE will be closed and the management access via the AEM is finished until the NE is created and connected again AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 5 173 NE management equipment configuration Equipment configuration a a AEM R1 7 5 174 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 Service provisioning Contents 6 1 6 2 363 211 454 Introduction Service provisioning telephony 6 2 1 Network interface 6 2 1 1 6 2 1 2 6 2 1 3 6 2 1 4 6 2 1 5 6 2 1 6 6 2 1 7 6 2 1 8 VRT VB List window Use the VRT VB List VRT TR303 window Modify the VRT TR303 VRT TRO8 window Modify the VRT TRO8 VB INA window Modify the VB INA 6 2 2 Physical DS1 List window 6 2 2 1 Modify the physical DS1 list 6 2 3 Creation of VRT VB logical feeder T1 cross connection 6 2 3 1 6 2 3 2 6 2 3 3 6 2 3 4 Physical DS1 window Modify the physical DS1 Logical DS1 window Modify
513. t_TASK lee_TASK Ao_TASK Default value Act_TASK Cut through set LOGTELNET Login to connect to AEM server for cut tings through purposes Default value defined at installation time PASSTELNET Password to connect to AEM server for Cut through purposes Default value defined at installation time running Default value defined at installation time Help settings HELP_URL Contains the URL where the help files are located HELP_BROWSER HELP_BROWSER Solaris Setting this property should contain the name of browser being used netscape in our case the full path is not necessary HELP_BROWSER Windows Setting how ever in windows it is necessary to specify the full path where the browser is located remember that in this case it is needed to use double back slashes For example C Program Files Netscape Communicator Program netscape exe Default value netscape Event settings EVENT_DELAY This is the delay applied to all events re ceived by the GUI except those ones man aged by the System Events Distributor That is the delay between the GUI event reception and the event handler process Value expressed in milliseconds Default value 5000 V5 settings V5_ RADIX This is the radix being used to display the v5 id Default value 10 AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 B 9 Configuration parameters Overview E ee Name Market settings IS NAR MARKET Descripti
514. tall directory opt lucent OrbixWeb3 1 q 9 Type a valid path where the package files must be placed and press Re turn Or press Return to accept the default path Package lt LuJRERT gt jre 1 2 2 05 have been found in opt lucent JDK_1 2 2_05 Checking your DNS domain name The DNS domain name found was es lucent com What is your DNS domain name default es lucent com q 10 Type your DNS domain name and press Return or press Return to ac cept the default name Enter the NS hostname masc216 q 11 Type the AEM server hostname and press Return or accept the default hostname by pressing Return only AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 2 63 Software installation and commissioning Installation procedure a See Wait Do you agree with NS hostname lt masc216 gt IP address lt IP address gt y n q 12 Type y and press Return ifthe IP adress is correct Select owner and group for package files NBR USER GROUP 1 halt other 2 root other 3 smtp root 4 verl staff Enter selection q 13 Type 4 and press Return User verl and Group staff have been selected Using lt gt as the package base directory Processing package information Processing system information Verifying disk space requirements Checking for conflicts with packages already installed Checking for setuid setgid programs This package contains scripts which will be executed
515. tallation and commissioning Installation procedure p See 23 Press Return ObjectStore includes shared libraries For Ob jectStore applications and utilities to work the dynamic linker must be able to find them The recommended arrangement is to have symbolic links in usr lib to the shared libraries If you choose not to make these links then you will have to instruct all ObjectStore users to add opt lucent OS51_SP2 ostore lib to their LD_LIBRARY_PATH environment variable Do you want to create links to ObjectStore li braries in usr lib yes 24 Press Return Since you have requested a File database con figuration you must give a pathname for the transaction log file Where do you want to put the transaction log 25 Type opt lucent transaction log and press Return You have configured this machine to run an Ob jectStore server The server s transaction log is in opt lucent transaction log Do you want to proceed yes 26 Press Return Writing configuration files and initializing the server please wait 000613 091747 ObjectStore Release 5 1 Service Pack 2 Database Server The ObjectStore server is running ObjectStore includes a server daemon which must be running for any application to access an ObjectStore database It is recommended that you auto start the daemon via commands in your operating system startup scripts If you do not configure automatic startup you will have to start the serv
516. talling AnyMedia Element Manager File Browser Release 1 7 administration as lt LuFiBrow gt Installing part 1 of 1 opt lucent AnyMediaEM_R1 7 FileBrowser bin FileBrowser verifying class lt common gt Installation of lt LuFiBrow gt was successful Network Registry Processing package instance lt LUNER gt from installation lt homelocal tmp lucent AnyMediaEMR1 7 gt AnyMedia Network Register Element Manager Release 1 7 Administration sparc LUNER_36_1 1 kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk AnyMedia Element Manager c 1999 Lucent Technologies kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Package lt LuSysAdm gt SystemAdmin LuSysAdm_36_1 1 have been found in opt lucent AnyMediaEM R1 7 OK No previous package LuNER have been found Using lt opt lucent AnyMediaEM_R1 7 gt as the package base directory Processing package information Processing system information Verifying disk space requirements Checking for conflicts with packages already installed Checking for setuid setgid programs This package contains scripts which will be executed with super user permission during the process of installing this package AEM R1 7 2 32 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 Software installation and commissioning Installation procedure p Se Do you want to continue with the installation of lt LUNER gt y n 19 Type y and press Return Installing AnyM
517. tasks In general the number of manageable users and NEs makes it inefficient to start up a process of each type per user or NE The load balancing mechanisms allows the AEM to distribute the current load among the running processes The adminis trator can start up a reasonable number of processes to assure a certain service level according with the expected workload 3 4 2 Start up shutdown of server applica tions via command line The system can be configured at installation time to start up the server applica tions automatically on every reboot An administrator can start up or shut down server applications via a command line interface Commands for The following table shows which commands have to be entered in a terminal win start up and shut dow to start up or shut down server applications down Table 3 6 Commands for start up and shut down If you want to type in a terminal window start up all AEM packages SystemAdmin ALL shut down all AEM packages SystemAdmin CLEAN start up the Administration AEM package SystemAdmin Administration start up the NarrowBand AEM package SystemAdmin NarrowBand start up the BroadBand AEM package SystemAdmin BroadBand SystemAdmin com mand Any combination of the parameters Administration NarrowBand and BroadBand of the SystemAdmin is possible AEM R1 7 3 18 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 System management System administration 3 4 3 System administration window Overv
518. tate The administrative state of the package Possible values ON if the package is up OFF otherwise The Administrative State is changed whenever a star tup or shutdown command is issued Operational State The operational state of the package displayed when the Administrative State is ON only Possible values IS if the package is in service OOS if it is out of service TRANSITORY otherwise AEM R1 7 3 22 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 System management System administration Figure 3 10 System Administration window DMGs Actions in DMGs The following table lists all actions you can perform in the DMGs tab of the System tab Administration window Table 3 12 Actions for the administration of DMGs If you want to then Result start up a DMG select an optional DMG in the table and The selected DMG is started up press Start Up The Administrative State of the DMG must be OFF shut down a DMG select an optional DMG in the table The selected DMG is shut down press Shutdown and confirm the shut down in the warning window which pops up The Administrative State of the package must be ON edit a DMG select the DMG and press Edit The Edit DMG window is displayed cf Chapter 3 4 5 AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 3 23 System management System administration p See 3 4 3 4 Administration of module groups Overview The module groups MGs tab in the System Administ
519. tate re flected this button displays the possible operation Clear if the loopback is set Set if the loopback is cleared Timing Source Displays whether or not the selected physi cal DS1 is the timing source reference Yes or No The ref erence can be changed via the Edit Timing Source but ton on the right hand side This button provides access to the Timing Source Control window cf Chapter 5 5 6 4 page 5 129 to allow the modification of the current NE tim ing source reference DS1 Regeneration only for NE R1 2 2 This field displays the current DS1 regeneration state clear or set The Label button is used to set or clear the physical DS1 regeneration Depend ing on the state reflected this button displays the possible oper ation Clear if the state is set Set if the state is cleared AEM R1 7 6 22 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 Service provisioning Service provisioning telephony p Se Parameters Buttons X Connection Information Description Logical DS1 Id This field displays the logical DS1 id which is cross connected with the selected physical DS1 id If there is no cross connection this field is empty Add Logical DS1 This button provides access to the Log ical DS1 window to add a new logical DS1 to the selected physical DS1 The button is available only if there is no logi cal DS1 cross connection to the selected physical DS1 Edit Logical DS1 This button provides acce
520. tate use the check box Slot Required in the field Operation amp Protection and click on Apply modify the protection scheme click on IO DS1 Protection button to open the Shelf Protection window IO DS1 tab cf Chapter 5 5 11 3 page 5 146 add a logical DS1 select a Physical DS1 Id in the list with no cross connected logical DS1 id and press Add Logical DS1 The Logical DS1 window pops up cf Chapter 6 2 3 3 page 6 26 The same result will be obtained by double clicking on the corresponding row edit a physical DS1 use the option menu near the Edit but ton to select Physical DS1 and press Edit The Physical DS1 window pops up cf Chapter 6 2 3 1 page 6 21 edit a logical DS1 select a row with an existing cross con nection in the Physical DS1 Informa tion list use the option menu near the Edit but ton to select Logical DS1 and press Edit The Logical DS1 window pops up cf Chapter 6 2 3 3 page 6 26 AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 5 57 NE management equipment configuration Equipment configuration ee If you want to then remove a cross connection select a row with an existing cross con nection in the Physical DS1 Informa tion list and press Remove A Warning window pops up displaying the following message Logical DS1 will be removed Ok to proceed exit the window click on Close AEM R1 7 5 58 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 NE management equipment
521. ted NE max 30 characters VRT VB id This option menu lists all VRT VB ids of the selected type Operational The Operational State shows the VRT VB service state ob State tained from the NE through the use of the Get button Possible values Enabled Disabled The Secondary Operational State shows the secondary service state obtained from the NE The Get button retrieves the VRT VB service state Command But Three buttons provide access to other windows tons Depending on the right hand side option menu provides the Add button access to different windows Logical DS1 win dow Logical DSO window Physical DS1 List This button provides access to the Physical DS1 List window Logical DSO List This button provides access to the Log ical DSO List window AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 6 15 Service provisioning Service provisioning telephony p Se 6 2 1 8 Modify the VB INA The VB INA window can be reached only from the VRT VB List window via Edit VRT VB button Procedure Complete the following procedure to modify the VB INA Step Procedure 1 Use the option menu VRT VB id to choose a desired VRT VB type If you want to then get the current service states of the click on Get in the Operational State VRT VB field add a logical DS1 use the option menu at the right hand side of the Add button to choose Logi cal DS1 and click on Add The Logical DS1 window pops up cf
522. ter face does not support DC feeding and does not support out band signaling This interface can support Analog Leased Line ALL service AEM R1 7 GL 12 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 aa Index A Access bar 3 4 Access protection 1 30 Access to the testroutines 7 25 Actions 1 15 3 46_ AEM external system LAN interface A 5_ AEM NB protocol profiles A 5_ Alarm log 1 27 monitoring 1 25 Classification 7 39_ Alarm Reporting 7 3 Alarm Severities 7 40 Alarm Viewer Alarm Table 7 15 General Information 7 14 Menu Bar 7 12 System management functions 7 18 Toolbar 7 14 Alarm viewer Starting 7 10 ALARM_AO_NOT_PROCESS 7 43 ALARM_EVENT_NOT_PROCESS 7 44 Alarms Alarm classification 7 39 Reporting via EM 7 3 Alternate key 3 5 AMAS R1 2 shelf 5 2 AP card test 7 28 AP card test result 7 29 AP provisioning 5 63 Applications start 3 4 Apply button 3 14 Archive database 3 38 Archive command 3 40 Assign controlled objects to domains 4 12 user groups access to applications 4 21 user groups access to domains 4 20 user groups access to tasks 4 22 users to user groups 4 6 Association NE AEM 5 39 Association state 5 39 Autonomous Reports 1 15 3 46 6 Available Domains 5 3 363 211 454 B Background map Backspace key 3 5 Backup command 3 40 level 3 43 schedules 3 43 types 3 38 Backup database 3 38 Bridge definition A 2_ Built in self test 7 31 Buttons often used Apply 3
523. terChangeability Code Indicates the interchange ability among packs to specify forward backward compatibil ity Format of the ICC is m n where m is the issue number and n the series number CLEI Code assigned by Bellcore that provides information about the functionality of the pack ECI Code that corresponds to the bar coded label on the faceplate of the pack There is a one to one correspondence between CLEI and ECI codes Operation amp This field is described in Chapter 5 5 10 page 5 140 Protection Software Ver NE Type Displays whether the NE is a COT or not sion Possible value for this release REMOTE TERMINAL SW Version Software version that has been obtained from the NE at connection time The AEM will have to verify whether the mentioned SW Version is manageable by the system Ongoing Tasks These check boxes indicate operations in progress which can take a long time and must be known by the operator They will be refreshed when the window is launched or when refreshing the whole window 2 Click on Close to exit the window AEM R1 7 5 60 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 NE management equipment configuration Equipment configuration p Se 5 5 5 4 View the CTU parameters The CTU craft test unit provides both channel testing support and a termination for local operations administration maintenance and provisioning Procedure Complete the following procedure to view edit the CTU data Step
524. that can be managed by the AEM as well as the deletion and edition of their at tributes It also involves the movement of a group from a old parent group to a new parent group and the information of the group status parameter Due to the increase of the number of NEs to be managed by the AEM they are displayed in a layered way displaying sets of NEs instead of the whole set of NEs These groups can contain NEs and or other groups Groups and NEs are distrib uted in a tree hierarchy with the root group as the starting point of the tree AEM R1 7 Version 1 00 06 00 5 23 NE management equipment configuration Groups and NEs management p See The root group has no group icon nor group coordinates as it is never shown from an upper layer Instead it has a background map to display the icons of the items of the first level Root level Root group background map First level NE Second level Group 1 1 Group 1 2 Group 2 1 Third level Group 1 2 1 Group 1 2 2 Figure 5 8 Tree hierarchy of groups and NEs View levels The root group is a special group that is created at the first start up and can never be deleted It is the only item in the root level of Figure 5 8 From this level only the items of the first level are visible for example Group 1 Group 2 and NE1 are directly reachable from the root level Allocation to back To facilitate the visualization of the child items of a group a background map can ground
525. that no more processes can be added other wise a process is added to the module remove a process select the process which shall be re If the minimum number of processes from the module moved and press Remove Confirm the which have to run is reached the status removal in the warning window which bar displays a message that no more opens processes can be removed otherwise the process is removed from the AEM killa process from select the process which shall be killed The physical process is killed the module and press Kill Confirm the killing in the warning window which opens recover a process of select the process which shall be recov The process is recovered the module ered and press Recover 3 4 7 Contents of packages and distributed module groups The following tables show which distributed module groups are contained in a cer tain package also which module groups are in a certain distributed module group and finally which modules are contained in a certain module group Table 3 21 Module group types in a certain package Package Module group type AlarmRead AlarmUpdate Administration Narrowband Broadband Administration Narrowband Broadband Administration Narrowband Broadband AlarmDistributor Administration Narrowband Broadband HighestSeverityAlarmEventDistribu tor Narrowband Broadband NER Narrowband Broadband NEEventDistributor AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version
526. the AEM GUI will not get to know whether a northbound interface session is running or not C 3 Northbound interface specific TL1 messages Some TL1 messages feature more parameters when invoked via AEM These TL1 messages are described in this section namely m REPT ALM Report Alarm m RTRV ALM Retrieve Alarms m RTRV ALM ENV Retrieve Alarm Environment AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 C 3 Northbound interface Northbound interface specific TL1 messages p See C 3 1 REPT ALM Report Alarm C3 11 Purpose A REPT ALM Report Alarm message is generated autonomously by the NE to report the occurrence of an equipment facility or system alarm condition to the OS AEM and CIT An alarm condition reported via the REPT ALM message has a corresponding REPT ALM clearance message that is generated when the alarm condition clears Abortable No Privilege Code Reports Only GSI Confirmation Required No File Transfer No Related Autonomous Message None C 3 1 2 Output format If the command request completes successfully the following normal completion response is returned sid date time AC atag REPT ALM AIDTYPE AID NTFCNCDE CONDTYPE SRVEFF OCRDAT OCRTM CONDDESCR C 3 1 3 Output format parameters AID Access identifier This parameter appears in the Access ID Block Type Access ID Required Yes AID is the address of the equipment or facility for which an alarm is being re ported Abbreviation M
527. the NE could be lost edit an AFM feeder enter a new value for Shelf VPI and press Apply The following warning message pops up Changing the Shelf VPI may be service affecting and it will take a time Do you want to continue enter new values for OAM VPI and OAM VCI and press Apply The follow ing warning message pops up Changing the OAM VPI VCI may be service affecting It will take a time and it can make that communication with NE is not recovered if OAM PVC is used for management communi cations Do you want to con tinue gt NOTE If the same value has been en tered for OAM VPI as for Shelf VPI the only possible value for OAM VCI is 32 select the desired feeder and press Edit or double click on the row entry The AFM Feeder window pops up cf Chapter 5 5 5 25 page 5 99 AEM R1 7 Version 1 00 06 00 5 97 NE management equipment configuration Equipment configuration ee If you want to then reset the AFM pack click on Reset The following warning message pops up Resetting the AFM may be service affecting and will take a time Do you want to continue 2 Click on Close to exit the window AEM R1 7 5 98 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 NE management equipment configuration Equipment configuration 5 5 5 25 AFM Feeder window data applica tion This screen is used to configure the AFM feeder parameters It can be reached from the AFM window cf Chapter 5 5 5 2
528. the Series Number SW Version Shelf Version The software version is only ap plicable for COMDACs and AFMs For these packs it is ob tained from the NE at connection time Internally the AEM verifies whether the mentioned SW Version is manageable by the system The shelf version applies to shelves and sub shelves NE Summary Apparatus Code Displays a mnemonic that identifies the apparatus code type Possible values COM101 FAC100 DTP100 LPS100 LPA380 LPA300 LPA350 LPU116 LPA900 LPA400 LPA400B LPA404 LPA408 LPA414 MSU100 Number of Units Displays two numbers the number of packs and the number of unplugged units AEM R1 7 5 138 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 NE management equipment configuration Equipment configuration p Se 5 5 8 2 Get the NE inventory data Procedure Complete the following procedure to display the NE inventory data Step Procedure 1 Select NE in the Network Browser and Inventory via the cursor menu The NE Inventory window pops up cf Chapter 5 5 8 1 page 5 137 2 Clicking on one of the column headers sorts the inventory data according to the column entries Clicking again reverses the sort order 3 Click on Close to exit the window 5 5 9 Network element working mode Selection of the working mode via GUI is not yet implemented It is only possible via Cut Through interface cf Chapter 5 5 16 page 5 169 using TL1 commands Set CFG ISDN SW CFG The system suppo
529. the operation 06 00 AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Fault management and maintenance Alarm monitoring p Se NE Selection SHELF20_NB sh13 EM Figure 7 7 NE selection window 7 3 4 4 Administrator defined filters Administrator priv Only a user with administrator privileges can define own alarm filters in the Alarm ileges required Viewer application Filter syntax This filter consist of a combination of logical expressions over the so called field value tuples of the alarm database Each logical expression consists of an alarm field a relational operator gt lt and a value for the specified alarm field Pa renthesis can be used for grouping expressions Filter file If the administrator specifies a logical expression in the filter file the AMS will query the alarm database to return the list of alarms that match this logical ex pression For instance an administrator can request all critical alarms of an NE or all platform alarms or all alarms which are service affecting and are raised at the same time 7 3 4 4 1 Syntax rules The following rules have to be obeyed for building a filter expression m The filter file must contain a single line only m A space has to be used between field names possible values operators and brackets m The expression NULL has to be used to represent an empty string AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 7 21 Fault management and maintenance Alarm monitoring
530. this control will be disabled Possible values 8 1 5 step 0 25 Default 8 Transmit TLP This slider can be used to set a fixed transmission gain or TTLP loss in dB Negative values define loss positive values de fine gain Only valid if LOSS is Fixed If LOSS is not fixed this control will be disabled Possible values 6 75 4 5 step 0 25 Default 4 5 Impedance This option menu can be used to define the termination im pedance of the tip ring interface Possible values 600 900 Default 900 Equalization This slider can be used to set the slope equalization for the AP or CU Possible values 0 7 step 1 Default 0 Trunk Condition This option menu can be used to determine whether the AP or CU sets the signaling state toward the CO Central Office to the Idle state Busy or the DSO remote alarm indication Rai code during a fault condition Default Idle Busy for 2FX AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 6 45 Service provisioning Service provisioning telephony 6 2 4 11 2RVO Service Details window Overview The 2RVO 2 wire loop reverse battery originate is applicable to the PRCOIN LPA350 and PROG2W LPA380 APs Balance Mode Fixed Trunk Condition Idle f Balance RTLP eload Successful Figure 6 19 Logical DS0 window 2RVO Service Details Parameters Description Receive TLP RTLP Transmit TLP TTLP Impedance This slider can
531. tion of combined tasks The integrated management of both agents telephony and data requires not only the equipment configuration features described previously for each agent but also a unique view of some areas for example subshelf management pack provision ing etc AEM R1 7 5 14 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 NE management equipment configuration Initial windows p Se 5 3 Initial windows This major application provides the user with the facilities needed to fully config ure AnyMedia network elements both equipment and services Groups and NEs Man Figure 5 5 Groups and NEs Management window The initial window consists of three windows At the top the menu bar cf Chapter 5 3 1 page 5 16 and the tool bar cf Chapter 5 3 2 page 5 17 On the left hand side the Network Browser cf Chapter 5 3 2 1 page 5 17 On the right hand side the Background Map window shows a background map of a selected NE group cf Chapter 5 3 3 page 5 18 Depending on previous actions the following frames are additionally available 363 211 454 On the right hand side a common area is used for the display of the infor mation requested through the menu bar cursor menu or tool bar if present A Network Element Browser cf Chapter 5 3 2 2 page 5 18 shows all the components of the NE which has been selected via the Network Browser AEM R1 7 Version 1 00 06 00 5 15 NE management equipment configuration
532. tions of general AEM platform alarms includ ing proposals for corrective maintenance actions Alphabetical order In the following the AEM platform alarms are listed alphabetically 7 5 4 1 LOG_DEL_FULL Meaning All old logs have been deleted Because more available space was necessary the log type of the current day has been deleted too The Object_Id shows which log type has been deleted Abbreviation LOG_DEL_ FULL Severity Major Service affecting No Effects There are no old logs available and not all logs of the current day are available to be viewed or stored Possible cause s There may be a problem or abnormal situation in the AEM or the selection of the configurable size limits of the log system was too small Corrective actions Proceed as follows to clear the alarm Step Procedure 1 Check the AEM for problems or abnormal situations Have any problems or abnormal situations occurred Yes Try to resolve these problems or abnormal situations If this is not possible continue with step 2 No Continue with step 2 2 Check the size limits of the log system Are the size limits set correctly cf Chapter 3 7 2 Yes Call Lucent Technologies Technical Support No Set the size limits correctly i e increase the size limits AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 7 41 Fault management and maintenance Alarms U SeSe e 7 5 4 2 LOG_DEL_PART Meaning A log type not yet archived has been deleted due
533. to the IAT IAT RT link working is detected AFM FLT red Lit when a fault is detected on the pack ACT green Indicates that this AFM is active CR MJ red Lit when the highest severity alarm is critical or major MN yellow Lit when the highest severity alarm is minor CLF1 yellow Lit when a fault or facility alarm occurs on the in service received D1 port 1 CLF2 yellow Lit when a fault or facility alarm occurs on the in service received D1 port 2 AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 7 5 Fault management and maintenance Alarm management E I O 4 170 5 C i i couwrun Caurun FLT FLT FLT I O P I O 1 COM1 COM2 CTU AP 1 AP 2 AP 3 AP AP 5 AP 6 AP 7 AP 8 AP 9 AP 10 AP 11 AP 12 AP 13 AP 14 AP 15 AP 16 FG ade rosone Figure 7 2 Pack MSC PTU Inserted View _ Provisioned View Example of a shelf view MDS2 Shelf View Window Lit when a fault is detected on the pack m Lit when loss of clock sync signal is de tected m Flashes when incorrect MDSU MDS2 MDS82B side association is detected DT Lit when a fault is detected on the pack Lit when a channel served by the PTU is un der test AFM Lit when a fault is detected on the pack Indicates that this AFM is active Lit when the highest severity alarm is critical or major CLF1 CLF2 yellow Lit when the highest severity alarm is minor yellow Lit when a fa
534. to 5 Default value 4 BAM association snmpRetries Maximum number of times for a SNMP re transmission Possible values 1 to 10 Default value 3 BAM association nextAttempt Time to wait after a new SNMP communica tion attempt Possible values 0 to 50 minutes Default value 5 BAM alarmSync period Time between periodic alarm synchronization Possible values 3600 to 86400 seconds Default value 21600 BAM cfgSync period Time between periodic config synchronization AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 B 5 Configuration parameters Overview mm ee Name Description BAM timeSync delay Maximal time delay when a time synchroniza tion is not needed Possible values 0 to 30 seconds Default values 30 BAM cfgSync maxRetries Maximum number of retries of full synchroni zations Possible values 0 to 5 times Default value 3 BAM trapHandler queueSize Maximum size of the trap s queue Possible values 1 to 1000 elements Default value 1000 OAM settings OAM backup archiveDirectory Destination of the log files archived by the AnyMedia archive script if it is not specified as command line parameter It can be a tape de vice Default value archives OAM backup backupDirectory Destination of the log files and data bases backed up by the AnyMedia backup script if it is not specified as command line parameter It can be a tape device Default value backups
535. to lack of available space Abbreviation LOG_DEL_PART Severity Minor Service affecting No Effects The respective log type can neither be viewed nor archived Possible cause s There may be a problem or an abnormal situation in the AEM or the configurable size limits of the log system have not been chosen correctly Corrective actions Proceed as follows to clear the alarm Step Procedure 1 Archive the remaining logs to prevent them from being deleted 2 Check the AEM for problems or abnormal situations Have any problems or abnormal situations occurred Yes Try to resolve these problems or abnormal situations If this is not possible continue with step 3 No Continue with step 3 3 Check the size limits of the log system Are the size limits set correctly cf Chapter 3 7 2 Yes Call Lucent Technologies Technical Support No Set the size limits correctly i e increase the size limits 7 5 4 3 PRINT_ALARM Meaning There are one or more problems blocking the printing jobs Abbreviation PRINT ALARM Severity Major Service affecting No Effects It is not possible to print reports Possible cause s There may be a problem in the printer the spoolers the network or the AEM AEM R1 7 7 42 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 Fault management and maintenance Alarms mm ee Corrective actions Proceed as follows to clear the alarm Step Procedure 1 Check if a default printer is defined Yes Continue with ste
536. tore data For database backup and restoration the AEM is able to create maintain a copy of provisioning data from the active COMDAC or AFM NVDS When a loss of data occurs in the NE due to factors such as human error power failure or hardware and software failures the restoration features enable the AEM to restore a previ ous backup to one NE Backup media The AEM is able to store the backup copy in diverse storage media that can in clude HDD hard disk drive tapes removable disk cartridges and any other avail able mass storage medium FTP For database backup and restoration operations the AEM uses an FTP file trans fer protocol connection within the NE FTP allows the AEM to overwrite or copy information residing on the NE The AEM can open only one FTP session per NE at a time where the AEM will support the client role of the FTP session and the AnyMedia Access System will play the server part Failing backup re The backup and restore processes will fail if the time period during which the con store nection is lost exceeds the time out defined in the AEM or the NE time out other wise the process will continue after the connection is recovered AEM R1 7 5 162 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 NE management equipment configuration Equipment configuration p SSe 5 5 15 1 Data backup telephony agent Procedure Complete the following procedure to initiate data backup for a telephony agent Step Procedure 1 Sele
537. trolled systems p See m Each DS3 has a 44 736 Mbps transmission rate and carries ATM payload cells m The network DS3 may terminate directly at an DS3 interface of an ATM network node or may be transported over a synchronous optical network transmission system m The network DS3 provides a user network interface UNI 3 1 cell format toward the network as defined in the ATM Forum 5 2 3 3 DS3 framing and synchronization For DS3 framing direct cell mapping or PLCP is used The AFM transmit clock is provisionable to be free running The status of the DS3 ports is provided by LEDs on the AFM as well as by the AEM GSI display 5 2 3 4 Broadband synchronization and tim ing Feeder timing The timing source used by the AFM is not provisionable The choices are as fol lows m Loop timed from the input of DS3 1 default value m Free running Loop timed When the timing source is set to loop timed the AFM recovers the timing from the DS3 input that connects toward the ATM network DS3 1 It distributes the recov ered timing to the DS3 2 downstream interface and also to the output of DS3 1 The AFM recovers and distributes timing in this fashion regardless of where it is in a daisy chain or if it is operating alone Therefore the AFM recovers timing from DS3 1 regardless of whether DS3 1 is connected to the ATM transport network or to DS3 2 of another AFM Free running When the timing source is set to free running all DS3 timing i
538. ts AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 1 19 Functional description System and software architecture p SSe 1 3 2 Hardware platform 1 3 2 1 Architecture Components A number of AEM Clients UNIX Workstations can be added to the AEM Server to support concurrent users or remote access to the server s applications These clients can be connected through a TCP IP infrastructure or a Wide Area Network WAN Examples are shown in Figure 1 9 to Figure 1 12 Tasks of the The tasks of the components are m nen components m AEM server Manages all the AEM applications and provides access to the NEs the da tabase and the external OS AEM client Formats the display of the application screens and manages the users ses sions with the application e g database access Conceptional Figure 1 4 is a conceptual representation of the various generic components representation GUI AEM client server database AEM client AEM System Figure 1 4 Hardware components AEM R1 7 1 20 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 Functional description System and software architecture Examples of Two examples of an AEM system are shown in Figure 1 5 AEMs AEM system 1 AEM system 2 AEM server AEM server Figure 1 5 Examples of AEMs 1 3 2 2 Requirements Server clients A SUN SOLARIS work station can be used as AEM server as well as AEM client Peripherals The AEM system may use a number of
539. ts General The Print windows cf Figure 3 15 Figure 3 16 and Figure 3 17 are used from any application within AEM to generate an output of data System details for If the Unix command 1p does not exist or is not configured on your system the printing AEM software will not be able to print This is because the print out is first con verted to PostScript format and then piped to the Unix command lp d printer_name where printer_name is replaced by the value en tered in the Printer field of the Print Dialog Print options de The available options in the print dialogue depend on the used operating system pend on operation and may slightly differ from the descriptions below e g under Solaris it is not pos system sible to change the orientation of the printed page 3 5 1 Page Setup dialog Page Setup The Page Setup dialog pops up after the selection of Print Window in a window or Print in the Preview Frame dialog Figure 3 16 shows an example of the Page Setup dialog Paper Size US Letter 77 Orientation Portrait Landscape Reverse Landscape Figure 3 15 Page Setup dialog Actions in Page The following table provides an overview of the possible actions in the Page Setup Setup dialog dialog Table 3 23 Page Setup dialog actions If you wantto then select the paper size use the option menu Paper Size AEM R1 7 3 34 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 System management Print out reports Table 3 2
540. ts sorted alphabetically The Selected NEs list shows all NEs to which the download is being done The Add gt gt button can be used to move the selected NE from the Available NEs list to the Selected NEs list The lt lt Remove button can be used to remove domains from the Selected NEs list The Add gt gt button and the lt lt Remove button are available only after having selected an NE from the corresponding list The check box Standby Comdac Automatic Copy can be used to initiate the automatic copying of the software from the working COMDAC to the standby COMDAC after the software download is completed successfully Download Infor Filename This text field shows the name of the file which mation will be downloaded The Browse button opens the File Browser window where the file can be selected Apply This button is used to start the software download 5 5 12 3 Software download to telephony agent Procedure Complete the following procedure to start the software download Step Procedure 1 Select NE in the Network Element Browser and Software Download gt Telephony via the cursor menu The COMDAC Software Download window pops up 2 Use the radio buttons in the field Selection Criteria to define single or multiple download For single download proceed with step 4 for multiple download proceed with step 3 3 Use the Add gt gt button in the field Target to move the desired NEs to the Av
541. twork management protocol SNMP over UDP IP and FTP over TCP IP The AEM is also prepared to communicate with other legacy OSs by means of TL1 northbound interfaces and via CORBA interface TL1 is used for request response and autonomous reports commands and FTP is used for software and database upload download operations The DCN is the communications infrastructure routers WAN links etc needed for communication of the AEM with the NEs it manages This manual refers to AEM R1 7 Version 1 00 06 00 A 1 Data communications network DCN configuration Terms used in this chapter AEM release 1 7 and the supported NE releases For these releases many DCN configurations and protocol profiles can be used according to the network opera tors needs and scenarios Two sample DCN scenarios are given at the end of this chapter A 3 Terms used in this chapter Data communica tions network Semi permanent leased line Remote operations channel Router Bridge Inband manage ment channel A 2 Version 1 00 The DCN consists of the communication media and the interconnected devices which are used to exchange management information between the AEM the NEs and other management systems A semi permanent leased line SPLL is a service in which resources are used permanently for the transmission of data between two points The switch is the re sponsible for the set up of this service The remote operations channel ROC is a bear
542. uTeSc gt was successful Installation of AnyMedia EM R1 7 was successful lt ADM side installation gt AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 2 47 Software installation and commissioning Installation procedure p See 2 2 1 1 3 Installation of the telephony R1 7 agent optional Complete the following procedure to install the telephony R1 7 agent Step Procedure 1 Go to the directory where the installation script is placed CD ROM 2 of 4 2 Type install_AMEM nb and press Return AnyMedia EM R1 7 installation CopyRight c 2000 Lucent Technologies Inc All Rights Reserved Pre requisites 1 Before attempting to install the application please read the readme txt file 2 AnyMedia EM R1 7 runs on SUN SPARC Solaris 2 computers running Solaris 2 6 plus security and Y2000 and packs 105490 07 105568 13 105210 19 106040 12 105633 21 106409 01 105181 15 105669 07 105284 25 patches recommended by SUN and 106255 01 patch 3 TCP ports The following ports MUST be available in order to succesfully run the AnyMedia EM 1570 Orbix daemon uses the TCP port 1570 in order to wait for incoming connections that use the Orbix protocol 1591 to 1641 As Corba servers are activated by the Orbix daemon they are assigned a port so that clients can communicate with it It is essential that these ports are not used by any process on the SAME SUBNET DOMAIN 4 The install_AMEM script runs on K shell lt
543. uccessful Processing package instance lt LuSec gt from lt homelocal tmp lucent AnyMediaEMR1 7 gt AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 2 39 Software installation and commissioning Installation procedure p ee Security installa AnyMedia Element Manager Security Release 1 7 tion Administration sparc LuSec_36_1 1 kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk AnyMedia Element Manager c 1999 Lucent Technologies kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Package lt LuSysAdm gt SystemAdmin LuSysAdm_36_1 1 have been found in opt lucent AnyMediaEM_R1 7 OK No previous package LuSec have been found Using lt opt lucent AnyMediaEM_R1 7 gt as the package base directory Processing package information Processing system information Verifying disk space requirements Checking for conflicts with packages already installed Checking for setuid setgid programs This package contains scripts which will be executed with super user permission during the process of installing this package Do you want to continue with the installation of lt LuSec gt y n y 22 Type y and press Return Installing AnyMedia Element Manager Security Release 1 7 Administration as lt LuSec gt Installing part 1 of 1 lt files list gt verifying class lt common gt Executing postinstall script Package lt LuOSRT gt ObjectStore 5 1 _SP2 Run Time have been found in op
544. ue 1000 NEM association heartBeat Maximum number of missing heartbeats to the Number NE Possible values 1 to 5 times Default value 3 NEM association heartBeat Time between two heartbeats to the NE Time Possible values 0 to 15 minutes Default value 5 NEM association loopTimer Time to wait after connection to four TCP IP ports have been tried and failed Possible values 0 to 50 minutes Default value 5 AEM R1 7 B 4 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 Configuration parameters Overview mm ee Name Description NEM timeSync delay Maximal time delay in seconds when a time sync is not needed Possible value 0 to 30 seconds Default value 30 NEM association osContext TL1 context used as parameter in ENT OSAC MAP TL1 command Default value TL1OTHER1 NEM association tl1 Timeout Time out for all TL1 commands Possible values 1 to 5 Default value 4 BAM association timeSync Indicates if the time and date in the agents has to be kept in synchronization with the time and date of the AEM Possible values true false Default value true BAM association heartBeat Maximum number of missing heartbeats to the Number NE Possible values 1 to 5 times Default value 3 BAM association heartBeat Time between two heartbeats to the NE time Possible values 0 to 15 minutes Default value 5 BAM association snmpTimeout Time out for all SNMP commands Possible values 1
545. ult management overview 1 3 Fiber Reach 5 171 File Print 7 12 7 18 Reload 7 13 Filr Browser 5 168 Full backup database 3 38 ae H Help icon 3 4 I Icon 3 7 Icons greyed 3 4 ILLEGAL_SW_VERSION 7 50 Incremental backup database 3 38 Input focus 3 6 Installation third party software 1 23 INVALID_MIB_IDENTIFIER 7 48 Inventory Management 5 7 IP Address 5 37_ K Keyboard 3 5 Keys special Alternate 3 5 Backspace 3 5 Control 3 5 Delete 3 5 Escape 3 5 Return 3 5 je SS L LAN interface external system A 3_ Life cycles network 1 22 List box 3 14 Log alarm 1 27 Log alarms 3 47 Log management 3 46 Log out workspace menu 3 12 Log size 3 46 Log type Actions 1 15 3 46 Autonomous Reports 1 15 3 46 System Internal Events 1 15 3 46 Log Viewer application 3 47 LOG_DEL_FULL 7 41 LOG_DEL_PART 7 42 Login 3 2 5 37 AEM R1 7 IN 2 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 Index Logout manually from System 3 3 Loopback Test 7 31 LUMOS Installation 2 10 M MDS2 shelf 5 3 MDS2B Shelf 5 3 5 4 MDS2B Shelf View 5 51_ Menu Actions 7 13 File 7 12 7 18 Filters 7 13 7 19 Help 7 13 Views 7 13 Menu bar 3 10 menu bar 5 16 Menus often used File gt Exit 3 15 File gt Print 3 15 Help gt Index 3 15 Help gt On Window 3 15 Metallic Distribution Shelf 5 3 Metallic Shelf Controller 2 2 5 4 Minimize Restore Front Panel workspace menu 3 12 Modifyin
546. ult or facility alarm occurs on the in service received E1 port 1 yellow Lit when a fault or facility alarm occurs on the in service received E1 port 2 7 6 Version 1 00 06 00 AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Fault management and maintenance Alarm management p See Alarm information For more information on the reported alarm open the Alarm Viewer cf Chapter 7 3 page 7 10 Alarm Acknowledging alarms and clearing alarms is described in Chapter 7 3 5 acknowledg page 7 24 ment clearance 7 2 4 Provide access to the current alarm data Alarm retrieval The user can select lists of alarms filtered by several fields Therefore the user specifies a selection criterion cf Chapter 7 3 4 3 page 7 19 that is taken by the AMS to make the appropriate filters For instance an user can request all the crit ical alarms of an NE or all platform alarms or all alarms which are service affect ing and are raised at the same time The number of alarms stored in the alarm database can be retrieved too The to tal number of alarms can be retrieved as well as the number of alarms per severity number of critical alarms major minor and indeterminate User domains The user domain is the list of NEs and or the AEM the user can manage The user domains are applicable in the AMS to the alarm retrieval operations and to the alarm notification Each user can only request alarms and the number of alarms that are in the user s domain The cl
547. um value for 1 day is 86400 Apply This button is used to confirm the changes AEM R1 7 5 102 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 NE management equipment configuration Equipment configuration p Se 5 5 5 28 Define AFM Feeder PM thresholds data application Procedure Complete the following procedure to define the feeder PM thresholds Step Procedure 1 Select NE in the Network Element Browser and AFM Feeder PM Thres hold via the cursor menu The AFM Feeder PM Thresholds window pops up This window can also be reached from the AFM Feeder window cf Chapter 5 5 5 25 page 5 99 by pressing the PM Thresholds button 2 Use the corresponding text fields to define the desired thresholds and press Apply 3 Click on Close to exit the window AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 5 103 NE management equipment configuration Equipment configuration p See 5 5 5 29 ADSL Application Pack window data application This window includes inventory data operation and protection information as well as general drop information ADSL Application Pack Edit Drop Aili Gross Connections Figure 5 36 ADSL Application Pack window The following table shows the view edit options of this window Parameters Buttons Description NE Name NE name of the selected NE max 30 characters AEM R1 7 5 104 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 NE management equipment configuration Equipment configuration p Se
548. umber and n the series number CLEI Code assigned by Bellcore that provides information about the functionality of the pack ECI Code that corresponds to the bar coded label on the faceplate of the pack There is a one to one correspondence between CLEI and ECI codes The option menu Provisioned Apparatus Code lists the provisioned packs and the value None for unprovisioning Provisioning Info only availa ala Er RAN The None value can be used to unprovision the AP The cur rent window will be closed and the Common AP window pops up cf Chapter 5 5 5 5 page 5 63 Operation The check box Slot required can be used to change the state of the self slot It can be changed only if the pack is not inserted AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 5 67 NE management equipment configuration Equipment configuration p Se Parameters Buttons Description Physical DSO This field contains a table displaying physical DSO informa Information tion This information is presented in a 3 column table The table is sorted by Physical DSO Id A scroll bar allows navigation through the table Rows in the table can be selected to edit add or remove single or multiple row selection the corre sponding Logical DSO s through the use of the Edit Logical DSO Add Logical DSO or Remove Logical T0 buttons see below m Physical DSO Id Identifies the port within the AP Format drop shelf slot port Possible values drop sh
549. unit Manual Switch to Protection The specified service IO DS1 has been manually switched to protection IO DS1 The Protection State displays the current protection state which will be updated as a result of a Protection Switch see below Possible values are Not Equipped Working Standby AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 5 147 NE management equipment configuration Equipment configuration p Se Parameters Buttons Description Protection Radio buttons allow protection switching Clear or Inhibit or Switch Forced Switch to Protection or Manual Switch to Protec tion Clear Clears any active switch request and returns traffic on the protection pack to its original service pack provided this pack is functional Clear does not affect the Automatic Switch Inhibit If applied on the protection pack service returns to the protected pack and Protection Scheme changed to Dis able If applied on the protected pack protection for this pack is disabled If this pack was providing service through the protection pack a protection to service switch will occur This protection switch remains in effect till a protection mode is cleared Forced Switch to Protection Switches service from the service pack to the protection pack no matter what Not ap plicable to protection pack The switch remains in this state until a Lockout or Clear is requested Manual Switch to Protection Switches service from ser vice
550. up the default log type is displayed this value can be configured de fault Actions Access permission The log types which are visible to you depend on your user group The following table shows the log types which the different user groups are allowed to see Table 3 34 Visibility of a log type for a certain user group Log type Visible for user group Actions Administrator Maintenance System Internal Events Administrator Maintenance Autonomous Reports this log type includes autono mous reports alarms and perfor mance of ADSL ATM and Feeder Administrator Maintenance Monitoring AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 3 47 System management Log management p See Figure 3 18 Log Viewer Meaning of The following table explains the meaning of the columns in alphabetical order in columns the Log Viewer table Table 3 35 Information displayed in the Log Viewer table Column Meaning Conditions The condition of a performed action to indicate whether it is the request or the response E g START END_SUCCESS END_ERROR CANCEL Date amp Time Date and time when the event was registered in the log file Format yyyy mm dd hh mm ss Date amp Time Last Indicates the last severity change ES PSES Indicates the Errored Second data for a E3 or DS3 feeder BB ES Up ES Down Indicates the Errored Second data BB AEM R1 7 3 48 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 System mana
551. uperFrame with Datalink ESF Extended Superframe FTP File Transfer Protocol FXO Foreign Exchange Office G GS Ground Start GSF General Service Function GSFN Generic Signalling Function GSI Graphical System Interface GUI Graphical User Interface AEM R1 7 AB 4 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 Abbreviations ee H HBER High Bit Error Ratio HDD Hard Disk Drive HDLC High Level Data Link Control HP Hewlett Packard HW Hardware IAT Integrated Access Terminal IATS Integrated Access Terminal Server ICC InterChangeability Code ICMS Integrated Configuration Management System ID Identifier IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers HOP Internet Interoperability Protocol IN Information alarm severity INA Integrated Network Access IP Internet Protocol IS In Service ISP Internet Service Providers ISDN Integrated Services Digital Network AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 AB 5 Abbreviations B S ITU International Telecommunication Union L LAN Local Area Network LBER Low Bit Error Ratio LDS Logical Digital Switch LED Light Emitting Diode LIC License LLN Logical Line Number LPBK Loop Back LS Loop Start M MDS Metallic Distribution Server MDSU Metallic Distribution Server Unit MEA Mismatch of Equipment and Attributes MHz Megahertz MJ Major alarm severity MIT Mechanized L
552. uration facilities provided by the AEM for the data agent include the following tasks a Configuration specific equipment data Circuit pack management AFM management ADSLs management Physical feeders management Drops management Date amp Time management m Maintaining a local copy of configuration data in the AFM s NVDS Synchronizing the local copy with the equipment data maintained by the AFM Inventory Management system activity of collecting updating and re porting data on equipage and system status including providing users with access to the entire equipment information whether locally maintained or not AFM memory administration which means the management of the non volatile data storage NVDS of the AnyMedia Access System including AFM for Backup and Restore AFM software administration which involves tasks to manage the non volatile program storage NVPS of the AnyMedia Access System including AFM for software download software validation and activation etc AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 5 13 NE management equipment configuration Overview of the controlled systems ee m Subshelves management for subshelf creation subshelf edition with cross connection and subshelf deletion Profile management for creating deleting or applying threshold and transmission profiles Edit profile variables using a previously defined tem plate 5 2 4 3 Configura
553. use button is pressed The cursor must not however be positioned on a menu bar or a window frame The cursor menu is not available in all dialogue boxes The functions which can be executed using this cursor menu depend on the application of the respective dialogue box Select menu Proceed as follows to select a menu option from the cursor menu option Step Procedure 1 Press and hold down the right mouse button 2 Drag the cursor onto the desired menu option 3 Release the right mouse button to execute the menu option or if you do not wish to execute a menu option move the cursor away from the menu and release the right mouse button AEM R1 7 5 20 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 NE management equipment configuration Initial windows p Se 5 3 5 1 Cursor menus entries 5 3 5 1 1 Network Browser Selected icon on Network Browser Cursor menu entries Group New Groups amp NEs window Edit Groups amp NEs window Show Map background map Remove groups Alarm Monitoring group specific alarms NE Edit Groups amp NEs window NE Management NE Management window Remove NE Open Network Element Browser Alarm Monitoring NE specific alarms Log Viewer 5 3 5 1 2 Network Element Browser Selected icon on Network Ele ment Browser NE Cursor menu entries Inventory Date amp Time gt Telephony Date amp Time gt Data Synchronization gt Telephony Synchronization gt Data
554. users The AEM uses the security mechanisms provided by the SOLARIS Operat ing System AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 1 15 Functional description System and software architecture p SSe m AEM security privilege levels Allows at least three privilege levels within the managed domain This is mapped to the NE privilege levels accordingly Administrator has all the permissions Maintenance has configuration and monitoring permissions Monitoring has alarm monitoring and testing permissions m NE user security privilege levels It is possible to administer the NE users and the privilege levels via the cut through interface m User access is authenticated through user name and password m Single login to access the domain Enables an authorized user to access multiple NEs simultaneously e g multiple windows using a single login and password m Domain partitioning Enables the NEs managed by the AEM to be partitioned into separate se curity domains and permits users access to the domains based on their ar eas of responsibility and profile m User inactivity timer The user terminal will be locked with a screen saver once a configurable in activity timer has expired To unlock the terminal the user has to type his her password The timer has to be configured by the administrator m Second inactivity timer Once the terminal is locked the user will be logged out once a second in activity time
555. ut without closing other instances of the Alarm Viewer Exit Close all Alarm Viewers opened by the user AEM R1 7 7 12 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 Fault management and maintenance Alarm monitoring p Se Table 7 3 Views Menu Menu display Menu option Meaning Information in Views View1 Select a view from the predefined views Chapter 7 3 4 2 View2 View2 page 7 18 View3 i View 4 View3 View 5 i Reload viene View 5 Reload Display a fresh copy of the current informa tion shown in the window Only alarms which match the filter criteria will be included Table 7 4 Filters menu Menu display Menu option Meaning Information in Open Open Open a user defined filter pre Predefined Filters viously stored No modifica tions allowed Predefined Filters Selection of filter criteria for Chapter 7 3 4 3 Alarms for the last 24 hours displaying alarm information page 7 19 Critical Raised Alarms Raised Alarms Alarms from a Host s Critical Alarms not cleared Owned Acknowledge Alarms Clear Alarms All Acknowledge Alarms None Filter All Alarms Table 7 5 Actions menu Menu display Menu option Meaning Information in Acknowledge Acknowledge all selected alarms their status Chapter 7 3 5 Acknowledge will change to acknowledged page 7 24 Clear Clear all selected alarms their status will change to cleared Table 7 6 Help menu
556. ventDistributor NEEventDistributor AEM R1 7 3 32 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 System management System administration mm ee Table 3 22 Module types in a certain module group type Module group type Module type AMU_NB_ R121 ConfigReadNBR121 ConfigUpdateNBR121 NEMR121 NEMForwarderR121 SBINBR121 AMU_NB_R122 ConfigReadNBR122 ConfigUpdateNBR1 22 NEMR122 NEMForwarderR122 SBINBR122 AMU_NB_R170 ConfigReadNBR170 ConfigUpdateNBR1 70 NEMR170 NEMForwarderR170 SBINBR170 AMU_BB_R112 ConfigReadBBR112 ConfigUpdateBBR112 BAMR112 BAMForwarderR112 SBIBBR112 PerformanceCollectBBR112 AMU_BB_R14 ConfigReadBBR14 ConfigUpdateBBR 14 BAMR14 BAMForwarderR14 SBIBBR14 PerformanceCollectBBR14 CommAgentEventDistributor CommAgentEventDistributor ConfigtEventDistributor ConfigtEventDistributor AccessPolicyManager AccessPolicyManager AuthorizationService AuthorizationService SecurityEventDistributor SecurityEventDistributor LogRead LogRead LogWrite LogWrite LogWrite Perf LogWritePerf TestScheduler TestScheduler FileBrowser FileBrowser CombinedShelf CombinedShelf TrapDispatcher TrapDispatcher PerformanceCorfig PerformanceCorfig SystemAdmin SystemAdmin WatchDaemon WatchDaemon SystemEventDistributor SystemEventDistributor NamingService NamingService OrbixDaemon OrbixDaemon AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 3 33 System management Print out reports 3 5 Print out repor
557. vide more information on a certain keyword 4 Conventions used The following are terms used in this USM that may have a different meaning than the general or common use of the term m Inthe AEM the term access means that the system provides the primary service interface for the customer to enter the network m The term plug in is generally used for circuit pack units COMDAG CIU IO DS1 CTU and application packs APs which have pre designated slots with the capability to plug in the circuit pack Numbering Each fascicle can be identified by its number and contains a chapter which is numbered accordingly e g Chapter 2 is contained in Fascicle 2 The page figure and table numbering begins with 1 in every chapter To be able to identify them easily these numbers are prefixed with the fascicle number For example Figure 2 3 designates the third figure in Fascicle 2 Cross references Cross reference conventions are identical with those used for numbering i e the first number in cross references refers to the corresponding fascicle Keyword blocks To facilitate the location of specific text passages the guide contains so called keyword blocks These are placed to the left of the main text and contain either a keyword or a word which indicates the contents of a paragraph or group of para graphs Abbreviations Each abbreviation used in this guide is listed in fascicle AB Abbreviations of the hardcopy version unless
558. view The AEM provides the user with a command line to a TL1 transaction language 1 session with any NE Using this command line the user can type any TL1 com mand send these commands to a selected NE and get the responses to the re quests as well as all the autonomous outputs sent by the NE TL1 used for the provisioning maintenance and administration of the AnyMedia Access System is an ASCIl based command language This cut through interface is used by remote AEM craft personal when the GUI does not support certain TL1 commands The AEM will provide the independence between the cut through interface and the GUI interface To open a cut through interface with an NE the operator must provide the connec tion information Login and Password defined in the NE Name Information win dow cf Chapter 5 5 1 page 5 35 When the AEM receives the request to open a cut through session it opens a tel net connection with the selected NE to avoid conflicts with the current AEM GUI session Then the operator will manage the cut through session through the use of TL1 commands Cut through GUI The AEM GUI behaviour but not necessarily the performance is not affected by independence any simultaneous cut through connection running on the platform The operator using the AEM GUI does not used to know about any cut through session running on the AEM platform The performance of the system could be af fected by the load of the hardware but the beh
559. w tab Data Parameters Buttons Description NE Name NE name of the selected NE max 30 characters AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 5 45 NE management equipment configuration Equipment configuration p Se Parameters Buttons Provisioning In formation Description Once the connection is established the following fields can not be edited unless the connection is interrupted connec tion state Not Managed Communications Info This field contains the editable text field IP Address This information is mandatory to get a AEM NE connection Format xxx xxx xxx xxx where xis a numeric 0 9 Authentication Information This field contains the text field Security Id This information is also mandatory to get a AEM NE connection The Security Id has a range from 3 to 10 characters The Label button is used to provision deprovision the NE Provision f the NE is not provisioned or any value has been changed Provisioning is enabled only if the administra tive state is Not Managed see below Deprovision If the NE has been provisioned and no value has been changed Operational State The option menu Administrative State shows the possible values Managed Not Managed The text field Operational State shows the current state of the data agent Possible values Communication Stopped Communication Stopped Releasing Communication Trying Communica tion Trying Problem Detected Communicatio
560. w NE as described in Chapter 5 4 3 2 page 5 29 3 Press Apply to confirm The Domain Selection window pops up AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 5 35 NE management equipment configuration Equipment configuration Assign domain 5 36 Version 1 00 Domain Selection a Paramatta Marries Figure 5 14 Domain Selection window At creation time the NE must be included in one or several domains for domain creation see Chapter 4 The Domain Selection window consists of two lists Available Domains and Selected Domains The window provides the facilities needed to se lect the domains from which the NE will be accessible Use the Add gt gt button to move the selected domain from the Available Domains list to the Selected Domains one Use lt lt Remove to remove domains from the Selected Domains list The Add gt gt button and the lt lt Remove button are available only after having selected a domain name from the corresponding list Press OKto confirm The NE is assigned to the selected domains and the Domain Selection window is closed gt NOTE 06 00 If you decide to close this window via Cancel or window controls a Warn ing window pops up informing you of the possible rejection of the NE crea tion At least 1 domain must be selected and confirmed Otherwise the NE creation operation will be rejected Do you want to go back to Domain Selection If you select No the creation
561. w pops up cf Chapter 6 3 2 page 6 68 This window can also be reached from the ADSL Pack window cf Chapter 5 5 5 29 page 5 104 or from the ADSL Drop window cf Chapter 5 5 5 31 page 5 109 via ATM Cross Connections 4 Use the option menu Administrative State to change this state If the ad ministrative state has been changed from Unlocked to Locked a Warn ing window pops up Changing the administrative state of an ATM cross connection may be service affecting Do you want to continue 5 Click on Close to exit the window 6 3 5 Remove an ATM cross connection Procedure Complete the following procedure to remove an ATM cross connection Step Procedure 1 Select NE in the Network Element Browser and List gt ATM Cross Con nections via the cursor menu The ATM Cross Connection List window pops up cf Chapter 6 3 1 page 6 65 2 Use the radio buttons and the related option menus to select the filter for the display of the cross connection table 3 Click on the cross connection to be removed and press Remove If the cross connection is in service a Warning window pops up Removing an ATM cross connection may be service affecting Do you want to continue AEM R1 7 6 72 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 Service provisioning Service provisioning data p mm ee If you decide to continue the AEM will send a delete message to the NE 4 Click on Close to exit the window AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Ver
562. while it is connected to any higher manage ment system OS connected via northbound interface Stand alone mode In the stand alone mode the AEM performs the whole management of the NEs on its own The user is able to perform all management tasks via the GUI Figure 1 1 shows the system architecture in the stand alone mode NE NE Figure 1 1 Stand alone Mode Integrated In the integrated management mode the AEM works as an integral part of the cus management mode tomer s management network providing higher management systems OSs with services to manage NEs in their domains The AEM allows other OSs to pass provisioning testing or fault information to and from the NEs e g a fault management surveillance system can collect fault data using the pass through interface AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 1 5 Functional description Introduction Figure 1 2 shows the system architecture of the integrated management mode i TL1 COBRA NE NE Figure 1 2 Integrated Management Mode The complete system and software architecture of the AEM is described in Chapter 1 3 page 1 7 1 2 5 Performance reliability and availability The AEM fulfils the following features m 30 simultaneous users m Support of 600 NEs in the server configuration m Database re synchronization The AEM can re synchronize its database with the 600 NE data bases within 24 hours m Priority of synchronization
563. will be removed Ok to proceed If you decide to continue the remove operation will be started The informa tion displayed will be updated once the remove operation is finished to show the current list click on Close 363 211 454 AEM R1 7 Version 1 00 06 00 5 79 NE management equipment configuration Equipment configuration p See 5 5 5 15 MDSU window The metallic distribution server unit MDSU provides the interfaces to the MDS2 MDS2B subshelves MDSU Server Figure 5 29 MDSU window The following table shows the view edit options ofthe MDSU window Parameters Buttons Description Action NE Name NE name of the selected NE max 30 characters Slot Id This option menu shows the slot which is being used as MDSU Possible values ap 1 1 16 AEM R1 7 5 80 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 NE management equipment configuration Equipment configuration p Se Parameters Buttons Description Action Inventory Infor The read only text fields provide the following information mation Card Type 11 character mnemonic used to identify the gen eral type of function provided Serial Number 12 character alphanumeric code that in cludes the date and place of manufacture Apparatus Code Specifies the function of the pack ICC InterChangeability Code Indicates the interchangea bility among packs to specify forward backward compatibility Format of the ICC is m n where m is the is
564. window Table 3 14 Actions for the administration of MGs If you want to then Result select the MG in the table and press Re The selected MG is recovered ecover The Administrative State of the MG must be ON edit an MG select the MG and press Edit The Edit MGs window is displayed cf Chapter 3 4 6 recover an MG AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 3 25 System management System administration ee 3 4 4 View distributed module groups of a package Overview The DMGs in Package window allows for viewing the DMGs which make up pack aged Additional information for each DMG is displayed DMGs information Next to Package Name the name of the selected package is displayed The table under DMGs in Package displays the following information Table 3 15 DMGs Information Table entry Meaning Name The internally assigned name of the DMG ID The internally assigned ID ofthe DMG Type The types of the MGs in this DMG The administrative state of the DMG Possible val ues ON if the DMG is up OFF otherwise The Ad ministrative State is changed whenever a startup or shutdown command is issued Administrative State Operational State The operational state of the MG displayed when the Administrative State is ON only Possible values IS if the package is in service OOS if it is out of ser vice TRANSITORY otherwise Figure 3 12 DMGs in Package Window AEM R1 7 3 26 Ve
565. with super user permission during the process of installing this package Do you want to continue with the installation of lt LuOXWRT gt y n 14 Type y and press Return Installing OrbixWeb 3 1 Runtime for AnyMedia EM R1 7 as lt LuOXWRT gt Installing part 1 of 1 lt files list gt verifying class lt none gt Executing postinstall script AEM R1 7 2 64 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 Software installation and commissioning Installation procedure You have the installation logfile in tmp EM_Install_LuOXWRT 1log Installation of lt LuOXWRT gt was successful Netscape 4 6 instal Processing package instance lt LUNETSCP gt from lation lt homelocal tmp lucent AnyMediaEMR1 7 gt Netscape Navigator 4 6 Stand Alone for AnyMedia EM R1 7 sparc solaris Version 4 6 OK No previous package LuNETSCP have been found Here is a list of your partitions and the free space in each of them Filesystem kbytes used avail capacity Mounted on dev dsk c0t0d0s0 143927 36997 92538 29 dev dsk c0t0d0s4 625262 401583 167406 71 usr dev dsk c0t0d0s3 96455 12119 74691 14 var dev dsk c0t0d0s6 6591133 3405788 3119434 53 homelocal dev dsk c0t0d0s5 240399 8597 207763 4 var cache swap 1194208 8616 1185592 1 tmp masstc1 export1 b1d 2 b1dr17 51014048 44384096 6289872 88 home bldr17 masstc1 export1 b1d 2 syi_pl 51014048 44384096 6289872 88 home syi_pl Enter install directory opt lucent Netscape q
566. within the NE It can also be used to add edit remove cross connections Figure 6 34 ATM Cross Connections List window The following table shows the view edit options of this window Parameters Buttons Description NE Name NE name of the selected NE max 30 characters AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 6 65 Service provisioning ee Parameters Buttons Filter Selection 6 66 Version 1 00 06 00 Service provisioning data Description Four radio buttons and six related option menus can be used to select the filter for displaying the cross connections in the list below m All This button can be used to list all cross connec tions within the NE Shelf Subshelf Id This button can be used to list all cross connections within a shelf or subshelf The re lated option menu provides the following values main shelf id ids of all created subshelves None Slot Id This button can be used to list all cross con nections within a slot The related two option menus provide the following values first menu main shelf id ids of all created subshelves None second menu ADSL slots related to the selection in the first option menu None Physical Drop Id This button can be used to list all cross connections of a drop The related three option menus provide the following values first menu main shelf id ids of all created subshelves None second menu ADSL slots related to the selecti
567. wo directions upstream and downstream Possible values 1 900 for 15 min 1 86400 for one day LOS Loss of Signal Four text fields show the values for two different time periods 15 min one day for the two direc tions upstream and downstream Possible values 1 90 for 15 min 1 8640 for one day HBER High Bit Error Rate Four text fields show the val ues for two different time periods 15 min one day for the two directions upstream and downstream Possible values 1 90 for 15 min 1 8640 for one day RFI Remote Failure Indication Two text fields show the values for two different time periods 15 min one day for the downstream direction Possible values 1 90 for 15 min 1 8640 for one day LOF Loss of Frame Two text fields show the values for two different time periods 15 min one day for the upstream direction Possible values 1 90 for 15 min 1 8640 for one day Remove This button can be used to remove any profile except one of the first two default profiles This button is used to confirm the changes The window re mains open for further use Apply gt NOTE All profiles are applied on a port AEM R1 7 5 120 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 NE management equipment configuration 5 5 5 36 Modify the ADSL threshold profile data application Procedure 363 211 454 Equipment configuration Complete the following procedure to cre
568. ws the drop VCI used to create the cross connection on the drop side This field can be empty if the row is a VP cross connection Administrative State This field shows the current adminis trative state of the cross connection Locked Unlocked The Remove button can be used to remove a selected cross connection This button is enabled only if a cross con nection is selected 363 211 454 AEM R1 7 Version 1 00 06 00 6 69 Service provisioning 6 70 Version 1 00 Parameters Buttons Operational State New Cross Con nection Service provisioning data Description The option menu Administrative State provides the possi ble states that can be used Locked and Unlocked gt NOTE The NE rejects the change from Locked to Locked or from Unlocked to Unlocked Trying to do this provokes a command unsuccessful answer The field Service State shows the state of the ADSL drop obtained on demand by the user Possible values Enabled Disabled Unknown The Get button can be used to update the display of the Service State Feeder Side VPI This field is used to define the VPI used to create the cross connection on the feeder side Possible values 1 255 Feeder Side VCI This field is used to define the VCI used to create the cross connection on the feeder side Possible values 33 1023 Drop Side VPI This field is used to define the VPI used to create the cross connection on the drop
569. y G Generic Signaling Function GSFN This defines the signaling interface for a provisioned distribution port It is part of the TO object data associated with each port Typical values for the GSFN are 2LS 2 wire loop start and 2RVO 2 wire loop reverse battery originat ing side Global Program This defines the information presentation to the user according to the user s preferred language and customs A global program is one that has been internationalized and can be localized GSI This is an intelligent terminal which may be a laptop PC that supports Graphical User Interface GUI software and the TL1 protocol interface to the AnyMedia Access System GSI NB The Graphical System Interface for narrowband services This is a Windows 95 based PC which uses TL1 com mands for the management of AnyMedia Network Elements GUI The Graphical User Interface of the AnyMedia Element Manager System H Host A machine where one or more modules are installed Hub or Multiport Repeaters This have 8 12 16 or more ports With their help multiple devices with 10BASE T interface can be connected to a single LAN They have at least one additional port for connecting an additional segment of a LAN AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 GL 5 Glossary o eee Incremental Backup This copies new files and files that have changed since a previous backup The incremental backups are usually given a dump level which determines w
570. you like to continue y n q 3 Type y and press Return to continue or type n or q and press Return to exit AnyMedia NB EM R1 7 installation CopyRight c 2000 Lucent Technologies Inc All Rights Reserved Please choose the installation mode 1 ADM lt Administration package installation gt 2 GUI lt Client package installation gt Enter selection q gt NOTE Type to get help type to repeat the prompt and type q to exit from the installation 4 Type 1 and press Return AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 2 9 Software installation and commissioning Installation procedure E See Packages to install LuLUMRT LURWRT LuOX23RT LuOXNSRT LuOSRT LUMOS build 3 0 Processing package instance lt LuLUMRT gt from installation lt home bldr17 LOAD_36 1 1 build lucent AnyMediaEMR1 7 gt Lumos Runtime for AnyMedia EM R1 7 sparc solaris Build 3 0 run time OK No previous package LuLUMRT have been found Here is a list of your partitions and the free space in each of them Filesystem kbytes used avail capacity Mounted on dev dsk c0t0d0s0 143927 36990 92545 29 dev dsk c0t0d0s4 625262 401569 167420 71 usr dev dsk c0t0d0s3 96455 11161 75649 13 var dev dsk c0t0d0s6 6591133 4250252 2274970 66 homelocal dev dsk c0t0d0s5 240399 8597 207763 4 var cache swap 1204840 40 1204800 1 tmp masstcl export1 bld 2 bldr17 51014048 49174256 1499704 98 home bldr17 masstc1 export1 b1d 2 syi_pl
571. you press the left mouse button Minimize The window is shown as an icon Maximize The window is shown in its maximum possible screen size Lower If there are several overlapping windows the currently active win dow is shifted to the bottom of the pile Close This function will close the window and remove it from the user in terface exiting the application linked to the window AEM R1 7 363 211 454 Version 1 00 06 00 3 9 System management General information on keyboard mm ee 3 3 6 Menu bar Menu options The menu bar of a window contains the menu names Once you click on a menu it opens and a series of related menu options will be displayed under the menu name Conventions Each option represents a function which can be used to control the application running in the window To call this function click on the required option A menu option is referred to in the text as Menu name gt Menu option e g in the menu below Network View gt Maps A grayed menu name or option cannot be selected Submenu conven Submenus are menus opening under a certain menu option and containing a tions number of related menu options Some menu options are provided with a small ar row pointing to the right gt These menu options have a submenu that will open as soon as you click on the menu option A submenu option is referred to in the text as Menu name gt Menu option gt Submenu option e g NE gt Program
572. ystem DDS timing distribution to CUs Supports signaling bit translation and signaling state transition detection for direct inward dialing DID services on TR 303 m The MSC is a simplex pack Power test units The PTU has power converters to distribute 5V and 5V power to the CUs and 5V power to the MSC Each PTU powers 12 CUs and one MSC Positive and neg ative ringing inputs are looped through each PTU so that each PTU distributes ringing to the 12 CUs to which it provides power The PTU can detect the loss of its ringing inputs The PTU has relays and protectors for test access It also has terminations and detectors for channel testing Each PTU also supports one test access path TAP The PTU2 TAP TAP A is required for special services testing and local test access the PTU1 TAP TAP B is required for POTS testing Channel units SLC carrier SPQ and AUA type channel units CUs will be used All intelligence about the CUs their register formats and locations the PTU message sets etc reside on the COMDAC The set of SLC channel units supported is shown below m SPQ429 Quad P phone CF m SPQ442 Quad E SPOTS CS m AUA41B 4W CF inventory ready m AUA45B ringing repeater manual ring down m AUA75 PLAR m SPQ452 Dual Dataport OCU m AUA200 SW 56 2W CU Adtran m AUA232 RS 232 Adtran m SPQ444 Single 4W CS w TDM m SPQ454 Single 4W E amp M Types amp Il m MCU 5205 DC alarm CU Tollgrade m MCU 5405 DC bypass CU Toll
573. ystem information Verifying disk space requirements Checking for conflicts with packages already installed Checking for setuid setgid programs This package contains scripts which will be executed with super user permission during the process of installing this package Do you want to continue with the installation of lt LuAM gt y n 14 Type y and press Return Installing AnyMedia Element Manager Alarms Release 1 7 Administration as lt LuAM gt Installing part 1 of 1 lt files list gt verifying class lt common gt AEM R1 7 2 28 Version 1 00 06 00 363 211 454 Software installation and commissioning Installation procedure p Se Executing postinstall script Package lt LuOSRT gt ObjectStore 5 1_SP2 Run Time have been found in opt lucent OS51_SP2 Package lt LuOX23RT gt OrbixMT Version 2 3c02MT Run Time have been found in opt lucent OrbixMT_2 3c2 Creating data bases Starting AMDbPopulate process Getting the AnyMedia installation path OK Getting Alarm data base path OK Creating Alarm Data Base exit OK 2242 Killed orbixd daemon pid 2242 have been killed Was mine You have the installation logfile in tmp EM_Install_LuAM log Installation of lt LuAM gt was successful Backup installation Processing package instance lt LuBack gt from lt homelocal tmp lucent AnyMediaEMR1 7 gt AnyMedia Element Manager Backup Release 1 7 Administration s

Contents - Alcatel-Lucent Documentation Center

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents